BKI Vol3 PDF

BIRO KLASIFIKASI INDONESIA
RULES
FOR THE CLASSIFICATION
AND CONSTRUCTION OF
SEAGOING STEEL SHIPS
VOLUME III
Rules for Machinery Instalation
EDITION 2005
Table of Contents x
Tables of Contents
Page
Section 1 General Rules and Instructions
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
B. Documents for Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
C. Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
D. Design and Construction of the Machinery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
F. Safety Equipment and Protective Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
G. Communication and Signalling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
H. Instructions for the Application of the Construction Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Section 2 Internal Combuction Engines and Air Compressors
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
B. Documents for Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
C. Crankshaft Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
D. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
E. Tests and Trials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
F. Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
G. Pipelines and Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
H. Starting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
I. Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
J. Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
K. Engine Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
L. Approximate Calculation of the Starting Air Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
M. Air Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Section 3 Turbomachinery
I. Steam Turbines
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
C. Design and Construction Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
D. Astern Running, Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
E. Manoeuvering and Safety Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
F. Control and Monitoring Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
G. Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
H. Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
I. Trials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
II. Gas Turbines and Exhaust Gas Turbochargers
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
C. Design and Construction Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
D. Astern Running, Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
E. Control and Safety Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
F. Control and Monitoring Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
G. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
xi Table of Contents
H. Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
I. Trials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Section 4 Main Shafting
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
C. Shaft Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
D. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
E. Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Section 5 Gears, Couplings
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
C. Calculation of the Load-Bearing Capacity of Gear Teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
D. Gear Shalts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
E. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
F. Balancing and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
G. Design and Construction of Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Section 6 Propellers
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
C. Dimensions and design of propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
D. Controllable Pitch Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
E. Propeller Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
F. Vane wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
G. Balancing and testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Section 7 Boilers and Heat Transfer Equipment
I. Boilers
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
C. Principles Applicable to Manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
D. Design Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
E. Equipment and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
F. Testings of Boilers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
G. Hot Water Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
H. Exhaust Gas Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
II. Thermal Oil System
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
B. Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
C. Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
D. Equipment Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
E. Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
F. Fire Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
G. Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Table of Contents xii
Section 8 Pressure Vessels
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
B. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
C. Manufacturing Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
D. Design Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
E. Equipment and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
F. Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
G. Gas Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Section 9 Oil Firing Equipment
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
B. Oil Firing Equipment for Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
C. Oil Burners for Hot Water Boilers, Oil-Fired Heaters and
Small Heating Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Section 10 Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating, Hydraulic and

Thermal Oils as well as Oil Residues
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
B. Storage of Liquid Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
C. Storage of Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
D. Storage of thermal oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
E. Storage of Oil Residues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Section 11 Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
B. Materials, Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
C. Calculation of Wall Thickness and Elasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
E. Steam Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
F. Boiler Feedwater and Circulating Arrangement, Condensate Recirculation . . . . . . . . . 11-18
G. Oil Fuel Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
H. Lubricating Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
I. Seawater Cooling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
K. Fresh Water Cooling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
L. Compressed Air Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
M. Exhaust Gas Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
N. Bilge Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
O. Equipment for the Treatment and Storage of Bilge Water
and Fuel and Oil - Residues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
P. Ballast Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Q. Thermal Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
R. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
S. Drinking Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
T. Sanitary Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
U. Hose Assemblies and Compensators of Non-Metallic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
Section 12 Fire Protection and Fire Extinguishing Equipment
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
B. Fire Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
C. Fire Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
D. Scope of Fire Extinguishing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
xiii Table of Contents
E. General Water Fire Extinguishing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
F. Portable and Mobile Fire Extinguisher, Portable Foam Applicators and

Water Fog Applicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
G. High-Pressure CO2 Fire Extinguishing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
H. Low-Pressure CO2 Fire Extinguishing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
I. Halon Fire Extinguishing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
K. Foam Fire Extinguishing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
L. Pressure Water Spraying Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
M. Fire Extinguishing Systems for Paint Lockers, Flammable Liquid Lockers
and Galley Range Exhaust Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
N. Dry Powder Fire Extinguishing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
O. Inert Gas Systems for Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
P. Fire Extinguishing Equipment for Helicopter Landing Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Section 13 Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
B. Necessary Propulsion Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
C. Necessary Reinforcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Section 14 Steering Gears, Rudder Propeller Units, Lateral Thrust Units, Windlasses, Winches
Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems and Stabilizers
A. Steering Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

B. Rudder Propeller Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
C. Lateral Thrust Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
D. Windlasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
E. Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
F. Hydraulic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
G. Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
H. Stabilizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Section 15 Special Rules for Tankers
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
B. General Rules for Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
C. Tankers for the Carriage of Oil Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
D. Machinery for Operation with Crude Oil from
the Cargo of Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Section 16 Torsional Vibrations
A. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
B. Calculation of Torsional Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
C. Permissible Torsional Vibration Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
D. Torsional Vibration Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
E. Prohibited Ranges of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
F. Auxiliary Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Section 17 Spare Parts
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
B. Volume of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
1-1
A. General B. Documents for Approval
1. The Rules for the Construction of Machinery

Installations apply to the propulsion installations of 1. Before the start of manufacture, plans
ships classed by Biro Klasifikasi Indonesia including showing the general arrangement of the machinery
all the auxiliary machinery and equipment necessary installation together with all drawings of parts and
for the operation and safety of the ship. installations subject to testing, to the extent specified
in the following Sections of Rules for Machiney
They also apply to machinery which the Society is to Installations, Volume III, are each to be submitted in
confirm as being equivalent to classed machinery. triplicate1) to the Society.
2. Apart from the machinery and equipment

detailed below, the Rules are also individually 2. The drawings must contain all the data
applicable to other machinery and equipment where necessary for approval. Where necessary, calculations
this is necessary to the safety of the ship or its cargo. and descriptions of the plant are to be submitted.
3. Designs which deviate from the Rules for the 3. Once the documents submitted have been
Construction of Machinery Installations may be approved by the Society they are binding on the
approved provided that such designs have been execution of the work. And subsequent modifications
examined by the Society for suitability and have been require the Society's approval before being put into
recognized as equivalent. effect.
4. Machinery installations which have been

developed on novel principles and/or which have not
yet been sufficiently tested in shipboard service
require the Society's special approval.
C. Ambient Conditions
Such machinery may be designated by "Exp." attached
to the character of classification and be subjected to 1. Operating conditions, general
intensified survey, if sufficiently reliable proof cannot
be provided of its suitability and equivalence in 1.1 The selection, layout and arrangement of all
accordance with para. 3. shipboard machinery, equipment and appliances shall
be such as to ensure faultless continuous operation
under the ambient conditions specified in Tables
5. In the instances mentioned in 3. and 4. the 1.1-1.4.
Society is entitled to require additional documentation
to be submitted and special trials to be carried out.
1.2 Account is to be taken of the effects on the
machinery installation of distortions of the ship's hull.
6. In addition to the Rules, the Society reserves
the right to impose further requirements in respect of
all types of machinery where this is unavoidable due
to new findings or operational experience, or the
Society may permit deviations from the Rules where
these are specially warranted.
1
7. National Rules or Regulations outside the )
Society's Rules remain unaffected.
1-2
Table 1.1 Inclinations Table 1.3 Air temperature
at atmosphere pressure = 1000 mbar

Angle of inclination [o] 2) and relative humidity = 60 %
Installations,
Components Athwartship Fore-and-aft
Installa- Location, Temperature
tion, arrangement range
static dynamic static dynamic
component [oC]
Main and in enclosed 0 to 45 2)

auxiliary 15 22,5 5 7,5
spaces
machinery
Machinery
Ship's safety on machinery
and
equipment, components,
electrical boilers According to
e.g. installations specific local
emergency 1
) in spaces,sub- conditions
power ject to higher
installations, or lower
emergency 22,53) 22,5 3) 10 10 temperatures
fire pumps
and their on the open -25 to + 45
drives deck
Switchgear, 1
) Electronic appliances shall be designed and tested to ensure
electrical and trouble-free operation even at a constant air temperature of
electronic + 55 C.
appliances 1) 2
) The Society may approve lower air temperatures for ships
and remote- designed only for service in particular geographical areas.
control
systems
1
) Up to an angle of inclination of 45 o no undesired
switching operations or functional changes may occur.
2
) Athwartships and fore-and-aft inclinations may occur Table 1.4 Other ambient conditions
simultaneously.
3
) On ships for the carriage of liquefied gases and chemicals Location Conditions
the emergency power supply must also remain operational
with the ship flooded to a final arthwarthships inclination
up to a maximum of 30o Ability to withstand oil
vapour and salt-laden air
Trouble-free operation within

In all spaces the temperature ranges stated
in Table 1.3, and humidity up
to 100 % at a reference
Table 1.2 Water temperature temperature of 45 C
Coolant Temperature [oC] Tolerance to condensation is

assumed
Seawater + 32 1)
In specially 80 % relative humidity at a
protected reference temperature of
Charge air coolant see Section 2, A.2 control rooms 45 C.
inlet to charge air
cooler On the open Ability to withstand
deck temporary flooding with
1
) The Society may approve lower water temperatures for seawater and salt-laden spray
ships operating only in special geographical areas.
2. Vibrations
1-3
2.1 General reliability or loading of components so long as these

limits are not exceeded. It is, in particular,
2.1.1 Machinery, equipment and hull structures are inadmissible to compare the loading of components of
normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, different reciprocating machines by comparing the
construction and installation must in every case take substitution quantities measured at the engine frame.
account of these stresses.
The faultless long-term service of individual 2.1.7 For reciprocating machinery, the following
components shall not be endangered by vibration statements are only applicable for outputs over
stresses. 100 kW and speeds below 3000 Rpm.
2.1.2 Where a machine or a piece of equipment

generates vibrations when in operation, the intensity of 2.2 Assessment
the vibration shall not exceed defined limits. The
purpose is to protect the vibration generators, the 2.2.1 In assessing the vibration stresses imposed
connected assemblies, peripheral equipment and hull on machinery, equipment and hull structures, the vi-
components form additional, excessive vibration bration velocity v is generally used as a criterion for
stresses liable to cause premature failures or mal- the prevailing vibration stress. The same criterion is
functions. used to evaluate the intensity of the vibration spec-
trum produced by a vibration exciter (cf. 2.1.2).
2.1.3 The following provisions relate the vibrations
in the frequency range from 2 to 300 Hz. The In the case of a purely sinusoidal oscillation, the ef-
underlying assumption is that vibrations with oscilla- fective value of the vibration velocity veff can be
tion frequencies below 2 Hz can be regarded as calculated by the formula :
rigid-body vibrations while vibrations with oscillation
frequencies above 300 Hz normally occur only locally
1 1 1 a
and may be interpreted as structure-borne noise. veff s v (1)
Where, in special cases, these assumptions are not 2 2 2
valid (e.g. where the vibration is generated by a gear
pump with a tooth meshing frequency in the range
above 300 Hz) the following provisions are to be in which
applied in analogous manner. s vibration displacement amplitude
v vibration velocity amplitude
2.1.4 Attention has to be paid to vibration stresses veff effective value of vibration velocity
over the whole relevant operating range of the a vibration acceleration amplitude
vibration generator. angular velocity of vibration.
Where the vibration is generated by an engine, con- For any periodic oscillation with individual harmonic
sideration must be extended to the whole available components 1,2,...n, the effective value of the vibra-
working speed range and, where appropriate, to the tion velocity can be calculated by the formula:
whole power range.
2.1.5 The procedure described below is largely veff veff

2 2
veff ....
2
veff (2)
standardized. Basically, a substitution quantity is i 1 2 n
formed for the vibration stress or the intensity of the

exciter spectrum (cf. 2.2.1). This quantity is then in which veffi is the effective value of the vibration
compared with permissible or guaranteed values to velocity of the i-th harmonic component. Using
check that it is admissible. formula (1), the individual values of veffl are to be
2.1.6 The procedure mentioned in 2.1.5 takes only calculated for each harmonic.
incomplete account of the physical facts. The aim is to
evaluate the true alternating stresses or alternating Depending on the prevailing conditions, the effective
forces. No simple relationship exists between the value of the vibration velocity is given by formula (1)
actual loading and the substitution quantities: vibration for purely sinusoidal oscillations or by formula (2) for
amplitude vibration velocity and vibration acceleration any periodic oscillation.
at external parts of the frame. Nevertheless this
procedure is adopted since it at present appears to be
the only one which can be implemented in a
reasonable way. For these reasons it is expressly
pointed out that the magnitude of the substitution
quantities applied in relation to the relevant limits
enables no conclusion to be drawn concerning the
1-5
proving that the vibration loads are within the 2.2.4.5 For directly connected peripheral appliances,
permissible limits in accordance with 2.3. BKI may approve higher values than those specified
in 2.2.4.2, 2.2.4.3 and 2.2.4.4 where these are
guaranteed by the manufacturer of the reciprocating
2.2.4.2 Where the vibration loads of reciprocating machine in accordance with 2.2.4.1 and are proved in
machines lie within the A' area, separate accordance with 2.3.
consideration or proofs relating to the directly
connected peripheral equipment (cf. 2.2.4) are not Analogously, the same applies to adjacent machines
required. The same applies to machines and plant and appliances where the relevant manufacturer
located in close proximity to the generator (2.2.4). guarantees higher values and provides proof of these
in accordance with 2.3.
In these circumstances directly connected peripheral
appliances shall in every case be designed for at least 2.2.5 For appliances, equipment and components
the limit loads of area B', and machines located which, because of their installation in steering gear
nearby for the limit loads of area B. compartments or bow thruster compartments, are
exposed to higher vibration stresses, the admissibility
If the permissible vibration loads of individual of the vibration load may, not withstanding 2.2.3, be
directly connected peripheral appliances in assessed according to the limits of area B. The design
accordance with 2.2.4.1 lie below the boundary curve of such equipment shall allow for the above men-
of area B, admissibility must be proved by tioned increased loads.
measurement of the vibration load which actually
occurs. 2.3 Proofs
2.3.1 Where in accordance with 2.2.4.1, 2.2.4.4,

2.2.4.3 If the vibration loads of reciprocating and 2.2.4.5 BKI is asked to approve higher vibration
machines lie outside area A' but are still within area load values, all that is normally required for this is
B', it must be proved by measurement that directly the binding guarantee of the admissible values by the
connected peripheral appliances are not loaded above manufacturer or the supplier.
the limits for area C.
2.3.2 BKI reserves the right to call for detailed
In these circumstances directly connected peripheral proofs (calculations, design documents,
appliances shall in every case be designed for at least measurements, etc.) in case where this is warranted.
the limit loads of area C, and machines located
nearby for the limit loads of area B. 2.3.3 Type testing in accordance with BKI's
"Regulations for the Performance of Type Test on
Proof is required that machines and appliances Electrical Appliances and Components" is regarded
located in close proximity to the main exciter are not as proof of admissibility of the tested vibration load.
subjected to higher loads than those defined by the
boundary curve of area B. 2.3.4 BKI may recognize long-term trouble free
operation as sufficient proof of the required reability
If the permissible vibration loads of individual and operational dependability.
directly connected peripheral appliances or machines
in accordance with 2.2.4.1 lie below the stated values, 2.3.5 The manufacturer of the reciprocating
admissibility must be proved by measurement of machine is in every case responsible to BKI for any
vibration load which actually occurs. proof which may be required concerning the level of
the vibration spectrum generated by reciprocating
machinery.
2.2.4.4 If the vibration loads of reciprocating
machines lie outside area B' but are still within area 2.4 Measurement
C, it is necessary to ensure that the vibration loads on
the directly connected peripheral appliances still 2.4.1 Proof based on measurements is normally
remain within area C. if this condition cannot be met, required only for reciprocating machines with an
the important peripheral appliances must in output of more than 100 kW, where the other
accordance with 2.3 be demonstrably designed for the conditions set outin 2.2.4.2 - 2.2.4.4 are met. Where
higher loads. circumstances warrant this, BKI may also require
proofs based on measurements for smaller outputs .
Suitable measures (vibration damping etc.) are to be
taken to ensure reliable prevention of excessive vi- 2.4.2 Measurements are to be performed in every
bration loads on adjacent machines and appliances. case under realistic service conditions at the point of
The permissible loads stated in 2.2.4.3 (area B or a installation. During verification, the output supplied
lower value specified by the manufacturer) continue by the reciprocating machine shall be not less than
to apply to these units. 80 % of the rated value. The measurement shall cover
1-6
the entire available speed range in order to facilitate 1. Dimensions of components

the detection of any resonance phenomena.
1.1 All parts must be capable of withstanding the
stresses and loads peculiar to shipboard service, e.g.
2.4.3 BKI may accept proofs based on those due to movements of the ship, vibrations,
measurements which have not been performed at the intensified corrosive attack, temperature changes and
point of installation (e.g. test bed runs) or at the point wave impact, and must be dimensioned in accordance
of installation but under different mounting with the requirements set out in the present Volume.
conditions provided that the transferability of the
results can be proved. In the absence of Rules governing the dimensions of
parts, the recognized Rules of engineering practice
The results are normally regarded as transferable in are to be applied.
the case of flexibly mounted reciprocating machines
of customary design. 1.2 Where connections exist between systems or
plant items which are designed for different forces,
If the reciprocating machine is not flexibly mounted, pressures and temperatures (stresses), safety devices
the transferability of the results may still be are to be fitted which prevent the over stressing of the
acknowledged if the essential conditions for this system or plant item designed for the lower design
(similar bed construction, similar installation and pipe parameters. To preclude damage, such systems are to
routing etc.) are satisfied. be fitted with devices affording protection against
excessive pressures and temperatures and/or against
overflow.
2.4.4 The assessment of the vibration stresses
affecting or generated by reciprocating machines nor- 2. Materials
mally relates to the location in which the vibration
loads are greatest. Fig. 1.2 indicates the points of All components subject to the Rules for Machinery
measurement which are normally required for an in Installations, Volume III, must comply with the Rules
line piston engine. The measurement has to be for Materials, Volume V.
performed in all three directions. In justified cases
exceptions can be made to the inclusion of all the 3. Welding
measuring points.
The fabrication of welded components, the approval
of companies and the testing of welders are subject to
2.4.5 The measurements may be performed with the Rules for Welding, Volume VI.
mechanical manually-operated instruments provided
that the instrument setting is appropriate to the 4. Tests
measured values bearing in mind the measuring
4.1 Machinery and its component parts are
accuracy.
subject to constructional and material tests, pressure
Directionally selective, linear sensors with a and leakage tests, and trials. All the tests prescribed
frequency range of at least 2 to 300 Hz should in the following Sections are to be conducted under
normally be used. Non-linear sensors can also be the supervision of the Society.
used provided that the measurements take account of
In the case of parts produced in series, other methods
the response characteristic.
of testing may be agreed with the Society instead of
With extremely slow-running reciprocating machines, the tests prescribed, provided that the former are
measurements in the 0,5 to 2 Hz range may also be recognized as equivalent by the Society.
required. The results of such measurements within the
4.2 The Society reserves the right, where
stated range cannot be evaluated in accordance with
necessary, to increase the scope of the tests and also
2.2.
to subject to testing those parts which are not
expressly required to be tested according to the Rules.
2.4.6 The records of the measurements for the
points at which the maximum loads occur are to be 4.3 Components subject to mandatory testing are
submitted to BKI together with a tabular evaluation. to be replaced with tested parts.
D. Design and Construction of the Ma-

chinery Installation
1-7
Sides for L left side looking Measuring 0 bed

measurement towards coupling flange height 1 base
2 crankshaft height
3 frame top
R right side looking towards
coupling flange Measuring Icoupling side (CS)
point over II
engine center
engine length III
opposite side to coupling
(OCS)
Fig. 1.2 Schematic representation of in-line piston engine
4.4 After installation on board of the main and Ship's machinery is to be so arranged and equipped
auxiliary machinery, the operational functioning of that it can be brought into operation from the "dead
the machinery including the associated ancillary ship" condition with the means available on board.
equipment is to be verified. All safety equipment is to
be tested, unless adequate testing has already been The "dead ship" condition1) means that the entire
performed at the manufacturer's works in the machinery installation including the electrical power
presence of the Society's Representative. supply is out of operation and auxiliary sources of
energy such as starting air, battery-supplied starting
In addition, the entire machinery installation is to be current etc. are not available for restoring the ship's
tested during sea trials, as far as possible under the electrical system, restarting auxiliary operation and
intended service conditions. bringing the propulsion installation back into
operation.
5. Corrosion protection
To overcome the "dead ship" condition use may be
Parts which are exposed to corrosion are to be
safeguarded by being manufactured of
corrosion-resistant materials or provided with
1
effective corrosion protection. ) !
! " # ! " !
6. Availability of machinery " $
! #
1-8
made of an emergency generator set provided that it Steps are to be taken to ensure that in the event of the
is ensured that the electrical power for emergency failure of a propulsion engine, operation can be
services is available at all times. It is assumed that maintained with the other engines, where appropriate
means are available to start the emergency generator by a simple change-over system.
at all times.
For multiple-shaft systems, each shaft is to be
7. Control and regulating provided with a locking device by means of which
dragging of the shaft can be prevented.
7.1 Machinery must be so equipped that it can
be controlled in accordance with operating 8.5 Gear transmissions, disengageable couplings
requirements in such a way that the service conditions
prescribed by the manufacturer can be met. Where the propulsion plant is manoeuvred with the
aid of change-over gears or disengageable couplings,
7.2 In the event of failure or fluctuations of the the control system is to be designed in such a way as
supply of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic power to to ensure that operator error does not cause the
regulating and control systems, or in case of a break propulsion plant to be overloaded or damaged or to
in a regulating or control circuit, steps must be taken stall and the propulsion engine to run up to excessive
to ensure that: speed.
- The appliances remain at their present 9. Turning appliances

operational setting or, if necessary, are changed
to a setting which will have the minimum adverse 9.1 Machinery is to be equipped with the
effect on operation (fail-safe conditions), necessary turning appliances.
- The power output or engine speed of the 9.2 The turning appliances are to be of the self
machinery being controlled or governed is not locking type. Electric motors are to be fitted with
increased, and suitable retaining brakes.
- No unintentional start-up sequences are initiated. 9.3 An automatic interlocking device is to be

provided to ensure that the propulsion installation
7.3 Manual operation cannot start up while the turning gear is engaged.
Every functionally important, automatically or remote 10. Operating and maintenance instructions
controlled system must also be capable of manual
operation. 10.1 Manufacturers of machinery, boilers and
auxiliary equipment must supply a sufficient number
8. Propulsion plant of operating and maintenance notices and manuals
together with the equipment. In addition, an easily
8.1 Manoeuvering equipment legible board is to be mounted on boiler operating
platforms giving the most important operating
Every engine control platform is to be equipped in
instructions for boilers and oil-firing equipment.
such a way that
11. Markings, identification
- the propulsion plant can be adjusted to any
setting, In order to avoid unnecessary operating and switch-
ing errors, all parts of the machinery whose function
- the direction of propulsion can be reversed, and
is not immediately apparent are to be adequately
- the propulsion unit or the propeller shaft can be marked and labeled.
stopped.
12. Fuels
12.1 The flash point1) of liquid fuels for the

8.2 Propulsion units are to be fitted with
operation of boilers and diesel engines may not be
equipment enabling the direction of propulsion to be
lower than 60 C.
reversed.
For emergency generating sets, however, use may be
8.3 Remote controls
made of fuels with a flash point of 43 C.
The remote control of the propulsion plant from the
12.2 In exceptional cases, for ships intended for
bridge is subject of Rules for Automation,
Volume VII.
8.4 Multiple-shaft and multi-engine systems 1

) % &' (
! ) *#
1-9
operation in limited geographical areas or where liquid heads an hydraulic hammer.

special precautions subject to the Society's approval
are taken, fuels with flash points between 43 C 2. Accessibility of machinery and boilers
and 60 C may also be used. This is conditional upon
the requirement that the temperatures of the spaces in 2.1 Machinery and boiler installations and
which fuels are stored or used must invariably be apparatus must be accessible for operation and
10 C below the flash point. maintenance.
12.3 The use of gaseous fuels taken from the 2.2 In the layout of machinery spaces (design of
cargo is subject to Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied foundation structures, laying of pipelines and cable
Gases in Bulk, Volume IX. conduits etc.) and the design of machinery and
equipment (mountings for filters, coolers etc.), 2.1 is
13. Refrigerating installations to be complied with.
Refrigerating installations for which no Refrigerating 3. Engine control rooms

Installations Certificate is to be issued are subject to
the Rules for Refrigerating Installations, Engine control rooms are to be provided with at least
Volume VIII, C, D, F, J.1 and M.2.3. two exits, one of which can also be used as an escape
route.
4. Lighting
E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment All operating spaces must be adequately lit to ensure
that control and monitoring instruments can be easily
1. Operating and monitoring equipment read. In this connection see the Rules for Electrical
Installations, Volume IV, Section 9.
1.1 Instruments, warning and indicating systems
and operating appliances are to be clearly displayed 5. Bilge wells/bilges
and conveniently sided. Absence of dazzle,
particularly on the bridge, is to be ensured. Bilge wells and bilges must be readily accessible and
easy to clean and either visible or adequately lit.
Operating and monitoring equipment is to be grouped Bilges beneath electrical machines must be so
in such a way as to facilitate easy supervision and designed as to prevent bilge water from penetrating
control of all important parts of the installation. into the machinery at all angles of inclination and
movements of the ship in service.
The following requirements are to be observed when
installing equipment and appliances: 6. Ventilation
Protection against humidity and the accumulation The design and construction of ventilation systems
of dirt, are subject to Biro Klasifikasi Indonesia "Regulation
for Ventilation Systems on Board Seagoing Ships".
Avoidance of excessive temperature variations,
7. Noise abatement
Adequate ventilation.
In compliance with the relevant national regulations,
In consoles and cabinets containing electrical or care is to be taken to ensure that operation of the ship
hydraulic equipment or lines carrying steam or water is not unacceptably impaired by engine noise.
the electrical gear is to be protected from the damage
due to leakage. Redundant ventilation systems are to
be provided for air-conditioned machinery and
control rooms. F. Safety Equipment and Protective
Measures
1.2 Pressure gauges
Machinery is to be installed and safeguarded in such
The scales of pressure gauges are to be dimensioned a way that the risk of accidents is largely ruled out.
up to the specified test pressure. The maximum Besides national regulations particular attention is to
working of boilers, pressure vessels, and other be paid to the following:
systems with pressure limitation by safety valves is to
be marked on the pressure gauges. Pressure gauges 1. Moving parts, flywheels, chain and belt
must be installed in such a way that they can be drives, linkages and other components which could
isolated. constitute an accident hazard for the operating
personnel are to be fitted with guards to prevent
Lines leading to pressure gauges must be installed in contact. The same applies to hot machine parts, pipes
such a way that the readings cannot be affected by and plating which are not protected by insulation, e.g.
1-10
the delivery lines of air compressors. From the engine room or the engine control room it
must be possible to activate an alarm in the engineers
2. When using hand cranks for starting internal living quarters (see also the Rules for Electrical
combustion engines, steps are to be taken to ensure Installations, Volume IV, Section 9).
that the crank disengages automatically when the
engines start. 3. Engine telegraph
Dead-Mans cicuits are to be provided for rotating
equipment. Machinery operated from the engine must be
equipped with a telegraph.
3. Blow down and drainage facilities are to be
designed in such a way that the discharged medium In the case of multiple-shaft installations, a telegraph
can be safely drained off. must be provided for each unit.
4. In operating spaces, anti-skid floorplates and Local control stations are to be equipped with an
floor-coverings must be used. emergency telegraph. Design details are given in the
Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV,
5. Service gangways, operating platforms, Section 9, C.2.
stairways and other areas open to access during
operation are to be safeguarded by guard rails. The 4. Shaft revolution indicator
outside edges of platforms and floor areas are to be
fitted with comings unless some other means is The speed and direction of rotation of the propeller
adopted to prevent persons and objects from sliding shafts are to be indicated on the bridge and in the
off. engine room. In the case of small propulsion units,
the indicator may be dispensed with.
6. Devices for blowing through water level
gauges must be capable of safe operation and Barred speed ranges are to be marked on the shaft
observation. revolution indicators, see Section 16.
7. Safety valves and shutoffs must be capable 5. Design of communication and signaling
of safe operation. Fixed steps, stairs or platforms are equipment
to be fitted where necessary. Reversing, command transmission and operating
controls etc. are to be grouped together at a
8. Safety valves are to be installed to prevent
convenient point on the control platform.
the occurrence of excessive operating pressures.
The current status, "Ahead" or "Astern", of the
9. Steam and feed water lines, exhaust gas
reversing control is to be clearly indicated on the
ducts, boilers and other equipment and pipelines
propulsion plant control platform.
carrying steam or hot water are to be effectively
insulated. Insulating materials must be incombustible. Signalling devices must be clearly perceptible from
Points at which combustible liquids or moisture can all parts of the engine room when the machinery is in
penetrate into the insulation are to be suitably full operation.
protected, e.g. by means of shielding.
For details of the design of electrically operated
command transmission, signalling and alarm systems,
see Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV,
Section 9 and Rules for Automation, Volume VII .
G. Communication and Signalling
Equipment
1. Oral communication
H. Instructions for the Application of the
Means of oral communication are to be provided Construction Rules
between the ship's manoeuvering station, the engine
Operationally important auxiliary machinery
room and the steering gear compartment, and these
me ans sh a l l a l l o w f u l l y s a t i s f a c t o r y Operationally important auxiliary machinery
intercommunication independent of the shipboard comprises all auxiliary machinery which:
power supply under all operating conditions (see also
the Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV, - is necessary for the operation of the ship,
Section 9)
- is required for the operation of the propulsion
installation,
2. Engineer alarm
- is essential for maintaining the ship's safety.
1-4
Fig. 1.1 Areas for the assessment of vibration loads
Table 1.5 Numerical definition of the area boundaries shown in Fig. 1.1
Areas A B C A' B'
s [mm] <1 <1 <1 <1 <1

v [mm/s] < 20 < 35 < 63 < 20 < 40
veff [mm/s] < 14 < 25 < 45 < 14 < 28
a [9,81 m/s2] < 0,7 < 1,6 <4 < 1,3 < 2,6
2.2.2 The assessment of vibration loads is vibration load to the permissible level.
generally based on areas A, B and C, which are
enclosed by the boundary curves shown in Fig. 1.1. 2.2.4 Because they act as vibration exciters,
The boundary curves of areas A, B, and C are reciprocating machines must be separately
indicated in Table 1.5. If the vibration to be assessed considered. Both the vibration generated by
comprises several harmonic components, the reciprocating machines and the stresses consequently
effective value according to 2.2.1 must be applied. imparted to directly connected peripheral equipment
(e.g. governors, exhaust gas turbocharger and
The assessment of this value is to take account of all lubricating oil pumps) and adjacent machines or plant
important harmonic components in the range from 2 (e.g. generators, transmission systems and pipes)
to 300 Hz. may, for the purpose of these Rules and with due
regard to the limitations stated in 2.1.6, be assessed
2.2.3 Area A can be used for the assessment of all using the substitution qualities presented in 2.2.
machines, equipment and appliances. Machines,
equipment and appliances for use on board ship shall 2.2.4.1 In every case the manufacturer of
as a minimum requirement be designed to withstand reciprocating machines has to guarantee permissible
a vibration load corresponding to the boundary curve vibration loads for the important directly connected
of area A. Otherwise, with BKI's consent, steps must peripheral equipment. The manufacturer of the
be taken (vibration damping etc.) to reduce the actual reciprocating machine is responsible to BKI for
1-11
- Starting devices for auxiliary and main engines

The following equipment is to be classed and treated
as operationally important auxiliary machinery: - Engine room ventilators
- Diesel and turbine generators - Control and regulating equipment for propulsion
installations
- Cooling water pumps / coolant pumps
- Turning gears for main engines
- Lubricating oil pumps
- Steering gears
- Fuel booster and fuel transfer pumps
- Hydraulic pumps for controllable pitch propeller
- Fuel and lubricating oil separators plants
- Starting air and control air compressors - Bow thruster units
- Auxiliary and exhaust gas boilers - Windlasses
- Condensate, boiler feed and boiler water - Driving and control equipment for bulkhead
circulating pumps closing systems, hull closure systems, stern and
bow ramps
- Thermal oil pumps
- Heeling compensation systems
- Boiler fans
Operationally important auxiliary machinery for
- Boiler firing systems cargo refrigeration equipment covered by a
Refrigerating Installations Certificate (SMP)
- Auxiliary blowers for main engines
comprises:
- Exhaust-gas turbochargers
- Refrigerant compressors
- Exhaust-gas power turbines
- Cooling water pumps
- Bilge and ballast pumps
- Brine pumps
- Fire pumps
- Refrigerated space circulating fans
- Foam pumps
- Refrigerant circulating pumps
Section 2 - Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors 2-1
Section 2
Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors
A. General livery system of main engines is normally to be so

adjusted that overload power cannot be given in ser-
1. Scope vice.
The Rules contained in this section apply to internal
3.5 Subject to the prescribed conditions, diesel
combustion engines used as main propulsion units and
engines driving electric generators must be capable of
auxiliary units and to air compressors.
overload operation even after installation on board.
For the purpose of these Rules, internal combustion
3.6 Subject to the approval of the Society, diesel
engines are diesel engines.
engines for special vessels and special applications
Diesel/gas engine are additionally subject to the Rules may be designed for a continuous power (fuel stop
for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk, power) which cannot be exceeded.
Volume IX, Section 16.
3.7 For main engines, a power diagram (Fig. 2.1)
2. Ambient conditions is to be prepared showing the power ranges within
which the engine is able to operate continuously and
In determining the power of all engines used on board for short periods under service conditions.
ships with an unlimited range of service, the following
ambient conditions are to be used:
Barometric pressure 1000 mbar
Suction air temperature 45 C
Relative humidity of air 60 %
Seawater temperature 32 C
(Charge air coolant - inlet
temperature of charge air coolers
subject to seawater)
3. Rated power
3.1 Diesel engines are to be designed such that
their rated power when running at rated speed can be
delivered as continuous power. Diesel engines are to
be capable of continuous operation within power
range in Fig. 2.1 and of short period operation in
power range . The extent of the power ranges are to
be stated by the engine manufacturer.
3.2 Continuous power is understood to mean the
service standard power which an engine is capable of
delivering continuously, provided that the maintenance
prescribed by the engine manufacturer is carried out, Fig. 2.1 Example of a power diagram
between the maintenance intervals stated by the engine
manufacturer.
3.3 To verify that an engine is rated at its con-
tinuous power, it is to be demonstrated that the engine 4. Fuels
can run at an overload power corresponding to 110 %
4.1 The use of liquid fuels is subject to the Rules
of its rated power at corresponding speed for an
contained in Section 1, D.12.
uninterrupted period of 1 hour. Deviations from the
overload power value require the agreement of the
Society. 4.2 For fuel treatment and supply, see Section 11, G.
3.4 After running on the test bed, the fuel de-

2-2 Section 2 - Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors
4.3 For engines fueled by gases evaporating from - Charge air cooling system
the ship's cargo, see Rules for Seagoing Ships, Volume
IX, Section 16. The use of other gas fuels requires the - Cylinder arrangement (in-line, Vee)
special approval of the Society. 4. Following initial approval of an engine type
5. Accessibility of engines by the Society, only those documents listed in Table
2.1 require to be resubmitted for examination which
Engines are to be so arranged in the engine room that embody important design modifications.
all the assembly holes and inspection ports provided by
the engine manufacturer for inspections and 5. Where considered necessary, the Society may
maintenance are accessible. request further documents to be submitted.
6. The approval of exhaust gas turbochargers,
heat exchangers of any kind, engine-driven pumps,
etc. is to be requested from the Society by the
respective manufacturer.
B. Documents for Approval
1. For each engine type the drawings and
documents listed in Table 2.1 shall, wherever C. Crankshaft Design
applicable, be submitted by the engine manufacturer to
the Society for approval (A) or information (I). 1. Design methods
1.1 Crankshafts are to be designed to withstand
2. For each engine type manufactured under the stresses occurring when the engine runs at rated
license, the licensee shall submit to the Society, as a power. Calculations are to be based on the Sociaetys
minimum requirement, the following documents: "Regulations for the Calculation of Diesel Engine
Crankshafts". Other methods of calculation may be
- Comparison of all the drawings and used provided that they do not result in crankshaft
documents as per Table 2.1 - where dimensions smaller than those obtained by applying
applicable - indicating the relevant drawings the aforementioned regulations.
used by the licensee and the licensor.
1.2 Outside the end bearings, crankshafts
- All drawings of modified components, if designed according to the regulations specified in 1.1
available, as per Table 2.1 together with the may be adapted to the diameter of the adjoining shaft
licensor's declaration of consent to the by a generous fillet (r 0,06 d) or a taper.
modifications,
1.3 Design methods for application to crank-
- A complete set drawings shall be put at the shafts of special construction and to the crankshafts of
disposal of the local inspection office of Biro engines of special type are to be agreed with the
Klasifikasi Indonesia as a basis for the tests Society.
and inspections.
2. Shrink joints of built-up crankshafts
3. The type specification of an internal The shrink joints of built-up crankshafts are to be
combustion engine is defined by the following data: designed in accordance with Societys "Regulation for
the Calculation of Diesel Engine Crankshaft ".
- Manufacturer's type designation
3. Screw joints
- Cylinder bore
3.1 Split crankshafts
- Stroke
Only fitted bolts may be used for assembling split
- Injection system
crankshafts.
- Fuels which can be used
3.2 Power-end flange couplings
- Working cycle (4-stroke, 2-stroke)
The bolts used to connect power-end flange couplings
- Scavenging system (naturally aspirated or are normally to be designed as fitted bolts in
supercharged) accordance with Section 4, D.
- Rated power per cylinder at rated speed and If the use of fitted bolts is not feasible, the Society
maximum mean effective working pressure may agree to the use of an equivalent frictional
resistance transmission.
- Supercharging system (pulsating pressure
system or constant-pressure system)
Table 2.1 Documents for approval
Serial I/A Description Quantity Remarks

No. (see
below)
1 I Details required on BKI forms when applying for approval of an 3
internal combustion engine
2 I Engine transverse cross-section 3
3 I Engine longitudinal section 3
4 - Bedplate or crankcase
I - cast 1
A - welded, with welding details and instructions 3
3
5 A Thrust bearing assembly 3 )
6 - Thrust bearing baseplate
3
I - cast 1 )
3
A - welded, with welding details and instructions 3 )
7 - Frame/column
1
I - cast 1 )
1
A - welded, with welding details and instructions 3 )
8 I Tie rod 1
9 I Cylinder cover assembly 1
1 2
10 I Cylinder jacket or engine block 1 ) )
2
11 I Cylinder liner 1 )
12 A Crankshaft for each number of cylinders, with data sheets for 3
calculation of crankshafts
13 A Crankshaft assembly, for each number of cylinders 3
14 A Thrust shaft or intermediate shaft (if integral with engine) 3
15 A Coupling bolts 3
16 A Counterweights including fastening bolts 3
17 I Connecting rod, details 3
2
18 I Connecting rod assembly 3 )
2
19 I Crosshead assembly 3 )
2
20 I Piston rod assembly 3 )
21 I Piston assembly 1
22 I Camshaft drive assembly 1
23 A Material specifications of main parts with information on non- 3
destructive material tests and pressure tests
24 A Arrangement of foundation bolts (for main engines only) 3
6
25 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of starting air system 3 )
6
26 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of fuel oil system )
6
27 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of lubricating oil system 3 )
6
28 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of cooling water system 3 )
6
29 A Schematic diagram of engine control and safety system 3 )
30 I Shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes - assembly 1
4
31 A Shielding of high-pressure fuel pipes - assembly 3 )
5
32 A Arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valves 3 )
33 I Operation and service manuals 1
1
) Only for one cylinder
2
) Only necessary if sufficient details are not shown on the transverse cross section and longitudinal section.
3
) If integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate
4
) Only for engines with a bore > 200 mm, or a crankcase volume > 0,6 m3
5
) And the entire system, if this is part of the goods to be supplied by the engine manufacturer
A for approval
I for information
4. Torsional vibration, critical speeds Section 16 applies.

D. Materials 15. Bolts and studs for:
1. Approved materials - cylinder covers
1.1 The mechanical characteristics of materials - crossheads

used for the components of diesel engines must
conform to the Society's Rules Materials, Volume V. - main bearings
The materials approved for the various components
are shown in Table 2.3 together with their minimum - connecting rod bearings
required characteristics.
16. Camshaft drive gear wheels and chain wheels
1.2 Materials with properties deviating from made of steel or cast steel.
those specified may be used only with the Society's
special approval. The Society requires proof of the 2.1.1 Material tests are to be performed in
suitability of such materials. accordance with Table 2.2.
2. Testing of materials Table 2.2 Material tests
2.1 In the case of individually produced engines,

the following parts are to be subjected to material tests Parts to be tested
in the presence of the Societys representative Cylinder bore (numbered according
to the list under D.2.1
1. Crankshaft above)
300 mm 1-6-10- 11-12- 13
2. Crankshaft coupling flange (non-integral) for
main power transmission > 300 400 mm 1-6-8-9-10-11-12-13-
14-15
3. Crankshaft coupling bolts
> 400 mm all parts
4. Pistons or piston crowns made of steel, cast
steel or nodular cast iron 2.1.2 In addition, material tests are to be carried out
on pipes and parts of the starting air system and other
5. Piston rods pressure systems forming part of the engine (see
Section 11).
6. Connecting rods including the associated
bearing covers 2.2 In the case of individually manufactured
engines, non-destructive material tests are to be per-
7. Crossheads formed on the parts listed below in accordance with
Tables 2.4 and 2.5:
8. Cylinder liners made of steel or cast steel
1. Steel castings for bedplates, e.g. bearing
9. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel transverse girders, including their welded
joints
10. Welded bedplates:
2. Solid forged crankshafts
plates and bearing transverse girders made of
forged or cast steel 3. Cast, rolled or forged parts of fully built
crankshafts
11. Welded frames and crankcases
4. Cast or forged parts of semi-built crankshafts
12. Welded entablatures
5. Connecting rods
13. Tie rods
6. Piston rods
14. Exhaust gas turbocharger:
shaft and rotor
Table 2.3 Approved materials

Approved materials Society's Rules *) Components
Forged steel Rm 360 N/mm2 Section 5, C Crankshafts

Connecting rods
Pistons rods
Crossheads
Pistons and piston crowns
Cylinder covers/heads
Camshaft drive wheels
Rolled or forged steel rounds Section 5, C Tie rods

Rm 360 N/mm2 Bolts and studs
Special grade cast steel Section 6, C Throws and webs of built-up

Rm 440 N/mm2 and crankshafts
Special grade forged steel Section 5, C
Rm 440 N/mm2
Cast steel Section 6, C Bearing transverse girders

(weldable)
Camshaft drive wheels
Nodular cast iron, preferably ferritic Section 7, B Engine blocks

grades Bedplates
Rm 370 N/mm2 Cylinder blocks
Flywheels
Valve bodies
Lamellar cast iron Section 7, C Engine blocks

Rm 200 N/mm2 Bedplates
Cylinder blocks
Cylinder liners
Flywheels
Shipbuilding steel, all BKI grades Section 3, B Welded bedplates

for plates 35 mm thick Welded frames
Welded housings
Shipbuilding steel, BKI grade D for
plates > 35 mm thick
Structural steel, unalloyed, for Section 3, F

welded assemblies
*) All details refer to the Society's Rules, Volume V, Rules for Materials
7. Piston crowns of steel or cast steel of any engine component, non-destructive testing by
approved methods may be required in addition to the
8. Tie rods (at each thread over a distance tests mentioned above.
corresponding to twice the threaded length)
2.3 Crankshafts welded together from forged or
9. Bolts which are subjected to alternating cast parts are subject to the Society's special approval.
loads, e.g.: Both the manufacturers and the welding process must
have been accepted. The materials and the welds are to
- main bearing bolts be tested.
- connecting rod bolts
- crosshead bearing bolts

E. Tests and Trials
- cylinder cover bolts
1. Manufacturing inspections
10. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel
1.1 The manufacture of all engines with BKI
11. Camshaft drive gear wheels made of steel or classification is subject to supervision by the Society.
cast steel.
1.2 Where engine manufacturers have been
2.2.1 Magnetic particle or dye penetrant tests are to approved by the Society as "Suppliers of Mass
be performed in accordance with Table 2.4 at those Produced Engines", these engines are to be tested in
points, to be agreed between the Society's Surveyor accordance with BKI's "Regulations for the Testing of
and the manufacturer, where experience shows that Mass Produced Engines".
defects are liable to occurs.
2. Pressure tests
Table 2.4 Magnetic particle tests
The individual components of internal combustion
engines are to be subjected to pressure tests at the
Parts to be tested pressures specified in Table 2.6.
Cylinder bore (numbered according
to the list under 3. Type approval testing (TAT)
D.2.2 above)
400 mm 1-2-3-4-5 3.1 General
> 400 mm all parts Engines for installation on board ship must have been
type tested by BKI. For this purpose a type approval
2.2.2 Ultrasonic tests are to be carried out by the test in accordance with 3.1.2 is to be performed.
manufacturer in accordance with Table 2.5, and the
corresponding signed manufacturer's certificates are to 3.1.1 Preconditions for type approval testing
be submitted.
Preconditions for type approval testing are that:
Table 2.5 Ultrasonic tests
- the engine to be tested conforms to the
specific requirements for the series and has
Parts to be tested been suitably optimized,
Cylinder bore (numbered according
to the list under D.2.2 - the inspections and measurements necessary
above) for reliable continuous operation have been
performed during works tests carried out by
400 mm 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 7 - 10
the engine manufacturer and BKI has been
> 400 mm 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7- 10 informed of the results of the major
inspections,
2.2.3 Welded seams of important engine compo- - BKI has issued the necessary approval of
nents may be required to bc subjected to approved drawings on the basis of the documents to be
methods of testing. submitted in accordance with Section 2. B.
2.2.4 Where there is reason to doubt the soundness

Table 2.6 Pressure test 1)
Component Test Pressure, pp [bar] 2)
Cylinder cover, cooling water space3) 7
Cylinder liner, over whole length of cooling water 7

space5)
Cylinder jacket, cooling water space 4 , at least 1,5 pe,mp
Exhaust valve, cooling water space 4 , at least 1,5 pe,mp
Piston, cooling water space 7

(after assembly with piston rod, if applicable)
Pump body, 1,5 pe,mp or pe,mp + 300 (whichever is less)

pressure side
Fuel injection system
Valves 1,5 pe,mp or pe,mp + 300 (whichever is less)
Pipes 1,5 pe,mp or pe,mp + 300 (whichever is less)
Hydraulic system High pressure 1,5 pe,mp

piping for
hydraulic drive
of exhaust gas
valves
Scavenge pump cylinder 4
Exhaust gas turbocharger, cooling water space 4 , at least 1,5 pe,mp
Exhaust gas line, cooling water space 4 , at least 1,5 pe,mp
Coolers, both sides4) 4 , at least 1,5 pe,mp
Engine-driven pumps 4 , at least 1,5 pe,mp

(oil, water, fuel and bilge pumps)
Starting and control air system 1,5 pe,mp before installation

1
) In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the Table. Where design or testing features may require
modification of these test requirement, special consideration will be given.
2
) pe,mp[bar] = maximum working pressure in the part concerned.
3
) For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted, e.g. suitable non-destructive
examination and dimensional control properly recorded.
4
) Charge air cooleras need only be tested on the water side.
5
) For centrifugally cast cylinder liners, the pressure test can be replaced by a crack test.
3.1.2 Scope of type approval testing the Society during the type test.
The type approval test is subdivided into three stages, - Stage B - Type test
namely:
This test is to be performed in the presence
- Stage A - Internal tests of the Society's representative.
Functional tests and collection of operating

values including test hours during the - Stage C - Component inspection
internal tests, which are to be presented to
The operating hours of the engine the Society's agreement.

components to be presented for inspection
after type testing in accordance with 3.4 are 3.3.1 Load points
to be stated.
Load points at which the engine is to be operated are
3.2 Stage A - Internal tests to conform to the power/speed diagram in Fig. 2.2.
Functional tests and the collection of operating data; The data to be measured and recorded when testing the
are to be performed during the internal tests. The engine at various load points must include all the
engine is to be operated at the load points important parameters necessary for an assessment.
for the engine manufacturer and the pertaining
operating values are to be recorded. The load points The operating time per load point depends on the
are to be selected according to the range of application engine size and on the time for collection of the
of the engine. operating values. The measurements shall in every
case only be performed after achievement of
For engines to be operated on heavy fuel oil suitability steady-state condition.
for this shall be proved in an appropriate form.
3.2.1 Normal case
The normal case includes the load points 25 %,

50 %, 75 %, 100 % and 110 % of the maximum rated
power
a) along the nominal (theoretical) propeller

curve and at constant speed for propulsion
engines
b) at rated speed with constant governor setting

for generator drive, and
c) proving of the limit points of the permissible

operating range defined by the engine
manufacturer.
3.2.2 Emergency operation situations
For turbocharged engines the achievable output in

case of turbocharger damage is to be determined as
follows:
- Engines with one turbocharger, when rotor is

blocked or removed
- Engines with two or more turbochargers,

when the damaged turbocharger is shut off.
Note :
The engine manufacturer is to state whether the

achievable output is continuous. If there is a time Range of continuous operation
limit. the permissible operating time is to be indicated.
Range of intermitted operation
3.3 Stage B - Type test
Range of short-time overload operation
During the type test all the tests listed below under in special applications.
3.3.1 to 3.3.3 are to be carried out in the presence of Fig. 2.2 Power/speed diagram
the Society's representative. The results achieved are
to be recorded and signed by the Society's represen-
tative. Deviations from this program, if any, require
At 100 % output (rated power) in accordance with and/or starting and reversing tests for
3.3.1.1 an operating time of 2 hours is required. At reversible engines
least two sets of readings are to be taken at an interval
of 1 hour in each case. - Governor test
- Test of the safety system particularly for

If an engine can continue to operate without its overspeed and low lubricating oil pressure.
operational safety being affected in the event of a
failure of its independent cylinder lubrication, proof of 3.4 Stage C - Component inspection
this shall be included in the type test.
Immediately after the test run the components of one
3.3.1.1 Rated power (continuous power) cylinder for in-line engines and two cylinders for V-
engines are to be presented for inspection as follows:
It means 100 % output at 100 % torque and 100 %
speed (rated speed) corresponding to load point 1. - Piston, removed and dismantled
- Crosshead bearing, dismantled

3.3.1.2 100 % power
- Crank bearing and main bearing, dismantled
At maximum permissible speed corresponding to load
point 2. - Cylinder liner in the installed condition
3.3.1.3 Maximum permissible torque - Cylinder head, valves disassembled
It means normally 110 % output at 100 % speed - Control gear, camshaft and crankcase with
corresponding to load point 3, or maximum opened covers
permissible power (normally 110 %) and speed accor- Note:
ding to nominal propeller curve corresponding to load
point 3 a. If deemed necessary by the Society's representative ,
further dismantling of the engine may be required.
3.3.1.4 Minimum permissible speed for
intermittent operation
3.5 The results of the type test are to be incor-
- At 100 % torque corresponding to load porated in a report which is to be handed to the
point 4 Society.
- At 90 % torque corresponding to load 3.6. Type test of mass produced engines
point 5
3.6.1 For engines with cylinder bores 300 mm
3.3.1.5 Part-load operation which are to be manufactured in series the type test
shall be carried out in accordance with the Society's
It means 75 %, 50 % and 25 % of rated power and
"Regulations for Mass Produced Engines".
speed according to nominal propeller curve corres-
ponding to points 6, 7 and 8 and at rated speed with 3.6.2 For the performance of the type test, the
constant governor setting corresponding to points 9, engine is to be fitted with all the prescribed items of
10 and 11. equipment. If the engine, when on the test bed, cannot
be fully equipped in accordance with the requirements,
3.3.2 Emergency operation
the equipment may then be demonstrated on another
Maximum achievable power when operating in engine of the same series.
accordance with 3.2.2
3.7 Renewal of type test
- at speed conforming to nominal propeller
curve If the rated power (continuous power) of a type tested
and operationally proven engine is increased by more
- with constant governor setting for rated than 10 %, a new type test is required. Approval of the
speed. power increase includes examination of the relevant
drawings.
3.3.3 Functional tests
4. Works trials
- Lowest engine speed according to nominal
propeller curve 4.1 In general, engines are to be subjected to
trials on the test bed at the manufacturer's works and
- Starting tests for non-reversible engines under the Society's supervision. The scope of these
2 - 10 Section 2 - Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors
trials shall be as specified below. Exceptions to this After the test bed trials the output of engines driving
require the agreement of the Society. generators is to be so adjusted that overload (110 %)
power can be supplied in service after installation on
4.2 Scope of works trials board in such a way that the governing characteristics
and the requirements of the generator protection
During the trials the operating values corresponding to devices can be fulfilled at all times
each load point are to be measured and recorded by
the engine manufacturer. All the results are to be c) 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power and idle run
compiled in an acceptance protocol to be issued by the
engine manufacturer. d) Start-up tests
In each case all measurements conducted at the e) Test of governor and independent overspeed
various load points shall be carried out under steady protection device
operating conditions. The readings for 100 % power
(rated power at rated speed) are to be taken twice at an f) Test of engine shutdown devices
interval of at least 30 minutes.
4.2.1 Main engines for direct propeller drive 4.2.3 Auxiliary driving engines and engines
driving electric generators
a) 100 % power (rated power)
Tests to be performed in accordance with 4.2.2.
at 100 % engine speed (rated engine speed)
no: For testing of diesel generator sets, see also Rules for
Seagoing Ships, Volume IV, Section 17.
at least 60 minutes after reaching the
steady-state conditions 4.3 Depending on the type of plant concerned,
the Society reserves the right to call for a special test
b) 110 % power at n = 1,032 no: schedule.
45 minutes after reaching the 4.4 In the case of main propulsion engines and
steady-state conditions engines driving electric generators the rated power is
to be verified as minimum power.
Note:
4.5 Component inspection
After the test bed trials the output shall normally be
limited to the rated power (100 % power) so that the After the test run randomly selected components shall
engine cannot be overloaded in service. be presented for inspection.
c) 90 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power in The crankshaft web deflection is to be checked.

accordance with the nominal propeller curve.
5. Shipboard trials (dock and sea trials)
d) Starting and reversing manoeuvres
After the conclusion of the running-in programme
e) Test of governor and independent over-speed prescribed by the engine manufacturer engines are to
protection device undergo the trials specified below.
f) Test of engine shutdown devices. 5.1 Scope of sea trials
4.2.2 Main engines for electrical propeller drive 5.1.1 Main propulsion engines driving fixed
propellers
The test is to be performed at rated speed with a
constant governor setting under conditions of: a) At rated engine speed no:
a) 100 % power (rated power) : at least 4 hours
at least 60 minutes after reaching the and

steady-state condition
at engine speed corresponding to normal
b) 110 % power: cruise power:
at least 2 hours
45 minutes after reaching the
steady-state condition
Note:
b) At engine speed n = 1,032 no: 30 minutes
where the engine adjustment permits (see 5.1.4 Engines driving auxiliaries and electrical
A.3.4) generators
c) At minimum on-load speed These engines are to be subjected to an operational

test for at least four hours. During the test the set
d) Starting and reversing manoeuvres concerned is required to operate at its rated power for
an extended period.
e) In reverse direction of propeller rotation
during the dock or sea trials at a minimum It is to be demonstrated that the engine is capable of
speed of n = 0,7 no: supplying 110 % of its rated power, and in the case of
shipboard generating sets account shall be taken of the
10 minutes times needed to actuate the generator's overload
f) Testing of the monitoring and safety systems protection system.
5.1.2 Main propulsion engines driving con- 5.2 The suitability of main and auxiliary engines
trollable pitch propellers or reversing to burn residual oils or other special fuels is to be
gears demonstrated if the machinery installation is designed
to burn such fuels.
5.1.1 applies as appropriate.
5.3 The scope of the shipboard trials may be
Controllable pitch propellers are to be tested with extended in consideration of special operating
various propeller pitches. Where provision is made for conditions such as towing, trawling, etc.
combined operation, the combine curves are to be
plotted and verified by measurements. 5.4 It is necessary to ensure that the limits
specified for main engines by the engine
5.1.3 Main engines driving generators for manufacturers for the difference in electrical potential
propulsion (Voltage) between the crankshaft/shafting and the hull
are not exceeded in service. Appropriate earthing
The tests are to be performed at rated speed with a devices including limit value monitoring of the
constant governor setting under conditions of permitted voltage potential are to be provided.
a) 100 % power (rated power):
at least 4 hours
and F. Safety Devices
at normal continuous cruise power: 1. Speed control and engine protection

against overspeed
at least 2 hours
1.1 Main and auxiliary engines
b) 110 % power:
1.1.1 Each diesel engine not used to drive an
30 minutes electric generator must be equipped with a speed
governor or regulator so adjusted that the engine
c) In reverse direction of propeller rotation
speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than
during the dock or sea trials at a minimum
15 %.
speed of 70 % of the nominal propeller
speed : 1.1.2 In addition to the normal governor, each
main engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over
10 minutes
which can be declutched in service or which drives a
d) Starting manoeuvres variable-pitch propeller must be fitted with an
independent overspeed protection device so
e) Testing of the monitoring and safety systems adjusted that the engine speed cannot exceed the rated
speed by more than 20 %.
Equivalent equipment may be approved by the

Society.
Note:
1.2 Engines driving electric generators
Tests are to be based on the rated electrical powers of
the driven generators. 1.2.1 Each diesel engine used to drive an electric
generator must be fitted with a governor which, in the
event of the sudden complete removal of the load, Section 3, B.

prevents any transient speed variation ( rs) in excess
of 10 % of the rated speed. The permanent speed 1.2.6 Generator sets which are installed to serve
variation ( r) may not exceed 5 %. stand-by circuits must satisfy these requirements even
when the engine is cold. The start-up and loading
1.2.2 In addition to the normal governor, each sequence is to be concluded in about 30 seconds.
diesel engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over
must be equipped with an overspeed protection
device independent of the normal governor which 1.2.7 Emergency generator sets must satisfy the
prevents the engine speed from exceeding the rated above governor conditions also unlimited with the
speed by more than 15 %. start-up and loading sequence having to be concluded
in about 45 seconds.
1.2.3 The diesel engine must be suitable and designed
for the special requirements of the ship's electrical 1.2.8 The governors of the engines mentioned in
system. 1.2 must enable the rated speed to be adjusted over the
entire power range with a maximum deviation of 5 %.
Where connection of loads is envisaged in two stages,
the following procedure is to be applied: Sudden 1.2.9 The rate of speed variation of the adjusting
loading from no-load to 50 %, followed by the mechanisms must permit satisfactory synchronization
remaining 50 % of the rated generator power, duly in a sufficiently short time. The speed characteristic
observing the requirements of 1.2.1 and 1.2.4. should be as linear as possible over the whole power
range. The permanent deviation from the theoretical
Connection of the load in more than two steps (see linearity of the speed characteristic may, in the case of
Fig. 2.3) is acceptable on condition that generating sets intended for parallel operation, in no
range exceed 1 % of the rated speed.
- the design of the ship's electrical system
enables the use of such generator sets Notes relating to 1.1 and 1.2:
- adequate scope for connection of the load in a) The rated power and the corresponding
more than two steps is provided in the design rated speed relate to the conditions under
of the ship's electrical system and is which the engines are operated in the system
approved when the drawings are inspected. concerned.
- undisputed proof of proper operation is b) An independent overspend protection device

furnished during testing of the on-board means a system all of whose component
systems. The loading of the ship's electrical parts, including the drive, function
system in the case of stepped connection of independently of the normal governor.
operationally important consumers following
failure and restoration of the system is to be
taken into account. 1.3 Use of electrical/electronic governors
- furthermore, the safety of the ship's electrical 1.3.1 The governor and the associated actuator
system in the event of parallel generator must, for controlling the respective engine, be suitable
operation and failure of a generator is to be for the operating conditions laid down in the
demonstrated. Construction Rules and for the requirements specified
by the engine manufacturer.
1.2.4 Speed must be stabilized and in steady-state The regulating conditions required for each individual
condition within five seconds, inside the permissible application as described in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be
range for the permanent speed variation r. satisfied by the governor system.
The steady-state condition is considered to have been Electronic governors and the associated actuators
reached when the residual speed variation does not are subject to type testing.
exceed 1% of the speed associated with the set
For the power supply, see Rules for Electrical
power.
Installatons, Volume IV, Section 9, B.8 and Volume
1.2.5 The characteristic curves of the governors of VII, Section 4, G.2.
diesel engines of generator sets operating in parallel
must not exhibit deviations larger than those specified
in the Rules for of Seagoing Ships, Volume IV,
Fig 2.3 Limiting curves for loading 4-stroke diesel engines step by step from
no load to rated power as function of the brake mean effective pressure
1.3.2 Requirements applying to main engines Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to
be fitted.
For propulsion installations, to ensure continuous
speed control or immediate resumption of control after 1.3.3 Requirements applying to auxiliary engines
a fault at least one of the following requirements is to for driving generators
be satisfied:
Each auxiliary engine must be equipped with its own
a) the governor system has an independent governor system.
back-up system
In the event of a fault in the governor system, the fuel
or admission in the injection pumps must be set to "0".
Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to
b) there is a redundant governor assembly for be fitted.
manual change-over with a separately protected
power supply 1.3.4 The special conditions necessary to start
operation from the dead ship condition are to be
or observed (see Rules for Seagoing Ships, Volume
IV, Section 3, B.1.7 )
c) a complete preset governor assembly is
available as a spare 2. Cylinder overpressure warning device
or 2.1 All the cylinders of engines with a cylinder
bore of > 230 mm are to be fitted with cylinder
d) the engine has a manually operated fuel
overpressure control valves. The response threshold of
admission control system suitable for
these valves shall be set at not more than 40 % above
manoeuvering.
the combustion pressure at the rated power.
In the event of a fault in the governor system, the
2.2 The cylinder overpressure control valves may
operating condition of the engine must not become
be replaced by effective combined visual/acoustic
dangerous, that is, the engine speed and power must
cylinder overpressure warning devices. These must
not increase.
have been type-tested by the Society.
3. Crankcase airing and venting Notes relating to 4.1 and 4.3:
3.1 Crankcase airing a) In estimating the gross volume of the

crankcase, the volume of the fixed parts which
The airing of crankcases is not allowed (gas it contains may be deducted.
engines, see Rules for Seagoing Ships,Volume IX,
Section 16). b) A space communicating with the crankcase via
a total free cross-sectional area of > 115
3.2 Crankcase venting cm2/m3 of volume need not be considered as a
separate space. In calculating the total free
3.2.1 Where crankcase venting systems are provided cross-sectional area individual sections of
their clear opening is to be dimensioned such as small < 45 cm2 are to be disregarded.
as possible.
c) Each safety valve required may be replaced by
3.2.2 Where provision has been made for extracting not more than two safety valves of smaller
the lubricating oil vapors, e.g. for monitoring the oil cross-sectional area provided that the free
vapor concentration, the negative pressure in the cross-sectional area or each safety valve is not
crankcase may not exceed 2,5 mbar. less than 45 cm2.
3.2.3 The vent pipes of two or more engines must not 4.4 The safety devices must take the form of flaps
be combined. or valves of proven design. In service they must be
oiltight when closed and must prevent air from
3.2.4 In the case of two-stroke engines the lubricating
flowing into the crankcase. The gas flow caused by the
oil vapours from the crankcase must not be admitted
response of the safety device must be deflected, e. g.
into the scavenge manifolds of the engine.
by means of a baffle plate, in such a way as not to
4. Crankcase safety devices endanger persons standing nearby.
4.1 Safety valves to safeguard against overpressure Safety devices shall respond to as low an overpressure
in the crankcase are to be fitted to all engine with a in the crankcase as possible (maximum 0,2 bar).
cylinder bore of > 200 mm or a crankcase volume of
4.5 Crankcase doors and their fittings must be so
0,6 m3.
dimensioned as not to suffer permanent deformation
All other spaces communicating with the crankcase due to the overpressure occurring during the response
e.g. gear or chain casings for camshafts or similar of the safety equipment.
drives, are to be equipped with additional safety
4.6 A warning sign is to be mounted on the local
devices if the volume of these spaces exceeds 0,6 m3.
engine control platform or, if appropriate, on both
sides of the engine drawing attention to the fact that
4.2 Engines with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm the crankcase doors and/or sight holes may not be
250 mm must be equipped with at least one safety opened immediately following stoppage of the engine,
valve at each end of the crankcase. If the crankshaft but only after a sufficient cooling period has elapsed.
has more than 8 throws, an additional safety valve is
to be fitted near the middle of the crankcase.
5. Safety devices in the starting air system
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 250 mm 300 mm
The following equipment is to be fitted to safeguard
must have at least one safety valve close to every
the starting air system against explosions due to failure
second crank throw, subject to a minimum number of
of starting valves:
two.
5.1 An isolation non-return valve is to be fitted to
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 300 mm must have
the starting air line serving each engine.
at least one safety valve close to each crank throw.
5.2 Engines with cylinder bores of > 230 mm are
4.3 Each safety valve must have a free
to be equipped with flame arrestors as follows:
cross-sectional area of at least 45 cm.
a) On directly reversible engines immediately in
The total free cross-sectional area of the safety valves
front of the start-up valve of each cylinder
fitted to an engine to safeguard against over pressure
in the crankcase may not be less than 115 cm2/m3 of b) On non-reversible engines, immediately in
crankcase volume. front of the intake of the main starting air line
to each engine.
5.3 Equivalent safety devices may be approved by

the Society. Appropriate design measures are to be introduced to

ensure generally that leaking fuel is drained efficiently
6. Safety devices in the lubricating oil system and cannot enter into the engine lube oil system.
Each engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over is 2.4 Heat tracing, thermal insulation, re-
to be fitted with devices which automatically shut circulation
down the engine in the event of failure of the lubri-
cating oil supply. Exceptions to this Rule are engines Fuel lines, including fuel injection lines, to engines
driving emergency generator sets and emergency fire which are operated with preheated fuel are to be
pumps. insulated against heat losses and, as far as necessary,
provided with heat tracing.
7. Safety devices in scavenge manifolds
Means of fuel circulation are also to be provided.
The scavenge manifolds of two-stroke engines are to
be equipped with overpressure safety devices. 3. Filters Arrangements
3.1 Fuel and lubricating oil filters which are to be

mounted directly on the engine are not to be located
G. Auxiliary Systems above rotating parts or in the immediate proximity of
hot components.
1. General
3.2 Where the arrangement stated in 3.1 is not
Peripheral piping systems and filter arrangements see
feasible, the rotating parts and the hot components are
Section 11.
to be sufficiently shielded.
2. Fuel lines
3.3 Drip pans of suitable size are to be mounted
2.1 General under fuel filters. The same applies to lubricating oil
filters if oil can escape when the filter is opened.
2.1.1 Only pipe connections with metal scaling
surfaces or equivalent pipe connections of approved 3.4 Switch-over filters with two or more filter
design may be used for fuel injection lines. chambers are to be fitted with devices which safely
ensure a relief of pressure before opening and venting
2.1.2 Feed and return lines are to be designed in such when a chamber is placed in service. Shutoff valves
a way that no unacceptable pressure surges occur in shall normally be used for this purpose. It must be
the fuel supply system. Where necessary, the engines, clearly discernible which filter chambers are in service
are to be fitted with surge dampers approved by the and which are out of operation at any time.
Society.
4. Lubricating oil system
2.2 Shielding
4.1 General requirements relating to lubricating oil
2.2.1 Regardless of the intended use and location of systems and to the cleaning, cooling etc. of the lu-
internal combustion engines, all external fuel bricating oil are contained in Section 11, H., for filters,
injection lines (high pressure lines between injection see G.3.
pumps and injection valves) are to be shielded by
4.1.1 Engines whose sumps serve as oil reservoirs
jacket pipes in such a way that any leaking fuel is
must be so equipped that the oil level can be estab-
safely collected lished and, if necessary, topped up during operation.
Means must be provided for completely draining the
drained away unpressurized, and oil sump.
efficiently monitored 4.1.2 The combination of the oil drainage lines from
the crankcases of two or more engines is not allowed
2.2.2 If pressure variations of 20 bar occur in fuel
feed and return lines, these lines are also to be 4.2 The equipment of engines fitted with
shielded. lubricating oil pumps is subject to Section 11, H.3.
2.2.3 Where, pipe sheaths in the form of hoses are 4.2.1 Main lubricating oil pumps driven by the
provided as shielding, the hoses must be demonstrably engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of
suitable for this purpose and approved by BKI. lubricating oil over the entire operating range.
4.2.2 Main engines which drive main lubricating oil

2.3 Fuel leak drainage pumps are to be equipped with independently driven
stand-by pumps.
4.2.3 In installations comprising more than one main 6.1.4 Even at low engine speeds, main engines must
engine and with separate lubricating oil systems be supplied with charge air in a manner to ensure
approval may be given for the carriage on board of reliable operation.
reserve pumps ready for mounting provided that the
arrangement of the main lubricating oil pumps enables Where necessary, two-stroke engines are to be
the change to be made with the means available on equipped with directly or independently driven
board. scavenging air blowers.
5. Cooling system 6.1.5 If, in the lower speed range or when used for
manoeuvring, an engine can be operated only with a
5.1 For the equipment of engines with cooling water charge air blower driven independently of the engine,
pumps and for the design of cooling water systems, a stand-by charge air blower is to be installed or an
see Section 11, J. and K. equivalent device of approved design.
5.1.1 Main cooling water pumps driven by the engine 6.1.6 With main engines emergency operation must
are to be designed to maintain the supply of cooling be possible in the event of a turbocharger failure.
water over the entire operating range.
6.2 Charge air cooling
5.1.2 Main engines which drive main cooling water
pumps are to be equipped with independently driven 6.2.1 The construction and testing of charge air
stand-by pumps or with means for connecting the coolers are subject to Section 8.
cooling water system to independently driven stand-by
pumps. 6.2.2 Means are to be provided for regulating the
temperature of the charge air within the temperature
5.1.3 In installations comprising more than one main range specified by the engine manufacturer.
engine and with separate fresh cooling water systems
approval may be given for the carriage on board of 6.2.3 The charge air lines of engines with charge air
reserve pumps ready for mounting provided that the coolers are to be provided with sufficient means of
arrangement of the main fresh cooling water pumps drainage.
enables the change to be made with the means
6.3 Fire extinguishing equipment
available on board. Shutoff valves must be provided
enabling the main pumps to be isolated from the fresh The charge air receivers of crosshead engines which
cooling water system. have open connection to the cylinders are to be con-
nected to an approved fire extinguishing system which
5.2 If cooling air is drawn from the engine room, is independent of the engine room fire extinguishing
the design of the cooling system is to be based on a system.
room temperature of at least 45 C.
7. Exhaust gas lines
The exhaust air of air-cooled engines may not cause
any unacceptable heating of the spaces in which the 7.1 Exhaust gas lines are to be insulated and/or
plant is installed. The exhaust air is normally to be led cooled in such a way that the surface temperature
to the open air through special ducts. cannot exceed 220 C at any point.
5.3 Where engines are installed in spaces in which Insulating materials must be non-combustible.
oil-firing equipment is operated, Section 9, A.5 is also
to be complied with. 7.2 General rules relating to exhaust gas lines are
contained in Section 11, M.
6. Charge air system
6.1 Exhaust gas turbocharger
6.1.1 The construction and testing of exhaust gas H. Starting equipment

turbocharger are subject to Section 3/II (Gas Tur-
bines). 1. General
6.1.2 Exhaust gas turbochargers may exhibit no Engine starting equipment must enable engines to be
critical speed ranges over the entire operating range of started up from the shutdown condition using only the
the engine. means available on board.
6.1.3 The lubricating oil supply must also be ensured 2. Starting with compressed air
during start-up and run-down of the exhaust gas
turbochargers. 2.1 Main engines which are started with
compressed air are to be equipped with at least two
starting air compressors. At least one of the air cannot be connected in parallel with each other. Each
compressors must be driven independently of the main battery must enable the main engine to be started from
engine and must supply at least 50 % of the total ca- cold.
pacity required.
The total capacity of the starter batteries must be
2.2 The total capacity of the starting air sufficient for the execution within 30 minutes, without
compressors is to be such that the starting air receivers recharging the batteries, of the same number of
designed in accordance with 2.4 or 2.5, as applicable, start-up operations as is prescribed in 2.4. or 2.5, as
can be charged from atmospheric pressure to their appropriate, for starting with compressed air.
final pressure within one hour.
Normally, compressors of equal capacity are to be 3.2 If two or more auxiliary engines are started
installed. electrically, at least two mutually independent batteries
are to be provided. Where starter batteries for the main
This does not apply to an emergency air compressor engine are fitted, the use of these batteries is
which may be provided to meet the requirement stated acceptable.
in H.1.
The capacity of the batteries must be sufficient for at
2.3 If the main engine is started with compressed least three start-up operations per engine.
air, the available starting air is to be divided between
at least two starting air receivers of approximately If only one of the auxiliary engines is started
equal size which can bc used independently of each electrically, one battery is sufficient.
other.
3.3 The starter batteries may only be used for
2.4 The total capacity of air receivers is to be starting (and preheating where applicable) and for
sufficient to provide, without their being replenished, monitoring equipment belonging to the engine.
not less than 12 consecutive starts alternating between
Ahead and Astern of each main engine of the 3.4 Steps are to be taken to ensure that the batteries
reversible type, and not less than six starts of each are kept charged and the charge level is monitored.
main non-reversible type engine connected to a
4. Start-up of emergency generating sets
controllable pitch propeller or other device enabling
the start without opposite torque. The number of starts 4.1 Emergency generating sets are to be so
refers to an engine in cold and ready-to-start condition. designed that they can be started up readily even at a
temperature of 0 C.
2.5 With multi-engine installations the number of
start-up operations per engine may, with the Society's If the set can be started only at higher temperatures, or
agreement, be reduced according to the concept of the where there is a possibility that lower ambient
propulsion plant. temperatures may occur, heating equipment is to be
fitted to ensure ready reliable starting.
2.6 If starting air systems for auxiliaries or for
supplying pneumatically operated regulating and The operational readiness of the set must be
manoeuvering equipment or tyfon units are to be fed guaranteed under all weather and seaway conditions.
from the main starting air receivers, due attention is to Fire flaps required in air inlet and outlet openings
be paid to the air comsumption of this equipment must only be closed in case of fire and are to be kept
when calculating the capacity of the main starting air open at all other times. Warning signs to this effect are
receivers. to be applied. If the flaps close, an alarm must bc
activated. No alarm is required in the case of
2.7 Other consumers with a high air consumption
automatic fire flap actuation dependent on the
apart from those mentioned in 2.6 may not be
operation of the set. Air inlet and outlet openings must
connected to the main starting air system. Separate air
not be fitted with weatherproof covers.
supplies are to be provided for these units. Deviations
to this require the agreement of the Society. 4.2 Each emergency generating set required to be
capable of automatic starting is to be equipped with an
2.8 For the approximate calculation of the starting
automatic starting system approved by the Society, the
air storage capacity, use may be made of the formulae
capacity of which is sufficient for at least three
given in Part C of the appendix to this section.
successive starts (see Volume IV, Rules for Electrical
3. Electrical starting equipment Installation, Section 3, C).
3.1 Where main engines are started electrically, two In addition, a second energy source is to be installed
mutually independent starter batteries are to be which will allow three further starts to be effected
installed. The batteries are to be so arranged that they within 30 minutes. This requirement may be dispensed
with if the set can also be started by hand.
4.3 In order to guarantee the availability of the 1.1.1 Indicators for the following parameters are to
starting equipment, steps are to be taken to ensure that be clearly sited on the local main engine control
station :
a) Electrical and hydraulic starting systems are - Speed/direction of rotation
supplied with energy from the emergency
switchboard; - Lube oil pressure
b) Compressed air starting systems are supplied - Fuel pressure

via a non-return valve from the main and
auxiliary compressed air receivers or by an - Cylinder cooling water pressure
emergency air compressor, the energy for which
- Piston coolant pressure
is provided via the emergency switchboard; and
- Charge air pressure
c) The starting, charging and energy storage
equipment is located in the emergency generator - Starting air pressure
room.
- Control air pressure
4.4 Where automatic starting is not specified,
reliable manual starting systems may be used, e.g. by 1.1.2 The following temperature indicators are to
means of hand cranks, spring-loaded starters, hand- be provided on the local control station or directly on
operated hydraulic starters or starters using ignition the engine :
cartridges.
Lube oil inlet
4.5 Where direct manual starting is not possible,
starting systems in accordance with 4.2 and 4.3 are to Cylinder cooling water outlet
be provided, in which case the starting operation may
be initiated by hand. Piston coolant outlet
4.6 The starters of emergency generator sets may be Charge air inlet, charge air cooler
used only for this purpose.
Charge air outlet, charge air cooler
5. Start-up of emergency fire extinguisher sets
- Fuel at engine inlet (for engines running on
5.1 Diesel engines driving emergency fire pumps heavy fuel oil)
are to be so designed that they can still be reliably
- Exhaust gas temperature
started by hand at a temperature of 0 C. Wherever the dimensions permit, at each
cylinder outlet and at the turbocharger
If the engine can be started only at higher
inlet/outlet
temperatures, or where there is a possibility that lower
temperatures may occur, heating equipment is to be 1.1.3 In the case of gear and controllable pitch
fitted to ensure reliable starting. propeller systems, the local control indicators and
control equipment required for emergency operation
5.2 If manual start-up using a hand crank is not
are to be installed.
possible, the emergency fire-extinguisher set is to be
fitted with a starting device approved by the Society 1.1.4 Critical speed ranges are to be marked in red
which enables at least 6 starts to be performed within on the tachometers.
30 minutes, two of these being carried out within the
first 10 minutes. 1.2 Machinery control room/control centre
If the installation named has a control station for the

propulsion system with remote operation or control,
the control indicators listed in paragraph 1.1.1, 1.1.2
and 1.1.3 are to be installed.
I. Control Equipment
1.3 Bridge/navigations centre.
1. Main engines
1.3.1 The essential operating parameters for the
1.1 Local control station propulsion system are to be provided in the control
station area.
To provide emergency operation of the propulsion
plant a local control station is to be installed from 1.3.2 The following stand-alone control equipment
which the plant can be operated and monitored. is to be installed :
Speed/direction of rotation of main engine Piston coolant pressure
Speed/direction of rotation of shafting Starting air pressure
Propeller pitch (controllable pitch propeller) Control air pressure
Starting air pressure 2.1.2 Upper temperature limit
Control air pressure Lube oil inlet
1.3.3 In the case of engines installations up to a total Cylinder cooling water outlet
output of 600 kW, simplification can be agreed with
BKI. Piston coolant outlet
2. Auxiliary engines Charge air outlet, charge air cooler
As a minimum requirement the following controls are Exhaust gas (exhaust-gas turbocharger outlet).
to be clearly located on the engine:
2.2 Auxiliary engines
Lube oil pressure
Lower limit
Fuel pressure
Lube oil pressure
Cylinder cooling water pressure
Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow.
Cylinder cooling water temperature (outlet)
Fuel temperature at engine inlet (for engines

running on heavy fuel oil only)
K. Engine Alignment
1. Engines are to be mounted and secured to their

shipboard foundations is conformity with the
J. Alarms "Regulation for the Seating of Propulsion Plants",
1995 edition.
1. General
2. The crankshaft alignment is to be checked
1.1 The following Rules apply to machinery every time an engine has been aligned on its founda-
installations which have been designed for tion by measurement of the crank web deflection.
conventional operation without any degree of
automation. Note is to be taken of:
1.2 Within the context of these Rules, the word a) The draught/load condition of the vessel,
alarms is understood to mean the visual and audible
warning of abnormal operating parameters. b) The condition of the engine-cold/
preheated/hot.
2. Scope of alarms.
3. Where the engine manufacturer has not
Alarms are to be fitted to signal that the following specified values for the permissible crank web
limiting values are being exceeded : deflection, assessment is to be based on the Societys
reference values.
2.1 Main engines
2.1.1 Lower limiting value
Lube oil pressure
Cylinder cooling water pressure

Fig. 2.4 Reference values for crack web deflection
4. Reference values for crank web deflection the crankshaft and assessing the bearing wear. For
measuring point 0, which is obstructed by the
4.1. Irrespective of the crank web deflection figures connecting rod, the mean value of the measurements
quoted by the manufacturers of the various engine made at 1' and 1" is to be applied.
types, reference values for assessing the crank web
deflection in relation to the deflection length rO can 4.3. Determining the crank web deflection
be taken from Fig. 2.4. length ro
Provided that these values are not exceeded, it may be Explanatory notes on :
assumed that neither the crankshaft nor the crankshaft
bearings are subjected to any unacceptable additional - solid-forged and drop-forged crankshafts in
stresses. Fig. 2.6, parts A, B and C;
4.2. Notes on the measurement of crank web - semi-built crankshafts, part D.

deflections
Symbols :
Crank web deflections are to be measured at
dw R [mm] crank radius
distance R (see Fig. 2.5).
2 H [mm] stroke (2 R)
dk [mm] crank pin diameter
dw [mm] journal diameter
dN [mm] shrink annulus diameter
W [mm] axial web thickness
B [mm] web width at distance R/2
Fig. 2.5 Ti [mm] depth of web undercut (on crank pin

side)
Crank web deflection a is only meaningful as
measured between opposite crank positions (see Fig. Ta [mm] depth of web undercut (on journal
2.5), i. e. between 0 - 3 for evaluating vertical side)
alignment and bearing location, and between 2 - 4 for
s [mm] pin/journal overlap
evaluating lateral bearing displacement when aligning
Where there is a negative pin/journal overlap (s < 0),

the deflection length rO in accordance with part A is
determined by applying the formulae :
2 dk 2 dw
ro 0,5 (H d k d w) W 1 1
W W
(7)
In case of web undercut, W in formulae (7) is to be

replaced by:
W* = 0,5 (2 W - Ti - Ta) (8)
In the case of semi-built crankshafts in accordance

with part D, the value dw under the root sign only in
formulae (7) is to be replaced by:
dw* = (dN - dw) + dw (9)
In case of web undercut, W* is also to be substituted

for W in accordance with formulae (8).
Where there is a positive pin/journal overlap (s 0)

according to part C, the value W in formulae (7) is to
be replaced by:
W (W Ti Ta)2 [0,5.(dk dw H)]2 (10)
For the conventional designs, where
B/dW = 1,37 to 1,51 in the case of solid forged

crankshafts, and
B/dW = 1,51 to 1,63 in the case of semi-built

crankshafts,
the influence of B in the normal calculation of ro is

already taken into account in the values of a in Fig.
2.11.
Where the values of B/dW depart from the above (e.g.

in the case of discs oval webs etc.) the altered
stiffening effect of B is to be allowed for by a
fictitious web thickness W** which is to be calculated
by applying the following equations and is to be
substituted for W in formulae (7):
3
B
W W 0,44 for solid-forged
dw
crank-shafts (11)
3
B
W W 0,57 for s e mi b u i l t
dw
crank-shafts (12)
L Approximate Calculation of the Starting

Air Supply e [-] Euler's number (2,718....)
1. Starting air for installations with If a pressure-reducing valve is fitted, which reduces
reversible engines the pressure pe,perm to the starting pressure PA, then the
value of "c" shown in Fig. 2.14 is to be used.
Assuming an initial pressure of 30 bar and a final
pressure of 9 bar in the starting air receivers, the The following values of nA are to be applied:
preliminary calculation of the starting air supply for a
reversible main engine may be performed as follows: nA = 0,06 no + 14 where no 1000
nA = 0,25 no - 176 where no > 1000

!"
no [Rpm] = rated speed
(13) 2. Starting air for installations with non

reversible engines
where For each non-reversible main engine driving a con-

trollable pitch propeller or where starting without
J [dm3] total capacity of the starting air torque resistance is possible the calculated starting air
receivers supply may be reduced to 0,5 . J though not less than
that needed for six start-up operations.
D [mm] cylinder bore
H [mm] stroke
Vh [dm3] swept volume of one cylinder (in M. Air Compressors

the case of double-acting engines,
the swept volume of the upper 1. General
portion of the cylinder)
1.1 Scope
Pe,perm [bar] maximum permissible working
pressure of the starting air receiver These Rules apply to reciprocating compressors of the
normal marine types. Where it is intended to install
z [-] number of cylinders compressors to which the following Rules and
calculation formulae cannot be applied, the Society
Pee [bar] mean effective working pressure in requires proof of their suitability for shipboard use.
cylinder at rated power
1.2 Documents for approval
The following values of "a" are to be used: Drawings showing longitudinal and transverse cross-
sections, the crankshaft and the connecting rod are to
- for two-stroke engines: a = 0,4714 be submitted to the Society in triplicate for each
compressor type.
- for four-stroke engines: a = 0,4190
2. Materials
The following values of "b" are to be used: 2.1 Approved materials
- for two-stroke engines: b = 0,059 In general, the crankshafts and connecting rods of re-
ciprocating compressors shall be made of steel, cast
- for four-stroke engines: b = 0,056
steel or nodular cast iron. The use of special cast iron
alloys is to be agreed with the Society.
The following values of "c" are to be used:
2.2 Material testing
c = 1, where Pe,perm = 30 bar
Material tests are to be performed on crankshafts with
a calculated crank pin diameter of > 50 mm. For crank
pin diameters of 50 mm works certificates are
sufficient.
3. Crankshaft dimensions
where pe,perm 30 bar, if no pressure-reducing valve is
fitted. 3.1 The diameters of journals and crank pins are
to be determined as follows:
Pe, mp [bar]
3
dk 0,126 D 2 p c C1 Cw (2 H f L)
(14)
Fig. 2.7 The Value of "c" where a pressure-reducing valve is fitted
Where
= #$ $
for two-stage
dk [mm] minimum pin/journal diameter
compressors with a differential
D [mml cylinder bore for single-stage
piston as in Fig. 2.9
compressors
pc [bar] design pressure PR, applicable up
= DHD = cylinder bore of the second
to 40 bar
stage in two-stage compressors with
separate pistons H [mm] piston stroke
= 1,4 DHd for two stage L [mm] distance between main bearing
compressors with a stepped piston centers where one crank is located
as in Fig. 2.4 between two bearings. L is to be
substituted by L1 = 0,85 L where

two cranks at different angles are 400 1,03
located between two main bearings, 440 0,94
or by L2 = 0,95 L where 2 or 3 480 0,91
connecting rods are mounted on one 520 0,85
crank. 560 0,79
f = 1,0, where the cylinders are in line 600 0,77
640 0,74
= 1,2, where the cylinders are at 90 680 0,70
for V or W type
720 1) 0,66
760 1) 0,64
= 1,5, where the cylinders area at 60 1
) Only for drop-forged crankshafts
for V or W type
= 1,8, where the cylinders are at 45

for V or W type 4. Construction and fittings
C1 [-] coefficient according to Table 2.7 4.1 General
z [-] number of cylinders 4.1.1 Cooler dimensions are to be based on a

seawater temperature of at least 32 C in case of water
Cw [-] material factor according to Table cooling, and on an air temperature of at least 45 C in
2.8 or 2.9. case of air cooling, unless higher temperatures are
dictated by the temperature conditions attaching to the
Rm [N/mm] minimum tensile strength ship's trade or by the location of the compressors or
cooling air intakes.
Where fresh water cooling is used, the cooling water

inlet temperature shall not exceed 40 C.
Table 2.9 Values of Cw for nodular cast

iron shafts
Rm Cw
370 1,20
400 1,10
Fig. 2.8 Fig. 2.9 500 1,08
600 0,98
3.2 Where increased strength is achieved by a
700 0,94
favorable configuration of the crankshaft, smaller
values of dk may be approved. 800 0,90
Table 2.7 Values of C1 4.1.2 Unless they are provided with open
discharges, the cooling water spaces of compressors
and coolers must be fitted with safety valves or rupture
z 1 2 4 6 8
discs of sufficient cross-sectional area.
C1 1,0 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 4.1.3 High-pressure stage air coolers shall not be
located in the compressor cooling water space.
4.2 Safety valves and pressure gauges

Table 2.8 Values of Cw for steel shafts
4.2.1 Every compressor stage must be equipped
Rm Cw with a suitable safety valve which cannot be blocked
and which prevents the maximum permissible working
pressure from being exceeded by more than 10 % even
when the delivery line has been shut off. The setting
of the safety valve must be secured to prevent
unauthorized alteration. 4.3.4 Water traps, aftercoolers and the compressed

air spaces between the stages must be provided with
4.2.2 Each compressor stage must be fitted with a discharge devices at their lowest points.
suitable pressure gauge, the scale of which must in-
dicate the relevant maximum permissible working 4.4 Name plate
pressure.
Every compressor is to carry a name plate with the
4.2.3 Where one compressor stage comprises following information:
several cylinders which can be shut off individually,
each cylinder must be equipped with a safety valve - Manufacturer
and a pressure gauge.
- Year of construction
- Effective suction rate [m3/h]
- Discharge pressure [bar]
4.3 Air compressors with oil-lubricated - Speed [Rpm]

pressure spaces
- Power consumption [kW].
4.3.1 The compressed air temperature, measured
5. Tests
directly at the discharge from the individual stages,
may not exceed 160 C for multi-stage compressors or 5.1 Pressure tests
200 C for single-stage compressors. For discharge
pressures of up to 10 bar, temperatures may be higher 5.1.1 Cylinders and cylinder liners are to be
by 20 C. subjected to hydraulic pressure tests at 1,5 times the fi-
nal pressure of the stage concerned.
4.3.2 Compressors with a power consumption of
more than 20 kW should be fitted with thermometers 5.1.2 The compressed air chambers of the inter-
at the individual discharge connections, wherever this coolers and aftercoolers of air compressors are to be
is possible. If this is not practicable, they are to be subjected to hydraulic pressure tests at 1,5 times the
mounted at the inlet end of the pressure line. The final pressure of the stage concerned.
thermometers are to be marked with the maximum
permissible temperatures. 5.2 Final inspections and testing
4.3.3 After the final stage, all compressors are to Compressors are to be subjected to a performance test
be equipped with a water trap and an aftercooler. at the manufacturer's works under supervision of the
Society and are to be presented for final inspection.
Section 3 - Thermal Turbomachinery 3-1
Section 3
Thermal Turbomachinery
I. Steam Turbines
A. General 1. Approved materials

1. Scope 1.1 Rotating components
The following Rules apply to main and auxiliary Turbine rotors, discs and shafts are to be manufac-
steam turbines. tured from forged steel.
The Society reserves the right to authorize deviations The rotors of small turbines may also be cast in spe-
from the Rules in the case of low-power turbines. cial-grade steel. Turbine blades, shrouds, binding and
damping wires are to be made of corrosion-resistant
2. Documents for approval materials.
For every steam turbine installation, the documents 1.2 Stationary components
listed below under a) to f) are to be submitted to the
Society in triplicate1) for approval: The casings of high-pressure turbines and the bodies
of manoeuvering, quick-closing and throttle valves are
a) Assembly and sectional drawings of the to be made of high-temperature steel or cast steel.
turbines, Depending upon pressure and temperature, the casings
b) Detail drawings of rotors, casings, of intermediate and low-pressure turbines may also be
diaphragms, blades, valves, bed frames and made of nodular or grey cast iron.
main condenser (for gearing, see Section 5), Diaphragms are to be manufactured from steel, cast
c) Details of operating characteristics and steel, nodular or grey cast iron depending on the
critical speeds, temperature and load. Welded construction may also
bc approved for steel or cast steel components.
d) Proof of a sufficient safety margin in the
components subject to the severest loads. Grey and nodular cast iron may be used up to a steam
For temperatures up to approximately 400 temperature of 300 oC.
o
C, the relevant strength characteristic is the 2. Testing of materials
yield point at elevated temperatures; for
higher temperatures it is the long-term creep 2.1 The following parts are subject to testing in
strength or the 1 % time yield limit for accordance with the Society's Rules for Materials:
100.000 hours at service temperature,
e) Details of the welding conditions applicable a) Rotating parts such as rotors, discs, shafts,
to welded components and shrink rings, blades, toothed couplings and
other dynamically loaded components as
f) On request, calculations relating to blade well as valve spindles and cones.
vibration.
b) Stationary parts such as casings, diaphragms,
nozzles and nozzle chests, guide vanes,
For small auxiliary turbines with a steam inlet turbine casing bolts, bed frames and bearing
temperature of up to 250 C it is generally sufficient pedestals.
to submit sectional drawings of the turbines. Heat c) Condenser tubes and tube plates.
flow diagrams for each turbine installation and a set
of operating instructions for at least each turbine type In the case of small auxiliary turbines with a steam
are to be submitted. inlet temperature of up to 250 C, the extent of the
tests may be limited to the disc and shaft materials.
B. Materials
C. Design and Construction Principles
1
)
1. Foundations
3-2 Section 3 - Thermal Turbomachinery
sufficient power for running astern. The astern power

The foundations of geared turbine installations are to is considered to be sufficient if, given free running
be so designed and constructed that only minor rela- astern, it is able to attain astern revolutions equivalent
tive movements can occur between the turbine and the to at least 70 % of the rated ahead revolutions for a
gearing which can be compensated by suitable period of at least 30 minutes.
couplings.
1.2 For main propulsion machinery with reverse
gearing, controllable pitch propellers or an electrical
2. Jointing of mating surfaces transmission system, astern running must not cause
The mating flanges of casings must form a tight joint any overloading of the propulsion machinery.
without the use of any interposed material.
2. Arrangements for emergency operation
3. Bearing lubrication In single screw ships fitted with multi-cylinder steam
The lubrication of bearings must not be impaired by turbines, the arrangement is to be such as to ensure
adjacent hot parts or by steam. safe operation when the steam led to any one of the
cylinders is cut off. For this purpose, means are to be
For the lubricating oil system, see Section 11, H. provided either for supplying steam directly to the
low-pressure turbine or for conveying the exhaust
4. Connections steam from the high or intermediate pressure turbine
directly to the condenser.
Pipes are to be connected to the turbine in such a way
that no unacceptably high forces or moments can be With a view to such emergency operation, suitable
transmitted to the turbine. equipment is to be provided to prevent the permissible
steam pressures and temperatures for the turbines and
condenser from being exceeded.
5. Drains
Turbines and the associated piping systems are to be
equipped with adequate means of drainage.
E. Manoeuvering and Safety Equipment
6. Turning gear
1. Manoeuvering and control equipment
Main propulsion turbines are to be equipped with
turning gear for both directions of rotation. The rotors 1.1 The simultaneous admission of steam to the
of auxiliary turbines must at least be capable of being ahead and astern turbines is to be prevented by
turned by hand. interlocks. Brief overlapping of the ahead and astern
valves during manoeuvering can be allowed.
7. Measurement of rotor clearances 1.2 Fluids for operating hydraulic manoeuvering
equipment, quick-closing and control systems must be
After assembly of each turbine in the manufacturer's
suitable for all service temperatures and of low
works, the rotor position and the clearances are to be
flammability.
determined. The clearances are to be specified in the
operating instructions. 1.3 Turbines for main propulsion machinery
equipped with controllable pitch propellers, disen-
8. Vibrations gaging couplings or an electrical transmission system
are to be filled with a speed governor which, in the
The range of service speeds of turbine plant must not event of a sudden loss of load, prevents the revolu-
give rise to unacceptable bending vibrations or to vi- tions from increasing to the trip speed.
brations affecting the entire installation1) .
1.4 The speed increase of turbines driving
electric generators - except those for electrical pro-
peller drive - resulting from a change from full load to
no-load may not exceed 5 % on the resumption of
D. Astern Running, Emergency Operation steady running conditions. The transient speed
increase resulting from a sudden change from full
1. Astern power for main propulsion load to no-load conditions may not exceed 10 % and
1.1 The main propulsion machinery must possess must be separated by a sufficient margin from the trip
speed.
1
) 2. Safety devices
! "# 2.1 Main propulsion turbines must be equipped
$ %
with quick-closing devices which automatically shut platform.

off the steam supply in case of:
2. Scope and design of equipment
a) Overspeed. Excess speeds of more than 15
% above the rated value are to be prevented, Depending on the degree of automation involved,
scope and design of the equipment is also subject to
b) unacceptable axial displacement of the rotor, Volume VII, Rules for Automation.
c) an unacceptable increase in the condenser 3. Control and indicating instruments
pressure,
When the turning gear is engaged, this fact must be
d) an unacceptable increase in the condenser indicated visually at the control platform.
water level and
Turbine and pipeline drainage valves are either to
e) an unacceptable drop in the lubricating oil operate automatically or are to be combined into
pressure. groups which can be operated from the control
platform.
2.2 In cases a) and b), the quick-closing devices
must be actuated by the turbine shafts. 4. Equipment for auxiliary turbines
2.3 It must also be possible to trip the quick- Turbines driving auxiliary machines are to be
closing device manually at the turbine and from the provided with the necessary equipment on the basis of
control platform. paragraphs 2 and 3.
2.4 Re-setting of the quick-closing device may
be effected only at the turbine or from the control
platform with the control valve in the closed position.
2.5 It is recommended that an alarm system
should be fitted which responds to excessive vibration G. Condensers
velocities1) .
1. Design
2.6 An interlock is to be provided to ensure that
the main turbine cannot be started up when the turning The condenser is to be so designed that the inlet steam
gear is engaged. speed not to prohibitive stressing of the condenser
tubes result. Excessive sagging of the tubes and
2.7 Steam bleeder and pass-in lines are to be vibration are to be avoided, e.g. by the incorporation
fitted with automatic devices which prevent steam of tube supporting plates.
from flowing into the turbine when the main steam
admission valve is closed. The water chambers and steam space must be
provided with openings for inspection and cleaning.
2.8 Turbines driving auxiliary machines must at Anti-corrosion protection is to be provided on the
least be equipped with quick-closing devices for water side.
contingencies 2.1 a and 2.1 d. An excessive rise in the
exhaust steam pressure must actuate the quickclosing ln the case of single-plane turbine installations,
device. suitable measures must be taken to prevent condensate
from flowing back into the LP turbine.
2.9 It shall be possible to start up any turbine
only when the quick-closing device is ready for
2. Cooling water supply
operation.
The supply of cooling water to the condenser is
3. Other Rules subject to the Rules contained in Section 11, J.
Depending on the degree of automation involved, the
extent and design of the equipment is also subject to
Volume VII, Rules for Automation.
F. Control and Monitoring Equipment
1. Arrangement
The control and monitoring equipment for each main H. Tests
propulsion unit is to be located on the control
1. Testing of turbine rotors
1.1 Thermal stability test
1
) !
"# Rotors forged in one piece and welded rotors are to be
$ % tested for axial stability by submitting them to a
thermal stability test. 2.3 Condensers are to be subjected to separate

hydrostatic testing on both the steam and the water
1.2 Balancing1) side. The test pressure shall be:
Finished rotors, complete with blades and associated pp = 1,0 bar on the steam side
rotating parts and ready for assembly, are to be pp = 1,5 pe,perm on the water side
dynamically balanced in the presence of the Surveyor.
1.3 Cold overspeed test

Turbine rotors are to be tested at a speed at least 15 %
above the rated speed for not less than three minutes. I. Trials
The Society may accept mathematical proof of the 1. Factory Trials
stresses in the rotating parts at overspeed as a
substitute for the overspeed test itself provided that Where steam turbines are subjected to a trial run at the
the design is such that reliable calculations are factory, the satisfactory functioning of the
possible and the rotor has been non-destructively manoeuvering, safety and control equipment is to be
tested to ascertain its freedom from defects. verified during the trial run, and such verification
shall in any case take place not later than the
commissioning of the plant aboard ship.
2. Pressure and tightness tests
2.1 All finished casing components are to be 2. Shipboard trials
subjected to hydrostatic testing in the presence of the
Surveyor. 2.1 Main turbines are to be subjected to a dock
The test pressure pp is calculated as follows: trial and thereafter, during a trial voyage, to the
pP = 1,5 pe,perm following tests:
where pe,perm 80 bar a) Operation at rated rpm for at least 6 hours,

b) Reversing manoeuvres, and
pP = pe,perm + 40 bar c) During the dock or sea trials, astern
where pe,perm > 80 bar revolutions equal to at least 70 % of the
rated ahead rpm for about 20 minutes.
pe,perm [bar]= maximum allowable working
pressure During astern and subsequent forward operation, the
steam pressures and temperatures and the relative
For the bodies of quick-closing, manoeuvering and expansion must not assume magnitudes liable to
control valves, the test pressure is 1,5 times the endanger the operational safety of the plant.
maximum allowable working pressure of the boiler
(approval pressure). The sealing efficiency of these
valves when closed is lo be tested at 1,1 pe,perm 2.2 Turbines driving electric generators or
auxiliary machines are to be run for at least 4 hours at
their rated power and for 30 minutes at 110 % rated
power.
2.2 Casing parts on the exhaust side of LP

turbines subjected during operation to the condenser
pressure are to be tested at pp = 1,0 bar.
1
) !
"#
$ %
II. Gas Turbines and Exhaust Gas Turbochargers
A. General purpose of the equipment, the Society reserves the

right to call for additional documentation.
1. Scope
The following Rules apply to main and auxiliary gas
turbines and, where appropriate, to exhaust gas
turbocharger.
B. Materials
The Society reserves the right to authorize deviations
from the Rules in the case of low-power turbines and 1. Approved materials
exhaust gas turbocharger. Gas turbine materials must fulfil the requirements
imposed by the operating conditions on the individual
2. Documents for approval
engine components. In the choice of materials,
For every gas turbine installation, the documents account is to be taken of such effects as, for example,
listed below under a) to f) are to be submitted to the creep, thermal fatigue, oxidation and corrosion to
Society in triplicate1) for approval : which parts are subject when in service. Evidence of
the suitability of the materials used is to be supplied
a) Assembly and sectional drawings to the Society in the form of details of their chemical
b) Detail drawings of rotors, casings, blades, and mechanical properties and of the heat treatment
combustion chambers and heat exchangers applied. Where composite materials are used, their
method of manufacture is to be described.
c) Diagrammatic layout of the fuel system,
including control and safety devices, and of
the lubricating oil system 2. Testing of materials
d) Start-up equipment with system description The materials of shafts, turbine and compressor
wheels, guide vanes and blades, turbine and
e) Details of operating conditions, including compressor casings, combustion chambers and heat
the pressure and temperature curves in the exchanger are to be tested in accordance with the
turbine and compressor at the rated power Society's Rules or with test specifications laid down
and corresponding rotational speeds, and by the gas turbine manufacturer and recognized by
details of permissible temporary operation the Society as part of the approval procedure.
beyond the values for the rated power.
In the case of low-power gas turbines and exhaust gas
f) Proof, by calculation or some other method, turbocharger (see also Section 2, D.2.1) material tests
e.g. in the form of the results of burst tests are to be applied to the materials used for shafts as
performed on turbine and compressor well as for turbine and compressor wheels.
wheels, that a sufficient safety margin has
been provided for in the components subject
to the severest loads. In the case of turbine
guide vanes and blades as well as turbine C. Design and Construction Principles
discs, the service life on which the
calculations were based is to be specified 1. Foundation
together with the temperatures occurring in The foundations of geared turbine installations are to
the materials at the rated power. be so designed and constructed that only minor
g) Details of the welding conditions for welded relative movements can occur between the turbine
components. and the gearing which can be compensated by
suitable couplings.
h) Testing procedure
2. Air supply
The Society is to be furnished with a set of operating
instructions for each turbine type. The air intake ducting is to be equipped to prevent
extraneous substances from entering the compressor
In individual cases, according to the design and and turbine. In particular, measures are to be taken to
reduce sufficiently the salinity of the combustion air.
1 Cleaning equipment is to be provided to remove
)
deposits from compressors and turbines.
1. Emergency operation
3. Combustion chambers In multi-shaft installations, the failure of one shaft
must not hinder the continued, independent operation
Access to the combustion chambers must be ensured. of the remaining units.
It shall be possible to inspect the burner cans without
having to remove the gas generator. In single-shaft installations with two or more main
gas turbines, care is to be taken to ensure that, in the
4. Bearing lubrication event of one of the gas turbines failing, the others are
Bearing lubrication may not be impaired by hot gases able to continue operation independently.
or by adjacent hot components. In the case of single-shaft installations with only one
Leakage oil and oil vapours are to be evacuated in main gas turbine, special agreement is to be reached
such a way that they do not come into contact with with the Society concerning the emergency operating
hot parts. For the lubricating oil system, see Section equipment.
11, H.
5. Start-up equipment
Gas turbines are to be fitted with start-up equipment E. Control and Safety Equipment
enabling them to be started up from the "shut down"
condition. 1. Control equipment
6. Turning gear 1.1 Gas turbines for main propulsion machinery
equipped with controllable pitch propellers,
Main propulsion turbines are to be equipped with disengaging couplings or an electrical transmission
turning gear. system are to be fitted with a speed governor which,
The rotors of auxiliary turbines must at least be in the event of a sudden loss of load, prevents the
capable of being turned by hand. revolutions from increasing to the trip speed.
7. Connections 1.2 The speed increase of gas turbines driving

electric generators - except those for electrical pro-
Pipes are to be connected in such a way that no peller drive - resulting from a change from full load
unacceptably high forces or moments are transmitted to no load may not exceed 5 % on the resumption of
to the gas turbine. steady running conditions. The transient speed in-
8. Fuel crease resulting from a sudden change from full load
to no-load conditions may not exceed 10 % and must
The Society is to be informed of the fuel grade be separated by a sufficient margin from the trip
authorized by the turbine manufacturer and of the speed.
equipment needed for treating the fuel.
For fuel, see also Section 1, D.12. 2. Safety devices
2.1 Gas turbines are to be equipped with a
9. Vibrations quick-closing device which automatically shuts off
the fuel supply to the turbine in case of :
The range of service speeds may not give rise to
unacceptable bending vibrations or to vibrations a) Overspeed of the power turbine. Speeds
affecting the entire installation1). exceeding the rated value by more than 15
% are to be prevented,
10. Inspection openings b) An unacceptable drop in the lubricating oil
It is recommended that inspection openings be pressure,
provided which allow the inside of the gas turbine c) Loss of flame during operation.
and compressor to be inspected with special
equipment, e.g. a borescope or similar, without the 2.2 The quick-closing device must also be ca-
need for dismantling. pable being operated manually from the control plat-
forms in the engine room.
D. Astern Running, Emergency Operation
2.3 Start-up must take place automatically in the
prescribed sequence. Interlocks must be provided to
1
ensure that this sequence (attainment of ignition
) ! speed, ignition, flame monitoring) is followed.
"#
$ %
2.4 Equipment is to be provided which will ing the maintenance operations to be carried out on
actuate an alarm if: gas turbines together with the intervals between such
operations.
a) The maximum permissible gas temperature
at the gas generator outlet is exceeded,
b) The lubricating oil temperature in the
turbine bearings rises excessively. H. Tests
In case a), the alarm shall actuate a "Reduce output" 1. Scope of tests
signal, unless such a reduction is effected automati- 1.1 Testing of materials
cally.
The scope of the tests to be performed on materials is
The provision of an alarm system which responds to specified in B.2.
excessive vibration velocities is recommended.
1.2 Non-destructive testing

2.5 Subject to the agreement of the Society, the
extent of the quick-closing and alarm equipment of The scope of the non-destructive tests to be per-
low-power gas turbines may be reduced. formed on rotating parts and casings is to be agreed
with the Society.
1.3 Balancing
Gas turbine and compressor rotors are to be balanced
when in the condition ready for assembly.
F. Control and Monitoring Equipment
1.4 Cold overspeed test
1. Arrangement Turbine and compressor wheels are to be tested at a
The necessary control and monitoring equipment for speed at least 15 % above the rated speed for not less
each main propulsion unit is to be located on the than three minutes.
control platform. Turbine and compressor wheels of exhaust gas
turbocharger are to be tested at a speed 20 % above
2. Scope of the monitoring equipment the maximum working speed for at least three min-
utes.
Monitoring equipment is to be provided for those
data the reading and/or recording of which is neces- The Society may accept mathematical proof of the
sary for the reliable control of operations. The fol- stresses in the rotating parts at overspeed as a
lowing monitoring equipment is to be provided as a substitute for the overspeed test itself provided that
minimum: the design is such that reliable calculations are
possible and the rotating parts have been subjected to
Air pressure and temperature at compressor thorough non-destructive testing to ascertain their
inlet, freedom from defects.
Gas pressure and temperature at gas gener- 1.5 Pressure and tightness tests
ator outlet,
Finished casing parts and heat exchanger are to be
Lubricating oil pressure and temperature, subjected to hydrostatic testing at 1,5 times the
Gas generator and power turbine rotor maximum permissible working pressure. If it is
speeds. demonstrated by other means that the strength of
casing parts is sufficient, a tightness test at 1,1 times
Equipment is to be provided for periodically record- the maximum permissible working pressure will
ing the temperature at the gas generator outlet. suffice.
Exhaust gas turbocharger spaces containing cooling
3. Equipment for auxiliary turbines water are to be tested at a pressure pp of 4 bar, subject
Gas turbines for driving auxiliary machines re subject to a minimum of 1,5 Pe,perm
to the appropriate requirements in 1. and 2.
2. Testing of mass produced exhaust gas
turbocharger
G. Maintenance
1. Maintenance schedule As regards mass produced exhaust gas turbochargers,
manufacturers may, on application, be approved as
A schedule is to be submitted to the Society specify-
suppliers of mass produced exhaust gas turbocharger 2. Shipboard trials

in accordance with the relevant regulations of the
Society. 2.1 Main turbines are to be subjected to a dock
trial and thereafter a trial voyage on the basis of test
program agreed by Head Office containing following
tests :
a) Endurance test at nominal speed
I. Trials b) Start-up manoeuvres
1. Factory Trials
The Society reserves the right to call for additional
1.1 Gas turbines are to be subjected at the tests in individual cases.
factory to a trial run carried out, wherever possible, at
the service temperature.
2.2 Turbines driving electric generators or auxiliary
The satisfactory operation of the safety and control machines are to be run for at least 1 hours at their
equipment is to be demonstrated during the trial run. rated power and for 30 minutes at 110 % rated
1.2 Exhaust gas turbocharger are to be tested for power.
20 minutes at the maximum working speed and at
working temperature.
Section 5 - Gears and Couplings 5-1
A. General
1.2 Couplings in the main propulsion plant must
1. Scope be made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron with a
1.1 These Rules apply to spur, planetary and mostly ferritic matrix. Grey cast iron or suitable cast
bevel gears and to all types of couplings for aluminium alloys may also be permitted for lightly
incorporation in the main propulsion plan or important stressed external components of couplings and the
auxiliary as specified in Section 1, H. rotors and casings of hydraulic slip couplings.
The design requirements laid down here may also be

1.3 The gears of important auxiliary machinery
applied to the gears and couplings of auxiliary
according to Section 1, H, are subject to the same
machinery other than that mentioned in Section 1, H,
requirements as those specified in 1.1 as regards the
if equivalent evidence of mechanical strength is not
materials used. For gears intended for auxiliary
available. machinery other than that mentioned in Section 1, H,
1.2 Application of these Rules to the auxiliary other materials may also be permitted.
machinery couplings mentioned in 1.1 may generally 1.4 Flexible coupling bodies for important
be restricted to basic approval by the Society of the auxiliary machinery according to Section 1, H, may
particular coupling type. Regarding the design of generally be made of grey cast iron, and for the outer
elastic couplings for use in generator sets, reference is coupling bodies a suitable aluminum alloy may also be
made to G.2.6. used. However, for generator sets use should only be
1.3 For the dimensional design of gears and made of coupling bodies preferably made of nodular
couplings for ships with ice class, see Section 13. cast iron with a mostly ferritic matrix, of steel or of
cast steel, to ensure that the couplings are well able to
withstand the shock torques occasioned by short
2. Documents for approval circuits. The Society reserves the right to impose
Assembly and sectional drawings together with the similar requirements on the couplings of particular
necessary detail drawings and parts lists are to be auxiliary drive units.
submitted to the Society in triplicate for approval.
2. Testing of materials
They must contain all the data necessary to enable the
load calculations to be checked. 2.1 All gear and coupling components which are
involved in the transmission of torque and which are
intended for the main propulsion plant must be tested
in accordance with the Society's Rules for Materials,
B. Materials Volume V. The same applies to the materials used for
gear components with major torque transmission
1. Approved materials
function and couplings in generator drives. Suitable
1.1 Shafts, pinions, wheels and wheel rims of documentation is to be submitted for the materials
gears in the main propulsion plant should preferably used for the major components of the couplings and
be made of forged steel. Rolled steel bar may also be gears of all other functionally important auxiliary
used for plain, flangeless shafts. Gear wheel bodies machines in accordance with Section 1, H. This
may be made of grey cast iron1) or nodular cast iron or documentation may take the form of a BKI Material
may be fabricated from welded steel plate with steel or Test Certificate or an acceptance test certificate issued
cast steel hubs. by the steelmaker.
2.2 On special application the material tests in
1 the presence of BKI may be suspended for couplings
) and gears in the main propulsion plant. In this case the
requested material properties have to be proved on the
basis of the respective guidelines edited by the
! Society.
5-2 Section 5 - Gears and Couplings
C. Calculation of the Load-Bearing Capacity a [mm] centre distance

of Gear Teeth
b [mm] face width
1. General
beff [mm] tip diameter
1.1 The sufficient load-bearing capacity of the
gear-tooth system is to be demonstrated by carrying df [mm] root diameter
out load capacity calculations for main and auxiliary Ft [N] nominal transverse force at refe-
gears in ship propulsion systems, while maintaining rence cylinder
the requisite margins of safety given in Tables 5.4 and
5.5. F x [m] initial equivalent misaligment
1.2 The calculations include the flank and root f'pe [mm] normal pitch error
loads of spur gears and bevel gears with spur and ha0 [mm] tool addendum
helical involute toothing and are to be carried out to
international standard ISO 6336, relating to spur gear hf0 [mm] tool addendum
tooth systems or ISO 10300 or DIN 3991.
KA [-] application factor
1.3 For gears in the main propulsion plant proof
KF [-] transverse load factor (root stress)
of the sufficient mechanical strength of the roots and
flanks of gear teeth in accordance with the formulae KF [-] face load factor (root stress)
contained in this Section is linked to the requirement
that the accuracy of the teeth should ensure KH [-] transverse load factor (contact
sufficiently smooth gear operation combined with stress)
satisfactory exploitation of the dynamic loading KH [-] face load factor (contact stress)
capacity of the teeth. For this purpose, the magnitude
of the individual pitch error fp and of the total profile Kv [-] dynamic load factor
error Ff should generally conform to at least quality 5
K [-] load distribution factor
as defined in DIN 3962 or 4 to ISO 1328, and in the
case of higher peripheral speeds generally to at least mn [mm] normal modul
quality 4 as defined in DIN 3962 or 3 to ISO 1328.
The total error of the tooth trace fH should conform mnm [mm] mean normal modul (bevel gears)
at least to quality 5 to DIN 3962, while the parallelism n [Rpm] number of revolutions
of axis should at least meet the requirements of quality
5 or 4 to DIN 3964 or ISO 1328 respectively. Prior to NL [Rpm] number of load cycles
running-in, the surface roughness Rz of the tooth
P [kW] transmitted power
flanks of gears made by hobbing or by the generating
method, should generally not exceed 10 m. In the pr [-] protuberance at tool
case of gears where the tooth form is achieved by a
post-grinding or a posts having procedure, the surface Q [-] quality
roughness should generally not exceed 4 m. The Ra [m] arithmetic mean roughness
tooth root radius ao on the tool reference profile
should be at least 0,25 mn. Rz [m] mean peak-to valley roughness
The Society reserves the right to call for proof of the T [Nm] torque
accuracy of the gear-cutting machines used and for
u [-] gear ratio
testing of the method used to harden the gear teeth.
x [-] addendum modification coefficient
1.4 The input data required to carry out load-
bearing capacity evaluations are summarised in YF [-] tooth form factor (root)
Table 5.1.
YNT [-] life factor (root)
2. Symbols, terms and summary of input
data YR rel T [-] relative surface condition factor
2.1 Symbols, term and summary of input data YST [-] stress concentration factor for
reference test gears
Indices 1 pinion
YX [-] size factor for tooth root stress
2 wheel
Y [-] helix angle factor for tooth root
n normal plane stress
o tool Y rel T [-] relative notch sensitivy factor
z [-] number of teeth 3. Influence factors for load calculations

ZE [-] elasticity factor 3.1 Nominal tangential load F t
ZH [-] zone factor (contact stress) The nominal tangential load acting in the gear-tooth
system is calculated from rated torque or from rated
ZL [-] lubricant factor power and speed.
ZNT [-] live factor (contact stress)
2000 . T P
ZV [-] speed factor Ft 19,1 . 106 . (1)
d n . d
ZR [-] roughness factor
ZW [-] work-hardening factor 3.2 Application factor K A
ZV [-] size factor (contact stress) The application factor KA takes into account the
increase in rated torque caused by external increases
Z [-] helix angle factor (contact stress) in dynamic and transient load. KA is determined for
Z [-] contact ratio factor (contact stress) main and auxiliary systems in accordance with Table
5.2.
n [ ] normal pressure angle
3.3 Load distribution factor K
[ ] helix angle
The load distribution factor K takes into account
m [ ] mean helix angle ( bevel wheels) deviations in load distribution e.g. in gears with dual
or multiple load distribution or planetary gearing with
[ ] transverse overlap ratio more than three planet whieels.
F [N/mm] calculated bending stress in the The following values apply in respect of planetary
critical section at the tooth root gearing:
FE [N/mm] allowable bending stress at tooth Gear with :
root
up to 3 planet wheels K = 1,0
FG [N/mm] tooth root stress limit
4 planet wheels K = 1,2
FO [N/mm] nominal tooth root stress
F lim [N/mm] endurance limit for bending stress
FP [N/mm] permissible tooth root stress
In gears which have no load distribution K = 1,0 is
H [N/mm] calculated contact stress applied.
HG [N/mm] modified contact stress number For all other cases K is to be agreed with BKI.
H lim [N/mm] endurance limit for contact stress 3.4 Face load factors KH and KF
HP [N/mm] permissible contact stress The face load factors take into account the effects of
[N/mm] nominal contact stress uneven load distribution over the tooth flank on the
HO
contact stress (Kh ) and on the tooth root stress (KF ).
40 [mm2/s] kinematic viscosity of the oil at 40
C In the case of flank corrections which have been de-
termined by recognized calculation methods, the K H
a0 [mm] tip radius of the tool and KF values can be preset. Hereby the special
influence of ship operation on the load distribution has
to be taken into account.
For internal toothing the number of teeth of the
internal gear, the centre distance are to be put into the
calculation with negative sign.
Table 5.1 List of input data for evaluating load-bearing capacity

Table 5.2 Application factors Table 5.3 Endurance limits for contact
stress HLIM
System type KA factor
Material HLIM [N/mm2]
Turbine and electric drive systems 1,0
Diesel engine drive system with Case-hardening steel, case- 1500
1,1 hardened
fluid clutch between engine and
gears Nitriding steels, gas nitrided 1250
Diesel engine drive system with Alloyed heat treatable steels, 850 - 1000
highly flexible coupling between 1,3 bath or gas nitrided
engine and gears Alloyed heat treatable steels,
0,7 HV10+ 800
Diesel engine drive system with induction hardened
no flexible coupling between Alloyed heat treatable steels 1,3 HV10+350
engine and gears 1,5
Unalloyed heat treatable steels 0,9 HV+370
Auxiliary machinery under static
load Structural steel 1,0 HB + 200
0,6 - 1,0 Cast steel, cast iron and
nodular cast graphite 1,0 HB + 150
Note
For other type of system the KA factor is to be stipulated
separately
5. Tooth root bending stress
3.5 Transverse load factors KH and K 5.1 The existing maximum root bending stress
F of the teeth should not exceed the permissible
The transervers load factors KH and KF take into tooth root stress FP of the teeth.
account the effects of an uneven distribution of force
of several tooth pairs engaging at the same time. Tooth root stress is to be calculated separately for
pinion and wheel.
In the case of gears in main propulsion systems with
a gear tooth system of a quality described in 1.3 F = FO . KA . KV . K . KF . KF < FP (4)
Kh = KF = 1,0
Ft
with YF YS Y
can be applied. For other gears the face factors are to FO
b mn
be calculated in accordance with DIN/ISO.
5.2 The permissible root bending stress FP shall
4. Contact stress
have a safety margin F as indicated in Table 6
4.1 The existing contact stress sH shall not against the tooth root stress FG which is determined
exceed the permitted flank stress HP (Hertzian flank from the material-dependent fatique strength FE or
stress). FLIM in accordance with Table 5, allowing for the
stress corecction factors YST, YNT, Y rel T, Yrel T, YX.
H Ho . KA.K .K .KH .KH HP (2)
FG
FP (5)
SF
Ft u 1
with Ho ZH . ZE . Z . Z . . with
d1.b u
FG = FLIM . YST . YNT . Y rel T . YR rel T . YX
4.2 The permissible contact stress HP shall
include a safety margin SH as given in Table 5.4
against the modified contact stress HG which is
determined from the material-dependent fatigue
strength HLIM as shown in Table 5.3 allowing for the D. Gear Shafts
stress correction factors ZNT, ZL, ZV, ZR, ZW, ZX .
1. Minimum diamctcr
HG The dimensions of shafts of reversing and reduction
HP (3)
SH gears are to be calculated by applying the following
formula :
with HP = HLIM . ZNT . ZL . ZV . ZR . ZW . ZX
Table 5.4 Minimum safety margins for contact stress F
Ref. Application Boundary conditions SH
1.1 Gearing in ship propulsion systems Modulus mn < 16 1,45

and generator drive system
1.2 Modulus mn > 16 0,024 mn + 1,066
1.3 Where gear tooth systems made of 1,1

non-hardened steels operate with
the hardened tooth system of
mating gear, the safety margin
according to 1.1 for the unhardened
gears may be reduced by 25 %
1.4 In the case of two mutually 1,23

independent main propulsion
systems up to an input torque of up
to 5000 Nm the operating safety
margin SH according to 1.1 may be
reduced by 15 %
2.1 Gears in auxiliary drive systems 1,23

which are subjected to dynamic load

which are subjected to static load
NL < 104
Table 5.5 Endurance limit for tooth root %

bending stress &
" # $ # #
FE = FLIM . YST with YST = 2
(6)
'
Material FE = FLIM . YST
[N/mm2]
Case-hardened steels, case- 900 for

hardened
Nitriding steels, gas nitrided 850
Alloyed heat treatable steel, 740
bath or gas nitrided ' '
Alloyed heat treatable steel,
700
induction nitrided
d [mm] minimum shaft diameter
Alloyed heat treatable
steels, heat treated 0,4 HV10+200 di [mm] diameter of shaft bore, if
Unalloyed heat treatable 0,3 HV10+160 applicable
steels da [mm] actual shaft diameter
Structural steel 0,4 HB + 90
Pw [kW] driving power of shaft
Cast Steel, cast iron with 0,4 HB +70
nodular graphite n [Rpm] shaft speed
Table 5.6 Minimum safety margins for tooth root stresses
Ref. Application Boundary conditions SF
1.1 Gearing in ship propulsion systems Modulus mn < 16 2,0

and generator drive system
1.2 Modulus mn > 16 0,02 mn + 1,68
1.3 for gear tooth systems, which are 2,6

stressed on alternate sides with
mn < 16
1.4 in the case of two mutually 1,3

independent main propulsion
systems up to an input torque of up
to 5000 Nm the operating safety
margin SF according to 1.1 may be
reduced by 35 %

which are subjected to dynamic load

which are subjected to static load
NL < 104
Remarks :
If the fatigue bending stress of the tooth roots is increased by technique approved by the Society, e.g. by shot peening, for case-hardened
toothing with m n < 10 minimum safety margin may be reduced up to 15 % with the consent of the Society.
F [-] factor for the type of drive specified by the Society

where increased bending
= 95 for turbine plants, stresses in the shaft are liable
electrical drives and engines to occur because of the
with slip couplings bearing arrangement, the
= 100 for all other types of
drive. The Society reserves casing design, the tooth
the right to specify higher F pressure, etc.
values if this appears
necessary in view of the
loading of the plant.
Cw [-] material factor in accordance E. Equipment
with Section 4, formula (2). 1. Oil level indicator
However, for wheel shafts
the value substituted for Rm For monitoring the lubricating oil level in main and
in the formula shall not be auxiliary gears, equipment must be fitted to enable
higher than 800 N/mm2. For the oil level to be determined without interruption of
pinion shafts the actual service.
tensile strength value may
generally be substituted for 2. Pressure and temperature control
Rm. Temperature and pressure gauges are to be fitted to
k [-] = 1,10 for gear shafts monitor the lubricating oil pressure and the
lubricating oil temperature at the oil-cooler outlet
= 1,15 for gear shafts before it enters the gears.
in the area of the pinion or
wheel body if this is keyed to Plain journal bearings arc also to be fitted with tem-
the shaft and for perature indicators.
multiple-spline shafts. Where gears are fitted with anti-friction bearings, a
temperature indicator is to be mounted at a suitable
Higher values of k may be point. For gears rated up to 2000 kW, spccial ar-
rangements may be agreed with the Society. Q [-] degree of balance

Where ships are equipped with automated machinery, = 6,3 for gear shafts, pinions
the requirements of Rules for Automation, Volume and coupling members for
VII, are to be complied with. engine gears
3. Lubricating oil pumps = 2,5 for torsion shafts and
gear couplings, pinions and
Lubricating oil pumps driven by the gearing must be gear wheels belonging to
mounted in such a way that they are accessible and turbine transmissions
can be replaced.
2. Testing of gears
For the pumps to be fitted, see Section 11, H.3.3.
2.1 Testing in the manufacturcr's works
4. Gear casings
When the testing of materials and component tests
The casings of gears belonging to the main propul- have been carried out, gearing systems for the main
sion plant and to important auxiliaries must be fitted propulsion plant and for important auxiliaries in
with removable inspection covers to enable the gears accordance with Section 1, H, are to be presented to
to be inspected and the thrust bearing clearance to be the Society for final inspection and operational
measured and oil sump to be cleaned. testing in the manufacturer's works. The final
5. Seating of gears inspection is to be combined with a trial run lasting
several hours under part or full-load conditions, on
The sealing of gears on steel or cast resin adapters is which occasion the tooth clearance and contact
to conform to the Society's Rules for the mechanical pattern are to be checked. In the case of a trial at
sealing of engine plants. full-load, any necessary running-in of the gears must
In the case of cast resin seatings,the thrust must be have been completed beforehand. Where no test
absorbed by means of stoppers. The same applies to facilities are available for the operational and on-load
cast resin seatings of separate thrust bearings. testing of large gear trains, these tests may also be
performed on board ship on the occasion of the dock
trials.
Tightness tests are to be performed on those
components to which such testing is appropriate.
Reductions in the scope of the tests require the
F. Balancing and Testing consent of the Society.
1. Balancing 2.2 Tests during sea trials
1.1 Gear wheels, pinions, shafts, gear couplings
2.2.1 Prior to the start of sea trials, the teeth of the
and, where applicable, high-speed flexible couplings
gears belonging to the main propulsion plant are to be
must be assembled in a properly balanced condition.
coloured with suitable dye to enable the contact
1.2 The generally permissible residual imbal- pattern to be established. During the sea trials, the
ance U per balancing plane of gears for which static gears are to be checked at all forward and reverse
or dynamic balancing is rendered necessary by the speeds to establish their operational efficiency and
method of manufacture and by the operating and smooth running as well as the bearing temperatures
loading conditions can be determined by applying the and the freedom from contamination of the lu-
formula bricating oil. On conclusion of the sea trials, the
gearing is to be examined via the inspection openings
and the contact pattern checked. Assessment of the
) # * # contact pattern is to be based on the guide values for
( ,$ - the proportional area of contact in the axial and radial
+ # directions of the teeth given in Table 5.5 and shall
(7) take account of the running time and loading of the
gears during the sea trial.
where : 2.2.2 In the case of reversing, reduction gears
mounted in anti-friction bearings and of multistage
G [kg] mass of body to be balanced gear trains manufactured to a proven high degree of
n [Rpm] operating speed in rev/min accuracy and with an input torque up to about
of body to be balanced. 20000 Nm, checking of the contact pattern may, with
the consent of the Society, be reduced in scope.
z [-] number of balancing planes
2.2.3 Checking of the contact pattern following
the sea trials can be reduced in scope in the case of d [mm] pitch circle diameter
planetary gears where such a test performed after a
trial run in the manufacturer's works lasting several KA [-] application factor in
hours on load has produced a satisfactory result, or accordance with C.1
where during the type-testing under full-load of the z [-] number of teeth
gear system in question all the tooth engagements
have been proved to produce a faultless contact n [Rpm] rated shaft speed
pattern. h [mm] working depth of toothing
2.2.4 For checking the gears of rudder propellers b [mm] minimum load-bearing tooth
as main propulsion, see Section 14.B. width
Table 5.7 Percentage area of contact dm [mm] diameter of gyration
Material, Working Width of G [kg] mass of coupling sleeve

shaping of depth tooth [N/mm2] permissible Hertzian stress
HP
teeth (without tip (without end according to C.1, Table 5.2
relief) relief)
p [N/mm2] loading capacity of the tooth
heat-treated, flanks
hobbed, 33 % 70 %
formed by Average Pperm = 400 - 600 N/mm2
values for tooth systems of
generating
method quenched and tempered
steel;
surface-
40 % 80 % (the upper values apply to
hardened,
Average higher- strength steels,
ground,
values higher quality toothing and
shaped
superior surface finishes).
= 800 -1000 N/mm2

for hardened and possibly
G. Design and Construction of Couplings ground tooth systems (the
upper values apply primarily
1. Tooth couplings to nitrided tooth systems of
superior surface finish
1.1 Adequate loading capacity of the tooth manufactured to close
flanks of straight-flanked tooth couplings requires tolerances).
that the following conditions be satisfied:
.
)) # ' # & # /0 1.2 The coupling teeth are to be effectively
& (8) lubricated. For this purpose a constant oil level
# # # + # maintained in the coupling may generally be regarded
as adequate where
& # ' ' d n2 < 6 109 [mm/min2] (10)

% 1 (9)
# #
For higher values of d n2, couplings in main
propulsion plants are to be provided with a
circulating lubrication oil system.
(Values close to 4,5 only with high manufacturing
accuracy and little residual imbalance) 1.3 For the dimensional design of the sleeves,
Where methods of calculation recognized by the flanges and bolts of gear couplings the formulae
Society are used for determining the Hertzian stress given in Section 4 are to be applied.
on the flanks of tooth couplings with convex tooth
flanks, the permissible Hertzian stresses are equal to 2. Flexible couplings
75 % of the values of HP shown in C.4.2 with stress
corection factors set to 1.0. 2.1 Flexible couplings must be approved for the
loads specified by the manufacturer and for use in
P [kW] driving power at coupling main propulsion plants and essential auxiliary
machinery. a flexible coupling is so designed that it exerts an

axial thrust on the coupled members of the driving
2.2 Flexible couplings in the main propulsion mechanism, provision must be made for the
plant and in power-generating plants must be so absorption of this thrust.
dimensioned that they are able to withstand for a
reasonable time operation with one engine cylinder 2.6 Flexible couplings for diesel generator sets
out of service. Additional dynamic loads for ships must be capable of absorbing impact moments due to
with ice class are to be taken into account. In this electrical short circuits up to a value of 6 times the
connection reference is made to Section 16. nominal torque of the coupling.
2.3 With regard to the routine supervision of 3. Flange and clamp-type couplings
coupling types already approved by the Society and
In the dimensional design of the coupling bodies,
in order to prove adequate dynamic fatigue strength
flanges and bolts of flange and clamp-type couplings,
prior to the issue of a general type approval for
the Rules specified in Section 4 are to be complied
flexible couplings to be introduced into shipbuilding
with.
for the first time, the Society reserves the right to call
for the execution of special dynamic loading tests 4. Testing of couplings
appropriate to the design of the coupling in question.
Couplings for ship's propulsion plants and couplings
2.4 With regard to the casings, flanges and bolts for generator sets and transverse thrusters are to be
of flexible couplings, the requirements specified in presented to the Society for final inspection and,
Section 4, D are to be complied with. where appropriate, for the performance of functional
and tightness tests.
2.5 If, when subjected to load during operation,
Section 6 - Propeller 6-1
Section 6
Propeller
A General bending stresses must be proved by a method

recognized by the Society.
1. Scope
2. Component for controllable pitch
These Rules apply to screw-propellers and vane
propellers and built-up propellers
wheels. See Section 13 for information on propellers
sizes and materials for vessels with ice class. The materials of the major components of the pitch
control mechanism and also the blade and boss
2. Documents for approval retaining bolts must comply with the regulations
2.1 Design drawings of propellers in main pertaining to metal materials.
propulsion systems having and engine output of in The blade retaining bolts of assembled propellers or
excess of 300 kW and in transverse thrust systems of controllable pitch propellers are to be manufactured
over 500 kW, vane wheels and also the position of the from seawater-resistant materials if they are not
vane wheel on the ship are to be submitted to the BKI protected againts contact with seawater.
in triplicate for examination The drawings are required
to contain all the details necessary to verify compli- 3. Novel materials
ance with the following Rules
Where it is proposed to use propeller materials whose
2.2 In the case of controllable pitch propeller serviceability is not attested by a sufficient period of
systems, general drawing and sectional drawings are practical experience the Society must be provided with
to be submitted in triplicate in addition to the design special proof of the suitability of such materials.
drawings for blade, boss and pitch control
4. Material testing
mechanisms. Control and hydraulic diagrams are to be
attached to a description of the functional The material of propellers, vane wheels, propeller
characteristics. In the case of new designs or bosses and all other major components involved in the
controllable pitch propeller system which are being transmission of torque is to be tested in accordance
installed for the first time on a vessel with the BKI with BKI material rules and regulations. This is also
classification, a description of the controllable pitch applies to components which are used to control the
propeller system is also to be provided. blades and also to propellers in main propulsion
systems smaller than 300 kW and transverse thrust
systems of less than 500 kW.
B. Materials
1. Propeller and propeller hubs C. Dimensions and design of propellers
Propellers and vane wheels are to be made of 1. Symbols and terms

seawater-resistant cast copper alloys or cast steel A [mm] Effective area of a shrink fit
alloys with a minimum tensile strength of 440 N/mm,
cf. Rules for Materials. For the purpose of the B [mm] Developed blade width of cylin
following design Rules governing the thickness of the drical sections at radii 0,25 R,
propeller blades, the requisite resistance to seawater of 0,35 R and 0,6 R
a cast copper alloy or cast steel alloy is considered to
c [-] Coefficient for shrunk joints
be achieved if the alloy used can be proved to
withstand a fatigue test under alternating bending = 1,0
stresses comprising 108 load cycles amounting to for engine and turbine gear
about 20 % of the minimum tensile strength and transmissions
carried out in a 3 % NaCl solution, and if it can be
= 1,2
proved that the fatigue strength under alternating for direct drives
bending stresses in natural seawater is not less than
about 65 % of the values established in 3 % NaCl CG [-] Size factor in accordance with
solution. Sufficient fatique strength under alternating formula (2)
6-2 Section 6 - Propeller
CDyn [-] Dynamic factor in accordance peller-fastening bolts

with formula (3)
Cw [-] Characteristic value for
propeller material as shown in D [mm] Diameter of propeller
Table 6.1 (corresponds to the
minimum tensile strength Rm of =2R
the propeller material where
this has been shown to possess dm [mm] Mean taper diameter
sufficient fatigue strength e [mm] Blade rake to aft acc. Fig. 6.1
under alternating bending
stresses in accordance with = R tan
paragraph B.1.) ET [-] Thrust stimulating factor in
accordance with formula (5)
f,f1,f2,f3 [-] Factors in formulae (2) (3) (4)
and (11)
FM [N] Bolt load
H [mm] Propeller blade face pitch at
radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and
!
0,6 R
! Hm [mm] Mean effective propeller pitch
"# ! on blade face for pitch varying
with the radius
!
(R B H)
(R B)
$ % & ' ,!
in which R, B and H are to be
$ ( ) & ,! substituted by values
$ !! corresponding to the pitch at
the various radii.
* )
$ 5 6) 7 / '
)
!!
+* 6) 7 // / /
'
$ )
$ " !!
*,
2 6) 7 // ' &
$ - "!! & / 8
, *, )
' / /
$ + . & !!
$ /
& 0 1 &2 3 / 9 / /
' 3 / /
- ' 3 / /
4
9 /
4 /
!0 " !0 " !0 !
C [-] Conicity of shaft ends 3 3 3
= difference in taper diameter
length of taper 1 / +
'
d [mm] Bolt-hole circle diameter of 0
blade or propeller-fastening
bolts
dk [mm] Root diameter of blade or pro
1 / ++ +
!0# = >
0 =!0 "
: ' / /
; : 1 ,!
!0" = >
=!0 !
A [-] Tightening factor for retaining

< 6) 7 // bolts and studs
( 6 7 * / ' ) ' = 1,2 - 1,6
/ ' '
depending on the method of
!0# 30 * / tightening used.
' ' !0# 3
/ & ' x [-] Factor for the section modulus
' of developed cylindrical
section about blade pitch line
L [mm] Pull-up length when mounting f o r blade prof i l e s i n
propeller on taper accordance with Table 6.2
Lmech [mm] Pull-up length at t = 35 C 'x [-] Factor for the section modulus
of developed cylindrical
Ltemp [mm] Temperature-related portion of
section about blade pitch line
pull-up length at t <35 C
for blade profiles other than
M [Nm] Torque those in Table 6.2
n [Rpm] Propeller speed in rev/min. [-] Angle included by face
generatix and normal
Pw [kWl Shaft power
[-] Half-conicity of shaft ends
p [N/mm] Specific pressure in shrunk
joint between propeller and =C/2
shaft
o [-] Cocfficient of static friction
Q [N] Peripheral force at mean taper
= 0,13
diameter for hydraulic oil shrunk joints
S [-] Margin of safety against = 0,18
propeller slipping on taper = for dry shrunk joints
2,8
Rp 0,2 [N/mm] 0,2 % proof stress of propeller
t [mm] Maximum blade thickness of material
developed cylindrical section at
radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R ReH [N/mm] Yield strengths and
T [N] Propeller thrust max / m [-] Ratio of maximum to mean stress at

blade face
TM [Nm] Impact moment
2. Calculation of blade thickness
Vs [kn] Speed of ship
2.1 At radii 0,25 R and 0,6 R the blade
w [-] Wake factor thicknesses of solid propellers must as a minimum
requirement comply with formula (1).
W0,35R [mm3] Section modulus of cylindical
W0,6R section at radii 0,35R and 0,6R. t = Ko k Kl CG CDyn (1)
Z [-] Total number of bolts used to
retain one blade or propeller e cos
Ko =1+ +
H "!!!
z [-] Number of blades
k as in Table 6.2
[-] Pitch angle of profile at radii
0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R
0 + = >
=!0 "
D
Pw 105 2 cos sin
Hm
K1
n B z Cw cos2
Fig 6.1 Blade Sections
CG [-] Size factor = ?

for > 1,5
/ =
1,1 0,85 (2)
0 max/ m can be roughly calculated from the thrust-
stimulating factor ET according to formula (5). For
more accurate calculation proceed according to 2.5
D to be inserted in [m]
f1 = 7,2 for solid propellers = ?
= f2 ET + 1 (4)
= 6,2 for separately cast =
b l a d e s o f
variable-pitch or KT J
ET
built-up propellers J KT
CDyn [-] Dynamic factor
Vs n (1 w) D 3
8= *= / 4,3 10-9 (5)
=
?
1,0 T
!0" /
f2 = 0,4 - 0,6 for single-screw ships, the
(3) lower value applying to stern
shapes with a wide propeller tip
clearance and no rudder heel and components still have a safely factor of 1,5 relative to
the larger value to sterns with little the yield strength of the materials used.
clearance and with rudder heel.
Intermediate values are to be ! = 3 >
= ;! 3
= (
selected accordingly.
= 0,2 for twin-screw ships (6)
f3 = 0,2 for propeller materials which W06R can be calculated by applying formula 7
satisfy the requirements of B.1.
W06R = 0,11 (Bt 2)06R (7)
2.2 The blade thicknesses of controllable pitch
propellers are to be determined at radii 0,35 R and 3. Blade retaining bolts
0,6 R by applying formula (1).
3.1 The blade retaining bolts shall be designed
For the controllable pitch propellers of tugs, trawlers in such a way as to withstand the forces induced in
and special-duty ships with similar operating the even of plastic deformation caused by a force
conditions the diameter/pitch ratio D/Hm for the maxi- acting on the blade at 0,9R. The bolt material shall
mum static bollard pull is to be used in formula (1). have a safety margin of 1,5 against its yield stress.
For other ships the diameter/pitch ratio D/Hm The thread core diameter shall not be less than
applicable to open-water navigation can be used in
formula (1). =-
!0 "3
2.3 The blade thicknesses calculated by applying
' 0
' @ 3 >
formula (1) are minima for the finish-machined
propellers. (8)
2.4 The fillet radii at the transition from the face

with M0,35R = W!0 R
and the back of the blades to the propeller boss should "3 !0
correspond in the case of three and four bladed 3.2 The blade retaining bolts are to be tightened
propellers, to about 3,5 % of the propeller diameter. in a controlled manner in such a way that the tension
For propellers with a larger number of blades the on the bolts is about 60 - 70 % of their yield strength.
maximum fillet radii allowed by the propeller design
should be aimed at, and the radii shall not in any case The shank of blade retaining bolts may be designed
be made smaller than 0,4 t0,25 with a minimum diameter equal to 0,9 times the root
diameter of the thread.
2.5 For special designs such as propeller with
skew angle 25o, end plate propellers, tip fin 3.3 Blade retaining bolts must be secured
propellers, special profiles etc., special mechanical against unintentionaI loosening.
strength calculation are to be submitted to BKI. 4. Indicators
Controllable pitch propeller system are to be provided
with an engine room indicator showing the actual
setting of the blades. Further blade position indicators
D. Controllable Pitch Propellers are to be mounted on the bridge and in the engine
room (see also Volume VII and Volume IV
Section 9).
Where the pitch-control mechanism is operated
5. Failure of control system
hydraulically, two mutually independent, power-
driven pump sets are to be fitted. For propulsion Suitable devices are to be fitted to ensure that an
plants up to 200 kW, one power-driven pump set is alleration of the blade setting cannot overload the
sufficient provided that, in addition, a hand-operated propulsion plant or cause it to stall.
pump is fitted for controlling the blade pitch and this
enables the blades to be moved from ahead to the Steps must be taken to ensure that, in the event of
astern position in a short enough time. failure of the control system the setting of the blades
Section 11, A to D is to be applied in an analogous - does not change or

manner to hydraulic pipes and pumps. - assumes a final position slowly enough to
2. Pitch control mechanism allow the emergency control system to be
put into operation.
In the case of the pitch-control mechanism proof is to
be furnished that when subjected to impact moments 6. Emergency control
TM as defined by formula (6), the individual
Controllable pitch propeller systems must be equipped

with means of emergency control enabling the 1.4 The tapers of propellers which are mounted
controllable pitch propeller to remain in operation on the propeller shaft with the aid of the hydraulic oil
should the remote control syslem fail. It is technique should not be more than 1 : 15 or less than
recommended that a device be fitted which locks the 1 : 20.
propeller blades in the "ahead" setting. 1.5 The propeller nut must be strongly secured
to the propeller shaft.
E. Propeller Mounting 2. Flange connections
1. Tapered Mountings 2.1 Flanged propellers and the bosses of

controllable pitch propellers are to be attached using
1.1 Where the tapered joint between the shaft fitted pins and bolts (necked down bolts for
and the propeller is fitted with a key the propeller is to preference).
be mounted on the tapered shaft in such a way that
approximately the mean torque can be transmitted 2.2 The diameter of the fitted pins is to be
from the shaft to the propeller by the frictional bond. calculated by applying formula (4) given in Section 4,
The propeller nut is to be secured in a suitable D.4.2.
manner.
2.3 The propeller retaining bolts are to be of
1.2 Where the tapered fit is effected by the hy- similar design to those described in D.3.
draulic oil technique without the use of a key the
The thread core diameter shall not be less than
necessary pull-up distance on the tapered shaft is
given by the expression
!0 "3
=-
' 0
L1) = Lmech + Ltemp (9) ' @ 3 >
where Lmech is determined according to the formulae 8

of elasticity theory applied to shrunk joints for a
specific pressure p [N/mm] at the mean taper
diameter found by applying formula (11) and for a
water temperature of 35 C. F. Vane wheels
1. Dimensioning of vane wheel
2 2 2 2 2
T f (c Q T ) T 1.1 The vane wheel blades are to be
p
A f dimensioned in such a way that the average material
strain in the blade does not exceed 25 N/mm.
(10) Mathematical proof thereof is to be submitted to the
2
Society.
o 2
with f = 1.2 The fitting of a vane wheel must not cause
S
the bending stress in the shafting to exceed 40 N/mm
and the surface pressure in the aft stern tube bearing
' to exceed 8 bar.
Ltemp = 6 10-6 (35 - t) (11)
2. Vane wheel bearings
t [ C] The temperature at which the 2.1 Design of bearings

propeller is mounted. The bearing loads used as a basis for dimensioning
Ltemp applies only to propellers made of bronze and the antifriction bearings are to be notified to the
austenitic steel. Society. With regard to these loads the irregular flow
against the vane wheel is to be taken into account.
1.3 The von Mises equivalent stress based on As vane wheels bearings two self-aligning roller
the maximum specific pressure p and the tangential bearings are to be used. The anti-friction bearings are
stress in the bore of the propeller hub may not exceed to be designed such that under the maximale bearing
75 % of the 0,2 % proof stress of yield strength of the loads occurring in service the theoretical bearing life
propeller material. is at least 40 000 hours.
For the dimensioning of the bearing journal, a
calculation of mechanical strength under service
1) Where appropriate, allowance is also to be made for conditions is to be submitted.
surface smooting when calculating L.
The vane wheel bearings are to be protected against 3.2 It must be possible to dismount the vane
ingress of seawater by means of suitable seals. wheel while the ship is afloat.
An effective rope guard is to be provided to protect
the sealing.
2.2 Bolted connections G. Balancing and testing
All bolted connections in the guide wheel and for 1. Balancing

fixing the vane wheel to the ship are to be tightened in The finished propeller and the blades of controllable
such a way that the utilization of the yield strength of pitch propellers and vane wheels are required to
the bolt material does not exceed 70 % and a undergo static balancing.
minimum elongation of 0,15 mm is attained.
2. Testing
2.3 Bearing lubrication
Fixed pitch propellers controllable pitch propellers
Only those lubricants may be used which ensure controllable pitch propeller systems and vane wheels
adequate lubrication of the anti-friction bearings even are to be presented to the Society for final inspection
with a low water content without reducing the service and verification of the dimensions.
life of the anti-friction bearings in the period between
2 regular docking intervals of the ship. In addition controllable pitch propeller systems are
required to undergo pressure tightness and operational
The lubricants used must be approved by the Society tests.
for lubrication of vane wheel bearings.
The Society reserves the right to require non-
3. Position on the ship destructive tests to be conducted to detect surface
3.1 The position of the vane wheel in the cracks or casting defects.
shafting and the dimensioning of the clearance With regard to the assessment and the repair of
between the rudder and the vane wheel must be such defects in propellers and vane wheels see the
that if the vane wheel bearings fail neither the Societys Regulations for the Assessment and Repair
propulsion nor the manoeuvrability of the ship are of Defects in Propellers.
impaired.
Section 7 - Boilers and Thermal Oil Systems 7-1
Section 7
Boilers and Thermal Oil Systems
I. Boilers
A. General strength calculations and design assessment, such as

working pressures, superheated steam temperatures,
1. Scope materials to be used and full details of welds including
filler materials.
1.1 For the purpose of these Rules, the term
"boiler" includes all closed vessels and piping systems Details and drawings are also to be submitted
used for: covering the valves and fittings and their arrangement
together with a description of the boiler plant
a) generating steam at pressure above specifying the arrangement of the boiler with
atmospheric (steam generators) or reference to the ship's longitudinal axis, the essential
boiler data and equipment items, e.g. steam
b) raising the temperature of water above the conditions, heating surfaces, allowable steam output,
boiling point corresponding to atmospheric feed, firing system, safety valves, controllers and
pressure (hot water generators). limiters.
The term "steam generator" also includes any 4. Definitions
equipment directly connected to the aforementioned
vessels or piping systems in which the steam is super- 4.1 Steam boiler walls are the walls of the steam
heated or cooled, the circulating line and the casings and water spaces located between the boiler isolating
of circulating pumps serving forced-circulation devices. The bodies of these isolating devices form
boilers. part of the boiler walls.
1.2 Steam and hot water generators as defined in 4.2 The maximum allowable working pressure
1.1 are subject to the Rules set out in B. to F., or, if (PB, design pressure) is the approved steam pressure
appropriate, in G. in bar (gauge pressure) in the saturated steam space
prior to entry into the superheater. In continuous flow
Exhaust gas economizers are subject to the special boilers, the maximum allowable working pressure is
requirements set out in H. In respect of materials, the pressure at the superheater outlet or, in the case of
manufacture and design, the requirements specified in continuous flow boilers without a superheater, the
B., C. and D. apply as appropriate. steam pressure at the steam generator outlet.
1.3 Hot water generators with a permissible 4.3 The heating surface is that part of the boiler
discharge temperature of not more than 120 C and all walls through which heat is supplied to the system,
systems incorporating steam or hot water generators
which are heated solely by steam or hot liquids are not a) the area in m2 measured on the side exposed
subject to these Rules, but come under Section 8. to fire or exhaust gas, or
2. Other Rules b) in the case of electrical heating, the
equivalent heating surface:
2.1 As regards their construction and installation,
steam boiler plants are also required to comply with N 860
H [m2]
the applicable statutory requirements and regulations 18000
of the ship's country of registration. Where N is the electric power in kW.
3. Documents for approval 4.4 The allowable steam output is the maximum
Drawings of all boiler parts subject to pressure, such quantity of steam (in metric tons/hour or kg/hour)
as drums, headers, tubes, manholes and inspection which can be produced continuously by the steam
covers etc., are to be submitted to the Society in generator operating under the design steam
triplicate. conditions.
5 Lowest water level - highest flue -

These drawings must contain all the data necessary for dropping time
7-2 Section 7 - Boilers and Thermal Oil System
6. Manual operation
5.1 The highest flue is the highest point on the
side of the heating surface which is in contact with the 6.1 The facility is to be provided for manual
water and which is exposed to flame radiation or operation. At least the water level limiters must
heated by gases which temperature exceeds 4000C at remain active even in manual operation.
maximum continuous power. The highest flue on 6.2 Manual operation demands constant and
water tube boilers with an upper steam drum is the top direct supervision of the system.
edge of the highest gravity tubes.
6.3 For detailed requirements in respect of
5.2 The requirements relating the highest flue do manual operation of the firing system see Section 9.
not apply to
7. Power of steam propulsion plants
Water tube boiler risers up to 102 mm outer
diameter On ships propelled by steam, the plant is to be
designed that, should one main boiler fail, sufficient
Once-through forced flow boilers propulsive capacity will remain to maintain adequate
Superheaters manoeuvrability and to supply the auxiliary
machinery.
Flues and exhaust gas heated parts in which
the temperature of the heating gases does not
exceed 4000C at maximum continuous power
5.3 The lowest water level must lie at least 150 B. Materials
mm above the highest flue also when the ship heels 40
to either side. Heated surfaces with a set highest flue
must remain wetted even when the ship is at the static 1. General requirements
heeling angles laid down in Section 1, Table 1.1. The With respect to their workability during manufacture
height of the water level is critical to the response of and their characteristics in subsequent operation,
the water level limiters. materials used for the manufacture of steam boilers
5.4 The heat accumulated in furnaces and other must satisfy the technical requirements, particularly
heated boiler parts may not lead to any undue those relating to high-temperature strength and, where
lowering of the water level due to subsequent appropriate, weldability.
evaporation when the firing system is swiched off. 2. Approved materials
The lowest water level is to be set so that the dropping
time does not exceed 5 minutes. The requirements specified in 1. are recognized as
having been complied with if the materials shown in
5.5 The "dropping time" is the time taken by the Table 7.1 are used.
water level, under conditions of interrupted feed and
allowable steam output, to drop from the lowest Materials not specified in the Society's Rules for
working level to the level of the highest point of the Materials may be used provided that proof is supplied
gas or flame path, i.e.: of their suitability and mechanical properties.
V 3. Material testing
t
D v
3.1 The materials of boiler parts subject to
t [min] dropping time pressure, including exhaust gas economizer tubes,
must be tested by the Society in accordance with the
V [m3] volume of water in steam generator Rules for Materials (cf. Table 7.1). Material testing by
between the lowest working level the Society may be waived in the case of:
and the highest point of the gas or
flame path. a) Small boiler parts made of unalloyed steels,
such as stay bolts, stays of 100 mm
D [kg/min] allowable steam output diameter, reinforcing plates, handhole and
v' [m3/kg] specific volume of the water at manhole covers, forged flanges and branch
saturation temperature pipes up to DN 150 or recognized standard
and
5.6 The lowest specified water level is to be
indicated permanently on the boiler shell by means of b) Smoke tubes (tubes subject to external
a water level pointer. Reference plates are to be pressure).
attached additionally beside or behind the water level
gauges pointing at the lowest water level.
Material grades in accordance

with the Rules for Classification
Material and product form Limits of application
and Construction, Volume V,
Rules for Material
Steel plates and steel strip - Plates and strip of high-temperature

steel, Section 3, H
Steel pipes - Seamless and welded pipes of

ferritic steels, Section 4, B and C
Forging and formed parts :

Forging for boilers,
a) drum, headers and similar hollow - vessels and pipeline
components with out longitudinal Section 5, E
seam
b) covers, flanges, branch pipes,
end plates
- Fasteners, Section 6,C

High-temperature bolts to
Nuts and bolts DIN 17 240
300 C DIN 267

40 bar Parts 3 and 4
M30 or other equivalent standards
Cast steel for boilers, pressure

vessels and pipelines.
Steel castings
Also GS 38 and GS 45 to DIN 1681
300 C and GS 16 Mn5 and GS 20 Mn5
to DIN 17 182
300 C
Nodular cast iron 40 bar Nodular cast iron
DN 175 for valves Section 7, B
and fittings
Lamellar (grey) cast iron : 200 C

10 bar
a) Boiler parts 200 mm diameter
(only for unheated surfaces
and not for heaters in ther- Grey cast iron
mal oil systems) 200 C Section 7, C
10 bar
b) Valves and fittings DN 175
(except valves subject to
dynamic stresses)
52 bar
c) exhaust gas economiser smoke gas temperature
600 C
water outlet temperature
245 C
100 bar
smoke gas temperature Grey cast iron of at least GG-25
700 C grade to Section 7, C
water outlet temperature
260 C
Valves and fittings of cast 225 C Cast copper alloys

copper alloy 25 bar Section 10, B
For the parts mentioned in a) and b), the properties of the certificates in accordance with EN 10204.1B or
materials are to be attested by Type B works test other equivalent standards.
3.2 Special agreements may be made regarding the of small wall thicknesses.
testing of unalloyed steels to recognized standards.
Tube ends to be expanded are to be cleaned and
3.3 The materials of valves and fittings must be checked for size and possible defects. Where
tested by the Society in accordance with the datas necessary, tube ends are to be annealed before
specified in Table 7.2. being expanded.
3.4 Parts not subject to material testing, such as 5. Stays, stay tubes and stay bolts
external supports, lifting brackets, pedestals etc. must be
5.1 Stays, stay tubes and stay bolts are to be
made of materials suitable for the intended purpose and
arranged that they are not subjected to undue bend-
in accordance with accepted engineering practice.
ing or shear forces.
Stress concentrations at changes in cross-section,

C. Principles Applicable to Manufacture in screw threads and at welds are to be minimized
by suitable component geometry.
1. Manufacturing processes applied to boiler
materials 5.2 Stays and stay bolts are to be welded by
full penetration preferably. Any vibrational stresses
Materials are to be checked for defects during the are to be considered for long stays.
manufacturing process. Care is to be taken to ensure that
different materials cannot be confused. During the course 5.3 Stays are to be drilled at both ends in such
of manufacture care is likewise required to ensure that a way that the holes extend at least 25 mm into the
marks and inspection stamps on the materials remain water or steam space. Where the ends have been
intact or are transferred in the prescribed manner. upset, the continuous shank must be drilled to a
distance of at least 25 mm.
Boiler parts whose structure has been adversely affected
by hot or cold forming are to be subjected to heat 5.4 Wherever possible, the angle made by gus-
treatment in accordance with the Rules for Materials, set stays and the longitudinal axis of the boiler
Volume V, Section 8, A. shall not exceed 30 . Stress concentrations at the
welds of gusset stays are to be minimized by
Table 7.2 Testing of materials for valves and suitable component geometry. Welds are to be
fittings executed as full-strength welds. In firetube boilers,
gusset stays are to be located at least 200 mm from
Service Testing required the firetube.
Type of
temperature for: PB in [bar]
materials 1) DN in [mm]
[ C] 5.5 Where flat surfaces exposed to flames are
Steel, cast steel > 300 DN > 32 stiffened by stay bolts, the distance between
centers of the stay bolts shall not generally exceed
Steel, cast steel, PB x DN > 2500 2) 200 mm.
300 or
nodular cast iron DN > 250 6. Stiffeners, straps and lifting eyes
Copper alloys 225 PB x DN > 1500 2) 6.1 Where flat end surfaces are stiffened by
1
) No test is required for grey cast iron.
profile sections or ribs, the latter shall transmit
their load directly (i.e. without welded-on straps) to
2
) Testing may be required with if DN is 32 mm. the boiler shell.
2. Welding 6.2 Doubling plates may not be fitted at

pressure parts subject to flame radiation.
The execution of welds, the approval of welding shops
and the qualification testing of welders are to be in Where necessary to protect the walls of the boiler,
accordance with Rules for Welding, Volume VI, strengthening plates are to be fitted below supports
Section 3. and lifting brackets.
3. Riveting 7. Welding of flat unrimmed ends to boiler

shells
Where, in special cases, boiler parts have to be riveted to
be observed Flat unrimmed ends (disc ends) on large
waterspace boilers are only permitted as
4. Tube expansion socket-welded ends with a shell projection of
Tube holes must be carefully drilled and deburred. Sharp 15 mm. The end/shell wall thickness ratio sB/sM
edges are to be chamfered. Tube holes should be as close shall not be greater than 1,8. The end is to be
as possible to the radial direction, particularly in the case welded to the shell with a full-strength weld.
8. Stand pipes and flanges The materials used must be suitable for the given
operating conditions.
Stand pipes and flanges are to be of rugged design and
properly welded to the shell. The wall thickness of 10. Boiler drums, shell sections, headers and
branch pipes must be sufficiently large safely to firetubes, See the Rules for Welding Volume VI,B.
withstand additional external loads. The wall thickness of
welded-in pipe connections shall be appropriate to the
wall thickness of the part into which they are welded.
D. Design Calculation
Welding-neck flanges must be made of forged material
with favourable grain orientation. 1. Design principles
9. Cleaning and inspection openings, cutouts and 1.1 Range of applicability of design
covers formulae
9.1 Steam boilers are to be provided with openings 1.1.1 The following strength calculations repre-
through which the space inside can be cleaned and sent the minimum requirements for normal
inspected. Boiler vessels with an inside diameter of more operating conditions with mainly static loading.
than 1200 mm and those measuring over 800 mm in Separate allowance must be made for additional
diameter and 2000 mm in length are to be provided with forces and moments of significant magnitude.
means of access. Parts inside drums must not obstruct Proper treatment and adequate monitoring of the
inner inspection or must be capable of being removed. feedwater are assumed to be carried out.
9.2 Inspection and access openings are required to 1.1.2 The wall thicknesses arrived at by applying
have the following minimum dimensions: the formulae are the minima required. The
undersize tolerances permitted by the Rules for
Manholes 300 x 400 mm or 400 mm diameter, Materials are to be added to the calculated values.
where the annular height is > 150 mm
the opening measure shall be 320 x The greater local undersize tolerances for tubes
420 mm. need not be considered.
Headholes 220 x 320 mm or 320 mm diameter 1.2 Design pressure pc
Handholes 87 x 103 mm 1.2.1 In general, the design pressure is equal to
the maximum allowable working pressure. Addi-
Sight holes are required to have a diameter of at
tional allowance is to be made for static pressures
least 50 mm; they should, however, be
of more than 0,5 bar.
provided only when the design of the
equipment makes a handhole 1.2.2 In designing continuous-flow boilers, the
impracticable. pressure to be applied is the maximum working
pressure anticipated in each of the individual main
9.3 The edges of manholes and other openings, e.g.
boiler sections at maximum continuous load and at
for domes, are to be effectively strengthened if the plate
the response threshold of the safety equipment.
has been unacceptably weakened by the cutouts. The
edges of openings closed with covers are to be reinforced 1.2.3 The design pressure applicable to the
by flanging or by welding on edge-stiffeners if it is likely superheated steam lines from the boiler is the
that the tightening of the crossbars etc. would otherwise maximum working pressure which adequate safety
cause undue distortion of the edge of the opening. devices prevent from being exceeded.
9.4 Cover plates, manhole stiffeners and crossbars
must be made of ductile material (not grey or malleable
cast iron). Grey cast iron (at least GG-20) may be used
for handhole cover crossbars of headers and sectional
headers, provided that the crossbars arc not located in the
heating gas flow. Unless metal packings are used, cover
plates must be provided on the external side with a rim or
spigot to prevent the packing from being forced out. The
gap between this rim or spigot and the edge of the
opening is to be uniform round the periphery and may not
exceed 2 mm for boilers with a working pressure of less
than 32 bar, or 1 mm where the pressure is 32 bar or
over. The height of the rim or spigot must be at least 5 !
mm greater than the thickness of the packing. " #
9.5 Only continuous rings may be used as packing.
iron :
1.3 Design temperature t Rm,20
c) Grey cast
Strength calculations are based on the temperature at the 11
iron :
center of the wall thickness of the component in question.
The design temperature is made up of the reference 1.4.3 Special arrangements may be agreed for
temperature and a temperature allowance in accordance high-ductility austenitic steels.
with Table 7.3. The minimum value is to be taken as
1.4.4 In the case of cylinder shells with cutouts
250 C.
and in contact with water, a nominal stress of 170
Table 7.3 Design temperatures N/mm shall not be exceeded in view of the pro-
tective magnetite layer.
Allowance to be added 1.4.5 Mechanical characteristics are to be taken
Reference Heated parts, heated from the Rules for Materials or from the standards
temperature Unheated mainly by specified therein.
parts 1.5 Allowance for corrosion and wear
contact radiation
The allowance for corrosion and wear is to be
Saturation c = 1 mm. For plate thicknesses of 30 mm and over
temperature 0 C 25 C 50 C and for stainless materials, this allowance may be
at m.a.w.p dispensed with.
Superheated 1.6 Special cases
steam 15 C 1) 35 C 50 C
temperature Where boiler parts cannot be designed in
accordance with the following Rules or on general
1) The temperature allowance may be reduced to 7 C
provided that special measures are taken to ensure that engineering principles, the dimensions in each
the design temperature cannot be exceeded individual case must be determined by tests, e.g. by
strain measurements
1.4 Allowable stress
2. Cylindrical shells under internal
The design of structural components is to be based on the pressure
allowable stress perm[N/mm2]. In each case, the minimum
value produced by the following relations is applicable : 2.1 Scope
1.4.1 Rolled and forged steels The following design Rules apply to drums,
shell rings and headers up to a diameter ratio Da/Di
For design temperatures up to 350 C of 1,7. Diameter ratios of up to Da/Di 2 may be
Rm,20 permitted provided that the wall thickness is
where Rm, 20 = guaranteed minimum tensile 80 mm.
2,7
strength [N/mm2] at room 2.2 Symbols
temperature
pc [bar] design pressure
$
where ReH,t = gu a r a n t e e d yi e l d p o i n t o r s [mm] wall thickness
%
minimum 0,2 % proof stress at Di [mm] inside diameter
design temperature t.
Da [mm] outside diameter
For design temperature over 350 C
c [mm] allowance for corrosion and wear
Rm,100000,t
where Rm100000,t= mean 100000 hour creep d [mm] diameter of opening or cutout
1,5
strength at design hole diameter for expanded
temperature t tubes and for expanded and seal-
welded tubes (see Fig. 7.1 a and
1.4.2 Cast materials 7.1 b)
inside tube diameter for
Rm,20 ReH,t Rm,100000,t welded-in pipe nipples and
a) Cast steel : ; ;
3,2 2,0 2,0 sockets (Fig. 7.1 c)
t,tl,tu [mm] pitch of tube holes (measured at
Rm,20 ReH,t center of wall thickness for cir-
b) Nodular cast ;
4,8 3,0
cumferential seams) 2.3.3 Weakening factor v

v [-] weakening factor The weakening factor v is shown in Table 7.4.
for welds : Table 7.4 Weakening factor v
the qualitative ratio of the welded
joints to the plate (weld quality rating) Construction Weakening factor v
for holes drilled in the plate : Seamless shell
the ratio of the weakened to the 1,0
rings and drums
unweakened plate section
Shell rings and
perm [N/mm2] allowable stress (see 1.4) drums with weld quality rating see Rules
longitudinal for Welding
sA [mm] necessary wall thickness at edge of weld
opening or cutout
Rows of holes1)
sS [mm] wall thickness of branch pipe
b [mm] supporting length of parent component
ls [mm] supporting length of branch pipe
l [mm] width of ligament between two branch
pipes
1
) The value of v for rows of holes may not be made
l's [mm] internal projection of branch pipe greater than 1,0 in the calculation. For staggered
pitches, see Appendix, Fig. 7.27.
Ap [mm2] area under pressure Refer also to Figures 7.1a-7.1c under paragraph 2.2
A [mm] supporting cross-sectional area

2.3.4 Weakening effects due to cutouts or indi-
vidual branch pipes are to be taken into account by
area compensation in accordance with the
expression:
Pc Ap 1
perm (2)
10 A 2
The area under pressure Ap and the supporting

Fig. 7.1 cross-sectional area A are defined in Fig. 7.2.
2.3 Design calculations

2.3.1 The necessary wall thickness s is given by the
expression :
Da pc
s c (1)
20 perm v pc
2.3.2 In the case of heated drums and headers with a

max. allowable working pressure of more than 25 bar,
special attention is to be given to thermal stresses.
For heated drums not located in the first pass (gas Fig. 7.2
temperature up to 1000 C max.), special certification in
respect of thermal stresses may be waived subject to the
The values of the supporting lengths may not
following provision:
exceed:
Wall thickness up to 30 mm and adequate cooling of the
for the parent
walls by virtue of close tube arrangement. The
component b ( Di sA c ) ( sA c)
description "close tube arrangement" is applicable if the
ligament perpendicular to the direction of gas flow and for the
parallel to the direction of gas flow does not exceed 50 branch pipe ls 1,25 ( d sS c ) ( sS c)
mm and 100 mm respectively.
Where a branch projects into the interior, the value 3.1 Scope
introduced into the calculation as having a supporting
function may not exceed l's 0,5 ls The following Rules apply to the design of smooth
and corrugated cylindrical shells and tubes with an
Cutouts exert a mutual effect if the ligament outside diameter of more than 200 mm which are
subjected to external pressure. Firetubes are tubes
l 2 ( Di sA c) ( sA c) exposed to fire.
The area compensation is then as shown in Fig. 7.3. 3.2 Symbols
s [mm] wall thickness
d [mm] mean diameter of smooth tube
da [mm] outside diameter of smooth tube
di [mm] minimum inside diameter of
corrugated firetube
l [mm] length of tube or distance
between two effective stiffeners
Fig. 7.3 h [mm] height of stiffening ring
b [mm] thickness of stiffening ring
Where materials with different mechanical strengths are u [%] percentage out-of-roundness of
used for the parent component and the branch or tube
reinforcing plate, this fact is to be taken into account in a [mm] greatest deviation from
the calculation. However, the allowable stress in the cylindrical shape (see Fig. 7.5)
reinforcement may not be greater than that for the parent
material in the calculation. perm [N/mm] allowable stress
Disc-shaped reinforcements should not be thicker than Et [N/mm] modulus of elasticity at design
the actual parent component thickness, and this thickness temperature
is the maximum which may be allowed for in the SK [-] safety factor against elastic
calculation. buckling
Disc-shaped reinforcements are to be fitted on the v [-] transverse elongation factor (0,3
outside. for steel)
The wall thickness of the branch pipe should not be more c allowance for corrosion and
than twice the required wall thickness at the edge of the wear
cutout.
In the case of tubular reinforcements, the following wall 3.3 Design calculations
thickness ratio is applicable :
3.3.1 Cylindrical shells and smooth firetubes
sS c
2 Calculation of resistance to plastic deformation:
sA c
d
1 0,1
2 (s c) l
Pc 10 perm (3)
2.4 Minimum allowable wall thickness d
1 0,03
d

u
s c d
For welded and seamless shell rings the minimum 1 5
l
allowable wall thickness is 5 mm. For non-ferrous metals,
stainless steels and cylinder diameters up to 200 mm,
smaller wall thicknesses may be permitted. The wall
thickness of drums into which tubes are expanded is to be
such as to provide a cylindrical expansion length of at
least 16 mm. Calculation of resistance to elastic buckling:
3. Cylindrical shells and tubes with an outside s c s c
3
diameter of more than 200 mm subject to Et da da

external pressure pc 20
Sk 2
2
3 (1 2
)
2 n
(n 1) 1
Z
safety factor Sk to be applied is 4,0.
n2 1
2 n2 1
(4) 3.8 Modulus of elasticity
2
n
1
Z
Table 7.6 shows the modulus of elasticity for steel
in relation to the design temperature.
Table 7.5 Design temperatures for shells
da and tubes under external
where : Z pressure
2 l
and n 2 For tubes exposed to fire
(firetubes) :
n>Z
t = saturation
n (integer) is to be chosen as to reduce pc to its minimum plain tubes temperature
value. n represents the number of buckled folds occurring + 4 . s + 30 oC
round the periphery in the event of failure. n can be t = saturation but at least
estimated by applying the following approximation corrugated 250 oC
tubes temperature
formula: + 3 . s + 30 oC
4 2 For tubes heated by exhaust gases
da da
n 1,63 t = saturation tem-
l s c
perature + 2 . s
+ 15 oC
3.3.2 In the case of corrugated tubes of Fox and
Morrison types, the necessary wall thickness s is given by
the expression:
pc di
s 1 mm (5)
20 perm

Contrary to 1.4, the values for the allowable stress of
firetubes used in the calculations are to be as follows: Fig. 7.4
Re,H,t Table 7.6 Values for the modulus of elasticity
- Plain firetubes, horizontal
2,5
Design Et 1 )
Re,H,t [N/mm2]
Plain firetubes, vertical temperature
2,0 [oC]
Re,H,t 20 206000
Corrugated tubes 250 186400
2,8 300 181500
Re,H,t
Tubes heated by 400 171700
2,0 500 161900
exhaust gases
600 152100
3.5 Design temperature 1
) Intermediate values should be interpolated
Contrary to 1.3, the design temperature to be used for

firetubes is shown in Table 7.5. 3.9 Allowance for corrosion and wear
An allowance of 1 mm for corrosion and wear is to
3.6 Stiffening
be added to the wall thickness s. In the case of
Apart from the firetube and firebox end-plates, the types corrugated tubes, s is the wall thickness of the
of structure shown in Figure 7.4 can also be regarded as finished tube.
providing effective stiffening.
3.10 Minimum allowable wall thickness
3.7 Safety factor Sk and maximum wall thickness
A safety factor Sk of 3,0 is to be used in the calculation of The wall thickness of smooth firetubes shall be at
resistance to elastic buckling. This value is applicable least 7 mm, that of corrugated firetubes at least 10
where the out-of-roundness is 1,5 % or less. Where the mm. For small boilers, non-ferrous metals and
out-of-roundness is more than 1,5 % and up to 2 %, the stainless steels, smaller wall thicknesses are
allowable. The maximum wall thickness may not exceed pressure (see Fig. 7.6). The following requirements
20 mm. Tubes which are heated by flue gases < 1000 oC are to be complied with:
may have a maximum wall thickness of up to 30 mm.
The radius R of the dished end may not exceed the
3.11 Maximum unstiffened length outside end-plate diameter Da, and the knuckle
radius r may not be less than 0,1 Da.
For firetubes, the length l between two stiffeners may not
exceed 6 d. The greatest unsupported length shall not The height H may not be less than 0,18 Da.
exceed 6 m or, in the first pass from the front end-plate,
5 m. Stiffenings of the type shown in Figure 4 are to be The height of the cylindrical portion, with the
avoided in the name zone, i. e. up to approximately 2 d exception of hemispherical end-plates, shall be
behind the lining. 3,5 s, s being taken as the thickness of the
unpierced plate even if the end-plate is provided
The plain portion of corrugated firetubes need not be with a manhole. The height of the cylindrical
separately calculated provided that its stressed length, portion need not, however, exceed the following
measured from the middle of the end-plate attachment to values in Table 7.7.
the beginning of the first corrugation, does not exceed
250 mm. Table 7.7 Height h of cylindrical portion
3.12 Out-of-roundness
The out-of-roundness [%] Wall thickness s h
[mm] [mm]
2 (dmax dmin) up to 50 150
u 100 over 50 up to 80 120
dmax dmin over 80 up to 100 100
over 100 up to 120 75
over 120 50
of new smooth tubes is to be given the value u = 1,5 % in
the design formula.
In the case of used firetubes, the out-of-roundness is to 4.1.2 These Rules also apply to welded
be determined by measurements of the diameters end-plates. Due account is to be taken of the
according to Fig. 7.5. quality rating of the weld (cf. 4.5 ).
4 a
u 100 4.2 Symbols
d
s [mm] wall thickness of end-plate
Da [mm] outside diameter of end-plate
H [mm] height of end-plate curvature
R [mm] inside radius of dished end
h [mm] height of cylindrical portion
& ' d [mm] diameter of opening measured

along a line passing through the
centers of the end-plate and the
opening. In the case of openings
3.13 Firetube spacing concentric with the end-plate, the
maximum opening diameter.
The clear distance between the firetube and boiler shell
at the closest point shall be at least 100 mm. The distance perm [N/mm2] allowable stress (cf. 1.4)
between any two firetubes shall be at least 120 mm. [-] coefficient of stress in flange
4. Dished end-plates under internal and

external pressure
4.1 Scope
4.1.1 The following Rules apply to the design of
unstayed dished end-plates under internal or external
Fig. 7.6
o [-] coefficient of stress in spherical must be at least equal to the required wall thickness of
section a cylindrical shell without weakening.
v [-] weakening factor
4.3.2 Design coefficients and o
c [mm] allowance for corrosion and wear
The design coefficients are shown in Fig. 7.7 in
Et [N/mm2] modulus of elasticity at design relation to the ratio H / Da and parameters
temperature
( ) * and s / Da.
sA [mm] necessary wall thickness at edge of
opening
For dished ends of the usual shapes, the height H can
Ss [mm] wall thickness of branch pipe be determined as follows :
b [mm] supporting length of parent Shallow dished end (R = Da)
component
H 0,1935 Da + 0,55 s
l [mm] width of ligament between two branch
pipes Deep dished end, ellipsoidal shape (R = 0,8 Da)
ls [mm] supporting length of branch pipe H 0,255 Da + 0,36 s
l's [mm] internal projection of branch pipe The values of for unpierced end-plates also apply to
dished ends with openings whose edges are located
Ap [mm] area subject to pressure inside the spherical section and whose maximum
opening diameter is d 4 s, or whose edges are
A [mm] supporting cross-sectional area adequately reinforced. The width of the ligament
Sk [-] safety factor against elastic buckling between two adjacent, non-reinforced openings must
be al least equal to the sum of the opening radii
S'k [-] safety factor against elastic buckling measured along the line connecting the centers of the
at test pressure openings. Where the width of the ligament is less than
4.3 Design calculation for internal pressure that defined above, the wall thickness is to be
dimensioned as though no ligament were present, or
4.3.1 The necessary wall thickness is given by the the edges of the openings are to be adequately rein-
expression: forced.
Da pc
s c (6)
40 perm v
The finished wall thickness of the cylindrical portion

Fig. 7.7 Values of coefficient for the design of dihed ends

4.3.3 Reinforcement of openings in the spherical

section
Openings in the spherical section are deemed to be
adequately reinforced if the following expression
relating to the relevant areas is satisfied.
pc Ap 1
perm (7)
10 A 2
The area under pressure Ap and the supporting

cross-sectional area A are shown in Fig. 7.8.
Fig. 7.9
4.4.2 A check is also required to determine whether

the spherical section of the end-plate is safe against
elastic buckling.
The following relationship is to be applied:
Et s c 2
pc 3,66 (8)
Sk R
The modulus of elasticity Et for steel can be taken

Fig. 7.8 from Table 7.6.
For calculation of reinforcements and supporting The safety coefficient Sk against elastic buckling and
lengths the formulae and prerequsites in 2.3.4 are the required safety coefficient Sk' at the test pressure
applicable. are shown in Table 7.8.
The relationship between respective areas of cutouts

exerting a mutual effect is shown in Fig. 7.9.
Table 7.8 Safety coefficient against elastic
The edge of disk-shaped reinforcements may not buckling
extend beyond 0,8 D a .
In the case of tubular reinforcements, the following s-c Sk1) Sk'1)
R
wall thickness ratio is applicable:
sS c 0,001 5,5 4,0
2
sA c 0,003 4,0 2,9
0,005 3,7 2,7
4.4 Design calculation for external pressure
0,01 3,5 2,6
4.4.1 The same formulae are to be applied to
end-plates under external pressure as to those subject 0,1 3,0 2,2
to internal pressure. However, the safety factor used 1
) Intermediate values should be interpolated
to determine the allowable stress in accordance with
1.4.1 is to be increased by 20 %.
4.5 Weakening factor bending moment

The weakening factor can be taken from Table 7.4 in de [mm] diameter of the largest circle
2.3.3. Apart from this, with welded dished ends- which can be described on a flat
except for hemispherical ends - a value of v = 1 may plate inside at least three
be applied irrespective of the scope of the test anchorage points
provided that the welded seam impinges on the area
within the apex defined by 0,6 Da (cf. Fig. 7.10). da [mm] outside diameter of expanded
tubes
a, b [mml clear supporting or design
widths of rectangular or elliptical
plates, b always designating the
shorter side or axis
tl, t2 [mm] pitch of uniformly spaced stays
or stay bolts
e1, e2 [mm] distances between centers of
non-uniformly spaced stays and
stay bolts
Fig. 7.10
f [mm2] cross-sectional area of ligament
rK [mm] inner corner radius of a flange,
or radius of a stress relieving
4.6 Minimum allowable wall thickness groove
The minimum allowable wall thickness for welding h [mm] inner depth of a flat,
neck end-plates is 5 mm. Smaller minimum wall welding-neck end-plate
thicknesses are allowed for non-ferrous metals and C [-] design coefficient
stainless steels.
y [-] ratio
5. Flat surfaces perm [N/mm2] allowable stress (see 1.4)
5.1 Scope c [mm] allowance for corrosion and
The following Rules apply to stayed and unstayed flat, wear
flanged end-plates and to flat surfaces which are
simply supported, bolted, or welded at their periphery
and which are subjected to internal or external 5.3 Design calculation of unstayed surfaces
pressure.
5.3.1 Flat, circular, flanged, unpierced end-plates
(cf.Fig.7.11).
5.2 Symbols
The necessary wall thickness s is given by the
pc [bar] design pressure expression:
s1 [mm] wall thickness in a stress pc
relieving groove s C ( Db rK ) c (9)
10 perm
s2 [mm] wall thickness of a cylindrical or
square header at the connection
to a flat end-plate with a stress
relieving groove
5.3.2 Circular plates
Db [mm] inside diameter of a flat, flanged
end-plate or design diameter of
an opening to be provided with
means of closure
D 1, D 2 [mm] diameter of circular plates
Dl [mm] bolt-hole circle diameter of a Fig. 7.11
plate subject additionally to a
5.3.3 Rectangular and elliptical plates.
Fig. 7.15
The required wall thickness s is given by the

expression:
pc
s C b y c (11)
10 perm
5.3.4 Welding-neck end-plates.
Fig. 7.12a - 7.12d

Fig. 7.16 Fig. 7.17
The thickness of the plate s is determined by applying

formula 10 or 11 as appropriate.
In the case of end-plates with a stress relieving
groove, provision must be made for the effective
relieving of the welded seams. The wall thickness s1
Fig. 7.13 in the stress relieving groove must therefore satisfy
the following conditions, cf. Fig. 7.17:
For round end-plates : s1 0,77 s2
For rectangular end-plates : s1 0,55 s2
Here s2 represents the wall thickness of the cylindrical
or rectangular header in [mm]. In addition, provision
must be made to ensure that shear forces occurring in
the cross-section of the groove can be safely
Fig. 7.14 absorbed.
It is therefore necessary that for round end-plates:
The required wall thickness s is given by the
expression : pc Db 1,3
s1 rK (12)
10 2 perm
pc
s C Db c (10)
10 perm and for rectangular end-plates:
pc a b 1,3
s1 (13)
10 a b perm
The design calculalion is to be based on the diameter

Radius rK shall be at least 0,2 s and not less than de or a circle, or on the length of the shorter side b of
5 mm. Wall thickness sl must be at least 5 mm. a rectangle which can be inscribed in the free un-
Where welding-neck end-plates in accordance with stiffened area, the least favourable position from the
Fig. 7.16 or Fig. 7.17 are manufactured from plates, point of view of stress being decisive in each case.
the area of the connection to the shell is to be tested The required wall thickness s is given by the
for lamination, e. g. ultrasonically. expression:
5.4 Design calculation of stayed surfaces
pc
5.4.1 For flat surfaces which are uniformly braced s C de c (16)
by stay bolts, circular stays or stay tubes, cf. Fig. 7.18. 10 perm
or
pc
s Cby c (17)
10 perm
Fig. 7.18 Fig. 7.19 The higher of the values determined by the formulae
is applicable.
The required wall thickness s inside the stayed areas 5.4.4 Flat annular plates with central longitudinal
is given by the expression: staying, see Fig. 7.21.
2 2
pc ( t1 t2 )
s C c (14)
10 perm
5.4.2 For flat plates which are nonuniformly

braced by stay bolts, circular stays and stay tubes, cf.
Fig. 7.19.
The necessary wall thickness s inside the stayed areas Fig. 7.21
is given by the expression:
The required wall Thickness s is given by the
expression:
e1 e2 pc
s C c (15)
2 10 perm pc
s 0,25 ( D1 D2 rK1 rK2 ) c (18)
10 perm
5.4.3 For flat plates which are braced by gusset
stays, supports or other means and flat plates between
arrays of stays and tubes, cf. Fig. 7.20.
5.5 Requirements for flanges
5.5.1 Application of the above formulae to flanged
end-plates and to flanges as a means of staying is
subject to the provision that the corner radii of the
flanges should have the following minimum values in
relation to the outside diameter of the endplate (cf.
Table 7.9).
In addition, the flange radii rK (Figs. 7.11, 7.20 and
7.21) must be equal to at least 1,3 times the wall
thickness.
5.5.2 In the case of welding-neck end-plates
without a stress relieving groove for headers, the
flange radius must be rK 1/3 s, subject to a
minimum of 8 mm, and the inside depth of the
end-plate must be h s, s for end-plates with
Fig. 7.20 openings being the thickness of an unpierced
end-plate of the same dimensions, cf. Fig. 7.16.

Type of end-plate or cover C 1)
Table 7.9 Minimum corner radius of flanges
Flat, forged and-plates or end-plates with
machined recesses for headers and flat,
Outside diameter of end Corner radius of flanged end-plates
plate flanges 0,35
[mm] [mm] Encased plates tightly supported and bolted
up to 500 30 at their circference
over 500 up to 1400 35 Inserted, flat plates welded on both sided
over1400 up to 1600 40
over 1600 up to 1900 45 Welding-neck end plates with stress re- 0.40
over 1900 50 lieving groove
Loosely supported plates, such as man-hole

5.6 Ratio y
covers; in the case of closing appliances, in
The ratio y takes account of the increase in stress, as addition to the working pres-sure, allowance 0,45
compared with round plates, as a function of the ratio is also to be made for the additional force
of the sides b/a of unstayed, rectangular and elliptical which can be excerted when the bolts are
plates and of the rectangles inscribed in the free, tightened (the permitted loading of the bolt or
unstayed areas of stayed, flat surfaces, cf. Table 7.10. bolts) distributed over the cover area).
Inserted, flat plates welded on one side

Table 7.10 Values of ratio y
Plates which are bolted at their circum-
Shape Ratio b/a 1) ference and are thereby subjected to an
additional bending moment according to the
1,0 0,75 0,5 0,25 0,1 ratio :
Rectangle
Dl/Db = 1,0 0,45
1,10 1,26 1,40 1,52 1,56
= 1,1 0,50
Ellipse 1,00 1,15 1,30 --- ---
1
= 1,2 0,55
) Intermediate values are to be interpolated linearly.
= 1,3 0,60
5.7 Coefficient C Intermediate values are to be interpolated
linearly
Coefficient C takes account of the type of support, the
edge connection and the type of stiffening. The value
Table 7.12 Values of coefficient C for stayed
of C to be used in the calculation is shown in Tables
surfaces
7.11 and 7.12.
Type of stiffening and/or end-plate C

Where different values of C are applicable to parts of
a plate due to different kinds of stiffening according Boiler shell, header or cumbustion chamber 0,35
to Table 7.12 coefficient C is to be determined by the wall, stay plate or tube area
arithmetical value :
Stay bolts in arrays with maximum stay bolt 0,40
C = (C1 + C2 ......Cn) / n centre distance of 200 mm
Round stays and tubes outside tube arrays
5.8 Minimum ligament with expanded tubes irrespective of whether they are welded-in, 0,45
The minimum ligament width depends on the bolted or expanded
expansion technique used. The cross-section f of the
ligament between two tube holes for expanded tubes
5.9 Minimum and maximum wall thickness
should be for :
5.9.1 With expanded tubes, the minimum plate
steel f [mm2] = 15 + 3,4 da
thickness is 12 mm. Concerning safeguards against
copper f [mm2] = 25 + 9,5 da the dislodging of expanded tubes, see 6.3.2.
5.9.2 The wall thickness of flat end-plates should
Table 7.11 Values of coefficient C for unstayed not exceed 30 mm in the heated portion.
surfaces
5.10 Reinforcement of openings
Where the edges of the openings are not reinforced, In the case of flat end-plates, up to half the load may
special allowance is to be made when calculating be assumed to be supported by the directly adjacent
thickness for cutouts, branches etc. in flat surfaces boiler wall.
which lead to undue weakening of the plate.
6.3.1 For stays, stay bolts or stay tubes, the
necessary cross-sectional area is given by:
F
A1 (19)
perm
6.3.2 Where expanded tubes are used, a sufficient

safety margin must additionally be applied to prevent
the tubes from being pulled out of the tube plate. Such
a safety margin is deemed to be achieved if the
permissible load on the supporting area does not
exceed the values specified in Table 7.13.
For the purpose of the
calculation, the suppor-
ting area is given by
Fig. 7.22 - 7.24 the expression : A2 = (da - di) lo
6. Stays, stay tubes and stay bolts subject to a maximum

of : A2 = 0,1 da lo
6.1 Scope
The following Rules apply to longitudinal stays, gus- Table 7.13 Loading of expanded tube
set stays, stay tubes, stay bolts and stiffening girders
of steel or copper and are subject to the requirements Type of Permissible load on
set out in C.5. expanded supporting area
connection [N/mm2]
6.2 Symbols
Plain F / A2 150
F [N] load on a stay, stay tube or stay With groove F / A2 300
bolt With flange F / A2 400
2
A1 [mm ] calculated required
cross-section area of stays, stay
For calculating the supporting area, the length of the
bolts and stay tubes
expanded section of tube (lo) may not be taken as
A2 [mm2] supported area of expanded exceeding 40 mm.
tubes
Ap [mm2] plate area supported by one 6.3.3 Where longitudinal stays, stay tubes or stay
stay, stay bolt or stay tube bolts are welded in, the cross-section of the fillet weld
subject to shear shall be at least 1,25 times the
da [mml outside diameter of stay, stay required bolt or stay tube cross-section:
bolt or stay tube
da a1 1,25 A1 (20)
di [mm] inside diameter of stay tube
lo [mm] length of expanded section of 6.4 Allowable stress
tube
The allowable stress is to be determined in accordance
a1 [mm] weld height in direction of load with 1.4.1. In departure from this, however, a value of
Re,H,t
perm [N/mm2] allowable stress is to be expected in the area of the weld in the
1,8
case of stays, stay tubes and stay bolts made of rolled
6.3 Design calculation
and forged steels.
The supporting action of other boiler parts may be
7. Boiler and superheated tubes
taken into consideration when calculating the size of
stays, stay tubes and stay bolts. Where the boundary 7.1 Scope
areas of flanged end-plates are concerned, calculation
of the plate area Ap is to be based on the flat surface The design calculation applies to tubes under internal
extending to the beginning of the end-plate flange. pressure and, up to an outside tube diameter of 200
mm, also to tubes subject to external pressure. e. g. for superheater support tubes.
7.2 Symbols 8. Plain rectangular tubes and sectional
headers
8.1 Symbols
da [mm] outside diameter of tube
perm [N/mm2] allowable stress
2m [mm] clear width of the rectangular
v [-] weld quality rating of tube parallel to the wall in
longitudinally welded tubes question
7.3 Calculation of wall thickness 2n [mm] clear width of the
The necessary wall thickness s is given by the rectangular-tube perpendicular
expression : to the wall in question
Z [mm] coefficient according to
da pc formula (23)
s (21)
20 perm v pc
a [mm] distance of relevant line of
holes from center line of side
7.4 Design temperature t
t [mm] pitch of holes
The design temperature applied is to be as specified in
d [mm] hole diameter
Table 7.3.
v [-] weakening factor for rows of
In the case of once through forced flow boilers, the
holes under tensile stress
calculation of the tube wall thicknesses is to be based
on the maximum temperature expected in the v' [-] weakening factor for rows of
individual main sections of the boiler under operating holes under bending stress
conditions plus the necessary added temperature
allowances. r [mm] inner radius at corners
7.5 Allowable stress perm [N/mm] allowable stress (see 1.4)
The allowable stress is to be determined in accordance 8.2 Design calculation

with 1.4.1. 8.2.1 The wall thickness is to be calculated for the
For tubes subject to external pressure, a value of center of the side and for the ligaments between the
ReH,t holes. The maximum calculated wall thickness shall
is to be applied. govern the wall thickness of the entire rectangular
2,0 tube.
7.6 Quality rating of weld, v The following method of calculation is based on the
For longitudinally welded tubes, the value of v to be assumption that the tube connection stubs have been
applied shall correspond to the approval test. properly mounted, so that the wall is adequately
stiffened.
7.7 Wall thickness allowances
8.2.2 The required wall thickness is given by the
In the case of tubes subject to relatively severe expression :
mechanical or chemical attack an appropriate wall
thickness allowance shall be agreed which shall be If there are several different rows of holes, the
added to the wall thickness calculated by applying necessary wall thickness is to be determined for each
formula (21). The permissible minus tolerance on the row.
wall thickness (see 1.1.2) need only be taken into
pc n 4,5 Z pc
consideration for tubes whose outside diameter s
exceeds 76,1 mm. 20 perm v 10 v, (22)
perm
7.8 Maximum wall thickness of boiler tubes

The wall thickness of intensely heated boiler tubes 8.2.3 Z is calculated by applying the formula:
(e.g. where the temperature of the heating gas exceeds 1 m3 n3 1
800 C) shall not be greater than 6,3 mm. This Z (m2 a 2) (23)
3 m n 2
requirement may be dispensed with in special cases,
Where Z has a negative value, the sign is to be disre- 8.5 Minimum wall thickness and ligament
garded when incorporating the term into formula (22). width
8.3 Weakening factor v 8.5.1 The minimum wall thickness for expanded
tubes shall be 14 mm.
8.3.1 If there is only one row of holes, or if there
are several parallel rows not staggered in relation to 8.5.2 The width of a ligament between two
each other, the weakening factors v and v' are to be openings or tube holes may not be less than 1/4 of the
determined as follows : distance between the tube centers.
t d 9. Straps and girders
v
t
9.1 Scope
t d
v v for wholes where d < 0,6 m The following Rules apply to steel girders welded to
t
the combustion chamber crown.
t 0,6 m
v for wholes where d > 0,6 m 9.2 General
t
8.3.2 In determining the values of v and v' for The supporting girders are to be properly welded to
elliptical holes, d is to be taken as the clear width of the combustion chamber crown at all points. They are
the holes in the longitudinal direction of the to be arranged in such a way that the welds can be
rectangular tube. However, for the purpose of competently executed and the circulation of water is
deciding which formula is to be used for determining not obstructed.
v', the value of d in the expressions d > 0,6 m and 9.3 Symbols
d < 0,6 m is to be the clear width of the hole
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. pc [bar] design pressure
8.3.3 In calculating the weakening factor for F [N] load carried by one girder
staggered rows of holes, t is to be substituted in the
e [mm] distance between center lines of
formula by t for the oblique ligaments (Fig. 7.25).
girders
8.3.4 For oblique ligaments, the value of Z to be
used in formula (22) is that determined by applying l [mm] free length between girder
formula (23), with a = 0, and multiplying by cos . supports
b [mm] thickness of girder
h [mm] height of girder
W [mm3] section modulus of one girder
M [Nmm] bending moment acting on
girder at given load
z [-] coefficient for section modulus
Fig. 7.25 perm [N/mm ] 2
allowable stress (see 1.4)
8.4 Stress at corners 9.4 Design calculation
In order to avoid undue stresses at corners, the 9.4.1 The simply supported combustion chamber
following conditions are to be satisfied : girder shown in Fig. 7.26 is to be treated as a simply
supported beam of length l. The support afforded by
r 1/2 s, subject to a minimum of: the plate material crown may also be taken into
consideration.
3 mm for rectangular tubes with a clear width of up to
50 mm.
8 mm for rectangular tubes with a clear width of
80 mm or over.
Intermediate values are to be interpolated linearly.
The radius shall be governed by the arithmetical mean
value of the nominal wall thicknesses on both sides of Fig. 7.26
the corner. The wall thickness at corners may not be
less than the wall thickness determined by applying
formula (22).
9.4.2 The required section modulus of a combus- working pressure and the service temperature.
tion chamber crown is given by:
10.3 Symbols
Mmax b h2 pc [bar] design pressure
W (24)
1,3 perm z 6 p' [bar] test pressure
FS [N] total load on bolted connection
The coefficient z for the section modulus takes in service
account of the increase in the section modulus due to
the combustion chamber crown plate forming part of F'S [N] total load on bolted connection
the girder. It may in general be taken as z = 5/3. at test pressure
For the height h, a value not exceeding 8 b is to be FSo [N] total load on bolted connection
inserted in the formula. in assembled condition with no
pressure exerted
9.4.3 The maximum bending moment is given by
the expression : FB [N] load imposed on bolted
connection by the working
Fl pressure
Mmax (25)
8 FD [N] force to close joint under
service conditions
where
FDo [N] force to close joint in
pc
F l e (26) assembled condition
10
FZ [N] additional force due to stresses
in connected piping
10. Bolts
Db [mm] mean jointing or bolt pitch
10.1 Scope
circle diameter
The following Rules relate to bolts which, as force
di [mm] inside diameter of connected
transmitting connecting elements, are subjected to
pipe
tensile stresses due to the internal pressure. Normal
operating conditions are assumed. ds [mm] shank diameter of a
necked-down bolt
10.2 General
dk [mm] root diameter of thread
Necked-down bolts should be used for elastic bolted
connections, particularly where the bolts are highly n [-] number of bolts forming
stressed, or are exposed to service temperatures of connection
over 300 C, or have to withstand internal pressures
of 80 bar or over. All bolts > M 30 (30 mm diameter perm [N/mm2] allowable stress
metric thread) must be necked-down bolts. [-] surface finish coefficient
Necked-down bolts are bolts to DIN 2510 with a
shank diameter dS = 0,9 dk (dk being the root dia- c [mm] additional allowance
meter). In the calculation special allowance is to be
k1 [mm] jointing factor for service
made for shank diameters < 0,9 dk.
condition
Bolts with a shank diameter of less than 10 mm are
ko [mm] jointing factor for assembled
not allowed.
condition
Bolts may not be located in the path of heating gases.
KD [N/mm2] jointing material deformation
At least 4 bolts must be used to form a connection. factor
To achieve small sealing forces, the jointing material 10.4 Design calculation
should be made as narrow as possible and preference
10.4.1 Bolted joints are to be designed for the
should be given to the tongue and groove system.
following load conditions:
Where standard pipe flanges are used, the strength
a) Service conditions
requirements for the bolts are considered to be
satisfied if the bolts used comply with DIN 2500 and (design pressure pc and design temperature
conform to the specifications contained therein in t),
respect of the materials used, the maximum allowable
b) Load at test pressure
(lest pressure p', t = 20 C) and during assembly to effect an intimate union

with the jointing material and to close the
c) Assembled condition at zero pressure gap at the flange bearing surfaces.
(p = 0 bar, t = 20 C).
10.4.2 The necessary root diameter of a bolt in a If the force exerted on assembly FDO > FS,
bolted joint comprising n bolts is given by : this value may be replaced by the following
where malleable jointing materials with or
without metal elements are used :
4 Fs
dk c (27)
perm n FDO 0,2 FDO 0.8 FS FDO (34)
10.4.3 The total load on a bolted joint is to be Factors ko, k and KD depend on the type and design of
calculated as follows : the joint and the material used. The relevant values are
a) For service conditions shown in the Tables 7.16 and 7.17.
FS = FB + FD + FZ (28) 10.4.4 The bolt design is to be based on the greatest

root diameter of the thread determined in accordance
2 with the three load conditions specified in paragraphs
Db pc
FB (29) 10.4.1 a) to 10.4.1 c).
4 10
10.5 Design temperature t
pc
FD Db k1 1,2 (30) The design temperatures of the bolts depend on the
10
type of joint and the insulation. In the absence of
(Where the arrangement of the bolts deviates special proof as to temperature, the following design
widely from the circular, due allowance is to temperatures are to be applied:
be made for the special stresses occurring)
Loose flange steam temperature - 30 C
The additional force Fz due to connected + loose flange
piping must be calculated from the stresses Fixed flange steam temperature - 25 C
present in these pipes. Fz is 0 in the case of + loose flange
bolted joints with no connected pipes. Where
connecting pipes are installed in a normal Fixed flange steam temperature -15 C
+ fixed flange
manner and the service temperatures are
< 400 C, Fz may be determined, as an The temperature reductions allow for the drop in
approximation, by applying the expression : temperature at insulated, bolted connections. For
2 non-insulated bolted joints, a further temperature re-
di pc
FZ duction is not permitted because of the higher thermal
4 10 stresses imposed on the entire bolted joint.
b) For the test pressure:
p FD The values of the allowable stress are shown in
Fs FB FZ (31) perm
pc 1,2 Table 7.14.
For calculating the root diameter of the

thread, Fs is to be substituted by F's in
formula (27).
Table 7.14 Allowable stress perm

c) For the zero-pressure, assembled condition:
FSO = FDO + FZ (32) Condition for necked- for full-
down bolts shank bolts
FDO = Db ko KD (33)
For calculating the root diameter of the Service Re,H,t Re,H,t
thread, Fs is to be substituted by FSo in condition 1,5 1,6
formula (27).
In the zero-pressure, assembled condition,
the force FDO is to be exerted on the bolts
2. Safety valves
Test pressure
and zero- Re,H,20 Re,H,20 2.1 Any steam boiler which has its own steam space
pressure is to be equipped with at least two reliable, spring-
1,1 1,2
assembled loaded safety valves. At least one safety valve is to be
condition set to respond if the maximum allowable working
pressure is exceeded.
10.7 Surface finish coefficient
In combination, the safety valves must be capable of
10.7.1 Full-shank bolts are required to have a discharging the maximum quantity of steam which can
surface finish of at least grade mg to DIN 267. be produced by the steam boiler during continuous
Necked-down bolts must be machined all over. operation without the maximum allowable working
pressure being exceeded by more than 10 %.
10.7.2 In the case of unmachined, plane-parallel
bearing surfaces, = 0,75. Where the bearing sur- 2.2 Any steam boiler which has a shut-off but which
faces of the mating parts are machined, a value of = does not have its own steam space is to have at least
1,0 may be used. Bearing surfaces which are not one reliable, spring-loaded safety valve fitted at its
plane-parallel (e. g. on angle sections) are not outlet. At least one safety valve is to be set to respond
permitted. if the maximum allowable working pressure is
exceeded. The safety valve or safety valves are to be
10.8 Additional allowance c designed so that the maximum quantity of steam
The additional allowance c mm shall be as shown in which can be produced by the steam boiler during
Table 7.15. continuous operation can be discharged without the
maximum allowable working pressure being exceeded
Table 7.15 Additional allowances c by more than 10 %.
2.3 External steam drums are to be fitted with at
Condition c [mm]
least two reliable, spring-loaded safety valves. At least
For service conditions : one safety valve is to be set to respond if the
up to M 24 3 allowable working pressure is exceeded. In
M 27 up to M 45 5 - 0,1 . dk combination, the safety valves must be capable of
M 48 and over 1
discharging the maximum quantity of steam which can
for test pressure 0 be produced in continuous operation by all connected
steam generators without the maximum allowable
for assembled conditions 0 working pressure of the steam drum being exceeded
by more than 10 %.
2.4 The closing pressure of the safety valves shall
E. Equipment and Installation be no more than 10 % below the response pressure.
1. General 2.5 The minimum flow diameter of the safety valves
1.1 The following requirements apply to steam must be 15 mm.
boilers which are not constantly and directly 2.6 Servo-controlled safety valves are permitted
monitored during operation. Note is also to be taken wherever they are reliably operated without any
of the official regulations of the flag country of the external energy source.
vessel, where appropriate.
2.7 The safety valves are to be fitted to the saturated
1.2 In the case of steam boilers which are monitored steam part or, in the case of steam boilers which do
constantly and directly during operation, some easing not have their own steam space, to the steam-water
of the following requirements may be permit ted, outlet of the boiler.
while maintaining the operational safety of the vessel.
1.3 In the case of steam boilers which have a
maximum water volume of 150 litres, a maximum 2.8 In the case of steam boilers which are fitted with
allowable working pressure of 10 bar and where the superheaters with no shut-off capability, at least two
product of water volume and maximum allowable safety valves must be located at the discharge from the
water pressure is less than 500, an easing of the superheater. Superheaters with shut-off capability are
following requirements may be permitted. to be fitted with at least one safety valve.
1.4 With regard to the electrical installation and Safety valves which are located at the discharge from
equipment also the Rules for Electrical Installations, the superheater must be designed for at least 25 % of
Volume IV and Rules for Automation,Volume VII are the required blow-off capacity. When designing safety
to be observed. valves, allowance is to be made for the increase in the
volume of steam caused by superheating. connection pipes on the water side must have an inner
diameter of at least 40 mm.
2.9 Steam may not be supplied to the safety valves
through pipes in which water may collect. 3.7 Water level indicators are to be connected to the
water and steam chamber of the boiler by means of
2.10 Safety valves must be easily accessible and easily accessible, simple to control and quick-acting
capable of being released safely during operation. shut-off devices.
2.11 Safety valves are to be designed so that no 3.8 The devices used for blowing through the water
binding or jamming of moving parts is possible even level indicators must be designed so that they are safe
when heated to different temperatures. Seals which to operate and so that blow-through can be monitored.
may prevent the operation of the safety valve due to The discharging mediums are to be drained away
frictional forces are not permitted. safely.
2.12 Safety valves are to be set in such a way as to 3.9 Remote water level indicators and display
prevent unauthorized alteration. equipment of a suitable type to give an indirect
2.13 Pipes or valve housings must have a drain facility reading may be approved as additional display
which has no shut-off capability fitted at the lowest devices.
point on the blow-off side. 3.10 In place of water level indicators, once-through
2.14 Combined blow-off lines from several safety forced flow boilers must be fitted with two mutually
valves may not unduly impair the blow-off capability. independent devices which trip an alarm as soon as
water flow shortage is detected. An automatic device
The discharging mediums are to be drained away to shut down the heating system may be provided in
safely. place of the second warning device.
3. Water level indicators 3.11 The cocks and valves of the water level
indicators which cannot be directly reached by hand
3.1 Steam boilers which have their own steam
from floor plates or a control platform must be have a
chamber are to be fitted with two devices giving a
control facility using pull rods or chain pulls.
direct reading of the water level.
4. Pressure gauges
3.2 Steam boilers which have their own steam space
heated by exhaust gases whose temperature does not 4.1 Each steam boiler is to be fitted with two
exceed 400 C, are to be fitted with at least one device pressure gauges which are linked to the steam space.
giving a direct reading of the water level. The allowable maximum working pressure is to be
marked on the dial by means of a permanent and
3.3 External steam drums of boilers which do not
easily visible red mark. The display range of the
have their own steam space are to be fitted with two
pressure gauge must include the test pressure. One
devices giving a direct reading of the water level.
pressure gauge must be located on the boiler and
3.4 Cylindrical glass water level gauges are not another at the machinery control station or at some
permitted. other appropriate site.
3.5 The water level indicators are to be fitted so that Where several steam boilers are incorporated on one
a reading of the water level is possible when the ship ship, the steam chambers of which are linked together,
is heeling and during the motion of the ship when it is one pressure gauge is sufficient at the machinery
at sea. The limit for the lower visual range must be at control station or at some other suitable location, in
least 30 mm above the highest flue, but at least 30 mm addition to the pressure gauges on each boiler.
below the lowest water level. The lowest water level
4.2 The pipe to the pressure gauge must have a
may not be above the centre of the visual range.
water trap and must be of a blow-off type. A
The water level indicators must be well illuminated connection for a test gauge must be installed close to
and visible from the boiler control station. the pressure gauge. In the case of pressure gauges
which are set off at a lower position the test
3.6 The connection pipes between steam generator connection must be provided close to the pressure
and water level indicators must have a inner diameter gauge and also close to the connection piece of the
of at least 20 mm. They must be run in such a way that pressure gauge pipe.
there are no sharp bends in order to avoid water and
steam traps, and must be protected from the effects of 4.3 Pressure gauges are to be protected against
the heated gases and against cooling. radiant heat and must be well illuminated.
Where water level indicators are linked by means of 5. Temperature gauges
common connection lines or where the connection
5.1 A temperature gauge is to be fitted to the flue
pipes on the water side are longer than 750 mm, the
gas outlets of fired steam boilers.
5.2 Temperature gauges are to be fitted to the 7.5 Where there is a possibility of oil or grease
exhaust gas inlet and outlet of steam boilers heated by getting into the steam or condensate system, a suitable
exhaust gas. automatic and continuously operating unit is to be
installed which trips an alarm and cuts off the feed
5.3 Temperature gauges must be fitted at the water supply if the concentration at which boiler
outlets from superheaters or superheater sections, at operation is put at risk is exceeded.
the inlet and outlet of attemporators, and also at the
outlet of once-through forced flow boilers, where this 7.6 Where there is a possibility of acid, lye or
is necessary to assess the behaviour of the materials seawater getting into the steam or condensate system,
used. a suitable automatic and continuously operating unit
is to be installed which trips an alarm and cuts off the
6. Regulating devices (Controllers) feed water supply if the concentration at which boiler
6.1 With the exception of boilers which are operation is put at risk is exceeded.
heated by exhaust gas, steam boilers are to be 7.7 It must be possible to carry out function test-
operated with rapid-control, automatic firing systems. ing of the monitoring devices, even during operation,
In main boilers, the control facility must be capable of if an equivalent degree of safety is not attained by
safely controlling all rates of speed and manoeuvres self-monitoring of the equipment.
so that the steam pressure and the temperature of the
super-heated steam stay within safe limits and the 7.8 The monitoring devices must trip visual and
supply of feed water is guaranteed. Auxiliary boilers audible fault warnings in the boiler room or in the
are subject to the same requirements within the scope machinery control room or any other suitable site. Cf
of potential load changes. Rules for Automation, Volume VII.
6.2 Steam pressure must be automatically regu- 8. Safety devices (Limiters)
lated by controlling the supply of heat. The steam
pressure of boilers heated by exhaust gas may also be 8.1 The suitability of safety devices for marine
regulated by condensing the excess steam. use is to be proven by type testing.
6.3 In the case of boilers which have a specified 8.2 Fired boilers are to be equipped with a reli-
minimum water level, the water level must be regu- able pressure limiter which cuts out and interlocks the
lated automatically by controlling the supply of feed firing system when the maximum allowable working
water. pressure is exceeded.
6.4 In the case of forced-circulation boilers 8.3 In steam boilers on whose heating surfaces a
whose heating surface consists of a steam coil and highest flue is specified, two reliable, mutually
once-through forced flow boilers, the supply of feed independent water level limiters must respond to cut
water may be regulated as a function of fuel supply. out and interlock the firing system when the water
falls below the specified minimum water level. The
6.5 In the case of steam boilers which are fitted water level limiter must also be independent of the
with superheaters, the temperature of the superheated water level control devices.
steam must be automatically regulated unless the
calculated temperature is higher than the maximum 8.4 The receptacles for water level limiters
attainable temperature of the superheater walls. located outside the boiler must be connected to the
boiler by means of lines which have a minimum inner
7. Monitoring devices (Alarms) diameter of 20 mm. Shut-off devices in these lines
must have a nominal diameter of at least 20 mm and
7.1 A warning device is to be fitted which is must indicate their open or closed position. Where
tripped when the specified maximum water level is water level limiters are connected by means of
exceeded. common connection lines, the connection pipes on the
water side must have an inner diameter of at least
7.2 In exhaust-gas heated boilers, a warning 40 mm.
device is to be fitted which is tripped when the
maximum allowable working pressure is exceeded. Operation of the firing system may only be possible
when the shut-off devices are open or else, after
7.3 In exhaust-gas heated boilers with a specified closure, the shut-off devices must reopen
minimum water level, a warning device is to be fitted automatically and in a reliable manner.
which is tripped when the water falls below this level.
Water level limiter receptacles which are located
7.4 Exhaust gas boilers with finned tubes are to outside the boiler are to be designed in such a way
have a temperature monitor fitted in the exhaust gas that a compulsory and periodic blow-through of the
pipe which trips an alarm in the event of fire. Cf. receptacles and lines can be carried out.
Rules for Automation, Volume VII.
8.5 In the case of forced-circulation boilers with
a specified lowest water level, two reliable, mutually than 50 mm above the highest flue when the non-re-
independent safety devices must be fitted in addition turn valve is not tight.
to the requisite water level limiters, which will cut out
and interlock the heating system in the event of any 9.3 The feed water is to be introduced into the
unacceptable reduction in water circulation. boiler in such a way as to prevent damage occurring to
the boiler walls and to heated surfaces.
8.6 In the case of forced-circulation boilers
whose heating surface consists of a single coil and 10. Shut-off devices
once-through forced flow boilers, two reliable, 10.1 Each steam boiler must be capable of being shut
mutually independent safety devices must be fitted in off from all connected pipes. The shut-off devices are
place of the water level limiters in order to provide a to be installed as close as possible to the boiler walls
sure means of preventing any excessive heating of the and must operate without risk.
heating surfaces by cutting out and interlocking the
firing system. 10.2 Where several boilers which have different
maximum allowable working pressures give off their
8.7 In steam boilers with superheaters, a steam into common lines, it is necessary to ensure that
temperature limiter is to be fitted which cuts out and the maximum working pressure allowable for each
interlocks the heating system if the allowable boiler cannot be exceeded in any of the boilers.
superheated steam temperature is exceeded. In the
case of boiler parts which carry superheated steam 10.3 Where there are several boilers which are
and which have been designed to long-term resistance connected by common pipes and the shut-off devices
values, one temperature recording device is adequate. for the steam, feed and drain lines are welded to the
boiler, for safety reasons while the boilers are
8.8 The safety devices must trip visual and running, two tandem shut-off devices which are to be
audible alarms in the boiler room or in the machinery protected against unauthorised operation are each to
control room or any other appropriate site. Cf. Rules be fitted with an interposed release device.
for Automation, Volume VII.
11. Scum removal, sludge removal, drain and
8.9 The electrical devices associated with the sampling devices
limiters are to be designed in accordance with the
closed-circuit principle so that, even in the event of a 11.1 Boilers and external steam drums are to be fitted
power failure, the limiters will cut out and interlock with devices to allow them to be drained and the
the systems unless an equivalent degree of safety is sludge removed. Where necessary, boilers are to be
achieved by other means. fitted with a scum removal device.
8.10 To reduce the effects due to swell, water 11.2 Drain devices and their connections must be
level limiters can be fitted with a delay function protected from the effects of the heating gases and
provided that this does not cause a dangerous drop in capable of being operated without risk. Self-closing
the water level. sludge removal valves must be lockable when closed
or alternatively an additional shut-off device is to be
8.11 The electrical interlocking of the firing fitted in the pipe
system following tripping by the safety devices may .
only be cancelled out at the firing system control 11.3 Where the scum removal, sludge removal or
panel itself. drain lines from several boilers are combined, a non-
return valve is to be fitted in the individual boiler
8.12 If an equivalent degree of safety cannot be lines.
achieved by the self-monitoring of the equipment, the
safety devices must be subjected to operational testing 11.4 The scum removal, sludge removal or drain
even during operation. In this case, the operational lines, plus valves and fittings, are to be designed to
testing of water level limiters must be carried out allow for the maximum allowable working pressure of
without the surface of the water dropping below the the boiler.
lowest water level.
11.5 With the exception of once-through forced flow
8.13 For details of additional requirements boilers, devices for taking samples from the water
relating to once-through forced flow boilers, see 3.10. contained in the boiler are to be fitted to steam boilers.
9. Feed and circulation devices 11.6 Scum removal, sludge removal, drain and
sampling devices must be capable of safe operation.
9.1 For details of boiler feed and circulation de- The mediums being discharged are to be drained away
vices, see Section 11, F. The following requirements safely.
are also to be noted:
12. Name plate
9.2 The feed devices are to be fitted to the steam
boiler in such a way that it cannot be drained lower 12.1 A name plate is to be permanently affixed to
each steam boiler, displaying the following
information: c) A separate tightness test may be dispensed with

if the pressure test is performed with petroleum
Manufacturer, or other liquid displaying similar properties.
Build number and year of construction, 14. Installation of boilers
Maximum allowable working pressure in bar, 14.1 Mounting
Steam production in kg/h or t/h, Boilers must be installed in the ship with care and
Permitted temperature of super-heated steam in must be secured to ensure that they cannot be
C provided that the boiler is fitted with a displaced by any of the circumstances arising when
super-heater with no shut-off capability. the ship is at sea. Means are to be provided to
accommodate the thermal expansion of the boiler in
12.2 The name plate must be permanently attached to service. Boilers and their seatings must be easily
the largest part of the boiler or to the boiler frame so accessible from all sides or must be easily rendered
that it is visible. so.
13. Valves and fittings 14.2 Fire precautions
13.1 Materials See Section 12.
Valves and fittings for boilers must be made of ductile
materials as specified in Table 7.1 and all their
components must be able to withstand the loads
imposed in operation, in particular thermal loads and F. Testing of Boilers
possible stresses due to vibration. Grey cast iron may 1. Constructional test
be used within the limits specified in Table 7.1, but
may not be employed for valves and fittings which are After completion, boilers are to undergo a
subjected to dynamic loads, e.g. safety valves and constructional test.
blow-off valves. The constructional test includes verification that the
boiler agrees with the approved drawing and is of
Testing of materials for valves and fittings is to be satisfactory construction. For this purpose, all parts of
carried out as specified in Table 7.2. the boiler must be accessible to allow adequate
inspection. If necessary, the constructional test is to be
13.2 Design
performed at separate stages of manufacture. The
Care is to be taken to ensure that the bodies of shut- following documents are to be presented: material test
off gate valves cannot be subjected to unduly high certificates covering the materials used, reports on the
pressure due to heating of the enclosed water. Valves non-destructive testing of welds and, where
with screw-on bonnets must be safeguarded to prevent applicable, the results of tests of workmanship and
unintentional loosening of the bonnet. proof of the heat treatment applied.
13.3 Pressure and tightness tests 2. Hydrostatic pressure tests
13.3.1 All valves and fittings are to be subjected to 2.1 A hydrostatic pressure test is to be carried out on
a hydrostatic pressure test at 1,5 times the nominal the boiler before the insulation is fitted. Where only
pressure before they are fitted. Valves and fittings for some of the component parts are sufficiently
which no nominal pressure has been specified are to accessible to allow proper visual inspection, the
be tested at twice the working pressure. In this case, hydrostatic pressure test may be performed in stages.
the safety factor in respect of the 20 C yield strength Boiler surfaces must withstand the test pressure
value may not fall below 1,1. without leaking or suffering permanent deformation.
13.3.2 The sealing efficiency of the closed valve is 2.2 The test pressure is generally required to be 1,5
to be tested at the nominal pressure or at 1,1 times the times the maximum allowable working pressure,
working pressure, as applicable. Valves and fittings subject to a minimum of PB + 1 bar.
made of castings and subject to operating
temperatures over 300 C are required to undergo one 2.3 In the case of continuous-flow boilers, the test
of the following tightness tests: pressure must be at least 1,1 times the water inlet
pressure when operating at the maximum allowable
a) Tightness test with air (test pressure approxi- working pressure and maximum steam output. In the
mately 0,1 x working pressure; maximum 2 bar); event of danger that parts of the boiler might be
subjected to stresses exceeding 0,9 of the yield
b) Tightness test with saturated or superheated strength, the hydrostatic test may be performed in
steam (test pressure may not exceed the separate sections. The maximum allowable working
maximum allowable working pressure); pressure is then deemed to be the pressure for which
the particular part of the boiler has been designed. economizer.

2.4 For boiler parts subject to internal and external The design temperature is the maximum feedwater
pressures which invariably occur simultaneously in temperature plus 25 C for plain tube economizers
service, the test pressure depends on the differential and plus 35 C for finned tube economizers.
pressure. In these circumstances, however, the test
The feedwater temperature at the economizer outlet
pressure should at least be equal to 1,5 times the
should be 20 C below the saturation temperature
design pressure specified in D.1.2.4.
corresponding to the working pressure of the boiler.
4. Equipment
4.1 Pressure gauges
G. Hot Water Generators
The inlet side of each economizer is to be provided
1. Design with a reliable pressure gauge as well as with a
connection for a test pressure gauge. The maximum
Hot water generators with a permissible discharge allowable working pressure of the economizer is to be
temperature of > 120 C, which are heated by solid, marked by a red line on the scale of the pressure
liquid or gaseous fuels or by exhaust gases or electri- gauge.
cally are to be treated in a manner analogous to that
applied to boilers. The materials and strength 4.2 Safety valve
calculations for hot water generators which are heated
Each economizer is to be equipped with a
by steam or hot liquids are subject to the requirements
spring-loaded safety valve with an inside diameter of
in Section 8 (Pressure Vessels).
at least 15 mm which is to be set in such a way that it
2. Equipment begins to blow at the latest when the maximum
allowable working pressure of the economizer Pv is
The safety equipment of hot water generators is reached.
subject to the requirements contained in DIN 4752
with due regard for the special conditions attaching to The safety valve is to be designed that, even if shutoff
shipboard operation. devices between the economizer and lhe boiler are
closed, the maximum allowable working pressure of
3. Testing the economizer is not exceeded by more than 10 %.
Each hot water generator is to be subjected to a 4.3 Temperature measuring device
manufacturing test and to a hydrostatic pressure test at
1,5 times the maximum allowable working pressure Each economizer is to be equipped with at least one
subject to a minimum of 4 bar. temperature measuring device giving a reliable
reading of the maximum feedwater temperature in the
economizer. The permissible outlet temperature of the
feedwater is to be marked in red on the temperature
H. Exhaust Gas Economizers meter.
1. Definition 4.4 Shut-off devices
Exhaust gas economizers are preheaters connected to Each economizer is to be equipped with a shut-off
the exhaust gas side of boiler heating surfaces which device at the feedwater inlet and outlet. The boiler
are used, without steam being produced in them in feed valve may be regarded as one of these shut-off
service, to preheat the feedwater and which can be devices.
isolated from the water side of the boiler.
4.5 Discharge and venting equipment
The surfaces of the preheater comprise the water
space walls located between the shut-off devices plus Each economizer is to be provided with means of
the casings of the latter. Water may be taken from the drainage and with vents for all points where air may
economizer only if the boiler feed system is specially gather enabling it to be satisfactorily vented even
designed for this purpose. when in operation.
2. Materials 4.6 Means for preventing the formation of steam

See under B. in Economizers
3. Design calculation Suitable equipment is to be fitted to prevent steam

from being generated in the economizer, e.g. when the
The formulae given under D are to be applied in the main engine is suddenly stopped. This may take the
calculation. The design pressure is to be at least tha form of a circulating line from the economizer to a
maximum allowable working pressure of the feedwater tank to enable the economizer to be cooled,
or of a by-pass enabling the economizer to be - Maximum allowable working pressure of

completely isolated from the flow of exhaust gas. economizer in bar
5. Name plate 6. Tests
A name plate giving the following details is to be Before they are installed, finished economizers are to
fitted to every economizer: be subjected at the maker's works to a manufacturing
test and a hydrostatic pressure test at 1,5 times the
Manufacturer's name and address max. allowable working pressure.
- Serial number and year of manufacture
Table 7.16 Jointing factors
Jointing Factor 1)
Shape Description Material
for liquids for gases and vapours
assembly2) service assembly2) service
ko ko . KD k1 ko ko . KD k1
[mm] [N/mm] [mm] [mm] [N/mm] [mm]

+
impregnated - 20 bD bD - - -
sealing
flat seals to material
DIN 2690
up to
DIN 2692 rubber - bD 0,5 bD - 2 bD 0,5 bD
Teflon - 20 bD 1,1 bD - 25 bD 1,1 bD

,
3
It - 15 bD bD - ) 1,3 bD
bD
200
hD
spirally unalloyed
wound steel - 15 bD bD - 50 bD 1,3 bD
gasket
Al - 8 bD 0,6 bD - 30 bD 0,6 bD
corrugated
gasket
Cu, Brass - 9 bD 0,6 bD - 35 bD 0,7 bD
mild steel - 10 bD 0,6 bD - 45 bD 1,0 bD
Al - 10 bD bD - 50 bD 1,4 bD
metal-
sheated
gasket Cu, Brass - 20 bD bD - 60 bD 1,6 bD
mild steel - 40 bD bD - 70 bD 1,8 bD

-
flat gasket
to - 0,8 bD - bD+5 bD - bD+5
DIN 2694
diamont - 0,8 - 5 1 - 5
gasket
.
1
) Applicable to flat, machined, sound, sealing surface
2
) Where ko cannot be specified, the product of ko KD is given here
3
) Must be a gastight grade
Table 7.16 Jointing factors (cont'd)
Jointing Factor 1)
for liquid for gases and vapours
Shape Description Material assembly2) service assembly2) service
ko ko . KD k1 ko ko . KD k1
[mm] [N/mm] [mm] [mm] [N/mm] [mm]
oval - 1,6 - 6 2 - 6
+
gasket
round - 1,2 - 6 1,5 - 6

gasket
ring - 1,6 - 6 2 - 6
gasket
U-shaped - 1,6 - 6 2 - 6
gasket to
DIN 2696
corrugated 0,4 Z 0,5 Z

.
gasket to - - 9+0,2.Z - 9+0,2.Z

DIN 2697
membrane
welded - 0 - 0 0 - -
gasket to
DIN 2695
1
) Applicable to flat, machined, sound, sealing surfaces.
2
) Where KD cannot be specified, the product of ko x KD is given here
Table 7.17 Deformation factors
Material Deformation factor KD

[N/mm]
aluminium, soft 492

copper, soft 185
soft iron 343
steel, St 35 392
alloy steel, 13 Cr Mo 44 441
austenitic steel 491
NOTE :
At room temperature KD is to be substituted by the deformation factor at 10
% compression 10 or alternatively by the tensile strength Rm
Fig.7.27 Weakening factor v for cylindrical shells with symmetrically staggered rows of holes
II. Thermal Oil Systems
A. General 3.3 The "discharge temperature" is the

temperature of the thermal oil immediately at the
1. Scope heater outlet.
The following Rules apply to thermal oil systems in
3.4 The "return temperature" is the temperature
which organic liquids (thermal oils) are heated by
of the thermal oil immediately at the heater inlet.
firing, exhaust gases or electricity to temperatures
below their initial boiling point at atmospheric 3.5 The "film temperature" is the wall
pressure. temperature on the thermal oil side. In the case of
heated surfaces, this may differ considerably from the
2. Other applicable Rules temperature of the thermal oil.
In addition, the Rules listed below are to be applied 4. Documents for approval
analogously : The following documents are to be submitted for
Rules for Machinery For materials, approval :
Installations Volume III fabrication and design
Section 7 I, B, C, D of the heaters - a description of the system stating the
discharge and return temperatures, the
Rules for Machinery For materials fabrica- maximum film temperatures, the total
Installations Volume III tion and design of the volume of the system and the physical and
Section 8, B, C, D. expansion vessel and
the tanks chemical characteristics of the thermal oil,
Rules for Machinery For oil firing systems - drawings of the heaters, the expansion vessel
Installations, Volume III (additional shutdown and the drainage and storage tanks,
Section 9, A and B. criteria see Section 7
II, B.4, C.4 - a flow-chart with details of the proposed
safety devices and valves,
Rules for Machinery For thermal oil tanks
Installations, Volume III, - circuit diagrams of the electrical control
Section 10, A, B and D. system, where required, in order to evaluate
their operation.
Rules for Machinery For pipes, valves and
Installations, Volume III pumps If specially requested, mathematical proof of the
Section 11, A. to D, Q maximum film temperature in accordance with DIN
and R.
4754 is to be submitted.
Rules for Machinery For fire protection and
Installations Volume III fire fighting equipment 5. Thermal oils
Section 12
5.1 The thermal oil must remain serviceable for at
Rules for Electrical For electrical equip- least 1 year at the specified thermal oil temperature.
Installations. Volume IV ment items Its suitability for further use is to be verified at
appropriate intervals, but at least once a year.
Rules for Automation , For automated
Volume VII machinery systems 5.2 Thermal oils may only be used within the limits
set by the manufacturer. A safety margin of about
3. Definitions 50 C is to be maintained between the discharge
temperature and the maximum allowable film
3.1 The "maximum allowable working pressure" temperature specified by the manufacturer.
is the maximum pressure which may occur in the in-
dividual parts of the equipment under service condi- 5.3 The thermal oil is to be protected from oxidation.
tions. Where necessary, special precautions are to be taken
for this purpose. In systems operating with an inert
3.2 The "thermal oil temperature" is the gas blanket, provision must be made for a constant gas
temperature of the thermal oil at the center of the flow supply. The pressure in the expansion tank must be
cross-section. indicated and safeguarded against overpressure.
5.4 Precautions are to be taken to protect the thermal monitoring devices are to be introduced into the
oil from oxidation system through welded-in immersion pipes
5.5 Copper and copper alloys are to be avoided due 3.8 Heaters are to be fitted with means enabling
to their catalytic effect on the thermal oil them to be completely drained.
6. Manual operation 3.9 For electrically heated heaters the Rules are to
be applied analogously to oil fired heaters.
6.1 The facility is to be provided for manual
operation. At least the temperature limiters on the oil 4. Equipment
side and flow monitoring must remain operative even
in manual operation. The suitability of safety and monitoring devices (e.g.
6.2 Manual operation demands constant and direct valves, limiters/alarms for temperature, flow and
supervision of the system. leakage monitoring) for marine use is to be proven by
type testing.
6.3 For details of requirements in respect of the
manual operation of the oil firing system, see 4.1 Safety valves
Section 9.
Each heater is to be equipped with at least one safety
valve having a blow-off capacity at least equal to the
increase in volume of the thermal oil at the maximum
heating power. During blow-off the pressure may not
increase above 10 % over the maximum allowable
B. Heaters
working pressure.
1. Acceptable materials
4.2 Temperature and flow indicating devices
Heaters of thermal oil systems are to be fabricated
4.2.1 Temperature measuring devices are to be
from the same materials as boilers as per Section 7
fitted at the discharge and return line of both oil fired
Part I, B.2.
heaters and heaters heated by exhaust gas.
4.2.2 Temperature measuring devices are also to be
The materials of the parts of the heaters which are in fitted in the flue gas or exhaust gas stream at the
contact with the thermal oil are to be tested in heaters outlet.
accordance with Section 7 Part I, B.3.
4.2.3 The flow of the thermal oil must be
3. Design indicated.
3.1 Heaters are to be designed thermodynamically 4.3 Temperature control

that neither the surfaces nor the thermal oil become
excessively heated at any point. The flow of the 4.3.1 For automatic control of the discharge
thermal oil must be ensured by forced circulation. temperature, oil fired heaters are to be equipped with
an automatic rapidly adjustable heat supply in
3.2 The surfaces which come into contact with the accordance with Section 9, A. and B.
thermal oil are to be designed for the maximum
allowable working pressure subject to a minimum 4.3.2 The discharge temperature of heaters heated
gauge pressure of 10 bar. by exhaust gas must be controlled by automatic
regulation of the heat input or by recooling the
3.3 Heaters heated by exhaust gas must be designed thermal oil in a dumping cooler, but independently
that resonance with oscillation of the exhaust gas from the control of the engine output.
column cannot occur.
4.4 Temperature monitoring
3.4 The exhaust gas feed must be arranged that the
4.4.1 If the allowable discharge temperature is
thermal oil cannot penetrate the engine or the
exceeded, for oil fired heaters the heat supply must be
turbocharger in case of a leakage in the heater
switched off and interlocked by a temperature limiter.
respectively the cleaning medium heater cleaning.
4.4.2 If the allowable discharge temperature is
3.5 Heaters heated by exhaust gas are to be provided
exceeded for heaters heated by exhaust gas an alarm
with inspection apertures at the exhaust gas intake and
must be tripped.
outlet.
4.4.3 The discharge temperature of parallel-
3.6 Oil fired heaters are to be provided with
connected heating surfaces in the heater must be
inspection apertures for examination of the
monitored individually at the outlet of each heating
combustion chamber.
surface.
3.7 Sensors for the temperature measuring and With heaters heated by exhaust gas, individual
monitoring of heating surfaces connected in parallel 1. Approved materials

may be dispensed with if the maximum exhaust gas
temperature is lower than the maximum allowable Vessels are to be constructed of materials conforming
film temperature of the thermal oil. to Section 8, B.3., in the pressure vessel class
appropriate to the thermal oil system.
4.4.4 If the specified flue gas temperature of the
oil fired heaters is exceeded, the firing system must be 2. Testing of materials
switched off and be interlocked. The vessel materials are to be tested in accordance
with Section 8, B.4.
4.4.5 Heaters heated by exhaust gases are to be
equipped with a temperature switch which, when the 3. Design
maximum design exhaust gas temperature is
exceeded, signals by means of an alarm that the 3.1 All vessels, including those open to the
heating surfaces are badly fouled. atmosphere, are to be designed for a pressure of at
least 2 bar, unless provision has to be made for a
4.5 Flow monitoring higher working pressure. Excepted from this Rules are
tanks designed and dimensioned according to the
4.5.1 Precautions must be taken to ensure that the
Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 12.
maximum allowable film temperature of the thermal
3.2 An expansion vessel is to be placed at the
4.6 Leakage monitoring highest point in the system. The space provided for
expansion must be such that the increase in the vol-
4.6.1 Oil fired heaters are to be equipped with a ume of the thermal fluid at the maximum thermal fluid
leakage detector which, when actuated, shuts down temperature can be safely accommodated. The
and interlocks the firing system. If the oil fired heater following are to be regarded as minimum
is in "stand-by" the starting of the burner must be requirements: 1,5 times the increase in volume for
blocked if the leakage detector is actuated. volumes up to 1000 liters, and 1,3 times the increase
for volumes over 1000 liters. The volume is the total
4.6.2 Heaters heated by exhaust gas are to be
quantity of thermal oil contained in the equipment up
equipped with a leakage detector which, when
to the lowest liquid level in the expansion vessel.
actuated, trips an alarm, and a reference shall be
provided to reduce the power of engine, which 3.3 At the lowest point of the system a drainage tank
delivers exhaust gas to the heater. is to be located, the capacity of which is sufficient to
hold the volume of the largest isolatable system
4.7 Shut-off devices section.
4.7.1 Both oil fired heaters and heaters heated by 3.4 A separate storage tank is to be provided to
exhaust gas are to be fitted with shut-off devices and, make good any losses. The stock of thermal oil is to
if necessary with by-pass valves, which can also be be at least 40 % of the capacity of the system.
operated from a position outside the immediate area in Depending on the system design or the ships
which the heater is installed. geographical area of service, a smaller stock may be
acceptable.
4.7.2 It is advisable for the heater to be capable of
being drained and ventilated from the same position. 3.5 In exceptional cases, approval may be given for
the drainage tank and the storage tank to be combined.
Combined storage/drainage tanks are to be
4.8 Fire detection and fire distinguishing dimensioned that in addition to the stock of thermal
system oil, there is room for the contents of the largest
4.8.1 The temperature switch for fire detection, isolatable system section.
required according to Section 12, C.4.3 must be
4. Equipment of the expansion vessel
provided additionally to the temperature switch
according to 4.4.5 and shall be set to a temperature 50 The suitability of level indication device, safety and
to 80 C higher. If actuated alarm shall be given by monitoring devices (e.g. low level limiter) for marine
group alarm. use is to be proven by type testing.
4.8.2 Thermal oil heaters heated by exhaust gas are 4.1 Level indication
to be fitted with a permanent system for extinguishing
and cooling in the event of fire, e.g. a pressure water 4.1.1 The expansion vessel must be equipped with
spraying system. For details see Section 12, Table a liquid level gauge with a mark indicating the lowest
12.1 and paragraph L.2.2. allowable liquid level.
4.1.2 Level gauges made of glass or plastic are not
C. Vessels allowed.
4.2 Low level limiter and pre-alarm tank

4.2.1 A limit switch is to be fitted which shuts 5.1 Both tanks are to be equipped with an air
down and interlocks the firing system and switches duct and a drain.
off the circulating pumps if the liquid level falls below
the allowable minimum. 5.2 Air ducts are to be installed above the free
deck and are to be fitted with automatic air duct
4.2.2 Additionally a pre-alarm for low liquid level closing devices, see Section 11, R.1..
is to be installed, e.g. by means of an adjustable level
switch on the liquid level gauge which gives an early 5.3 Drains must be self-closing if the vessels are
warning of a falling liquid level (e.g. in the event of a located above the double bottom.
leakage). 5.4 For sounding pipes, see Section 11, R.2
4.2.3 An alarm is also to be provided for the 5.5 The storage of thermal oils is governed by
maximum liquid level. Section 10.
4.3 Quick drainage valve and emergency
shut-off valve
D. Equipment Items
4.3.1 For rapid drainage in case of danger, a quick
drainage valve is to be fitted directly to the vessel with 1. Acceptable materials
remote control from outside the space in which the
1.1 Materials for pipes, valves and pumps see
equipment is installed.
Section 11, B.
4.3.2 Automatic means must be provided to ensure
1.2 Grey cast iron is unacceptable for equipment
a sufficient air supply to the expansion vessel when
items in the hot thermal oil circuit and for safety
the quick drainage valve is operated.
valves.
4.3.3 Where the expansion vessel is installed out-
side the engine room, the quick drainage valve may be
replaced by an emergency shut-off device. Pipe, valve and pump materials are tested in
accordance with Section 11, B.3.
4.3.4 The opening of the quick drainage valve or
the operation of the emergency shut-off device, as 3. Equipment
applicable, must cause the automatic shutdown of the
firing system and the circulating pumps. 3.1 Pipes, valves and pumps are governed, in
addition to the following specifications, by the
4.4 Connection lines provisions of Section 11, Q.
4.4.1 A safety expansion line must connect the 3.2 The outlets of the circulating pumps are to be
system to the expansion vessel. This must be installed equipped with pressure gauges.
with a continuous positive gradient and must be di-
mensioned that a pressure rise of more than 10 % 3.3 It must be possible to shut down the
above the maximum allowable working pressure in circulating pumps by an emergency switch which can
the system is avoided. also be operated from a position outside the room in
which they are installed.
4.4.2 The expansion vessel is to be provided with
an overflow line leading to the drainage tank. 3.4 Devices for safe sampling are to be provided
at a suitable location in the thermal oil circuit.
4.4.3 The quick drainage line may be routed jointly
with the overflow line to the drainage tank. 3.5 Means of venting are to be provided at the
highest points of the isolatable section of the thermal
4.4.4 All parts of the system in which thermal oil oil system and drains or drainage devices at the lowest
can expand due to the absorption of heat from outside points.
must be safeguarded against excessive pressure. Any
thermal oil emitted is to be safely drained off. Venting and drainage via open funnels are to be
avoided.
4.5 Closed system
3.6 Fitting and draining pumps see Section 11,
4.5.1 In systems operating with an inert gas Q.1.2.
blanket, provision must be made for a constant gas
supply. 3.7 Electric equipment items are governed by the
4.5.2 The pressure in the expansion vessel must be Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV.
indicated and safeguarded against overpressure.
5. Equipment of the drainage and storage
E. Marking - Capacity
1. Heaters 2.2 For vessels with an open connection to the
atmosphere, the maximum allowable operating
The following information shall be stated on a durable pressure is to be shown on the nameplate as "0" or
manufacturer's nameplate permanently attached to the "Atm.", even though a gauge pressure of 2 bar is
heater: taken as the design basis in accordance with C.
- Manufacturer's name and address
- Serial number
- Year of manufacture F. Fire Precautions
- Maximum allowable heating power The fire precautions are governed by the provisions of
Section 12.
- Maximum allowable operating pressure
- Maximum allowable discharge temperature
- Minimum flow rate
G. Testing
- Liquid capacity
1. Heaters
2. Vessels
The thermal oil heaters are to be subjected to a
2.1 Vessels are to be fitted with nameplate structural inspection and a pressure test, at 1,5 times
bearing the following information: the maximum allowable operating pressure, at the
manufacturer's works.
- Manufacturer's name and address
2. Thermal oil system
- Serial number
After completion of installation on board, the system
- Year of manufacture including the associated monitoring equipment is to be
- Maximum allowable operating pressure subjected to pressure, tightness and operational tests
in the presence of the Society's surveyor.
- Maximum allowable operating temperature
Section 8 - Pressure Vessels 8-1
Section 8
Pressure Vessels
A. General be submitted to the Society in triplicate.

1. Scope The following details, in particular, are to be specified:
1.1 The following Rules apply to pressure vessels - Intended use, substance to be contained in
(gauge or vacuum pressure) for the operation of the the vessel
main propulsion plant and its auxiliary machinery.
- Working pressures and temperatures, if
They also apply to vessels and equipment necessary
necessary, secondary loads, volume of the
for the operation of the ship and to independent cargo
containers if these are subjected to internal or external indivuidual spaces
pressure in service. - Design details of the pressurized parts
Gas cylinders are subject to the requirements in G. - Materials to be used, welding details, heat
treatment.
1.2 The Rules apply to a limited extent only (see
1.4) to pressure vessels and equipment with a
maximum allowable working pressure of up to 1 bar
gauge and with a total capacity, without deducting the
volume of internal fittings, of not more than 1000 l
and likewise to pressure vessels with a capacity B. Materials
of 0,5 l.
1. General requirements
1.3 Ship's service pressure vessels manufactured
to recognized standards, e.g. pressure vessels for the 1.1 The materials of parts subject to pressure
water supply system and calorifiers and charge air must be suitable for the intended use and comply with
coolers, are not subject to these Rules with respect to the Rules for Material, Volume V.
their wall thicknesses or the materials used. In the case 1.2 Parts such as ribs or girths, holders, supports,
of charge air coolers an examination of the drawing brackets etc. welded directly to pressure vessel walls
can be dispensed with. are to be made of material compatible with that of the
1.4 The pressure vessels and equipment wall and of guaranteed weldability.
mentioned in 1.2 and 1.3 are demonstrated to the 1.3 Welded structures are also subject to the
Society's Surveyor for final inspection (constructional Rules for Welding, Volume VI B, Section 14.
test) and to be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test
in accordance with F.1. in his presence. 1.4 For corrosion protection, see C.7.
1.5 Hot water generators with outlet temperatures
above 120 C which are heated by solid, liquid or 2. Classes
gaseous fuels, by exhaust gases or by electrical means, 2.1 According to operating conditions, vessels
as well as to economizers heated by flue gas are are to be classed in accordance with Table 8.1.
subject to Section 7 Part I - Boilers.
Surface condensers are additionally subject to 2.2 Pressure vessels filled partly with liquids and
Section 3. partly with air or gases or which are blown out by air
Cargo containers and process pressure vessels for the or gases, such as pressure tanks in drinking water or
transport of liquified gases in bulk are additionally sanitary systems and reservoirs, are to be classified as
subject to Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in pressure vessels containing air or gas. For reservoirs
Bulk, Volume IX in hydraulic systems, see also Section 14, F.
For reservoirs in hydraulic systems, see also Section 3. Approved materials

14, F. - Hydraulic System.
The materials specified in Table 8.2 are to be used for
the classes stated in 2.
Drawing of pressure vessels and equipment containing
all the data necessary for their safety assessment are to
8-2 Section 8 - Pressure Vessels
Table 8.1 Pressure vessel classes
Operating medium Design pressure pc[bar]

Design temperature t[ C]
Liquefied gases (propane, butane, etc), all --- ---

toxic gas cargo.
Refrigerants Group 2 Group 1
Steam, pc > 16 pc 16 pc 7
Compressed air, or
Gases t > 300 t 300 t 170
Thermal oils
pc > 16 pc 16 pc 7
Liquid fuels or
t > 150 t 150 t 60
Water and oils pc > 40 pc 40 pc 16

or
t > 300 t 300 t 200
Pressure vessel class I II III
4. Testing of Materials 250 mm for service temperatures 300 C.

4.1 Tests in accordance with the Society's Rules
for Materials are prescribed for materials belonging to 4.3 For all parts not subject to testing of materials
pressure vessel class I used for: by the Society, alternative proof of the characteristics
of the material is to be provided, e.g. a work certificate
a) all parts subject to pressure with the as to the properties of the materials used.
exception of small parts such as welded pads,
reinforcing discs, branch pieces and flanges
of nominal diameter DN 32 mm,together
with forged or rolled steel valve heads for
compressed air receivers. C. Manufacturing Principles
b) forged flanges for service temperatures 1. Manufacturing processes applied to
> 300 C and for service temperatures materials
300 C if the product of PB [bar] and DN
[mm] is > 2500 or the nominal diameter is Manufacturing processes must be compatible with the
> DN 250. materials concerned. Materials whose grain structure
has been adversely affected by hot or cold working are
c) bolts of size M 30 (30 mm diameter metric to undergo heat treatment in accordance with the
thread) and above made of steels with a Rules for Materials, Volume V, Section 6, A.
tensile strength of more than 500 N/mm2 and
alloyed or heat-treated steel bolts larger than 2. Welding
size M 16.
The execution of welding work, the approval of
d) nuts of size M 30 and above made of steels welding shops and the qualification testing of welders
with a tensile strength of more than are to be in accordance with Rules for Welding,
600 N/mm2 Volume VI, Section 14 .
d) bodies of valves and fittings, see Section 11,
B. 3. End plates
3.1 The flanges of dished ends may not be
4.2 For pressure vessel class II parts subject to unduly hindered in their movement by any kind of fix-
mandatory testing, proof of material quality may take tures, e.g. fastening plates or stiffeners. Supporting
the form of work test certificates (DIN 50 049 - 3.1 B) legs may only be attached to dished ends which have
provided that the test results certified therein comply been adequately dimensioned for this purpose.
with the Society's Rules for Materials.
3.2. Where covers or ends are secured by hinged
Work test certificates may also be recognized for bolts, the latter are to be safeguarded against slipping
series-manufactured class I vessel components made off.
of unalloyed steels, e.g. hand-and manhole covers, and
for forged flanges and branch pipes where the product
of PB DN 2500 and the nominal diameter DN
Table 8.2 Approved materials (Part 1)
Grades of materials in accordance with

Materials the Rules for Materials, Volume V.
and
product form Pressure vessel class
I II III
Plate for boilers and pressure vessels, Section 3, E
Steel plate, Low-temperature steels, Section 3, I

shapes and bars
Austenic stainless steels, Section 3, G
Specially killed steels (with General structural steels, Section 3, C

testing of each rolled plate),
Section 3, C. Shipbuilding
---- steels, Section 3,
B.
Seamless and welded ferritic steel pipes, Section 4, C

Pipes
Low temperature steel pipes for design temperatures below -10 C, Section
4, D.
Austenitic stainless steel pipes, Section 4, E.
Forgings for boilers, pressure vessels and pipelines, Section 5, E.

Forgings
Low temperature steel forgings for design temperatures below - 10 C,
Section 5, F.
Forgings for general plant engineering,

----
Section 5, B.
Bolts Bolts for general plant engineering to recognized standards, e.g. DIN 267 or
and ISO 898
nuts
High temperature steels for design temperatures > 300 C
Low-temperature steels for design temperatures below -10 C
Table 8.2 Approved materials (Part 2)
Grades of materials in accordance with

Materials Rules for Materials, Volume V.
and
product form Pressure vessel class
I II III
Steel casting for boilers, pressure vessels and pipelines, Section 6, D.
High-temperature steel casting for design temperature > 300

Cast steel
Low temperature steel castings for design temperature below - 10 C,
Section 6, E
Steel casting for plant

engineering, Section 4, B.
Nodular cast iron, Section 7, B.

Nodular cast iron Ferritic grades only
Standard grades up to 300 C
Special grades up to 350 C
Grey cast iron At least grade GG 20,

Section 7, G.
not permitted Not permitted for vessels
in thermal oil systems
Copper and copper alloys Copper alloys, Section 10, A and B, within the following limits :
pipes and castings
working pressure up to 25 bar
copper-nickel alloys up to 300 C
high-temperature bronzes up to 260 C
others up to 200 C
Alluminium alloys plate, Aluminium alloys, Section 9, within th following limits :

pipes and castings
working pressure up to 25 bar
design temperature up to 200 C
only with the special agreement of the Society
4. Branch pipes tubes. The expanded length should not be less than
12 mm.
The wall thickness of branch pipes must be
dimensioned as to enable additional external stresses 6. Compensation for expansion
to be safely absorbed. The wall thickness of welded-in
branch pipes should be appropriate to the wall The design of vessels and equipment has to take
thickness of the part into which they are welded. The account of possible thermal expansion, e.g. between
walls must be effectively welded together. the shell and bundle of heating tubes.
Pipe connections in accordance with Section 11 are to 7. Corrosion protection

be provided for the attachment of piping. Vessels and equipment exposed to accelerated
corrosion owing to the medium which they contain
5. Tube plates (e.g. warm seawater) must be protected in a suitable
manner.
Tube holes must be carefully drilled and deburred.
Bearing in mind the tube-expansion procedure and the 8. Cleaning and inspection openings
combination of materials involved, the ligament width 8.1 Vessels and equipment are to be provided
must be such as to ensure the proper execution of the with inspection and access openings which should be
expansion process and the sufficient anchorage of the as large as possible and conveniently located. For the
minimum dimensions of these, see Section 7, C.9. pressure, due attention is to be given to hydrostatic
pressures if these cause the loads on the walls to be
In order to provide access with auxiliary or protective increased by 5 % or more.
devices, a manhole diameter of at least 600 mm is
generally required. The diameter may be reduced to 1.2.2 In the case of feedwater heaters located on
500 mm where the pipe socket height to be traversed the delivery side of the boiler feed pump, the maxi-
does not exceed 250 mm. mum allowable working pressure is the maximum
delivery pressure of the pump.
Vessels over 2,0 m long must have inspection
openings at each end at least. Where the vessel can be 1.2.3 For external pressures, the calculation is to be
entered, one access opening is sufficient. based on a vacuum of 1 bar or on the external pressure
at which the vacuum safety valves are actuated. In the
Pressure vessels with an inside diameter of more than
event of simultaneous positive pressure externally and
800 mm must be capable of being entered.
vacuum internally, or vice versa, the calculation is to
8.2 Manhole openings must be designed and assume an external or, respectively, internal pressure
sited in such a way that the vessels are accessible increased by 1 bar.
without undue difficulty. The edges of inspection and
1.2.4 In the case of cargo tanks for liquified gases,
access openings are to be stiffened where they could
the design pressure is to be determined in accordance
be deformed by tightening the cover-retaining bolts or
with Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in
crossbars.
Bulk, Volume IX. Vessels and equipment in re-
Special inspection and access openings are not frigerating installations are governed by Rules for
necessary where internal inspection can be carried out Refrigerating Installations, Volume VIII.
by removing or dismantling parts.
8.3 Inspection openings may be dispensed with 1.3 Allowable stress
where experience has proved the unlikelihood of The dimensions of components are governed by the
corrosion or deposits, e.g. in steam jackets. allowable stress perm [N/mm2]. With the exception of
Where vessels and equipment contain dangerous cargo containers and process pressure vessels as
substances (e.g. liquefied or toxic gases), the covers of described in Volume IX, the smallest value determined
inspection and access openings shall be secured not by the following expressions is to be applied in this case
crossbars but by bolted flanges. :
9. Identification and marking

1.3.1 Rolled and forged steels
Each pressure vessel is to be provided with a plate or
permanent inscription indicating the manufacturer, the For design temperatures up to 350 C
serial number, the year of manufacture, the capacity,
the maximum allowable working pressure and in case
of service temperatures of more than 50 oC or less than Rm,20o
where Rm,20 guaranteed minimum tensile
-10 oC the service temperature of the pressurized parts. 2,7
On smaller items of equipment, an indication of the strength [N/mm2] at room
working pressures is sufficient. temperature (may be dispensed
with in the case of recognized
fine-grained steels with ReH
360 N/mm2)
D. Design Calculations
ReH,20o
1. Principles where ReH,20 guaranteed yield strength or
1,7
1.1 The parts subject to pressure of pressure minimum value of the 0,2 %
vessels and equipment are to be designed, as far as proof stress 1 ) at room
they are applicable, by applying the formulae for temperature
steam boilers (Section 7) and otherwise in accordance
with the general rules of engineering practice. The
calculations are to be based on the details specified in ReH,t
where ReH,t guaranteed yield strength or
1.2 to 1.7. 1,6
1.2 Design pressure pc minimum value of the 0,2 %
proof stress1) at design
1.2.1 The design pressure is generally the maxi-
mum allowable working pressure (gauge). In
1
determining the maximum allowable working ) 1% proof stress in case of austenitic steel
temperatures above 50 C For the weakening factors v, see Section 7, D.2.

For design temperature above 350 C 1.6 Allowance for corrosion and wear
Rm,100000,t The allowance for corrosion and wear is generally
where Rm,l00000,t= mean value of the c = 1 mm. It may be dispensed with in the case of plate
1,5 thicknesses of 30 mm or more, stainless steels and
100000 h fatigue other corrosion-resistant materials.
strength at design
temperature t 1.7 Minimum wall thicknesses
Cargo containers and process pressure vessels for 1.7.1 The wall thickness of the shells and end
liquefied gases are governed by the values specified in plates should generally not be less than 3 mm.
Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk,
1.7.2 Where the walls of vessels are made from
Volume IX.
pipes of corrosion-resistant materials or for vessels
1.3.2 Cast materials and equipment in class III a minimum wall thickness
of 2 mm can be allowed, provided that the walls are
a ) C a s t s t e e l not subjected to external forces.
: 1.8 Other Rules applicable to dimensional
design
Where walls, or parts of walls, cannot be calculated by
b) Nodular cast iron : applying the formulae given in Section 7 or in
accordance with the general rules of engineering
practice, other methods are to be used to demonstrate
that the allowable stresses are not exceeded.
c) Grey cast iron :
E. Equipment and Installation

1.3.3 Non-ferrous metals 1. Shut-off devices
Shut-off devices must be fitted in pressure lines as
close as possible to the pressure vessel. Where several
a) Copper and copper alloys : pressure vessels are grouped together, it is not
necessary that each vessel should be capable of being
shut-off individually and means need only be provided
b) Aluminium : for shutting off the group. In general, not more than
three vessels should be grouped together. Starting air
receivers and other pressure vessels which are opened
With non-ferrous metals supplied in varying degrees in service must be capable of being shut-off
of hardness it should be noted that heating, e.g. at individually. Devices incorporated in piping, (e.g.
soldering or welding, can cause a reduction in water and oil separators) do not require shut-off
mechanical strength. In these cases, calculations are to devices.
be based on the mechanical strength in the
soft-annealed condition. 2. Pressure gauges
1.4 Design temperature 2.1 Each pressure vessel which can be shut-off
and every group of vessels with a shut-off device must
1.4.1 The design temperature to be applied is be equipped with a pressure gauge, also capable of
generally the maximum temperature of the medium to being shut-off. The measuring range and calibration
be contained. must extend to the test pressure with a red mark to
1.4.2 Where heating is by firing, exhaust gas or indicate the maximum allowable working pressure.
electrical means, Section 7, Table 7.3 is to be applied 2.2 Equipment need only be fitted with pressure
as appropriate. Where electrical heating is used, Table gauges when this is necessary for its operation.
7.3 applies only to directly heated surfaces.
3. Safety equipment
1.4.3 With service temperatures below 20 C, a
design temperature of at least 20 C is to be used in 3.1 Each pressure vessel which can be shut-off or
calculations. every group of vessels with a shut-off device must be
equipped with a spring-loaded safety valve which
1.5 Weakening factor cannot be shut-off and which closes again reliably
after blow-off.
Appliances for controlling pressure and temperature 4.1 Heated pressure vessels in which a fall of the
are no substitute for relief valves. liquid level can result in unacceptably high
temperatures in the vessel walls must be fitted with a
3.2 Safety valves must be designed and set in device for indicating the level of the liquid.
such a way that the max. allowable working pressure
cannot be exceeded by more than 10 %. Means must 4.2 Pressure vessels with a fixed minimum liquid
be provided to prevent the unauthorized alteration of level must be fitted with feed equipment of adequate
the safety valve setting. Valve cones must be capable size.
of being lifted at all times.
5. Sight glasses
3.3 Means of drainage which cannot be shut-off
are to be provided at the lowest point on the discharge Sight glasses in surfaces subject to pressure are
side of safety valves for gases, steam and vapours. allowed only if they are necessary for the operation of
Facilities must be provided for the safe disposal of the plant and other means of observation cannot be
hazardous gases, vapours or liquids discharging from provided. They should not be larger than necessary
safety valves. Heavy oil flowing out must be drained and should preferably be round. Sight glasses must be
off via an open funnel. protected against mechanical damage, e.g. by wire
mesh. With combustible, explosive or poisonous
3.4 Steam-filled spaces are to be fitted with a media, sight glasses must be fitted with closable
safety valve if the steam pressure inside them is liable covers.
to exceed the maximum allowable working pressure.
6. Draining and venting
3.5 Heated spaces which can be shut-off on both
6.1 Pressure vessels and equipment must be
the inlet and the outlet side are to be fitted with a
capable of being depressurized and completely
safety valve which will prevent an inadmissible
emptied or drained. Particular attention is to be given
pressure increase should the contents of the space
to the adequate drainage facilities of compressed air
undergo dangerous thermal expansion or the heating
vessels.
elements fail.
Besides a temperature controller, electrically heated 6.2 Suitable connections for the execution of
appliances are also to be equipped with a safety hydraulic pressure tests and a vent at the uppermost
thermal limiter. point must be provided.
3.6 Pressure water tanks are to be fitted with a 7. Installation

safety valve on the water side. A safety valve on the 7.1 When installing and fastening pressure
air side may be dispensed with if the air pressure vessels onboard ship care is to be taken to ensure that
supplied to the tank cannot exceed its maximum the loads due to the contents and the structural weight
allowable working pressure. of the vessel and to movements of the ship and
vibrations cannot rise to any excessive stress increases
3.7 Calorifiers are to be fitted with a diaphragm
in the vessel's surfaces. Where necessary, surfaces in
safety valve at the cold water inlet.
the region of supports and brackets are to be fitted
3.8 Rupture discs are permitted only with the with reinforcing plates.
consent of the Society in applications where their use
7.2 Pressure vessels and equipment are to be
is specially justified. They must be designed that the
installed in such a way as to provide for practicable
maximum allowable working pressure cannot be
all-round visual inspection and to facilitate the exe-
exceeded by more than 10 %.
cution of periodic tests. Where necessary, ladders or
Rupture discs must be provided with a guard to catch steps are to be fitted inside vessels.
the fragments of the rupture element and must be
protected against damage from outside. The fragments 7.3 Wherever possible, horizontal laying
of the rupture element shall not be capable of reducing compressed air receivers should be installed at an
the necessary section of the discharge aperture. angle and parallel to the fore-and-aft line of the ship.
The angle should be at least 10 (with the valve head
3.9 Pressure relief devices can be dispensed with at the top.) Where vessels are installed athwartships,
in the case of accumulators in pneumatic and hydraulic the angle should be greater.
control and regulating systems provided that the
pressure which can be supplied to these accumulators 7.4 Where necessary, compressed air receivers
cannot exceed the maximum allowable working are to be marked on the outside that they can be
pressure and that the pressure-volume product is PB installed onboard ship in the position necessary for
I 200. complete venting and drainage.
4. Liquid level indicators and feed 8. Cargo tanks for liquefied gases
equipment for heated pressure vessels For the equipment and installation of cargo tanks for
liquified gases, see Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied Following installation onboard ship, a check is carried
Gases in Bulk, Volume IX. out on the fittings of vessels and equipment and on the
arrangement and setting of safety appliances, and
operating tests are performed wherever necessary.
F. Tests
1. Pressure tests G. Gas Cylinders
1.1 After completion, pressure vessels and 1. General
equipment has to undergo constructional and
hydrostatic tests. No permanent deformation of the For the purposes of these Rules, gas cylinders are
walls may result from these tests. bottles with a capacity of not more than 150 l with an
outside diameter of 420 mm and a length of 2000
During the hydrostatic test, the loads specified below mm which are charged with gases in special filling
may not be exceeded: stations and are thereafter brought on board ship
for materials with a for materials without a where the pressurized gases are used (see also
definite yield point definite yield point Section 12).
2. Manufacture
2.1 Gas cylinders must be manufactured by
established methods using suitable materials and must
be designed that they are well able to withstand the
1.2 The test pressure PP for pressure vessels and expected loads.
equipment is generally 1,5 times the maximum
2.2 The manufacturing process is subject to
allowable working pressure PB, subject to a minimum
approval. For this purpose, the following documents
of PB + 1 bar. Where the working pressure exceeds
are to be submitted:
200 bar, the test pressure to be applied is PB + 100
bar. For working pressures below atmospheric 2.2.1 A description of the manufacturing process
pressure, the test pressure is 2 bar gauge. For the test with indicating the production controls normally
pressures to be applied to steam condensers, see carried out in the manufacturer's works.
Section 3, Part I.
2.2.2 Details of the materials to be used (guide
1.3 All pressure vessels and equipment located in analysis, yield point, tensile strength, impact strength,
the fuel oil pressure lines of boiler firing equipment heat treatment).
are to be tested on the oil side with a test pressure of
1,5 times the working pressure, subject to a minimum 2.2.3 Drawings in triplicate with details of the
of 5 bar. On the steam side, the test is to be performed stamped marking to be applied.
as specified in 1.2. 3. Design calculation
1.4 Pressure vessels in water supply systems 3.1 Terms used
which correspond to Standard DIN 4810 are to be
tested at pressures of 5,2 bar, 7,8 bar or 13,0 bar as pc [bar] design pressure (specified test
specified in the Standard. pressure)
1.5 Air coolers (e.g. supercharge air coolers) are s [mm] wall thickness
to be tested on the water side at 1,5 times the
Da [mm] outside diameter of gas cylinder
maximum allowable working pressure, subject to a
minimum of 4 bar. ReH [N/mm2] guaranteed upper yield point
1.6 Pressure tests with media other than water [N/mm2] guaranteed lower yield point
may be agreed to in special cases.
[N/mm2] guaranteed 0,2 % proof stress
2. Tightness tests
[N/mm2] guaranteed minimum tensile
For vessels and equipment containing dangerous sub- strength
stances (e.g. liquefied gases), the Society reserves the
right to call for a special test of gastightness.
[N/mm2] yield point needed as compara-
3. Testing after installation on board tive value for the determination
of R
either Re = ReH
or Re = Rp0,2
[N/mm2] in each case the smaller of the

following two values:
1) Re
2) - 0,75 Rm for normalized or
normalized and tempered
cylinders
- 0,90 Rm for quenched and
tempered cylinders
[N/mm2] allowable stress =
[-] design coefficient for dished

ends (see Section 7, D.4.) Fig. 8.1
v [-] weakening factor (see Section

7,D.2) 5.1.2 Quenched and tempered cylinders
Two sample cylinder from each 100 originating from
3.2 Cylindrical surfaces one melt and one heat treatment.
! " # 5.2 Tests

" " $ # 5.2.1 One longitudinal tensile test specimen, three
transverse bending test specimens and a set of ISO
3.3 Dished ends V-type notched bar impact test specimens are to be
taken from the sample cylinders according to 5.1.1 and
! " #
" 5.1.2. The notched bar impact test specimens are to be
tested at -20 C.
"
3.4 Spherical ends 5.2.2 The second test bottle is to be subject to a

bursting test according to 5.2.9.
! " #
5.2.3 In the case of lots of less than 400 pieces of
normalized and/or 200 pieces of quenched and
" " $ # tempered bottles, only every other lot is to be
subjected to a bursting test.
The conditions applicable to dished ends are shown in
the Figure 8.1: 5.2.4 The cylindrical wall thickness of all sample
cylinders is to be measured in transverse planes at
4. Test pressure three levels (neck, middle and base). The end plate is
also to be sawn through and the thickness measured.
The specified test pressure for CO2 bottles with a
filling factor of 0,66 kg/l is 250 bar gauge. For other 5.2.5 Examination of the inner surface of the neck
gases, the test pressure may be agreed with the and bottom portions of the sample cylinders to detect
Society. possible manufacturing defects.
5. Testing of gas cylinders 5.2.6 Hydrostatic testing of all cylinders submitted
for testing.
5.1 Sampling
5.2.7 Final visual inspection of cylinders, including
5.1.1 Normalized cylinders
a check on the weight and volumetric capacity of
Two sample cylinders from each 400 originating from about 10 % of the cylinders submitted for testing.
one melt and one heat treatment. Check of the stamped marking.
5.2.8 The manufacturer must establish the volu-
metric capacity and weight of each cylinder. Cylinders 6. Marking and identification
which have been quenched and tempered are to be
submitted by the manufacturer to 100 % hardness Each gas cylinder is to be marked with the following:
testing. - Name or trade name of the manufacturer
5.2.9 Test bottles intended to be subjected to a - Serial number
bursting test must be clearly identified as to the lot
from which they have been taken. - Type of gas
5.2.9.1 The hydrostatic bursting test is to be carried - Design strength value [N/mm2]
out in two subsequent stages, by means of a testing - Capacity [l]
device enabling the pressure to be continuously
increased up to bursting of the bottle and the pressure - Test pressure [bar]
curve to be recorded as s function of time. The test
- Empty weight [kg]
must be carried out at room temperature.
- Date of test
5.2.9.2 During the first stage, the pressure has to
continuously increase, up to the value at which plastic - Test stamp
deformation starts; the pressure increase must not
exceed 5 bar/sec. 7. Recognition of equivalent tests
Once the point of plastic deformation has been Tests verified by other bodies may be recognized
reached (second stage), the pump capacity must not provided that they are established as being equivalent
exceed double the capacity of the first stage; it has to those prescribed above.
then to be kept constant until bursting of the bottle.
Section 9 - Oil Firing Equipment 9-1
Section 9
Oil Firing Equipment
A. General 4.2 Observation openings must be provided at

suitable points on the boiler or burner through which
1. Scope the ignition flame, the main flame and the lining can
1.1 The oil firing equipment of main and be observed.
auxiliary boilers and thermal oil heaters is subject to
4.3 Fuel leaking from potential leak points is to
the Rules in B.
be safely collected in oiltight trays and drained away
1.2 The oil burners of hot water boilers, oil fired (cf. Section 12, B.6.1)
heaters and small heating appliances which are located
in the engine room or in spaces containing equipment 5. Simultaneous operation of oil firing
important to the operation of the machinery are subject equipment and internal combustion
to the Rules specified under C. machinery
1.3 Where oil burners are to be used additionally The operation of oil firing equipment in spaces
for burning waste oil and oil sludge, the necessary containing other plants with a high air consumption,
measures are to be agreed with the Head Office of e.g. internal combustion engines or air compressors,
Biro Klasifikasi Indonesia in each case. must not be impaired by variations in the air pressure.
1.4 In addition, the following general
requirements of this section are mandatory for all
installations and appliances.
B. Oil Firing Equipment for Boilers and
2. Documents for approval Thermal Oil Heaters
A sectional drawing of each type of burner together 1. General
with a description of its mode operation and also
1.1 Boilers and thermal oil heaters without
circuit diagrams and equipment lists of the electrical
constant and direct supervision are to be operated with
control system are to be submitted to the Society in
automatic firing systems.
triplicate for approval. Provided that they meet
recognized standards, equipment covered by C is 1.2 The facility is to be provided for manual
generally not subject to verification of drawings. operation (emergency operation). Flame monitoring
must remain operative even in manual operation.
3. Approved fuels 1.3 Manual operation demands constant and
See Section 1, D.12. direct supervision of the system.
1.4 Safety devices may only be bridged by means
4. Boiler equipment and burner of key-operated switch.
arrangement
4.1 Oil burners are to be designed, fitted and 2. Preheating of fuel oil
adjusted in such a manner as to prevent flames from
2.1 Fuel oil preheating equipment must enable
causing damage to the boiler surfaces or tubes which
the steam boilers to be started up with the facilities
border the combustion space. Boiler parts which might
available on board.
otherwise suffer damage are to be protected by
refractory lining. 2.2 Any controllable heat source may be used to
preheat the fuel oil. Preheating with open flame is not
The firing system shall be arranged as to prevent
permitted.
flames from blowing back into the boiler or engine
room and allow unburnt fuel to be safely drained.
9-2 Section 9 - Oil Firing Equipment
2.3 Fuel oil circulating lines are to be provided to 3.5 Suitable devices, e.g. relief valves, must be
enable the preheating of the fuel oil prior to the fitted to prevent any excessive pressure increase in the
start-up of the boilers. fuel oil pump or pressurized fuel lines.
Where only steam-operated preheaters are present, 3.6 By means of a hand-operated, quick-closing
fuel which does not require preheating must be device mounted at the fuel oil manifold it must be
available to start up the boilers. possible to isolate the fuel supply to the burners from
the pressurized fuel lines. Depending on design and
When a change is made from heavy to light oil, the method of operation, a quick-closing device may also
light oil may not be passed through the heater or be be required directly in front of each burner.
excessively heated.
4. Safety equipment
2.4 The preheating temperature is to be selected
so as to avoid excessive foaming, the formation of 4.1 The correct sequence of safety functions
vapour or gas and also the formation of deposits on when the burner is started up or shut down is to be
the heating surfaces. ensured by means of a burner control box.
Where fuel oil is preheated in tanks at atmospheric 4.2 Two automatic shut-off devices must be
pressure, the requirements in Section 10, B.5. are to be provided at the fuel oil supply line of the burner.
complied with.
For the fuel oil supply line to the ignation burner one
The design and construction of pressurized fuel oil automatic shut-off device will be sufficient, if the fuel
heaters are subject to the requirements in Section 8. oil pump is switched off after iganation of the burner.
2.5 Temperature or viscosity control must be 4.3 In an emergency it must be possible to close
done automatically. For monitoring purposes, a the automatic shut-off devices from the boiler control
thermometer or viscosimeter is to be fitted to the fuel platform and - where applicable - from the control
oil pressure line in front of the burners. room.
2.6 Should the oil temperature or viscosity 4.4 The automatic shut-off device must not
deviate above or below the permitted limits, an alarm release the oil supply to the burner during start up and
system must signal this fact to the boiler operating must interrupt the oil supply during operation
platform. (automatic restart possible) if one of the following
faults occur :
3. Pumps, pipelines, valves and fittings a) - Failure of the required pressure of the
3.1 Oil fired main boilers must be equipped with atomizing medium (steam and
at least two fuel oil service pumps, two fuel oil heaters comprssed-air atomizers),
(cf. 1.1) and change-over duplex filters in the pump - Failure of the oil pressure needed for
suction and discharge lines. The pumps and heaters atomization (pressure atomizers),
are to be rated and arranged in such a way that the oil
firing equipment remains operational even one unit Insufficient rotary speed of spinning cup
should fail. or primary air pressure to low (rotary
atomizer),
This also applies to oil fired auxiliary boilers and
thermal oil heaters the event of failure of a single unit, b) Failure of combustion air supply
other means are provided for maintaining continuous c) Failure of control power supply
operation at sea.
d) Failure of induced-draught fan or insufficient
3.2 Fuel oil service pumps may be connected opening of exhaust gas register
only to the fuel system.
e) Burner retracted or pivoted out of position.
3.3 The requirements in 3.1 apply in analogous
manner to fuel oil gravity tanks. 4.5 The fuel oil supply must be interrupted by
closing the automatic shut-off devices and interlocked
3.4 Pipelines must be permanently installed and by means of the burner control box if :
joined by oiltight welds, oiltight thread connections of
approved design or with flanged joints. Flexible pipes a) a flame does not develop within the safety
may be used only directly in front of the burner to period following start-up (cf. 5.8),
enable the burner to swivel are to be retracted. They
must be installed with adequate bending radii and must b) the flame is extinguished during operation
be protected against inadmissible heating. For non- and an attempt to restart the burner within the
metallic flexible tubes and expansion compensators, safety period is unsuccessful (cf. 5.8), or
see Section 11, U.
c) limit switches are actuated.
4.6 The return line of burners with return lines 5.5 Where dampers or similar devices are fitted
must also be provided with an automatic shut-off de- in the air supply duct, care must be taken to ensure that
vice. The shut-off device in the return line may be air for purging the combustion chamber is always
dispensed with if the return line is not under pressure available unless the oil supply is necessarily
and no oil is able to flow back when the burner is interrupted.
shut-down.
5.6 Where an installation comprises several
4.7 Oil firing equipment with electrically oper- burners supplied with combustion air by a common
ated components must also be capable of being shut- fan, each burner must be fitted with a shut-off device
down by an emergency switch located outside the (e.g. a flap). Means must be provided for retaining the
space in which the equipment is installed. In analo- shut-off device in position and its position must be
gous manner, means must be provided for a remote indicated.
shut-down of steam-operated fuel oil service pumps.
5.7 Every burner must be equipped with an
4.8 The suitability of safety and monitoring igniter. The ignition is to be initiated immediately after
devices (e.g. burner control box, flame monitoring purging. In the case of low-capacity burners of
device, automatic shut-off device and limiters) for monobloc type (permanently coupled oil pump and
marine use is to be proven by type testing. fan) ignition may begin with start-up of the burner
unless the latter is located in the roof of the chamber.
5. Design and construction of burners1)
5.8 Every burner is to be equipped with a safety
5.1 The type and design of the burner and its device for flame monitoring. This appliance must
atomizing and air turbulence equipment must ensure comply with the following safety periods2) on burner
virtually complete combustion. start-up or when the flame is extinguished in
5.2 Oil burners must be designed and constructed operation:
that personnel cannot be endangered by moving parts. On start-up 5 seconds
This applies particularly to blower intake openings.
The latter must also be protected to prevent the entry In operation 1 second.
of drip water.
Where this is justified, longer safety periods may be
5.3 The high-voltage ignition system must be permitted for burners with an oil throughput of up to
automatically disconnected when the oil burner is 30 kg/h. Measures must be taken to ensure that the
retracted or pivoted out of the operating position. A safety period for the main flame is not prolonged by
catch is to be provided to hold the burner in the swung the action of the igniter (e.g. pilot burners).
out position.
5.9 Where burners are blown through after
5.4 Steam atomizers must be fitted with shut-down, provision must be made for the safe
appliances to prevent fuel oil entering the steam ignition of the residual oil ejected.
system.
6. Purging of combustion chamber and flues,
exhaust gas ducting
1 6.1 The combustion chamber and flues are to be

) adequately purged with air prior to every burner
start-up. A warning sign is to be mounted to this
effect.
6.2 A threefold renewal of the total air volume of
the combustion chamber and the flue gas ducts up to
the funnel inlet is considered sufficient. Normally
purging shall be performed with the total flow of
combustion air for at least 15 seconds. It shall,
however, in any case be performed with at least 50 %
of the volume of combustion air needed for the
maximum heating power of the firing system.
6.3 Bends and dead corners in the exhaust gas
ducts are to be avoided.
Dampers in uptakes and funnels should be avoided.
!
2
) ! "
9-4 Section 9 - Oil Firing Equipment
Any damper which may be fitted must be installed that 1.5 The plant must also be capable of being shut
no oil supply is possible when the cross-section of the down by means of an emergency switch located
purge line is reduced below a certain minimum value. outside the space in which the plant is installed.
The position of the damper must be indicated at the
boiler control platform. 2. Evaporation burners
6.4 Where an induced-draught fan is fitted, an 2.1 The burner design (e.g. dish or pot-type
interlocking system . must prevent start-up of the burner) must ensure that the combustion of the fuel oil
firing equipment before the fan has started. A cor- is as complete as possible at all load settings.
responding interlocking system is also to be provided At the maximum oil level and with all possible angles
for any flaps which may be fitted to the funnel of inclination of the ship (see Section 1, C.1.) no fuel
opening. oil may spill from the combustion vessel or its air
7. Electrical equipment holes. Parts of the equipment important for the
operation, monitoring and cleaning of the plant must
Electrical controls, safety appliance and their types of be easily accessible.
enclosure must comply with the Rules for Electrical
Installations, Volume IV and Rules for Automation, 2.2 Burners must be fitted with regulators
Volume VII. ensuring a virtually constant flow of fuel oil at the
selected setting. A safety device is required to prevent
8. Testing the oil in the combustion vessel from rising above the
maximum permitted level. The regulators must
8.1 The installation on board is to be subjected to function reliably despite all the movements and
operational tests including, in particular, determination inclinations of the ship at sea.
of the purging time required prior to burner start-up.
Satisfactory combustion at all load settings and the 2.3 Burners are normally to be equipped with a
reliable operation of the safety equipment are to be blower to ensure a sufficient supply of combustion air.
checked. Should the blower fail, the oil supply must be cut off
automatically. Heating equipment with burners not
8.2 After installation, the pressurized fuel oil supplied by a blower may only be installed and
system is to be subjected to a pressure and tightness operated in the spaces mentioned in A.1. providing a
test; cf. Section 11, B.4. supply of air adequate to maintain trouble-free
combustion is guaranteed.
3. Oil fired heaters
C. Oil Burners for Hot Water Heaters,
Oil-Fired Heaters and Small Heating 3.1 Oil fired heaters having an evaporation
Appliances burner without blower may be installed in the spaces
mentioned in A.1. only if their thermal power does not
1. Atomizing burners exceed 42 000 kJ/h. They may only be operated,
however, if items of equipment with a high air
1.1 Fully and semi-automatic atomizing burners consumption such as internal combustion engines or
must meet the requirements of DIN 4787 or must be air compressors do not take air from the same space.
recognized as equivalent. Adequate purging by means Compliance is to be ensured by an appropriate
of a fan must be ensured prior to each ignition, directive in the operating instructions and by a
effected by the controls. In general, a purging period warning sign fixed to such heaters. Attention is also to
of at least 5 seconds may be deemed sufficient. Where be drawn to the danger of blowbacks when the burner
the flue gas ducting is unfavourable, the purging time is re-ignited in the hot heater.
is to be extended accordingly.
3.2 Oil fired heaters must comply with the
1.2 Electrical equipment items and their types of requirements of DIN EN 1 or other recoqnized
enclosure must comply with Rules for Electrical standars and be tested and approved accordingly or
Installations, Volume IV. High-voltage igniters must must be recoqnized as equivalent. Control and safety
be adequately protected against unauthorized equipment must ensure the safe and reliable operation
interference. of the burner despite all the movements and
1.3 Where dampers or similar devices are inclinations of the ship at sea.
mounted in the air supply line, care must be taken to 3.3 Smoke tubes and uptakes must have a
ensure that air is available in all circumstances for cross-section at least equal to that of the flue gas duct
purging the combustion space. on the heater and must follow as direct a path as
1.4 Pivoted oil burners may be swivelled out only possible. Horizontal flue gas ducts are to be avoided.
after the fuel oil has been cut off. The high-voltage Funnel (stack) outlets are to be fitted with safety
ignition equipment must likewise be disconnected appliances (e.g. Meidinger discs) to prevent
when this happens. downdraughts.
chamber and flue gas ducts.

4. Small oil fired heaters for heating air
4.1 Depending on their mode of operation, the 4.2 Heating ducts are to be competently installed
requirements set out in paragraphs C.1 to C.3 apply in in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and
analogous manner to these units. operating instructions, and reductions in cross-section,
throttling points and sharp bends are to be avoided as
Equipment which does not entirely meet the not to incur the danger of the equipment overheating.
requirements of the standards mentioned can be A thermostatic control must shut the appliance down
allowed provided that its functional safety is assured in the event of overheating.
by other means, e.g. by an explosion-proof combustion
Section 10 - Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating, Hydraulic and Thermal Oils
as well as Oil Residues 10-1
S e c t i o n 10
Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating, Hydraulic and Thermal Oils

as well as Oil Residues
A. General provided for this purpose. This requirement does not

apply where the preheating is carried out with the
1. Scope cooling water of the main or auxiliary engines. Other
arrangement are subject to the approval of BKI.
The following requirements apply to the storage of
liquid fuels, lubricating, hydraulic and thermal oils as 2.1.3 Fuel tanks are to be separated by cofferdams
well as to oil residues. from tanks containing lubricating, hydraulic, thermal
or edible oil as well as from tanks containing boiler
feedwater, condensate or drinking water. Tanks for
2. Definitions used oil, which will not be more used on board are
Service tanks are settling tanks and daily service excluded from this requirement
tanks which supply consumers direct. 2.1.4 On small ships the arrangement of cofferdam
Changeable tanks are tanks which may be used according to 2.1.3 may, with the approval of Biro
alternatively for liquid fuels or ballast water. Change- Klasifikasi Indonesia, be dispensed with, provided that
able tanks are to be treated as fuel tanks. the common boundaries between the tanks are
arranged in accordance with Rules for Hull
Constructions, Volume II, Section 12.A.5.2.
2.1.5 Fuel oil tanks adjacent to lubricating oil
circulating tanks are in addition to the requirements
B. Storage of Liquid Fuels Rules for Hull Constructions, Volume II, Section 12,
to be provided with suitable means, e.g. level alarms
1. General Safety Precautions for Liquid by which it can be ensured that the maximum level in
Fuels the fuel oil tanks will not exceed the lowest operation
level in the lubricating oil circulating tanks.
Tanks and fuel pipes are to be so located and equipped
that fuel cannot spread either inside the ship or on
deck and cannot be ignited by hot surfaces or electrical 2.2 Location of fuel tanks
equipment. The tanks are to be fitted with air and
2.2.1 Fuel tanks may be located above engines,
overflow pipes as safeguards against overpressure (see
boilers, turbines and other equipment with a high
Section 11, R.).
surface temperature (above 220 C) only if adequate
spill trays are provided below such tanks and they are
2. Distribution, Location and Capacity of protected against heat radiation. Surface temperature
Fuel Tanks of the elements without insulation and lagging will be
considered.
2.1 Distribution of fuel tanks
2.2.2 Fuel tanks are to be designed as an integral
2.1.1 The fuel supply is to be stored in several
part of the ship's structure. If this is not possible, the
tanks so that, even in the event of damage to the
tanks shall be located adjacent to an engine room
bottom of one of the tanks, the fuel supply will not be
bulkhead and the tank top of the double bottom. The
entirely lost.
arrangement of free standing fuel tanks inside engine
On passanger ships and on cargo ships of 400 GRT or rooms is to be avoided. Tank locations which do not
over, no fuel tanks or tanks for the transport of conform to the preceding rules require the approval of
combustible liquids may be arranged forward of the BKI.
collision bulkhead.
2.1.2 Provision is to be made to ensure that internal
2.3 Tanks adjacent to refrigerated cargo holds are
combustion engines and boiler plants operating on
subject to the Rules for Refrigerating Installations,
heavy oil can operate temporarily on fuel which does
Volume VIII.
not need to be preheated. Appropriate tanks are to be
10-2 Section 10 - Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating, Hydraulic and Thermal Oils
as well as Oil Residues
2.4 A special fuel supply is to be provided for the 3.3.5 Sounding pipes of fuel tanks may not ter-
prime movers of the emergency source of electrical minate in accommodation or passenger spaces, nor
power : shall they terminate in spaces where the risk of igni-
tion of spillage from the sounding pipes might arise.
On cargo ships the fuel supply must be suf-
ficient for at least 18 hours. This applies in 3.3.6 On passenger ships, sounding pipes and oil
analogous manner to the motors driving level indicating devices may be permitted only where
emergency fire pumps. they do not require penetration below the tank top and
where their failure or over-filling of the tanks cannot
On passenger ships, the fuel supply must be result in the release of fuel.
sufficient for at least 36 hours. A reduction
may be approved for passenger ships 3.3.7 Sounding pipes should terminate outside
employed in regular, short voyages (in machinery spaces. However, where this is not
territorial waters), but such a supply must be possible, the following requirements are to be met:
sufficient for at least 12 hours.
a) Oil-level gauges are to be provided in
On passenger ships, the fuel tank must be located addition to the sounding pipes,
above the bulkhead deck, and on cargo ships above the
uppermost continuous deck, and in both cases outside b) Sounding pipes are either to terminate in
the engine and boiler rooms and aft of the collision locations remote from ignition hazards or
bulkhead. they are to be fitted with effective screens to
prevent the oil fuel in the case of spillage
By the arrangement and/or heating of the fuel tank, the through the termination of sounding pipe
emergency diesel equipment must be kept in a state of from coming into contact with a source of
readiness even when the outside temperature is low. ignition,
3. Fuel Tank Fittings and Mountings c) The termination of sounding pipes are to be
fitted with self-closing shut-off devices and
3.1 For filling and suction lines see Section 11, self-closing control devices.
G.; for air, overflow and sounding pipes, see Section
11, R. 4. Attachment of Mountings and Fittings to
Fuel Tanks
3.2 Service tanks are to be so arranged that water
and residues can settle out despite the movement of 4.1 Appliances, mountings and fittings not
the ship at sea. forming part of the fuel tank equipment may be fitted
to tank surfaces only by means of intermediate
Fuel tanks located above the double bottom are to be supports. Only components forming part of the tank
fitted with water drains with self-closing shutoff equipment may be fitted to free-standing tanks.
valves.
4.2 Valves and pipe connections are to be at-
3.3 Tank Gauges tached to strengthening flanges welded to the tank
3.3.1 The following tank gauges are permitted: surfaces. Holes for attachment bolts must not be
drilled in the tank surfaces.
- Sounding pipes
Instead of strengthening flanges, short, thick pipe
- Oil level indicating devices (type-tested) flange connections may be welded into the tank sur-
- Oil gauges with flat glasses and self-closing faces.
shut off valves at the connections to the tank 5. Tank Heating System
and protected against external damage
5.1 Tanks are to be provided with a system for
3.3.2 For fuel storage tanks the provision of warming up viscous fuels. It must be possible to
sounding pipes is sufficient. The sounding pipes may control the heating of the individual tank.
be dispensed with, if the tanks are fitted with oil level
indicating devices which have been typetested by BKI. For ships with ice class the tank heating is to be so
arranged that the fuel oil remain capable of being
pumped under all ambient conditions.
3.3.3 Fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to Heating coils are to be appropriately subdivided or
be fitted with oil level gauges according to 3.3.1. arranged in groups with their own shut off valves.
3.3.4 Sight glasses and oil gauges fitted directly on Where necessary, suction pipes should be provided
the side of the tank and round glass oil gauges are not with a heating arrangement.
permitted.
5.2 At the tank outlet, heating coils are to be
Section 10 - Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating, Hydraulic and Thermal Oils
as well as Oil Residues 10-3
fitted with means of closing together with an upstream bedplate, are to be taken to ensure that the entire
device for testing the condensate for oil. Heating coil contents of the tank remain in circulation. Limber
connections in tanks should normally be welded. The holes should be located as near the bottom of the tank
provision of detachable connections is permitted only as possible. Suction pipe connections should be placed
in exceptional cases. as far as is practicable from the oil drain pipe so that
neither air nor sludge can be sucked up irrespective of
Inside tanks, heating coils are to be supported in such the inclining position of the ship.
a way that they cannot be subjected to impermissible
stresses due to vibration, particularly at their points of 3.3 Lubricating oil drain tanks are to be equipped
clamping. with sufficient vent pipes.
5.3 Tanks for fuel which requires preheating are
to be fitted with thermometers and, where necessary,
with thermal insulation. D. Storage of thermal oils.
5.4 For the materials, wall thicknesses and 1. For the arrangement of the tanks B.2.2.1 and
pressure testing of heating coils, see Section 11. the Rules for Hull Constructions, Volume II, Section
6. Hydraulic Pressure Tests. 8 are be applied analogously.
Fuel tanks are to be tested for tightness in accordance 2. Tank fittings and mountings
with the Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II. 2.1 For tank measuring devices for thermal oil
7. Fuels with a flash point of 60 C tanks, see B.3.3 and Section 7 - II. Expansion tanks
are to be fitted with type-tested level indicating
For the storage of liquid fuels with a flash point of devices.
60 C, see Section 1, D.12.
2.2 For the mounting of appliances and fittings
on the tanks, B.4 is to be applied.
C. Storage of Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils 2.3 Fill and suction lines from thermal oil tanks,
1. Tank arrangement see Section 11, H.2.2.
For the arrangement of the tanks, B.2.2.1 and Rules

for Hull Constructions, Volume II, Section 8, B.5. 1. E. Storage of Oil Residues
are to be applied analogously.
1. Sludge tanks
2. Tank fittings and mountings
1.1 Sludge tanks of adequate capacity are to be
2.1 Fill and suction lines from lubricating oil and provided.
hydraulic oil tanks, see Section 11, H.
1.2 Capacity of sludge tanks
2.2 For tank sounding devices for oil tanks, see
B.3.3.1, B.3.3.4 and B.3.3.6. The capacity of sludge tanks shall be such that they are
able to hold the residues arising form the operation of
2.3 For the mounting of appliances and fittings the ship having regard to the maximum duration of a
on the tanks, B.4 is to be applied. voyage.
3. Capacity and Construction of Tanks 2. Fittings and mountings of sludge tanks
3.1 Lubricating oil drain tanks should be 2.1 Sludge tanks are to be fitted with means of
sufficiently large to ensure that the dwelling time of heating in accordance with B.5. The heating system is
the oil is long enough for the expulsion of air bubbles, to be so designed that the contents of the sludge tanks
the settling out of residues etc. With a maximum remain capable of being pumped. This condition is
permissible filling level of about 85 %, the tanks must considered to be satisfied if the contents of the tanks
be large enough to hold at least the lubricating oil can be heated to 60 C.
contained in the entire circulation system including the
contents of gravity tanks. 2.2 For tank sounding devices, B.3.3.2 and
B.3.3.5 are to be applied.
3.2 Measures, such as the provision of baffles or
limber holes consistent with structural strength 2.3 For air pipes, see Section 11, R
requirements, particularly relating to the machinery
Section 11 - Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps 11-1
A. General - Lubricating oil systems

- Starting air, control air and working air
1. Scope systems
These Rules apply to piping systems, including valves, - Exhaust gas systems
fittings and pumps, which are necessary for the
operation of the main propulsion plant together with - Bilge systems
its auxiliaries and equipment. They also apply to - Ballast systems
piping systems used in the operation of the ship whose
failure could directly or indirectly impair the safety of - Air, overflow and sounding pipes including
ship or cargo, and to piping systems which are dealt details of filling pipe cross sections
with in other sections of the Rules.
- Overflow systems
Cargo and process pipelines on ships for the carriage
of liquefied gases in bulk are additionally subject to - Sanitary water piping (fresh water, seawater)
the provisions of the Rules for Ships Carrying - Sanitary/sewage discharge piping
Liquefied Gases in Bulk, Volume IX., Cargo pipelines
for the carriage of chemicals in bulk are additionally - Drinking water systems
subject to the provisions of the Rules for Ships - Equipment for the treatment and storage of
Carrying Dangerous Chemical in Bulk, Volume X. bilge water and fuel oil residues.
Engine exhaust gas lines are additionally subject to
Section 2, G.4. 2.1.3 For remotely controlled valves:
Gas welding equipment is subject to the "Guidelines - Diagrammatic piping plans and diagrammatic
for the Design, Equipment and Testing of Gas plans of the location of piping and control
Welding Equipment on Seagoing Ships". stands in the ship
2 Documents for Approval - Diagrammatic plans and electrical circuit
2.1. The following drawings/documents are to be diagrams of the control stations and power
submitted for approval in triplicate1) units, drawings of as well as the remotely
controlled valves, control stands and the
2.1.1 Engine room arrangement plan corresponding pressure accumulators.
2.1.2 Diagrammatic plans of the following piping 2.1.4 For steam lines with working temperatures
systems including all the details necessary for > 400 C, the corresponding stress calculations to-
approval (e.g. Iists of valves, fittings and pipes) : gether with isometric data are to be submitted.
- Steam lines 3. Pipe classes
- Boiler feed water systems For the testing of pipes, selection of joints, welding
and heat treatment, pipes are subdivided into three
- Condensate systems classes as indicated in Table 11.1.
- Thermal oil systems
- Fuel systems (bunkering, transfer and supply
lines)
B. Materials, Testing
- Seawater cooling systems
1. General
- Fresh water cooling systemss (HT, NT)
Materials must be suitable for the proposed applica-
tion and comply with the Society's Rules for Materials,
Volume V.
1
) For ships flying Indonesian flag in quadruplicate, one of
which intended for Indonesian Government.
11-2
Table 11.1 Classification of pipes into "pipe classes"
Medium/type of pipeline Design pressure PR [bar]

Design temperature t [oC]
Toxic and corrosive media

1
Inflammable media with service temperature above the flash point all ) -
Inflammable media with a flash point below 60 C
Liquefied gases (LG)
Steam, thermal oil PR 16 PR 16 PR 7

or and and
t > 300 t 300 t 170
Air, gas PR > 40 PR 40 PR 16

Lubricating oil, hydrolic oil or and and
Boiler feedwater, condensate t > 300 t 300 t 200
Seawater and freshwater for cooling
Brine in refrigerating plant
PR > 16 PR 16 PR 7
Liquid fuels or and and
t > 150 t 150 t 60
Cargo pipelines for oil tankers - - all
Cargo and venting lines for gas and chemical tankers all - -
Refrigerants - all -
Open-ended pipelines (without shutoff), e.g. drains, venting pipes, - - all

overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines
Pipe Class I II III

1
) Classification in Pipe Class II is possible if special safety arrangements are available and structural safety precautions are
arranged
In case of especially corrosive media, the Society may copper alloys

impose special requirements on the materials used.
For welds, see the Rules for Welding, Volume VI. Pipes of copper and copper alloys must be of seamless
For the materials used for pipes and valves for steam drawn material or fabricated by a method approved by
boilers, see Section 7, B. the Society. Copper pipes for Classes I and II must be
seamless.
2. Materials
In general, copper and copper alloy pipe lines shall not
2.1 Pipes, valves and fittings of steel be used for media having temperatures above the
following limits:
Pipes belonging to Classes I and II must be either
seamless drawn or fabricated by a welding procedure - Copper and aluminum brass 200 C
approved by the Society. In general, carbon and car-
bon-manganese steel pipes, valves and fittings are not - Copper nickel alloys 300 C
to be used for temperatures above 400 C. However, - High-temperature bronze 260 C
they may be used for higher temperatures provided
that their metallurgical behavior and their 100000 h
strength (mean value, see C, 2.3) are in accordance 2.3 Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular fer-
with national or international regulations or standards ritic cast iron
and if such values are guaranteed by the steel Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron
manufacturer. Otherwise, alloy steels in accordance according to the Rules for Materials may be accepted
with the Society's Rules for Materials, Volume V are for bilge, ballast and cargo pipes within double-bottom
to be used. tanks and cargo tanks and for other purposes approved
by the Society. In special cases (applications
corresponding in principle to classes II and III) and
2.2 Pipes, valves and fittings of copper and subject to the Society's special approval, valves and
fittings made of ferritic nodular cast iron may be 2.5.4 Plastic pipes are to be continuously and
accepted for temperatures up to 350 C. Nodular permanently marked with the following particulars:
ferritic cast iron for pipes, valves and fittings fitted on
the ship's side must comply with the Society's Rules - Manufacturers marking
for Materials (see also Rule 22 of the 1966 - Standard specification number
Convention on Load Lines).
- Outside diameter and wall thickness of pipe
2.4 Pipes, valves and fittings of lamellar - Year of manufacture
graphite cast iron (grey cast iron)
2.5.4 Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic
Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be must, as a minimum requirement, be marked with the
accepted by the Society for Class III. Pipes of grey manufacturer's marking and the outside diameter of
cast iron may be used for cargo pipelines within cargo the pipe.
tanks of tankers.
2.6 Aluminum and aluminum alloys
Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be
used for cargo lines on the weather deck of oil tankers Aluminum and aluminum alloys must comply with the
up to a working pressure of 16 bar. Society's Rules for Materials and may in individual
cases, with the agreement of the Society, be used for
Ductile materials must be used for cargo hose con- temperatures up to 200 C. They are not acceptable
nections and distributor headers. for use in fire extinguishing lines.
This applies also to the hose connections of fuel and
2.7 Application of materials
lubricating oil filling lines.
For the pipe classes mentioned in A.3 materials must
The use of grey cast iron is not allowed:
be applied according to Table 11.2
- in cargo lines on chemical tankers (see the
Rules for Ships Carrying Dangerous
Chemical in Bulk, Volume X), 3.1 For piping systems belonging to class I and
II, tests in accordance with the Society's Rules for
- for pipes, valves and fittings for media
Materials and under the Society's supervision are to be
having temperatures above 220 C and for
carried out for :
pipelines subject to water hammer, severe
stresses or vibrations, a) Pipes, bends and fittings
- for sea valves and pipes fitted on the ship b) Valve bodies and flanges in accordance with
sides and for valves fitted on the collision Table 11.3
bulkhead,
c) Valve bodies and flanges > DN 32 in cargo
- for valves on fuel and oil tanks subject to and process pipelines on chemical and gas
static head. tankers
The use of grey cast iron in cases other than those 3.2 Welded joints in pipelines of classes I and II
stated is subject to the Society's approval. are to be tested in accordance with the Rules for
Materials and Welding, Volume VI, and the Rules for
2.5 Plastic pipes1)
Ships Carrying Liquefied Gas in Bulk, Volume IX.
2.5.1 Plastic pipes may be used after special
4. Hydraulic tests on pipes
approval by the Society.
4.1 Definitions
2.5.2 Pipes, connecting pieces, valves and fittings
made of plastic materials are to be subjected by the 4.1.1. Maximum allowable working pressure,
manufacturer to a continuous BKI approved quality PB [bar], Formula symbol: pe,perm
control.
This is the maximum allowable internal or external
2.5.3 Pipe penetrations through watertight working pressure for a component or piping system
bulkheads and decks as well as through fire divisions with regard to the materials used, piping design re-
are to be approved by BKI. quirements, the working temperature and undisturbed
operation.
1
) See IMO Resolution A.753 (18) "Guidelines for the
Application of Plastic Pipes on Ships"
11-4
Material Pipe Class

or
Application I II III
Pipes Pipes for general applications, Pipes for Steel not subject to any special
above 300 C high-temperature general quality specification, weldability in
steel pipes, below - 10 C pipes applications accordance with Rules for
made of steel with high low Welding
temperature toughness, stainless
steel pipes for chemical
Steels
Forgings, Steels suitable for the corresponding loading and processing conditions, for
plates, flanges temperatures > 300 C, high-temperature steels, for temperatures below -10 C, steels with
high low-temperature toughness
Bolts for general machine construc-

Bolts, nuts tion, temperatures > 300 C high
temperature steels, below -10 C Bolts for general machine construction
steels with high low-temperature
toughness
Cast steel for general applications,

above 300 C high temperature cast
Cast steel steel, below -10 C cast steel with Cast steel for general applications
high low-temperature toughness,
Castings (valves, fittings, pipes)
for agressive media stainless

castings
Nodular cast Only ferritic grades, elongation AE at least 15 %

iron
Cast iron with At least GG-20 up to 200 C,

lamellar grey cast iron not permitted in
graphite 1. Ballast lines through cargo
lines,
2. Valves and fittings on ship's
side, on the collision bulkhead
and on fuel and oil tanks
In cargo lines on tank ships

Copper, carrying chemicals only with For seawater and alkaline water only corrosion
(valves, fittings, pipes)
copper alloys special approval low-temperatures resistant copper and copper alloys
Non-ferrous metals
copper nickel alloys by special

agreement
Aluminium, In cargo and processing lines on Only with the agreement of the Society up to 200
Aluminium. gas tank ships C, not permitted in fire extinguishing systems
alloys
Non-metallic material
Plastics After special approval

(see 2.5)
Table 11.3 Approved materials and types of certificates
Pipe class Type of Approved Design Subject to Material

component material temperature testing Rules
Volume V
Pipes, Steel, DN > 32 Section 4

pipe elbows, copper, - Section 4
fittings copper
alloy DN 32
DN > 32 Section 5
Steel, > 300 C Section 6
cast steel
DN 32
I + II Valves, PB x DN > 2500 Section 5
flanges, 300 C or
metal Steel DN > 250
expansion cast steel
nodular Section 6
joints and cast iron PB x DN 2500
hoses, other or Section 7
components DN 250
> 225 C DN > 32
DN 32 Section 4
Copper, 225 C
copper alloy
PB x DN > 1500
PB x DN 1500
Steel,
cast steel, Section 5
Valves,2) grey cast Section 6
III flanges, other iron1), - - Section 7
component nodular cast
iron, Section 4
copper,
copper alloy
1
) No material test in the case of grey cast iron
2
) Casings of valves and pipe branches fitted on the ship sides are to be included in pipe class II.
4.1.2 Nominal pressure, PN [bar] Formula symbol: pc

This is the term applied to a selected pressure tem- This is the maximum allowable working pressure PB
perature relation used for the standardization of for which a component or piping system is designed
structural components. In general, the numerical value with regard to its mechanical characteristics. In gen-
of the nominal pressure for a standardized component eral, the design pressure is the maximum allowable
made of the material specified in the standard will working pressure at which the safety equipment will
correspond to the maximum allowable working interfere (e.g. activation of safety valves, opening of
pressure PB at 20 C. return lines of pumps, operating of overpressure safety
arrangements, opening of relief valves) or at which the
4.1.3 Test pressure, PP [bar] pumps will operate against closed valves.
Formula symbol: pp 4.2 Pressure test prior to installation on
This is the pressure to which components or piping board
systems are subjected for testing purposes.
4.2.1 All Class I and II pipes as well as steam
lines, feedwater pressure pipes, compressed air and
fuel lines having a design pressure PR greater than 3,5
4.1.4 Design pressure, PR [bar] bar together with their integral fittings, connecting
11-6
pieces, branches and bends, after completion of 4.4 Pressure testing of valves
manufacture but before insulation and coating, if this
is provided, shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure The following valves are to be subjected in the in the
test in the presence of the Surveyor at the following manufacturer's works to a hydraulic pressure test in
value of pressure: the presence of a BKI Surveyor.
pp = 1,5 pc [bar] a) Valves of pipe classes I and II to 1,5 PR,
where pc is the design pressure.For steel pipes and b) Valves and connections on the ship's side to
their integral fittings intended to be used in systems not less than 5 bar.
with working temperature above 300 C the test Shutt off devices mentioned under a) and b) are to
pressure PP is to be as follows: additionally tested for tightness with the nominal
pp = 1,5 (100 )/ (t) pc pressure.
perm perm
Shut off devices for boilers, see Section 7.
where 5. Structural tests, heat treatment and
perm (100 ) permissible stress at 100 C non-destructive testing
perm (t) permissible stress at the design Attention should be given to the workmanship in
temperature ( C) construction and installation of the piping systems
according to the approved data in order to obtain the
However, the test pressure need not exceed: maximum efficiency in service. For details concerning
pp = 2 pc [bar] structural tests and tests following heat treatments, see
Rules for Materials.
With the approval of the Society, this pressure may be
reduced to 1,5 pc where it is necessary to avoid
excessive stress in way of bends, T-pieces and other C. Calculation of Wall Thickness and
shaped components. Elasticity
In no case may the membrane stress exceed 90 % of 1. Minimum wall thickness
the yield strength or 0,2 % of the maximum
elongation. 1.1 The pipe thicknesses stated in Tables 11.5 and
11.7 are the assigned minimum thicknesses, unless
4.2.2 Where for technical reasons it is not possible due to stress analysis, see 2., greater thicknesses are
to carry out complete hydraulic pressure tests on all necessary.
sections of piping before assembly on board, pro-
posals are to be submitted for approval to the Society Provided that the pipes are effectively protected
for testing the closing lengths of piping, particularly in against corrosion, the wall thicknesses of group M and
respect of closing seams. D stated in Table 11.5 may with the Society's
4.2.3 When the hydraulic pressure test of piping is agreement be reduced by up to 1 mm, the amount of
carried out on board, these tests may be conducted in the reduction is to be in relation to the wall thickness.
conjunction with the tests required under 4.3.
Protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanizing, can be
4.2.4 Pressure testing of pipes with a nominal di- recognized as an effective corrosion protection
ameter less than 15 mm may be omitted at the Soci- provided that the preservation of the protective coating
ety's discretion depending on the application. during installation is guaranteed.
4.3 Test after installation on board For steel pipes the wall thickness group corresponding
4.3.1 After assembly on board, all pipelines to the laying position is to be as stated in Table11.4.
covered by these Rules are to be subjected to a 1.2 The minimum wall thicknesses for austenitic
tightness test in the presence of a BKI Surveyor. stainless steel pipes are given in Table 11.6.
In general, all pipe systems are to be tested for leakage 1.3 For the minimum wall thickness of air,
under operational conditions. If necessary, special sounding and overflow pipes through weather decks,
techniques other than hydraulic pressure tests are to be see R.
applied.
For CO2 fire extinguishing pipelines, see Section
4.3.2 Heating coils in tanks and pipe lines for fuels 12, G.4.2.2.
are to be tested to not less than 1,5 PR but in no case
less than 4 bar.
Table 11.4 Choice of minimum wall thickness
Location
Piping system
Machinery spaces
Cargo holds
&
!
"#
'
Bilge lines M D M x M -
1 M
Ballast lines M D x )
M x x
Seawater lines D x x M M
2
)
x x
Fuel lines D N x
- -
Lubricating lines - x x N x
N
Thermal oil lines M N
Steam lines M M M M - M N
- N
Condensate lines N
N
Feedwater lines M x x
x x x x x
Drinking water lines N x N
x x
x
Fresh cooling water x
D N D x x - -
lines
1) See Section 15, B.4.3.
2) Seawater discharge lines, see 11.,T.
x Pipelines are not to be installed.
(-) Pipelines may be installed after special agreement with the Society.
11-8
Table 11.5 Minimum wall thickness for steel pipes
Group N Group M Group D
da s da s da s da s
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
10,2 1,6 from 406,4 6,3 from 21,3 3,2 from 38,0 6,3
from 13,5 1,8 from 660,0 7,1 from 38,0 3,6 from 88,9 7,1
from 48,3 2,3 864,0 8,8 from 76,1 4,5 from 152,4 8,8
from 88,9 2,9 from 193,7 5,4
from 114,3 3,2 from 219,1 5,9
from 133,0 3,6 from 244,5 6,3
from 152,4 4,0 from 660,4 7,1
from 177,8 4,5 from 762,0 8,0
from 244,5 5,0 863,6 8,8
from 323,9 5,6 from 914,4 10,0
Table 11.6 Minimum wall thicknesses for Table 11.7 Minimum wall thicknesses for
austenitic stainless steel pipes copper and copper alloy pipes
Pipe outside Minimum wall Pipe outside Minimum wall thickness

diameter thickness s
diameter [mm]
da s da
Copper Copper
[mm] [mm] [mm]
alloys
up to 17,2 1,0
up to 48,3 1,6 8 - 10 1,0 0,8
up to 88,9 2,0 12 - 20 1,2 1,0
up to 168,3 2,3 25 - 44,5 1,5 1,2
up to 219,1 2,6 50 - 76,1 2,0 1,5
up to 273,0 2,9 88,9 - 108 2,5 2,0
up to 406,0 3,6 133 - 159 3,0 2,5
over 406,0 4,0 193,7 - 267 3,5 3,0
273 - 457,2 4,0 3,5
(470) 4,0 3,5
508 4,5 4,0
Table 11.8 Allowable stress, perm for copper and copper alloys (annealed)
Minimum Allowable stress perm [N/mm2]

Pipe material tensile
strength 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300
[N/mm2] C o
C o
C o
C o
C o
C o
C o
C o
C o
C o
C
Copper 215 41 41 40 40 34 27,5 18,5 - - - -
Aluminium brass 325 78 78 78 78 78 51 24,5 - - - -

Cu Zn 20 Al
Cu Ni 5 Fe
275 68 68 67 65,5 64 62 59 56 52 48 44
nickel alloys
Cu Ni 10
Fe
Copper
Cu Ni 30 365 81 79 77 75 73 71 69 67 65,5 64 62
Fe
2. Calculation of pipe wall thicknesses

R [mm] bending radius
2.1 The following formula is to be used for
calculating the wall thicknesses of cylindrical pipes 2.3 Permissible stress: perm
and bends subject to internal pressure : 2.3.1 Steel pipes

s so c b [mm] (1) The permissible stress perm to be considered in
formula (la) is to be chosen as the lowest of the
following values :
da pc a) Design temperature 350 C
so [mm] (1a)
20 perm v pc ( )*
where Rm,20o = specified minimum tensile
+
s [mm] minimum thickness (see 2.7) strength at room
temperature
so [mm] calculated thickness
("
da [mm] outer diameter of pipe where ReH,t = specified minimum yield
pc [bar] design pressure (see B.4.1.4) stress at design tem-
perature
perm [N/mm2] maximum permissible design stress or
(see 2.3)
( * ,)
b [mm] allowance for bends (see 2.2) where Rp0.2,t = minimum value of the 0,2
v [-] weld efficiency factor (see2.5) % proof stress at design
temperature
c [mm] corrosion allowance (see 2.6)
b) Design temperature > 350 C, whereby it is to be
2.2 For straight cylindrical pipes which are to be
checked whether the calculated values according
bent, an allowance (b) shall be applied for the bending
to a) give the decisive smaller value
of the pipes. The value of (b) shall be such that the
stress due to the bending of the pipes does not exceed ( *****
the maximum permissible design stress ( perm). The where Rml00000 = minimum stress
allowance (b) can be determined as follows : to produce
rupture in
100000 hours at
da
b 0,4 so (2)
R
11-10
the design the working temperature + 15 C1)

temperature t
b) Pipes before desuperheaters:
Rp 1% 100 000 = average stress to produce 1% creep
in 100000 hours at the design the working temperature + 15 C1)
temperature t
Rm 100000 (t + 15) = average stress to produce rupture in Table 11.9 Coefficient A,B for determining
100000 hours at the design the permitted stress perm
temperature t plus 15 C (see 2.4)
Pipe class I II, III
In the case of pipes which : Material
A B A B
- are covered by a detailed stress analysis
acceptable to the Society and Unalloyed and 2,7 1,6 2,7 1,8
- are made of material tested by the Society, the alloyed carbon steel
Society may, on special application, agree to a Rolled and forged
safety factor B of 1,6 (for A and B see Table stainless steel 2,4 1,6 2,4 1,8
11.9).
Steel with s,20o1) 3,0 1,7 3,0 1,8
> 400 N/mm2
2.3.2 Pipes made of metallic materials without
a definite yield point Grey cast iron - - 11 -
Materials without a definite yield point are covered by Nodular cast iron - - 5,0 3,0
Table 11.8. For other materials, the maximum
permissible stress is to be stated with BKI agreement, Cast steel 3,2 - 4,0 -
but must be at least : 1
) Minimum yield strength or minimum 0,2 % proof
Rm,t / 5 stress at 20 C
perm
where Rmt is the minimum tensile strength at the 2.5 Weld efficiency factor v
design temperature.
a) For seamless pipes v = 1,0
2.3.3 The mechanical characteristics of materials
which are not included in the Rules of Materials are to b) In the case of welded pipes, the value of v is to
be agreed with the Society with reference to Table be equal to that assigned at the works acceptance
11.9. test.
Steel pipes without guaranteed properties may be used 2.6 Corrosion allowance, c
only up to a working temperature of 120 C where the The corrosion allowance c depends on the application
maximum allowable stress perm 80 N/mm2 will be of the pipe, in accordance with Tables 11.10a and
approved. 11.10b. With the agreement of the Society, the
corrosion allowance of steel pipes effectively
2.4 Design temperature protected against corrosion may be reduced by not
more than 50 %.
2.4.1 The design temperature is the maximum
temperature of the medium inside the pipe. In case of With the agreement of the Society, no corrosion
steam pipes, filling pipes from air compressors and allowance need be applied to pipes made of
starting air lines to internal combustion engines, the corrosion-resistant materials (e.g. austenitic steels and
design temperature is to be at least 200 C. copper alloys) (see Table 11.6 and Table 11.7).
2.4.2 Design temperatures for superheated steam 2.7 Tolerance allowance t

lines are as follows : The negative manufacturing tolerances on the
a) Pipes behind desuperheaters: thickness according to the standards of the technical
terms of delivery are to be added to the calculated wall
with automatic temperature control : thickness (so) and specified as the tolerance allowance
the working temperature1) (design (t). The value of t may be calculated as follows :
temperature)
- with manual control:
1
) Transient excesses in the working temperature need not
be taken into account when determining the design
temperature.
a
t (3)
100 a Copper nickel alloys 0,5
(with Ni 10%)
where
a [%] = negative tolerance on the thickness 3. Elasticity analysis
so [mm] = calculated wall thickness 3.1 The forces, moments and stresses caused by
according to 2.1. impeded thermal expansion and contraction are to be
calculated for the following piping systems and the
Table 11.10a Corrosion allowance c for carbon calculations submitted to the Society for approval:
steel pipes
a) Steam pipes with working temperatures above
Corrosion 400 C
Type of piping system allowance c
[mm] b) Pipes with working temperatures below -110 C
3.2 Only approved methods of calculation may be
Superheated steam lines 0,3
applied. The change in elasticity of bends and fittings
Saturated steam lines 0,8 due to deformation is to be taken into consideration.
Steam heating coils inside 2,0 Procedure and principles of methods as well as the
cargo tanks technical data are to be submitted for approval. The
Society reserves the right to perform confirmatory
Feedwater lines : calculations.
in closed circuit systems 0,5
For determining the stresses, the hypothesis of the
in open circuit systems 1,5 maximum shear stress is to be considered. The
resulting comparison of stress of primary loads due to
Boiler blowdown lines 1,5 internal pressure and the dead weight of the piping
1,0 system itself (gravitational forces) may not exceed the
Compressed air lines
maximum allowable stress according to C.2.3. The
Hydraulic oil lines, stress obtained by adding together the above
lubricating oil lines 0,3 mentioned primary forces and the secondary forces
1,0 due to impeded expansion or contraction may not
Fuel lines exceed the mean value of the fatigue stress or the
Cargo oil lines 2,0 average stress to produce rupture in 100 000 hours,
where for fittings such as bends, T-connections,
Refrigerants lines for Group 1 0,3 headers etc. approved factors for increased stress are
refrigerants to be considered.
Refrigerant lines for Group 2 0,5 4. Fittings
refrigerants
Pipe branches may be dimensioned according to the
Seawater lines 3,0 equivalent surface areas method where an appropriate
Freshwater liners 0.8 reduction of the maximum allowable stress as
specified in C.2.3 is to be proposed. Generally, the
maximum allowable stress is equal to 70 % of the
Table 11.10b Corrosion allowance c for non- value according to C.2.3 for diameters over 300 mm.
ferrous metals Below this figure, a reduction to 80 % is sufficient.
Where detailed stress measuring, calculations or type
approvals are available, higher stresses can be per-
Pipe material Corrosion
mitted.
allowance c
[mm] 5. Calculation of flanges
Copper, brass and similar Flange calculations by a recognized method and using
alloys the permitted stress specified in 2.3 are to be
0,8
submitted if flanges do not correspond to a recognized
Copper-tin alloys except standard, if the standards do not provide for
those containing lead conversion to working conditions or where there is a
deviation from the standards.
Flanges in accordance with standards in which the
11-12
values of the relevant stresses or the material are 2.2.2 Socket welded connections according to Table
specified may be used at higher temperatures up to the 11.11 may be accepted in systems, in which no
following pressure : excessive stress, errosion or corrosion are expected.
perm The thicknesses of the sockets are to be in accordance

pperm pstandard with C.1.1, yet at least equal to the thicknessws of the
perm(t, material)
pipes.
where
The clearence between the pipes and the sockets is to
perm(t,material) = permissible stress according to 2.3 be as small as possible and is not to exceed 1 mm. The
for proposed material at design thickness of the weld must at least be equal to the pipe
temperature t thickness.
standard
perm = permissible stress according to 2.3 Table 11.11 Pipe connections
for the material at the temperature
corresponding to the strength data Nominal
Type of
specified in the standard Pipe class diameter
connections ND
pstandard = nominal pressure specified in the
standard Welded butt-
joints with
special provi- I,II,III
sions for root
side
D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes, Welded butt- all

Valves, Fittings and Pumps joints without
special II,III
1. General principles provisions for
1.1 Piping systems are to be constructed and root side
manufactured on the basis of standards generally used Socket weld III
in shipbuilding.
II 50
1.2 Welded connections rather than detachable
for
couplings should be used for pipelines carrying toxic Screwed socket subordinate
media and inflammable liquefied gases as well as for 50
systems
superheated steam pipes with temperatures exceeding (see 2.2.2)
400 C.
1.3 Expansion in piping systems due to heating and 2.2.3 Screwed socket connections and similar
shifting of their suspensions caused by deformation of connections are not permitted for pipes of classes I, II
the ship are to be compensated by bends, and III. Screwed socket connections are allowed only
compensators and flexible pipe connections. The ar- for subordinate systems (e.g. sanitary and hot water
rangement of suitable fixed points is to be taken into heating systems) with DN 50 operating at low
consideration. pressures. Screwed pipe connections and pipe
2. Pipe connections coupling may be used subject to special approval.
2.1 Dimensions and calculation 2.2.4 Steel flanges may be used as shown in Tables
11.12 and 11.13 in accordance with the permitted
The dimensions of flanges and bolting are to comply pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant
with recognized standards. standards.
2.2 Pipe connections 2.2.5 Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may be
2.2.1 The following pipe connections may be used: used in accordance with the relevant standards and
within the limits laid down in the approvals. Flanges
- Fully penetrating butt welds with/without and brazed or welded collars of copper and copper
provision to improve the quality of the root alloys are subject to the following requirements:
- Socket welds with suitable fillet weld thickness a) Welding neck flanges according to standard up
and possibly in accordance with recognized to 200 C or 300 C according to the maximum
standards temperatures indicated in Table 11.8; applicable
to all classes of pipe.
- Screw connections of approved type.
b) Loose flanges with welding collar; as for a).
For the use of these pipe connections, see Table 11.11
2.2.6 Flange connections for pipes classes I and II

c) Plain brazed flanges: only for pipe class III up to with temperature over 300 oC are to be provided with
a nominal pressure of 16 bar and a temperature necked-down bolts.
of 120 C.
Table 11.12 Use of flange types
Toxic, corrosive and Steam, Lubricating oil,

Pipe combustible media, thermal oils fuel oil Other media
class liquefied gases (LG)
PR Type of Temperature Type of Type of flange Temperature Type of flange

[bar] flange [ C] flange [ C]
I > 10 A > 400 A A,B > 400 A

10 A,B1) 400 A, B1) 400 A, B
II - A, B, C > 250 A, B, C A,B,C,E2) > 250 A, B, C

250 A,B,C,D,E 250 A,B,C,D,E,
III - - - A,B,C,D,E A,B,C,E - A, B, C

A,B,C,D,E,F3)
1
) Type B only for Da < 150 mm
2
) Type E only for t < 150 C and PR < 16 bar
3
) Type F only for water pipes and open-ended lines
2.2.7 Type approved pipe couplings may be used in constituting a fire risk, e.g. cargo pump rooms and car
the following systems: decks, must be flame resistant.
- Bilge and ballast lines
- Fuel and oil lines 3. Layout, marking and installation
- Seawater lines 3.1 Piping systems must be adequately identified
according to their purpose. Valves are to be
- Fresh and seawater cooling lines permanently and clearly marked.
- Fire fighting and deckwash lines 3.2 Pipes leading through bulkheads and tank walls
- Cargo oil lines must be water and oil tight. Bolts through bulkheads
are not permitted. Holes for set screws may not be
- Vent, fill and sounding pipes drilled in the tank walls.
- Drinking water lines 3.3 Pipe penetrations through watertight bulkheads
- Sanitary discharge lines and decks as well as through fire divisions which are
not welded are to be approved by BKI (see Rules for
- Inert gas lines on free deck Hull Constructions, Volume II, Section 26, C.8)
- Discharge lines from inert gas washers and deck 3.4 Piping systems close to electrical switchboards
water seals. must be so installed or protected that possible leakage
cannot damage the electrical installation.
The use of pipe couplings is not permitted in:
3.5 Piping systems are to be so arranged that they
- Bilge lines inside ballast and fuel tanks
can be completely emptied, drained and vented. Piping
- Seawater and ballast lines inside cargo holds and systems in which the accumulation of liquids during
fuel tanks operation could cause damage must be equipped with
special drain arrangements.
- Fuel and oil lines inside machinery spaces, cargo
holds and ballast tanks 3.6 Pipes lines layed through ballast tank, which are
coated in accordance with Section 1, N.3., Rules for
Not water filled pressure water spraying Hull Construction, Volume II, are to be either
systems. affectively protected against corrosion or they are to
2.2.8 Pipe couplings in bilge and seawater systems be of a material of low susceptibility to corrosion.
within machinery spaces and inside spaces The protection against corrosion of the tanks as well
11-14
as that of the pipes must be compatible to each other.

3.8 The wall thickness of discharge pipes up to the
first shutoff device is to be in accordance with Tables
11.16a and 11.16b. Pipes are to be connected by
welding or by flanges.
Table 11.13 Types of flange connections
Type A
Welding neck flange Loose flange with welding

neck
Type B
Slip-on welding flange-fully welded

Type C
Slip-on welding flange

Type D Type E Type F
Socket screwed flange Plain flange Lap joint flange

- conical threads - - welded on both sides - - on flanged pipe -
4. Shutoff devices These Rules apply to hydraulically, pneumatically or

electrically operated valves in piping systems and
4.1 Shutoff devices must comply with a recognized sanitary discharge pipes.
standard. Valves with screwed-on covers are to be
secured to prevent unintentional loosening of the 6.2 Construction
cover.
6.2.1 Remote controlled bilge valves and valves
4.2 Hand-operated shut off devices are to be closed important to the safety of the ship are to be equipped
by turning in the clockwise direction. with an emergency operating arrangement.
4.3 Valves must be clearly marked to show whether 6.2.2 For the emergency operation of remote
they are in the open or closed position. controlled valves in cargo piping systems, see Section
15.B.2.3.3.
4.4 Change-over devices in piping systems in which
a possible intermediate position of the device could be 6.3 Arrangement of valves
dangerous in service must not be used.
6.3.1 The accessibility of the valves for maintenance
4.5 Valves are to be permanently marked. The and repair is to be taken into consideration.
marking must comprise at least the following details:
Valves in bilge lines and sanitary pipes must always
Material of valve body be accessible.
Nominal diameter
6.3.2 Bilge lines
Nominal pressure.
Valves and control lines are to be located as far as
5. Ship's side valves possible from the bottom and sides of the ship.
5.1 For the mounting of valves on the ship's side, see 6.3.3 Ballast pipes
Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 6.G.
The requirements stated in 6.3.2 also apply here to the
5.2 Ship's side valves shall be easily accessible. location of valves and control lines.
Seawater inlet and outlet valves must be capable of
being operated from above the floor plates. Cocks on Where remote controlled valves are arranged inside
the ship's side must be so arranged that the handle can the ballast tanks, the valves should always be located
only be removed when the cock is closed. in the tank adjoining that to which they relate.
5.3 Valves with only one flange may be used on the 6.3.4 Fuel pipes
ship's side and on the sea chests only after special Remote controlled valves mounted on fuel tanks lo-
approval. cated above the double bottom must be capable of
5.4 Where discharge pipes without shut off devices being closed from outside the compartment in which
are connected to the ship's hull below the freeboard they are installed. (see also G.2.1 and H.2.2)
deck, the wall thickness of such pipes as far as the first 6.3.5 Bunker lines
shut off device is to be in accordance with Tables
11.16a and 11.16b. Remote controlled valves mounted on fuel tanks shall
not be automatically closed in case the power supply
6. Remote controll of valves fails, unless suitable arrangements are provided, which
6.1 Scope prevent excessive pressure raise in the bunker line
during bunkering.
11-16
6.3.6 Cargo pipes "Regulations for Construction and Testing of Pumps"

of BKI are to be applied.
For remote controlled valves inside cargo tanks, see
Section 15.B.2.3.3. 7.2 For the pumps listed below, a performance test
is to be carried out in the manufacturer's works under
6.4 Control stands the Society's supervision.
6.4.1 The control devices of remote controlled valves Bilge pumps/bilge ejectors
are to be arranged together in one control stand.
Ballast pumps
6.4.2 The control devices are to be clearly and
permanently identified and marked. Sea cooling water pumps
6.4.3 It must be recognized at the control stand Fresh cooling water pumps
weather the valves are open or closed.
Fire pumps
In the case of bilge valves and valves for changeable
Emergency fire pumps including drive units
tanks, the closed position is to be indicated optically
by limit-position indicators approved by the Society. Condensate pumps
6.4.4 The control devices of valves for changeable Boiler water feedwater pumps
tanks are to be interlocked to ensure that only the
valve relating to the tank concerned can be operated. Boiler circulating pumps
The same also applies to the valves of cargo holds and Lubricating oil pumps
tanks in which dry cargo and ballast water are carried
alternately. Fuel oil booster and transfer pumps
6.4.5 On passenger ships, the control stand for Circulating pumps for thermal oil installations
remote controlled bilge valves is to be located outside
Brine pumps
the machinery spaces and above the bulkhead deck.
Refrigerant circulating pumps
6.5 Power units
Cargo pumps
6.5.1 Power units are to be equipped with at least
two independent sets for supplying power for remote Cooling pumps for fuel injection valves
controlled valves.
Hydraulic pumps for controllable pitch
propellers
6.5.2 The energy required for the closing of valves
which are not closed by spring power is to be supplied Other hydraulic pumps/motors, see Section 14.
by a pressure accumulator.
8. Protection of piping systems against over
6.5.3 Pneumatically operated valves can be supplied pressure
with air from the general compressed air system. The following piping systems are to be fitted with
Where the quick-closing valves of fuel tanks are safety valves to avoid excessive over pressures:
closed pneumatically, a separate pressure accumulator a) Piping systems and valves in which liquids can
is to be provided. This is to be of adequate capacity be enclosed and heated;
and is to be located outside the engine room. Filling of
this accumulator by a direct connection to the general b) Piping systems which may be exposed in
compressed air system is allowed. A non-return valve service to pressures in excess of the design
is to be arranged in the filling connection of the pressure.
pressure accumulator.
Safety valves must be capable of discharging the
The accumulator is to be provided either with a pres- medium at a maximum pressure increase of 10 % of
sure control device with a visual and acoustic alarm or the allowable working pressure. Safety valves are to
with a hand-compressor as a second filling appliance. be fitted on the low pressure side of reducing valves.
The hand-compressor is to be located outside the en- 9. Piping on ships with added classification
gine room. mark or
6.6 After installation on board, the entire system is 9.1 The following Rules apply additionally to ships
to be subjected to an operational test. for which proof of buoyancy in the damaged condition
is provided :
7. Pumps
9.1.1 Passanger ships according to Volume II,
7.1 For materials and construction requirements the Section 29, J, as well as N.5 of this Section
9.1.2 Gas tankers accroding to Volume IX. watertight bulkhead of the relevant compartment and
are to be secured in the open position against
9.1.3 Chemical tankers according to Volume X. unintended operation.
9.1.4 Other cargo ships according to Volume II, 9.7.4 If the bulkhead penetrations, on ships other
Section 36, E. than passenger ships, for these pipes are arranged high
9.2 Volume II, Section 21, D is to be additionally enough and so near to midship that in no damage
applied for scuppers and discharge lines, Volume II, condition, including at temporary maximum heeling of
Section 21, E is to be additionally applied for vent, the ship, will be below the waterline, then the shut off
overflow and sounding pipes. valves may be dispensed with.
For closed cargo holds on passanger ships, see N.4.4.

of this Section.
E. Steam Lines
9.3 For pipe penetrations through watertight
bulkheads, see Volume II Section 11, A.3.4. 1. Operation
9.4 Pipelines with open ends in compartments or 1.1 Steam lines are to be so laid out and arranged
tanks are to be so laid out that no additional that important consumers can be supplied with steam
compartments or tanks can be flooded in any damaged from every main boiler as well as from a stand-by
condition to be considered. boiler or boiler for emergency operation.
9.5 Where shut off devices are arranged in cross 1.2 Important consumers are:
flooding lines of ballast tanks, the position of the
valves is to be indicated on the bridge. a) All consuming units important for the
propulsion, manoeuvrability and safe operation
9.6 For sanitary systems, see T.2. of this Section. of the ship as well as the important auxiliary
machines according to Section 1, H.
9.7 Where it is impossible to lay the pipelines
outside the damage zone, tightness of the bulkheads is b) All consuming units necessary to the safety of
to be ensured by applying the provision in 9.7.1 to the ship.
9.7.4.
1.3 Every steam consuming unit must be capable of
9.7.1 In bilge pipelines, a non-return valve is to be being shut off from the system.
fitted either on the watertight bulkhead through which
the pipe passes to the bilge suction or at the bilge 2. Calculation of pipelines
suction itself. 2.1 Steam lines and valves are to be constructed for
9.7.2 In ballast water and fuel pipelines for the filling the design pressure (PR) according to B.4.1.4.
and emptying of tanks, a shut off valve is to be fitted 2.2 Calculations of pipe thickness and elasticity
on the watertight bulkhead through which the pipe analysis in accordance with C. are to be carried out.
leads to the open end in the tank. The shut off valve Sufficient compensation for thermal expansion is to be
must be capable of being operated from a permanently proven.
accessible position located above the bulkhead deck,
and an indicator must show when the valve is in the 3. Laying out of steam lines
"closed" position.
3.1 Steam lines are to be so installed and supported
9.7.3 Overflow pipes of tanks in different watertight that expected stresses due to thermal expansion,
compartments which are connected to one common external loads and shifting of the supporting structure
overflow system are either under both normal and interrupted service conditions
will be safely compensated.
to be led, prior to being connected to the
system, within the relevant compartment, on 3.2 Steam lines are to be so installed that water
passenger ships high enough above the pockets will be avoided.
bulkhead deck and on other ships above the
3.3 Means are to be provided for the reliable
unsuitable damage water line, or
drainage of the piping system.
shut off valve is to be fitted to each overflow
3.4 Steam lines are to be effectively insulated to
pipe, which can be operated from a
prevent heat losses.
permanently accessible position, located above
the bulkhead deck on passenger ships and 3.4.1 At points where there is a possibility of contact,
above the unsuitable damage water line on the surface temperature of the insulated steam lines
other ships. may not exceed 80 C.
These shut off valves are to be situated on the 3.4.2 Wherever necessary, additional protection
11-18
arrangements against unintended contact are to be connected steam producers.

provided.
2.2 Where more than two feedwater pumps are
3.4.3 The surface temperature of steam lines in the installed, the capacity of all other feedwater pumps in
pump rooms of tankers may nowhere exceed 220 oC the event of the failure of the pump with the largest
(see also Section 15). capacity is to comply with the requirements of 2.1.
3.5 Steam heating lines, except for heating pur- 2.3 For continuous flow boilers the capacity of the
poses, are not to be led through accommodation. feedwater pumps is to be at least 1,0 times the
maximum steam output.
3.6 Sufficiently rigid positions are to be arranged
as fixed points for the steam piping systems. 2.4 Special requirements may be approved for the
capacity of the feedwater pumps for plants incor-
3.7 It is to be ensured that the steam lines are fitted porating a combination of oil fired and exhaust gas
with sufficient expansion arrangements. boilers.
3.8 Where a system can be entered from a system 3. Delivery pressure of feedwater pumps
with higher pressure, the former is to be provided with
reducing valves and relief valves on the low pressure Feedwater pumps are to be so laid out that the delivery
side. pressure can satisfy the following requirements:
3.9 Welded connections in steam lines are subject a) The required capacity according to 2. is to be
to the requirements specified in Rules for Welding, achieved against the maximum allowable
Volume VI. working pressure of the steam producer.
b) The safety valves must have a capacity equal
4. Steam strainers 1,0 times the approved steam output at 1,1
times the allowable working pressure.
Wherever necessary, machines and apparatus in steam
systems are to be protected against foreign matter by The resistances to flow in the piping between the
steam strainers. feedwater pump and the boiler are to be taken into
consideration. In the case of continuous flow boilers
5. Steam connections to equipment and pipes
the total resistance of the boiler must be taken into
carrying oil, e.g. steam atomizers or steamout ar-
account.
rangements, are to be so secured that fuel and oil
cannot penetrate into the steam lines. 4. Power supply to feedwater pumps
6. Inspection of steam lines for expanding 4.1 At least two independent power sources are to
be available for the operation of feedwater pumps.
Steam lines for superheated steam at above 500 C are
to be provided with means of inspecting the pipe for 4.2 For steam-driven feedwater pumps, the supply
expanding. This can be in the form of measuring of all the pumps from only one steam system is
sections on straight lengths of pipe at the superheater allowed provided that all the steam producers are
outlet if it is possible. The length of these measuring connected to this steam system. Where feedwater
sections is to be at least 2 da. pumps are driven solely by steam, a suitable filling
and starting up pump which is to be independent of
steam is to be provided.
F. Boiler Feedwater and Circulating Ar-
4.3 For electric drives, a separate lead from the
rangement, Condensate Recirculation
common bus-bar to each pump motor is sufficient.
1. Feedwater pumps
5. Feedwater lines
1.1 At least two feedwater pumps are to be
Feedwater lines may not pass through tanks which do
provided for each boiler installation.
not contain feedwater.
1.2 Feedwater pumps are to be so arranged or
5.1 Feedwater lines for main boilers
equipped that no backflow of water can occur when
the pumps are at a standstill. 5.1.1 Each main boiler is to be provided with a main
and an auxiliary feedwater line.
1.3 Feedwater pumps are to be used only for
feeding boilers. 5.1.2 Each feedwater line is to be fitted with a shut
off valve and a check valve at the boiler inlet. Where
2. Capacity of feedwater pumps
the shut off valve and the check valve are not directly
2.1 Where two feedwater pumps are provided, the connected in series, the intermediate pipe is to be
capacity of each is to be equivalent to at least 1,25 fitted with a drain.
times the maximum permitted output of all the
5.1.3 Each feedwater pump is to be fitted with a shut transfer the maximum volume of condensate pro-
off valve on the suction side and a screw-down duced.
non-return valve on the delivery side. The pipes are to
be so arranged that each pump can supply each 8.2 The condensate of all heating systems used to
feedwater line. heat oil (fuel, lubricating, cargo oil etc.) is to be led to
condensate observation tanks. These tanks are to be
5.2 Feedwater lines for auxiliary steam fitted with air vents.
producers (auxiliary and exhaust gas
boilers)
5.2.1 The provision of only one feedwater line for
auxiliary and exhaust gas boilers is sufficient if the G. Oil Fuel Systems
preheaters and automatic regulating devices are fitted
with by-pass lines. 1. Bunker lines
5.2.2 The requirements in 5.1.2 are to apply as 1.1 The bunkering of oil fuels is to be effected by
appropriate to the valves required to be fitted to the means of permanently installed lines either from the
boiler inlet. open deck or from bunkering stations located below
deck which are to be isolated from other spaces.
5.2.3 Continuous flow boilers need not be fitted with
the valves required according to 5.1.2 provided that Bunker stations are to be so arranged that the
the heating of the boiler is automatically switched off bunkering can be performed from both sides of the
should the feedwater supply fail and that the feedwater ship without danger. This requirement is considered to
pump supplies only one boiler. be fulfilled where the bunkering line is extended to
both sides of the ship. The bunkering lines are to be
6. Boiler water circulating systems fitted with blind flanges on deck.
6.1 Each forced-circulation boiler is to be equipped 2. Tank filling lines and suction lines
with two circulating pumps powered independently of
each other. Failure of the circulating pump in 2.1 Filling and suction lines from storage, settling
operation is to be signalled by an alarm. The alarm and daily service tanks situated above the double
may only be switched off if a circulating pump is bottom and in case of their damage fuel oil may leak,
started or when the boiler firing is shut down. are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut off
devices capable of being closed from a safe position
6.2 The provision of only one circulating pump for outside the space concerned.
each boiler is sufficient if:
In the case of deep tanks situated in shaft or pipe
a) The boilers are heated only by gases whose tunnel or similar spaces, shut off devices are to be
temperature does not exceed 400 C or fitted on the tanks. The control in the event of fire may
be effected by means of an additional shut off device
b) a common stand-by circulating pump is
in the pipe outside the tunnel or similar space. If such
provided which can be connected to any boiler
additional shut off device is fitted in the machinery
or
space it shall be operated from a position outside this
c) the burners of oil or gas fired auxiliary boilers space.
are so arranged that they are automatically shut
2.2 Shut off devices on fuel oil tanks having a
off should the circulating pump fail and the
capacity of less than 500 l need not be provided with
heat stored in the boiler does not cause any
remote control.
unacceptable evaporation of the available water
in the boiler. 2.3 Filling lines are to extend to the bottom of the
tank. Short filling lines directed to the side of the tank
7. Feedwater supply, evaporators
may be admissible.
7.1 The feedwater supply is to be stored in several
Storage tank suction lines may also be used as filling
tanks.
lines.
7.2 One storage tank may be considered sufficient
2.4 Where filling lines are led through the tank top
for auxiliary boiler units.
and end below maximum oil level in the tank, a
7.3 Two evaporators are to be provided for main non-return valve at the tank top is to be arranged.
steam producer units.
2.5 The inlet connections of suction lines are to be
8. Condensate recirculation arranged far enough from the drains in the tank so that
water and impurities which have settled out will not
8.1 The main condenser is to be equipped with two enter the suctions.
condensate pumps, each of which must be able to
3. Pipe layout
11-20
3.1 Fuel lines may not pass through tanks accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer
containing feedwater, drinking water, lubricating oil or of the engine.
thermal oil.
6.3 Uninterrupted supply of filtered fuel has to be
3.2 Fuel lines which pass through ballast tanks are ensured under cleaning and maintanance conditions of
to have an increased wall thickness according to Table filter equipment.
11.4.
6.4 Engines for the exclusive operation of
3.3 Fuel lines may not be laid in the vicinity of emergency generators and emergency fire pumps may
boilers, turbines or equipment with high surface be fitted with simplex filters.
temperatures (over 220 C) or in way of electrical
equipment. 6.5 Main fuel oil filters are to be fitted with
differential pressure control
3.4 Fuel oil lines shall be screened or otherwise
suitable protected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil Back flushing intervals of automatic back flushing
spray or oil leakage onto hot surfaces, into machinery filters are to be additionaly monitored.
air intakes, or othe surfaces of ignation. 6.6 Fuel transfer units are to be fitted with a
The number of detachable pipe connections is to be simplex filter on the suction side.
limited. 6.7 Filter arrangement, see Section 2, G.3.
7. Purifiers
3.5 Shut off valves in fuel lines in the machinery
spaces are to be operable from above the floor plates. 7.1 Manufacturer of purifiers for cleaning fuel and
lubricating oil must be approved by the Society.
3.6 Glass and plastic components are not permitted
in fuel systems. 7.2 Where a fuel purifier may exceptionally be
used to purify lubricating oil the purifier supply and
3.7 Fuel pumps must be capable of being isolated discharge lines are to be fitted with a change-over ar-
from the piping system by shut off valves. rangement which prevents the possibility of fuel and
4. Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps lubricating oils being mixed. Spectacle flanges are not
considered as sufficient precaution.
4.1 Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps shall be
designed for the proposed operating temperature of the Suitable equipment is also to be provided to prevent
medium pumped. such mixing occurring over control and compression
lines.
4.2 A fuel transfer pump is to be provided. Other
service pumps may be used as a stand-by pump 7.3 The sludge tanks of purifiers are to be fitted
provided they are suitable for this purpose. with a level alarm which ensures that the level in the
sludge tank cannot interfere with the operation of the
4.3 At least two means of oil fuel transfer are to be purifier.
provided for filling the day tanks.
8. Operation using heavy fuel oils
4.4 Where a feed or booster pump is required to
supply fuel to main or auxiliary engines, a standby 8.1 Heating of heavy fuel oil
pump shall be provided. Where pumps are attached to 8.1.1 Heavy fuel oil tanks are to be fitted with a
the engines, a standby pump may be dispensed with. heating system.
for auxiliary engines.
The laying out of the tank heating system is to be in
Fuel oil supply for oil fired auxiliary boilers, see accordance with the operating requirements and the
Section 9, B.3.1 quality of fuel oil intended to be used.
4.5 For emergency shut-down devices, see Section With the Society's consent, storage tanks need not be
12, B.9. fitted with a heating system provided it can be
5. The arrangement of shut-off devices in the guaranteed that the proposed quality of fuel oil can be
overproduction/recirculation lines is to be avoided. pumped under all ambient and environmental condi-
Where such valves must be fitted, they are to be tions.
locked in the operating position. For the tank heating system, see Section 10, B.5.
6. Filters 8.1.2 Heat tracing is to be arranged for pumps, filters
6.1 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery and oil fuel lines as required.
line of the fuel pumps. 8.1.3 Where it is necessary to preheat injection
6.2 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in valves of engines running with heavy fuel oil, the in-
jection valve cooling system is to be provided with
additional means of heating. 500 l, the outlet pipe is to be fitted with a remote
controlled quick-closing valve operated from outside
8.2 Treatment of heavy fuel oil the engine room. Stand pipes are to be equipped with
air/gas vents and with self-closing connections for
8.2.1 Settling tanks emptying and draining. Stand pipes are to be fitted
with a local temperature indicator.
Heavy fuel settling tanks or equivalent arrangements
with sufficiently dimensioned heating systems are to 8.5.2 Atmospheric stand pipes (pressureless)
be provided
Having regard to the arrangement and the maximum
Settling tanks are to be provided with drains, emptying fuel level in the service tanks, the stand pipes are to be
arrangements and with temperature measuring so located and arranged that a sufficient free space for
instruments. degasification is available inside the stand pipes.
8.2.2 Heavy fuel oil cleaning for diesel engines 8.5.3 Closed stand-pipes (pressurized systems)
For cleaning of heavy fuels, purifiers or purifiers Closed stand-pipes are to be designed as pressure
combined with automatic filters are to be provided. vessels and are to be fitted with the following
equipment:
8.2.3 Fuel oil blending and emulsifying a) a non-return valve in the recirculating lines
equipments from the engines,
Heavy fuel oil/diesel oil blending and emulsifying b) an automatic degaser or a gas blanket monitor
equipments require approval by the Society. with manual degaser,
8.3 Daily service tanks c) a local pressure gauge,
8.3.1 For the arrangement and equipment of daily d) a local temperature indicator,
service tanks, see Section 10, B.
e) a drain/emptying device, which is to be locked
8.3.2 The capacity of the day tanks shall be such that, in the closed position.
should the treatment plant fail, the supply to all the
connected consumers can be maintained for at least 8 8.6 End preheaters
hours. Two mutually independent end preheaters are to be
8.3.3 Where the overflow pipe of the day tank is provided.
terminated in the settling tanks, suitable means shall be The arrangement of only one preheater may be ap-
provided to ensure that no untreated heavy fuel oil can proved where it is ensured that the operation with fuel
penetrate into the day tank in case of overfilling of a oil which do not need preheating can be temporary
settling tank. maintained. The necessary tanks for such fuel oil are
8.3.4 Daily service tanks are to be provided with to be arranged.
drains and with discharge arrangements. 8.7 Viscosity control
8.4 Change-over arrangement diesel oil/ heavy 8.7.1 Where main and auxiliary engines are operated
oil on heavy fuel oil, automatic viscosity control is to be
8.4.1 The change-over arrangement of the fuel provided.
supply and return lines is to be interlocked so that 8.7.2 Viscosity regulators are to be fitted with a local
faulty switching is excluded and to ensure reliable temperature indicator.
separation of the fuels.
8.8 Local control devices
Change-over valves which allow interpositions are not
permitted. The following local control devices are to be fitted
directly before the engine
8.4.2 The change-over devices are to be accessible
and permanently marked. Their respective working a) a pressure gauge,
position must be clearly indicated.
b) a temperature indicator.
8.4.3 Remote controlled change-over devices are to
8.9 The heavy fuel system is to be effectively
be provided with limit position indicators at the
insulated as necessary.
control platforms.
8.5 Fuel supply through stand pipes
8.5.1 Where the capacity of stand pipes exceeds
11-22
H. Lubricating Oil Systems with capacity of 500 l and more and located above the
double bottom and which in case of their damaged
1. General requirements lubricating oil may leak, are to be fitted with directly
1.1 Lubricating oil systems are to be constructed to on the tanks with shut off devices according to G.2.1.
ensure reliable lubrication over the whole range of The remote operation of shut off devices according to
speed and during run-down of the engines and to G.2.1, which are kept closed during normal operation,
ensure adequate heat transfer. can be dispensed with.
1.2 Priming pumps 2.2.2 Where lubricating oil lines must be led in the
vicinity of hot machinery, e.g. superheated steam
Where necessary, priming pumps are to be provided turbines, steel pipes which should be in one length and
for supplying lubricating oil to the engines. which are protected where necessary are to be used.
1.3 Emergency lubrication 2.3 Filters
A suitable emergency lubricating oil supply (e.g. 2.3.1 Lubricating oil filters are to be arranged in the
gravity tank) is to be arranged for machinery which discharge lines of the pumps.
may be damaged in case of interruption of lubricating
oil supply.
2.3.2 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in
1.4 Lubricating oil treatment accordance with the requirements of the engine
manufacturer..
1.4.1 Equipment necessary for adequate treatment of
lubricating oil (purifiers, automatic back-flushing 2.3.3 Uninterrupted supply of filtered oil has to be
filters, filters and free-jet centrifuges) is to be ensured under cleaning and maintenance conditions of
provided. filter equipment.
1.4.2 In the case of auxiliary engines running on 2.3.4 Engines for emergency power supply and for
heavy oil which are supplied from a common emergency fire pumps may be provided with simplex
lubricating oil drain tank, suitable equipment is to be filters.
fitted to ensure that in case of failure of the common
lubricating oil treatment system of ingress of fuel or 2.3.5 Main flow filters are to be provided with
cooling water in to the lubricating oil circuit, the differential pressure monitoring.
auxiliary engines required to safeguard the power Additionally, the back-flushing cycles of automatic
supply in accordance with the Rules for Electrical filters are to be monitored.
Installation, Volume IV, Section 3.C remain fully
operational. 2.3.6 For the arrangement of filters, see Section2,
G.3.
2. Lubricating oil systems
2.3.7 For the protection of the lubricating oil pumps,
2.1 Lubricating oil tanks and gravity simplex filter of a minimum mesh size of 100 may
circulating tanks be arranged on the suction side of the pumps.
2.1.1 For the capacity and location of these tanks see 2.4 Lubricating oil coolers
Section 10, C.
It is recommended that turbine and large engine plants
2.1.2 Where an engine lubricating oil circulation tank be provided with more than one oil cooler.
extends to the bottom shell plating on ships for which
a double bottom is required in the engine room, shut- 2.5 Oil level indicators
off valve are to be fitted in the drain pipes between
Machines with their own oil charge are to be provided
engine casing and circulating tank. These valves are to
with a means of determining the oil level from outside
be capable of being closed from a level above the
during operation. This requirement also applies to
lower platform.
reduction gears, thrust bearings and shaft bearings.
2.1.3 The suction connections of lubricating oil
2.6 Purifiers
pumps are to be located as far as possible from drain
pipes. The requirements in G.7 apply as appropriate.
2.1.4 The gravity tank is to be fitted with an overflow 3. Lubricating oil pumps
pipe which leads to the circulating tank. Arrangements
are to be made for observing the flow of excess oil in 3.1 Main engines
the overflow pipe. 3.1.1 Main and independent stand-by pumps are to
2.2 Filling and suction lines be arranged.
2.2.1 Filling and suction lines of lubricating oil tanks Main pumps driven by the main engines are to be so
designed that the lubricating oil supply is ensured over low as possible on either side of the ship.
the whole range of operation.
1.2 For service in shallow waters, it is
3.1.2 For plants with more than one main engine, see recommended that an additional high seawater intake
Section 2, G.4.2.3. should be provided.
3.2 Main turbine plant 1.3 It is to be ensured that the total seawater supply
for the engines can be taken from only one sea chest.
3.2.1 Main and independent stand-by lubricating oil
pumps are to be provided. 1.4 Each sea chest is to be provided with an
effective vent. The following venting arrangements
3.2.2 Emergency lubrication will be approved:
The lubricating oil supply to the main turbine plant for a) An air pipe of at least 32 mm ID which can be
cooling the bearings during the run-down period is to shut off and which extends above the bulkhead
be assured in the event of failure of the power supply. deck
By means of suitable arrangements such as gravity
tanks the supply of oil is also to be assured during b) Adequately dimensioned ventilation slots in the
starting of the emergency lubrication system. shell plating.
3.3 Main reduction gearing (motor vessels) 1.5 Steam or compressed air connections are to be
provided for clearing the sea chest gratings. The
3.3.1 Lubricating oil is to be supplied by a main steam or compressed air lines are to be fitted with
pump and an independent stand-by pump. shutoff valves fitted directly to the sea chests. Com-
3.3.2 Where a reduction gear has been approved by pressed air for blowing through sea chest gratings may
the Society to have adequate self-lubrication at 75 % exceed 2 bar only if the sea chests are constructed for
of the torque of the propelling engine, a standby higher pressures.
lubricating oil pump for the reduction gear may be 1.6 Where a sea chest is exclusively arranged as
dispensed with up to a power ratio of chest cooler the steam or compressed airlines for
P/nl [kW/Rpm] 3,0 clearing, may with the Society's agreement, be dis-
pensed with according to 1.5.
nl [Rpm] gear input revolution
2. Special rules for ships with ice class
3.3.3 The regulations under 3.1.2 are to be applied
for multi-propeller plants and plants with more than 2.1 For one of the sea chests specified in 1.1 the
one engine. sea inlet is to be located on the ship's center line and
as far aft as possible. The seawater discharge line of
3.4 Auxiliary machinery the entire engine plant is to be connected to the top of
3.4.1 Diesel generators the sea chest.
Where more than one diesel generator is available, 2.1.1 For ships with ice class ES 1 to ES 4 the sea
stand-by pumps are not required. chest is to be arranged as follows:
Where only one diesel generator is available (e.g. on a) In calculating the volume of the chest the
turbine-driven vessels where the diesel generator is following value shall be applied as a guide
needed for startup etc.) a complete spare pump is to be about 1 m3 for every 750 kW of the ship's
carried on board. engine output including the output of auxiliary
3.4.2 Auxiliary turbines engines.
Turbogenerators and turbines used for driving b) The chest shall be of sufficient height to allow
important auxiliaries such as boiler feedwater pumps ice to accumulate above the inlet pipe.
etc. are to be equipped with a main pump and an c) The free area of the strum holes shall be not
independent auxiliary pump. The auxiliary pump is to less than four times the sectional area of the
be designed to ensure a sufficient supply of lubricating inlet pipe.
oil during the startup and run-down operation.
2.1.2 As an alternative two smaller chests may be
arranged as stated in 2.1.1.
I. Seawater Cooling Systems 2.1.3 All discharge valves shall be so arranged that
1. Sea connections, sea chests the discharge of water at any draught will not be
hindered by ice.
1.1 At least two sea chests are to be provided.
Wherever possible, the sea chests are to be arranged as 2.2 Where necessary, a steam connection or a
11-24
heating coil is to be arranged for de-icing and thawing to be of a capacity which will ensure reliable operation
the sea chests. of the plant under partial load conditions and astern
operation as required in Section 2, E.5.1.1.e). The
2.3 Additionally, cooling water supply to the main cooling water pump is to be automatically started
engine plant may be arranged from ballast tanks with as soon as the speed falls below that required for the
circulation cooling. operation of the scoop.
This system does not replace the requirement stated in 5.2 Steam turbine plants
2.1.1.
5.2.1 Steam turbine plants are to be provided with a
2.4 For the fire pumps, see Section 12, E.1.3.6. main and a stand-by cooling water pump.
3. Sea valves The main cooling water pump is to be of sufficient
3.1 Sea valves are to be so arranged that they can capacity to supply the maximum cooling water
be operated from above the floor plates. requirements of the turbine plant. The capacity of the
stand-by cooling water pump is to be such as to ensure
3.2 Discharge pipes for seawater cooling systems reliable operation of the plant also during astern
are to be fitted with a shutoff valve at the shell plating. operation.
4. Strainer 5.2.2 Where cooling water is supplied by means of a
The suction lines of the seawater pumps are to be scoop, the main cooling water pump is to be of
fitted with strainers. sufficient capacity for the cooling water requirements
of the turbine plant under conditions of maximum
The strainers are to be so arranged that they can be astern output.
cleaned during operation of the pumps.
The main cooling water pump is to start automatically
Where cooling water is supplied by means of a scoop, as soon as the speed falls below that required for the
strainers in the main seawater cooling line can be operation of the scoop.
dispensed with.
5.3 Multi-propeller plants; plants with more
5. Seawater cooling pumps than one main engine
5.1 Diesel engine plants For plants with more than one engine and with
separate cooling water systems, complete spare pumps
5.1.1 Main propulsion plants are to be provided with on board may be accepted instead of stand-by pumps
main and stand-by cooling water pumps. provided that the main seawater cooling pumps are so
5.1.2 The main cooling water pump may be attached arranged that they can be replaced with the means
to the propulsion plant. It is to be ensured that the available on board.
attached pump is of sufficient capacity for the cooling 5.4 Cooling water supply for auxiliary engines
water required by main engine and auxiliary
equipments over the whole speed range of the Where a common cooling water pump is provided to
propulsion plant. serve more than one auxiliary engine, an independent
stand-by cooling water pump with the same capacity
The stand-by cooling water pump is to be driven is to be fitted. Independently operated cooling water
independently of the main engine. pumps of the main engine plant may be used to supply
5.1.3 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are cooling water to auxiliary engines while at sea,
each to be of sufficient capacity to meet the maximum provided that the capacity of such pumps is sufficient
cooling water requirements of the plant. to meet the additional cooling water requirement.
Alternatively, three cooling water pumps of the same If each auxiliary engine is fitted with an attached
capacity may be arranged, provided that two of the cooling water pump, no stand-by cooling water pumps
pumps are sufficient to supply the required cooling need be provided.
water for full load operation of the plant at design 6. Cooling water supply in dock
temperature.
It is recommended that a supply of cooling water, e.g.
With this arrangement it is permissible for the second from a water ballast tank, should be available so that
pump to be automatically put into operation only in the at least one diesel generator and, if necessary, the
higher temperature range by means of a thermostat. domestic refrigerating plant may be run when the ship
5.1.4 Ballast pumps or other suitable seawater pumps is in dock.
may be used as stand-by cooling water pumps. Cargo and container cooling systems shall conform to
5.1.5 Where cooling water is supplied by means of a the requirements stated in Rules for Refrigerating
scoop, the main and stand-by cooling water pumps are Installations, Volume VIII, Section l, I.4.
2.4 It is to be ensured that auxiliary machinery can

be maintained in operation while repairing the main
K. Fresh Water Cooling Systems coolers. If necessary, means are to be provided for
changing over to other heat exchangers, machinery or
1. General equipment through which a temporary heat transfer
can be achieved.
1.1 Fresh water cooling systems are to be so
arranged that the engines can be sufficiently cooled 2.5 Shut off valves are to be provided at the inlet
under all operating conditions. and outlet of all heat exchanger.
1.2 Depending on the requirements of the engine 2.6 Every heat exchanger and cooler is to be
plant, the following fresh water cooling systems are provided with a vent and a drain.
allowed:
2.7 Keel coolers, chest coolers
a) a single cooling circuit for the entire plant
2.7.1 Arrangement and construction drawings of keel
b) separate cooling circuits for the main and and chest coolers are to be submitted for approval.
auxiliary plant
2.7.2 Permanent vents for fresh water are to be
c) several independent cooling circuits for the provided at the top of keel coolers and chest coolers.
main engine components which need cooling
(e.g. cylinders, pistons and fuel valves) and for 2.7.3 Keel coolers are to be fitted with pressure
the auxiliary engines gauge connections at the fresh water inlet and outlet.
d) separate cooling circuits for various 3. Expansion tanks

temperature ranges. 3.1 Expansion tanks are to be arranged at sufficient
1.3 The cooling circuits are to be so arranged that, height for every cooling water circuit.
should one of the circuits fail, operation can be Different cooling circuits may only be connected to a
maintained by the other cooling circuits. common expansion tank if they do not interfere with
Where appropriate, the necessary change-over each other. Care must be taken here to ensure that
arrangements are to be provided for this purpose. damage to or faults in one system cannot affect the
other system.
1.4 As far as possible, the temperature controls of
main and auxiliary engines as well as of different 3.2 Expansion tanks are to be fitted with filling
circuits are to be independent of each other. connections, aeration/de-aeration devices, water level
indicators and drains.
1.5 Where, in automated engine plants, heat
exchanger for fuel or lubricating oil are incorporated 4. Fresh water cooling pumps
in the cooling water circuit, the entire cooling water 4.1 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are to
system is to be monitored for fuel and oil leakage. be provided for each fresh water cooling system.
1.6 Common cooling water systems for main and 4.2 Main cooling water pumps may be driven
auxiliary plants are to be fitted with shut off valves to directly by the main or auxiliary engines which they
enable repairs to be performed without taking the are intended to cool provided that a sufficient supply
entire plant out of service. of cooling water is assured under all operating
2. Heat exchanger, coolers conditions.
2.1 The construction and equipment of heat 4.3 Stand-by cooling water pumps are to be driven
exchanger and coolers are subject to the Rules of independently of main engines.
Section 8. 4.4 Stand-by cooling water pumps are to have he
2.2 The coolers of cooling water systems, engines same capacity as main cooling water pumps.
and equipment are to be constructed to ensure that the 4.5 Main engines are to be fitted with at least one
specified cooling water temperatures can be main and one stand-by cooling water pump. Where
maintained under all operating conditions. Cooling according to the construction of the engines more than
water temperatures are to be adjusted to meet the one water cooling circuit is necessary, a stand-by
requirements of engines and equipment. pump is to be fitted for each main cooling water pump.
2.3 Heat exchanger for auxiliary equipment in the 4.6 As an exception to 4.1, the Rules for sea-water
main cooling water circuit are to be provided with cooling pumps in I.5.4 are to be applied to the fresh
by-passes if by this means it is possible, in the event of water cooling pumps of important auxiliary engines.
a failure of the heat exchanger, to keep the system in
operation. 4.7 A stand-by cooling water pump of a cooling
11-26
water system may be used as a stand-by pump for 1.9 For compressed air connections for blowing
another system provided that the necessary pipe through sea chests refer to I.1.5.
connections are arranged. The shut off valves in these
connections are to be secured against unintended 1.10 For the compressed air supply to pneumatically
operation. operated valves refer to D.6.
4.8 Equipment providing for emergency cooling 1.11 Requirements for starting engines with com-
from another system can be approved if the plant and pressed air, see Section 2.H.2.
system are suitable for this purpose. 2. Control air systems
4.9 For plants with more than one main engine, see 2.1 Control air systems for essential consumers are
Section 2, G.5.1.3. to be provided with the necessary means of air
5. Temperature control treatment.
Cooling water circuits are to be provided with 2.2 Pressure reducing valves in the control air
temperature controls in accordance with the system of main engines are to be redundant.
requirements. Control devices whose failure may
impair the functional reliability of the engine are to be
equipped or manual operation.
M. Exhaust Gas Lines
6. Preheating for cooling water
1. Pipe layout
Means are to be provided for preheating fresh cooling
water. Exeptions are to be approved by BKI. 1.1 Engine exhaust gas pipes are to be installed
separately from each other, taking the structural fire
7. Emergency generating units protection into account. Other designs are to be
submitted for approval. The same applies to boiler
Internal combustion engines driving emergency
exhaust gas pipes.
generating units are to be fitted with independent
cooling systems. Such cooling systems are to be made 1.2 Account is to be taken of thermal expansion
proof against freezing. when laying out and suspending the lines.
1.3 Where exhaust gas lines discharge near water
level, provisions are to be taken to prevent water from
L. Compressed Air Lines entering the engines.
1. General 2. Silencers
1.1 Pressure lines connected to air compressors are 2.1 Engine exhaust pipes are to be fitted with
to be fitted with non-return valves at the compressor effective silencers.
outlet. 2.2 Silencers are to be provided with opening or
1.2 Oil and water separators, see Section 2. equivalent arrangements for internal inspection.
1.3 Starting air lines may not be used as filling 3. Water drains
lines for air receivers. Exhaust lines and silencers are to be provided with
1.4 Only type-tested hose assemblies made of suitable drains of adequate size.
metallic materials may be used in starting air lines of 4. Insulation
diesel engines which are permanently kept under
pressure. 4.1 Exhaust gas lines, silencers and exhaust gas
boilers are to bc effectively insulated to prevent the
1.5 The starting air line to each engine is to be ignition of combustible materials on them.
fitted with a non-return valve and a drain.
4.2 Insulating materials must be incombustible.
1.6 Tyfons are to be connected to at least two
compressed air receivers. 4.3 Exhaust gas lines inside engine rooms are to be
provided with a metal sheathing or other approved
1.7 A safety valve is to be fitted behind each type of hard sheathing.
pressure-reducing valve.
5. For special Rules for tankers refer to Section
1.8 Pressure water tanks and other tanks connected 15, B.9.3.
to the compressed air system are to be considered as
pressure vessels and must comply with the
requirements in Section 8 relating to the working
pressure of the compressed air system. N. Bilge Systems
1. Bilge lines 1.5 Reverse-flow protection

1.1 Layout of bilge lines 1.5.1 A screw-down non-return valve is recognized
as reverse-flow protection.
1.1.1 Bilge lines and bilge suction are to be so
arranged that the bilges can be completely pumped 1.5.2 A combination of a non-return valve without
even under disadvantageous trim conditions. shut off mechanism and a shut off valve may be
recognized as equivalent with the Society's approval.
1.1.2 Bilge suction are normally to be located on
both sides of the ship. For compartments located fore 1.6 Pipe layout
and aft in the ship, one bilge suction may be consid-
ered sufficient provided that it is capable of com- 1.6.1 To prevent the penetration of ballast and
pletely draining the relevant compartment. seawater into the ship through the bilge system, two
means of reverse-flow protection are to be fitted in the
1.1.3 Spaces located forward of the collision bilge connections, one of which is to be a screwdown
bulkhead and aft of the stern tube bulkhead and not non-return valve.
connected to the general bilge system are to be drained
by other suitable means of adequate capacity. One of such means of protection is to be fitted in each
suction line.
1.1.4 The required pipe thicknesses of bilge lines are
to be in accordance with Table 11.4. 1.6.2 For bilge connections outside machinery
spaces, a combination of a non-return valve without
1.2 Pipes laid through tanks shut off and a remote-controlled shut off valve may be
recognized as equivalent.
1.2.1 Bilge pipes may not be led through tanks for
lubricating oil, thermal oil, drinking water or 1.6.3 The direct bilge suction and the emergency
feedwater. injection need only have one means of reverse-flow
protection as specified in 1.5.1.
1.2.2 Where bilge pipes are led through fuel tanks
located above the double bottom and terminate in 1.6.4 Where a direct seawater connection is arranged
spaces which are not accessible during the voyage, an for attached bilge pumps to protect them against
additional non-return valve is to be fitted in the bilge running dry, the bilge suction are also to be fitted with
pipe where the pipe from the suction enters the fuel two reserve flow protecting devices.
tank.
1.6.5 The discharge lines of oily water separators are
1.3 Bilge suction and strums to be fitted with a reserve flow protecting valve at the
ship's side.
1.3.1 Bilge suction are to be so arranged as not to
impede the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells. They 2. Calculation of pipe diameters
are to be fitted with easily detachable, corrosion
resistant strums. 2.1 The calculated values according to formulae (4)
to (6) are to be rounded up to the next higher nominal
1.3.2 Emergency bilge suction are to be arranged in diameter.
such a manner that they are accessible, with free flow
and at a suitable distance from the tank top or the 2.2 Dry cargo and passenger ships
ship's bottom. a) main bilge pipes
1.3.3 For the size and design of bilge wells see Rules
for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 8. B.6.2. dH 1,68 (B H) L 25 [mm] (4)
1.4 Bilge valves b) branch bilge pipes

1.4.1 Valves in connecting pipes between the bilge
and the seawater and ballast water system, as well as dz 2,15 (B H) l 25 [mm] (5)
between the bilge connections of different
compartments, are to be so arranged that even in the
event of faulty operation or intermediate positions of where
the valves, penetration of seawater through the bilge
system will be safely prevented. dH [mm] calculated inside diameter of main
bilge pipe
1.4.2 Bilge discharge pipes are to be fitted with shut
dz [mm] calculated inside diameter of branch
off valves at the ship's side.
bilge pipe
1.4.3 Bilge valves are to be arranged so as to be
L [m] length of ship between
always accessible irrespective of the ballast and
perpendiculars
loading condition of the ship.
11-28
B [m] moulded breadth of ship

3.3 One bilge pump with a smaller capacity than
H [m] depth of ship to the bulkhead deck that required according to formula (7) is acceptable
l [m] length of the watertight provided that the other pump is designed for a
compartment correspondingly larger capacity. However, the
capacity of the smaller bilge pump shall not be less
than 85 % of the calculated capacity.
2.3 Tankers
3.4 Use of other pumps for bilge pumping
The diameter of the main bilge pipe in the engine
rooms of tankers and bulk cargo/oil carriers is cal- 3.4.1 Ballast pumps, stand-by seawater cooling
culated using the formula: pumps and general service pumps may also be used as
independent bilge pumps provided they are self-
priming and of the required capacity according to
dH 3,0 (B H) l1 35 [mm] (6)
formula (7).
3.4.2 In the event of failure of one of the required
where: bilge pumps, one pump each must be available for fire
l1 [m] total length of spaces between fighting and bilge pumping.
cofferdam or pump-room bulkhead 3.4.3 Fuel and oil pumps may not be connected to
and stern tube bulkhead the bilge system.
Other terms as in formulae (4) and (5). 3.4.4 Bilge ejectors are acceptable as bilge
Branch bilge pipes are to be dimensioned in pumping arrangements provided that there is an
accordance with 2.2 b). For bilge installations for independent supply of driving water.
spaces in the cargo area of tankers and bulk cargo/oil 3.5 Number of bilge pumps for cargo ships
carriers see Section 15.
Cargo ships are to be provided with two independent,
2.4 Minimum diameter power bilge pumps. On ships up to 2000 tons gross,
The inside diameter of main and branch bilge pipes is one of these pumps may be attached to the main
not to be less than 50 mm. For ships under 25 m engine.
length, the diameter may be reduced to 40 mm. On ships of less than 100 tons gross, one engine
2.5 Maximum diameter driven bilge pump is sufficient. The second
independent bilge pump may be a permanently
The diameter of the main bilge line calculated installed manual bilge pump. The engine-driven bilge
according to 2.2 a) need not exceed ND 200. pump may be coupled to the main propulsion plant.
2.6 Deviations 3.6 Number of bilge pumps for passenger
ships
Where in individual cases formula (5) requires a
greater bilge pipe diameter than that determined by At least three bilge pumps are to be provided. One
formula (4), a greater pipe diameter than that pump may be coupled to the main propulsion plant.
according to formula (4) is not necessary. Where the criterion numeral is 301) or more, a further
bilge pump is to be provided.
3. Bilge pumps
4. Bilge pumping for various spaces
3.1 Capacity of bilge pumps
4.1 Machinery spaces
Each bilge pump must be capable of delivering:
4.1.1 On ships of more than 100 tons gross, the
Q 5,75 10 3 2
dH [m 3/h] (7) bilges of every main machinery space must be capable
of being pumped as follows:
a) through the bilge suctions connected to the
where:
main bilge system,
Q [m3/h] minimum capacity
b) through one direct suction connected to the
dH [mm] calculated inside diameter of main largest independent bilge pump and
bilge pipe
3.2 Where rotor dynamic (centrifugal) pumps are c) through an emergency bilge suction
used for bilge pumping, they must be self-priming or
connected to an air extracting device. 1
) See SOLAS 1974, Chapter II-1, part-A, Regulations 5
and 18
connected to the cooling water pump of the 4.4.1 Cargo holds above bulkhead decks of
main propulsion plant or through another passenger ships or freeboard decks of cargo ships are
suitable emergency bilge system. to be fitted with drainage arrangement.
4.1.2 If the ship's propulsion plant is located in 4.4.2 Closed cargo holds may be drained directly to
several spaces, a direct suction in accordance with overboard, only when at a heel of the ship of 5, the
4.1.1 b) is to be provided in each watertight edge of the bulkhead deck or freeboard deck shall not
compartment in addition to branch bilge suction, in be immersed below the water line.
accordance with 4.1.1 a).
Drains from scuppers to overboard are to be fitted
When the direct suctions are in use, it must be possible with reverse flow protecting devices according to,
to pump simultaneously from the main bilge line by Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 21.
means of all the other bilge pumps.
4.4.3 Where the edge of the deck touches the water
The diameter of the direct suction may not be less than line or is already immersed when the ship heels 5, the
that of the main bilge pipe. drainage shall be led to one or more drain tanks of
adequate capacity.
4.1.3 The diameter of the emergency bilge suc-tion
on steam ships in accordance with 4.1.1 c) is to be at 4.4.4 The drainage tanks are to be fitted with a high
least 2/3 of the diameter and on motor ships equal to water level alarm and provided with suitable
the diameter of the cooling water pump suction line. arrangements for discharge overboard.
Exceptions to this Rule require the approval of the
Society. The emergency bilge suction must be In addition it shall be ensured that
connected to the cooling water pump suction line by
means of a screw-down non-return valve. - the number, size and disposition of the
scuppers are such as to prevent accumulation
This valve is to be provided with a plate with the of free water,
notice :
- the pumping arrangement take account of the
Emergency bilge valve! amount of water from any pressure water
To be opened in an emergency only!
spraying system and the required fire hose
Emergency bilge valves and cooling water inlet valves nozzles,
must be capable of being operated from above the
- water contaminated with petrol or other
floor plates.
dangerous substances is not drained to
4.1.4 Engine control rooms and similar spaces as machinery spaces or other spaces where
well as decks in engine rooms are to be provided with sources of ignition may be present,
drains to the engine room bilge. A drain pipe which
- where the enclosed cargo space is protected
passes through a watertight bulkhead is to be fitted
by a carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system
with a self-closing valve.
the deck scuppers are fitted with means to
4.2 Shaft tunnel prevent the escape of the smothering gas.
A bilge suction is to be arranged at the after end of the 4.5 Spaces which may be used for ballast
shaft tunnel. Where the shape of the bottom or the water, oil or dry cargo
length of the tunnel requires, an additional bilge
Where dry-cargo holds are also intended for carrying
suction is to be provided at the forward end. Bilge
ballast water or oils, the branch bilge pipes from these
valves for the shaft tunnel are to be arranged outside
spaces are to be connected to the ballast or cargo pipe
the tunnel in the engine room.
system only by change-over valves.
4.3 Cargo holds The change-over valves must be so arranged that
4.3.1 Cargo holds are to be normally fitted with intermediate positioning does not connect the different
bilge suctions fore and aft. piping systems. Change-over connections are to be
such that the pipe not connected to the cargo hold is
4.3.2 Cargo holds having a length under 30 m may isolated from the blanked off side of the change-over
be provided with only one bilge suction on each side. connection.
4.3.3 On ships with only one cargo hold, bilge
wells are to be provided fore and aft.
4.3.4 For cargo holds for the transport of
dangerous goods, see Section 12, P.7. 4.6 Refrigerated cargo spaces
4.4 Closed cargo, holds above bulkhead decks Refrigerated cargo spaces and thawing trays are to be
and above freeboard decks provided with drains which cannot be shut off. Each
11-30
drain pipe is to be fitted at its discharge end with a trap emergency bilge pumping system is provided in
to prevent the transfer of heat and odours. addition to the main bilge system, this is to be
independent of the latter and must be so arranged as to
4.7 Spaces for transporting livestock permit pumping of any flooded compartment. In this
Spaces intended for the transport of livestock are to be case, only the shut off and change over valves of the
additionally fitted with pumps or ejectors for dis- emergency system need be capable of being operated
charging the waste overboard. from above the bulkhead deck.
4.8 Fore and after peaks 5.1.4 Shut off and change-over valves which must
be capable of being operated from above the bulkhead
These spaces shall either be connected to the bilge deck should be clearly marked, accessible and fitted
system or are to be drained by means of hand pumps. with a position indicator.
Spaces located above the afterpeak may be drained to
the shaft tunnel or to the engine room bilge, provided 5.2 Bilge suctions
the drain line is fitted with a self-closing valve which
is to be located at a highly visible and accessible posi- Bilge pumps in the machinery spaces must be pro-
tion. The drain lines shall have a diameter of at least vided with direct bilge suctions in these spaces, but
40 mm. not more than two direct suctions need be provided in
any one space.
4.9 Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void spaces
Bilge pumps located in other spaces are to have direct
Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void spaces adjoining suctions to the space in which they are installed.
the ship's shell are to be connected to the bilge system.
5.3 Arrangement of bilge pumps
Where the after peak is adjoining the engine room, it
may be drained over a self-closing valve to the engine 5.3.1 Bilge pumps must be installed in separate
room bilge. watertight compartments which are to be so arranged
that they are unlikely to be simultaneously flooded in
4.10 Chain lockers the event of damage to the ship.
Chain lockers are to be drained by means of Ships with a length of 91,5 m or over or having a
appropriate arrangements. criterion numeral of 301) or more are to have at least
one bilge pump available in emergency cases. This
5. Additional Rules for passenger vessels
requirement is satisfied if
5.1.1 The arrangement of bilge pipes
a) one of the required pumps is a submersible
- within 0,2 B of the ship's side measured at emergency bilge pump connected to its own
the level of the subdivision load line, bilge system and powered from a source
located above the bulkhead deck or
- in the double bottom lower than 460 mm
above the base line or b) the pumps and their sources of power are
distributed over the entire length of the ship
- below the horizontal level specified in Rules the buoyancy of which in damaged condition
for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section is ascertained by calculation for each
29.F. individual compartment or group of
is permitted only if a non-return valve is fitted in the compartments, at least one pump being
compartment in which the corresponding bilge suction available in an undamaged compartment.
is located. 5.3.2 The bilge pumps specified in 3.6 and their
5.1.2 Valve boxes and valves of the bilge system energy sources may not be located forward of the
are to be installed in such a way that each collision bulkhead.
compartment can be emptied by at least one pump in 5.4 Passenger vessels for limited range of
the event of ingress of water. service
Where parts of the bilge arrangement (pump with The range of bilge pumping for passenger vessels with
suction connections) are situated less than 0,2 B from limited range of service, e.g. navigation on shallow
the ship's shell, damage to one part of the arrangement water service, can be agreed with BKI.
must not result in the rest of the bilge arrangement
being rendered inoperable. 6. Additional Rules for tankers
5.1.3 Where only one common piping system is See Section 15, B.4.
provided for all pumps, all the shut off and changeover
valves necessary for bilge pumping must be arranged 1
) See SOLAS 1974, Chapter II-1, part A, Regulations 5
for operating from above the bulkhead deck. Where an and 18.
7. Bilge testing arranged that the tanks can be emptied despite

unfavorable conditions of trim and list.
All bilge arrangements are to be tested under the
Society's supervision. 1.1.2 Ships having very wide double bottom tanks
are also to be provided with suction at the outer sides
of the tanks. Where the length of the ballast water
tanks exceeds 30 m, the Society may require suction to
O. Equipment for the Treatment and Stor- be provided in the forward part of the tanks.
age of Bilge Water and Fuel and Oil -
Residues1) 1.2 Pipes passing through tanks
1. Oily water separating equipment Ballast water pipes may not pass through drinking
water, feedwater, thermal oil or lubricating oil tanks.
1.1 Ships of 400 tons gross and above shall be
fitted with an oily water separator or a filter plant for 1.3 Piping systems
the separation of oil/water mixtures. 1.3.1 Where a tank is used alternately for ballast
1.2 Ships of 10.000 tons gross and above shall be water and fuel (change-over tank), the suction in this
fitted, in addition to the equipment required in tank is to be connected to the respective system by
Paragraph 1.1, with an oil discharge monitoring and three-way cocks with L-type plugs, cocks with open
control system or with a 15 ppm alarm system. bottom or change-over piston valves. These must be
arranged so that there is no connection between the
1.3 A sampling device is to be arranged in the ballast water and the fuel systems when the valve or
discharge line of oily water separating equip- cock is in an intermediate position. Change-over pipe
ment/filtering systems. connections may be used instead of the above
mentioned valves. Each change-over tank is to be
1.4 By-pass lines are not permitted for oilywater individually connected to its respective system. For
separatoring equipment/filtering systems. remotely controlled valves see D.6.
2. Discharge of fuel and oil residues 1.3.2 Where ballast water tanks may be used
2.1 A sludge tank is to be provided. For the exceptionally as dry cargo holds, such tanks are also
fittings and mountings of sludge tanks, see Section 10, to be connected to the bilge system. The requirements
E. specified in N.4.5 are applicable.
2.2 A self-priming pump is to be provided for 1.3.3 Where, on cargo ships, pipelines are led
sludge discharge to reception facilities. The capacity through the collision bulkhead below the freeboard
of the pump shall be such that the sludge tank can be deck, a shutoff valve is to be fitted directly at the
emptied in a reasonable time. collision bulkhead inside the fore peak.
2.3 A separate discharge line is to be provided The valve has be capable of being remotely operated
for discharge of fuel and oil residues to reception from above the freeboard deck.
facilities. Where the fore peak is immediately adjacent to a
2.4 Where incinerating plants are used for fuel permanently accessible room (e.g; bow thruster room)
and oil residues, compliance is required with which is separated from the cargo space, this shutoff
Section 9 and with the Regulations for the Design and valve may be fitted directly at the collision bulkhead
Testing of Waste Incinerating Plants on Seagoing inside this room without provision for remote control.
Ships. 1.3.4 On passenger ships, only one pipeline may be
P. Ballast Systems led through the collision bulkhead below the freeboard
deck. The pipeline is to be fitted with a remote
1. Ballast lines controlled shutoff inside the forepeak directly at the
collision bulkhead. The remote control must be oper-
1.1 Arrangement of piping - general
ated from above the freeboard deck. Where the
1.1.1 Suction in ballast water tanks are to be so forepeak is divided into two compartments, two
pipelines may in exceptional cases be passed through
the collision bulkhead below freeboard deck.
1
) With regard to the installation on ships of oily water
1.3.5 If ballast water tanks on ships with ice class
separators, filter plants, oil collecting tanks, oil
discharge lines and a monitoring and control system or are arranged above the ballast load line, the tanks are
a 15 ppm alarm device in the water outlet of oily water to be fitted with a heating arrangement.
separators, compliance is required with the provisions of
the International Convention for the Prevention of 1.4 Anti-heeling arrangements
Pollution from Ships, 1973, (MARPOL) and the
Protocol of 1978. Anti-heeling arrangements, which may produce
Form F.136 is to be submitted for approval.
11-32
heeling angles of more than 10 according to Rules for The pipelines, pumps and valves belonging to these
Hull, Volume II, Section 1.E.3, are to be performed as systems are also subject to the following requirements.
follows :
1. Pumps
A shutoff device is to be provided in the
cross channel between the tanks destined for 1.1 Two circulating pumps which are to be
this purpose before and after the anti-heeling independent of each other are to be provided.
pump. 1.2 A transfer pump is to be installed for filling
These shutoff devices and the pump are to be the expansion tank and for draining the system.
remotely operated. The control devices are to 1.3 The pumps are to be so mounted that any oil
be arranged in one control stand. leakage can be safely disposed of.
At least one of the arranged remote 1.4 For emergency stopping see Section 12, B.9.
controlled shutoff devices shall automatically
shut down in the case of power supply 2. Valves
failure.
2.1 Only valves made of ductile materials may be
The position "closed" of the shutoff used.
devicesshall be indicated on the control
2.2 Valves shall be designed for a nominal
standby type approved end position
pressure of PN 16.
indicators.
2.3 Valves are to be mounted in accessible po-
Additionally, Rules for Electrical
sitions.
Installations, Volume IV, Section 7, G is to
be observed. 2.4 Non-return valves are to be fitted in the
pressure lines of the pumps.
2. Ballast pumps
2.5 Valves in return pipes are to be secured in the
The number and capacity of the pumps must satisfy
open position.
the vessel's operational requirements.
2.6 Bellow sealed valves are to be preferably
3. Additional Rules for passenger ships
used.
3.1 Cross-flooding arrangements
3. Piping
As far as possible, anti-heeling arrangements for
equalizing unsymmetrical flooding should operate 3.1 Pipes in accordance with Table 11.1 are to be
automatically. Where the arrangement does not used.
operate automatically, any shutoff valves and other 3.2 The material of the sealing joints is to be
devices must be capable of being operated from above suitable for permanent operation at the design tem-
the bulkhead deck. perature and resistant to the thermal oil.
The cross-flooding arrangements must ensure that in 3.3 Provision is to be made for thermal expansion
case of flooding, equalization is achieved within 15 by an appropriate pipe layout and the use of suitable
minutes. Separation of the tanks is to be ensured compensators.
during normal operation.
3.4 The pipelines are to be preferably connected
Anti-heeling arrangements for equalizing by means of welding. The number of detachable pipe
unsymmetrical flooding are to be submitted to the connections is to be minimized.
Society for approval.
3.5 The laying of pipes through accommodation,
4. Additional rules for Tankers public or service spaces is not permitted.
See Section 15, B.4. 3.6 Pipelines passing through cargo holds are to
5. Operational testing be installed in such a way that,no damage can be
caused.
The ballast arrangement is to be subjected to
operational testing under the Society's supervision. 3.7 Pipe penetrations through bulkheads and
decks are to be insulated against conduction of heat.
3.8 The venting is to be so arranged that air/oil
Q. Thermal Oil Systems mixtures can be carried away without danger.
Thermal oil systems shall be installed in accordance 4. Pressure testing
with Section 7, Part II.
See B.4.
5. Tightness and operational testing are to be so arranged that the overflow is led to one of
the storage tanks.
After installation, the entire arrangement is to be
subjected to tightness and operational testing under the 1.1.11 The overflow pipes of tanks used
supervision of the Society. alternatively for oil fuel and ballast water must be
capable of being separated from the fuel overflow
system and led separately to atmosphere when the
tanks are to be filled with ballast water.
R. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes 1.1.12 The overflow pipes of tanks used
alternatively for oil fuel and ballast water must be
General capable of being separated from the fuel overflow
The laying of air, overflow and sounding pipes is system.
permitted only in places where the laying of the 1.1.13 Where the air and overflow pipes of several
corresponding piping system is also permitted (see tanks situated at the ship's shell lead to a common line,
Table 11.4). the connections to this line are to be above the
1. Air and overflow pipes freeboard deck if possible but at least so high above
the deepest load waterline that should a leakage occur
1.1 Arrangement in one tank due to damage to the hull or listing of the
ship, fuel or water cannot flow into another tank.
1.1.1 All tanks, void spaces etc. are to be fitted at
their highest position with air pipes which must 1.1.14 The air and overflow pipes of lubricating oil
normally terminate above the open deck. and fuel tanks shall not be led to a common line.
1.1.2 Air and overflow pipes are to be laid 1.1.15 For the connection to a common line of air
vertically. and overflow pipes on ships with classification mark
or see D.9.
1.1.3 Air and overflow pipes passing through cargo
holds are to be protected against damage. 1.1.16 For the cross-sectional area of air pipes and
air/overflow pipes, see Table 11.14.
1.1.4 For the height above deck of air and overflow
pipes see Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II,
Section 21. 1.2 Number of air and overflow pipes
1.1.5 Air pipes from unheated leakage oil tanks and 1.2.1 The number and arrangement of the air pipes
lubricating oil tanks which do not form part of the is to be so performed that the tanks can be aerated and
ship's hull may terminate at clearly visible positions in deaerated, so that the design pressure of the tanks will
the engine room. Where these tanks from part of the not be exceeded.
ships hull, the air pipes are to terminate above the free
1.2.2 Tanks which extend from side to side of the
board deck, on passenger ships above the bulkhead
ship must be fitted with an air/overflow pipe at each
decks. It must be ensured that no leaking oil can
corner. At the narrow ends of double bottom tanks in
spread onto heated surfaces where it may ignite.
the forward and after parts of the ship, only one
1.1.6 Air pipes from lubricating oil storage tanks air/overflow pipe is sufficient.
which form part of the ship's shell are to terminate in
the engine room are to be provided with funnels and 1.3 Air pipe closing devices
pipes for safe drainage in the event of possible
overflow. Air/overflow pipes terminating above the open deck
are to be fitted with type-tested automatic air pipe
1.1.7 Air pipes of lubricating oil tanks which heads.
terminate on the open deck are to be so arranged that
seawater may not enter into the tanks.
Table 11.14 Cross-Sectional areas of air and
1.1.8 Air pipes for cofferdams and void spaces overflow pipes
with bilge connections are to be extended above the
open deck. Cross-sectional areas of air
Tank filling and overflow pipes
1.1.9 Air pipes of fuel day tanks which are led systems
above the open deck must be located at a sufficient AP AOP
height and protected against breaking seas. by 1/3 f per -
1.1.10 Where fuel day tanks are fitted with Filling gravity tank
change-over overflow pipes, the change-over devices
11-34
Pump- - 1,25 f per 2.1.1 Sounding pipes are to be provided for tanks,
ing tank 1) cofferdams and void spaces with bilge connections
and for bilges and bilge wells in spaces which are not
Explanatory note :
accessible at all times.
AP = air pipe
On application, the provision of sounding pipes for
AOP = air/overflow pipe
bilge wells in permanently accessible spaces may be
f = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe dispensed with.
1
) as the total cross-sectional area is sufficient if it can be
proved that the resistance to flow of the air and 2.1.2 Where the tanks are fitted with remote level
overflow pipes including the air pipe closing devices indicators which are type-approved by BKI the
at the proposed flow rate cannot cause unacceptably arrangement of sounding pipes can be dispensed with.
high pressure in the tanks in the event of overflow
2.1.3 As far as possible, sounding pipes are to be
1.4 Overflow systems laid straight and are to extend as near as possible to
the bottom of the tank.
l.4.1 Ballast water tanks
2.1.4 Sounding pipes which terminate below the
Proof by calculation is to be provided for the system
deepest load waterline are to be fitted with selfclosing
concerned that under the specified operating
shutoff devices. Such sounding pipes are only
conditions the design pressures of all the tanks
permissible in spaces which are accessible at all times.
connected to the overflow system cannot be exceeded.
All other sounding pipes are to be extended to the
1.4.2 Fuel oil tanks
open deck. The sounding pipe openings must always
The requirements to be met by overflow systems of be accessible and fitted with watertight closures.
heavy oil tanks are specified in the Society's
2.1.5 Sounding pipes of tanks are to be provided
"Regulation for the Construction, Fitting and Testing
close to the top of the tank with holes for equalizing
of Closed Fuel Overflow Systems".
the pressure.
1.4.3 The overflow collecting manifolds of fuel
2.1.6 In cargo holds, a sounding pipe is to be fitted
tanks are to be led at a sufficient gradient to an over-
to each bilge well.
flow tank of sufficient capacity.
2.1.7 Where level alarms are arranged in each bilge
The overflow tank is to be fitted with a level alarm
well of cargo holds, the sounding pipes may be
which operates when the tank is about 1/3 full.
dispensed with. The level alarms are to be separate
1.4.4 For the side of the air and overflow pipes, see from each other and are to be type approved by BKI.
Table 11.15.
2.1.8 Sounding pipes passing through cargo holds
1.4.5 The use of a fuel storage tank as overflow are to be laid in protected spaces or they are to be
tank is permissible but requires the installation of a protected against damage.
high level alarm and an air pipe with 1,25 times the
2.2 Sounding pipes for fuel, lubricating oil
cross-sectional area of the main bunkering line.
and thermal oil tanks
1.5 Determination of the pipe cross-sectional
2.2.1 Sounding pipes which terminate below the
areas.
open deck are to be provided with self-closing devices
1.5.1 For the cross-sectional areas of air and as well as with self-closing test valves, see also
overflow pipes, see Tables 11.14 and 11.15. Section 10, B.3.3.7.
The minimum diameter of air and overflow pipes shall 2.2.2 Sounding pipes shall not to be located in the
not be smaller than 50 mm. vicinity of firing plants, machine components with
high surface temperatures or electrical equipment.
1.5.2 The clear cross-sectional area of air pipes on
passenger ships with cross-flooding arrangement must 2.2.3 Sounding pipes must not terminate in
be so large that the water can pass from one side of the accommodation or service spaces.
ship to the other within 15 minutes. See also P.3.
2.2.4 Sounding pipes are not to be used as filling
1.6 The minimum wall thicknesses of air and pipes.
overflow pipes are to be in accordance with Table
2.3 Cross-sections of pipes
11.16a and 11.16b.
2.3.1 Sounding pipes shall have a nominal inside
1.7 For pipe material see B.
diameter of at least 32 mm.
2. Sounding pipes
2.3.2 The nominal diameters of sounding pipes
2.1 General which pass through refrigerated holds at temperatures
below 0 C are to be increased. 2.2.1 The upper openings of air pipes are to be
fitted with automatic closing devices and are to be
2.4 The minimum wall thicknesses of sounding protected against the entry of insects.
pipes are to be in accordance with Tables 11.16a and
11.16b. 2.3 Sounding pipes must terminate sufficiently
high above deck.
2.5 For pipe materials see B.
3. Drinking water pipe lines
3.1 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be
S. Drinking Water Systems connected to pipe lines carrying other media.
1. Drinking water tanks
3.2 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be laid
For the design and arrangement of drinking water through tanks which do not contain drinking water.
tanks see Volume II, Rules for Hull Construction,
3.3 Drinking water supply to tanks which do not
Section 12.
contain drinking water (e.g. expansion tanks of the
2. Drinking water tank connections fresh water cooling system) is to be made by means of
an open funnel or with means of preventing back-
2.1 Filling connections are to be located suffi- flow.
ciently high above deck and are to be fitted with a
closing device. 4. Drinking water pumps
2.1.1 Filling connections are not to be fitted to air 4.1 Separate drinking water pumps are to be
pipes. provided for drinking water systems.
2.2 Air/overflow pipes are to be extended above 4.2 The pressure lines of the pumps of drinking
the open deck and are to be protected against the entry water pressure tanks are to be fitted with screwdown
of insects by a fine mesh screen. non-return valves.
Air pipe closing devices, see Section 11, R.1.3.
Table 11.15 Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes (closed overflow systems)
Tank filling and overflow Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes Remarks
systems AP OP DP
1/3 f - - cross-sectional area of
Stand-pipe
stand-pipe 1,25 F
Filling
1/3 f 1) 2
) - nominal diameter of relief
Relief valve min. 1,25 F valve 1,25 F
2
Overflow chest 1/3 F at chest ) 1,25 F -
min. 1,25 F
Overflow 2
Manifold 1/3 F ) - -
system min. 1,25 F
Overflow tank 1/3 F - - -
Explanatory notes :
AP = air pipe
OP = overflow pipe
DP = drainage pipe
f = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe
F = cross-sectional area of main filling pipe
1) 1/3 f only for tanks in which an overflow is prevented by structural arrangements
2) Determined in accordance with 1.4.
Table 11.16a Choice of minimum wall thicknesses

Location
Piping system Air, sounding and
Drain lines and scupper pipes
or position of overflow pipes
open pipe Tank with Tank with Cargo Machinery
outlets same disparate- holds spaces
media media
11-36
below freeboard deck on

bulkhead deck above
above below
free-
without with weather weather
board
shuttoff on shutoff on deck deck
deck
ship's side ship's side
Air, Overflow
and sounding C C A A
pipe
Scupper pipes
A
from open deck
Discharge and B
scupper pipes A A
leading directly
B A
overboard
B
Discharge pipes
of pumps for
A
sanitary
systems
Table 11.16b Minimum wall thicknesses of air, - Steel pipes according to Table 11.5, Group N
overflow, sounding and sanitary
- Pipes having smaller thicknesses which are
pipes
specially protected against corrosion after special
Minimum wall thickness approval
Pipe O.D. [mm]
[mm] - Special types of pipes according to recognized
A B C standards, e.g. socketed pipes, after special
approval.
38 - 82,5 4,5 7,1 6,3
1.4 For sanitary discharge lines below freeboard
88,9 4,5 8 6,3
deck/bulkhead deck within a watertight compartment,
101,6 - 114,3 4,5 8 7,1 which terminate in a sewage tank or in a sanitary
127 - 139,7 4,5 8,8 8 treatment plant, pipes according to 1.3 may be used.
152,4 4,5 10 8,8
1.5 Penetrations of pipes of smaller thickness, pipes
159 - 177,8 5 10 8,8 of special types and plastic pipes through bulkheads of
193,7 5,4 12,5 8,8 type A are to be approved by BKI.
219,1 5,9 12,5 8,8
1.6 If sanitary discharge pipes are led through cargo
244,5 - 457,2 6,3 12,5 8,8 holds, they are to be protected against damage by
cargo.
5. Drinking water generation
1.7 Sewage tanks and sewage treatment systems
Where the distillate produced by the ship's own
evaporator unit is used for the drinking water supply, 1.7.1 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with air pipes
the treatment of the distillate has to comply with leading to the open deck. For air pipe closing devices
current regulations of national health authorities. see Section 11, R.1.3.
1.7.2 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with a filling
connection, a rinsing connection and a level alarm.
1.7.3 The discharge lines or sewage tanks and
T. Sanitary Systems sewage treatment tanks are to be fitted at the ship's
side with screw-down non-return valve.
1. General arrangement
When the valve is not arranged directly at the ships
1.1 For scuppers and overboard discharges see Rules
side, the thickness of the pipe is to be according to
for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 21.
Table 11.16b, coulumn B.
1.2 The minimum wall thicknesses of sanitary pipes
below free board and bulkhead decks are specified in 1.7.4 A second means of reverse-flow protection is
Tables 11.16a and 11.16b. to be fitted in the suction or delivery line of the
1.3 For discharge lines above freeboard sewage pump if, in the event of a 5 list to port or
deck/bulkhead deck the following pipes may be used: starboard, the lowest internal opening of the discharge
system is less than 200 mm above the summer load
line1). U. Hose Assemblies and Compensators of

Non-Metallic Materials
The second means of reverse-flow protection may be
a pipe loop having an overflow height above the Hose assemblies consist of hoses and hose couplings
summer load line of at least 200 mm at a 5 heel. The in the installed and tested condition.
pipe loop is to be fitted with an automatic ventilation
device located at 45 below the crest of the loop. 1. Scope
1.7.5 Where at a heeling of the ship of 5 at port or 1.1 The following Rules apply to hose assemblies
starboard, the lowest inside opening of the sewage and compensators of non-metallic materials in fuel,
system lies on the summer load line or below, the lubricating oil, hydraulic oil, bilge, ballast, fresh water
discharge line of the sewage collecting tank is to be cooling, seawater cooling, compressed air and
fitted in addition to the required reverse-flow auxiliary steam systems.
protection device according to 1.7.4 with a gate valve 1.2 Hose assemblies and compensators made of
directly on the ships' side. In this case the reverse flow non-metallic materials must not be used in
protection device need not to be of srew-down type. permanently pressurized starting air lines of diesel
1.7.6 Ballast and bilge pumps may not be used for engines.
emptying sewage tanks. 1.3 Compensators of non-metallic materials are not
2. Additional rules for ships with classification allowed in cargo pipe lines on tankers.
mark or 1.4 Hose assemblies in CO2 and halon systems are
2.2 If this condition cannot be fulfilled, e.g. when: subject to the Regulations for the Type-testing of Hose
Assemblies for Use in Carbon Dioxide and Halon Fire
- water tight compartments are connected with Extinguishing Systems.
each other through internal openings of the
sanitary discharge lines, or 2. Definitions
sanitary discharge lines from several water tight 2.1 High-pressure hose assemblies
compartments are led to a common drain tank, or According to these Rules, a high-pressure hose
parts of the sanitary discharge system are located assembly is a hose assembly which is used in systems
within the damage zone (see D.9.) and these are with dynamic load characteristics.
connected to other compartments over internal 2.2 Low-pressure hose assemblies
openings
According to these Rules, a low-pressure hose
the water tightness is to be ensured by means of assembly is a hose assembly which is used in systems
remote controlled shut-off devices at the watertight without dynamic load characteristic.
bulkheads.
2.3 Maximum allowable working pressure
The operation of the shut-off devices must be possible
from an always accessible position above the bulkhead 2.3.1 The maximum allowable working pressure
deck on passenger ships and above the unsuitable leak for high-pressure hose assemblies is the maximum
water line on other ships. The position of the shut-off dynamic internal pressure which may be imposed on
devices must be monitored at the remote control the hose assemblies.
position.
2.3 Where the lowest inside opening of the sanitary 2.3.2 The maximum allowable working pressure
discharge system is below the bulkhead deck, a screw- for low-pressure hose assemblies and compensators is
down non-return valve and a second reverse-flow the maximum static internal pressure which may be
protection device are to be fitted in the discharge line imposed on the hose assemblies or compensators.
of the sanitary water treatment arrangem1ent. In this
2.4 Test pressure
case, the discharge line of sanitary collecting tanks are
to be fitted with a gate valve and two reverse-flow 2.4.1 For high-pressure hose assemblies the test
protection devices. Concerning the shutoff devices and pressure is at least 2 times the maximum allowable
reverse-flow protection devices, 1.7.3, 1.7.4 and 1.7.5 working pressure.
are to be applied.
2.4.2 For low-pressure hose assemblies and
compensators the test pressure is 1,5 times the
maximum allowable working pressure.
1 2.5 Burst pressure

) Where sanitary treatment arrangements are fitted with
emergency drains to the bilge or with openings for The burst pressure is the static pressure at which the
chemicals, these will be considered as internal openings
hose assembly or the compensator is destroyed.
in the sense of these Rules..
11-38
For high-pressure hose assemblies the burst pressure 4.4 In fresh water systems with a working pressure of
is 4 times, and for low-pressure hose assemblies and 5 bar and in charging air and scavenging air lines,
compensators 3 times the maximum allowable hoses may be fastened to the pipe ends with double
working pressure. clips.
3. Requirements 4.5 Where hose assemblies and compensators are
installed directly near hot components they must be
3.1 1
Only approved ) hose assemblies and provided with approved heat-resistant sheathing.
compensators may be used in the systems mentioned
in. 5. Tests
3.2 Manufacturers of hose assemblies must be 5.1 Hose assemblies and compensators are to be
approved by BKI. subjected in the manufacturer's works to a pressure
test in accordance with 2.4 under the supervision of
3.3 Hose assemblies and compensators including the Society.
their couplings must be suitable for the operating
media, pressures and temperatures. 6. Cargo hoses
3.4 The selection of hose assemblies and com- 6.1 The selection and testing of cargo hoses is
pensators is to be based on the maximum allowable subject to the Society's "Regulations for the Re-
working pressure of the system concerned. A pressure quirements and Tests applicable to Cargo Hoses of
of 5 bar is to be considered as the minimum working Non-metallic and Metallic Materials".
pressure.
6.2 Cargo hoses on gas tankers are additionally
3.5 Hose assemblies and compensators in fuel, subject to the Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied
lubricating oil, hydraulic oil, bilge and seawater sys- Gases in Bulk, Volume IX, Section 5.7.
tems are to be flame-resistant1) .
6.3 Cargo hoses on chemical tankers are additionally
3.6 Only high-pressure hose assemblies may be used subject to the Rules for Ships Carrying Dangerous
in high-pressure systems with dynamic load Chemical in Bulk, Volume X, Section 5.7.
characteristics, e.g. hydraulic systems.
7. Marking
4. Installation
Hose assemblies and compensators must be perma-
4.1 Hose assemblies shall not be longer than is nently marked. The marking must comprise at least the
necessary for the application. following details:
4.2 In installing hose assemblies, the minimum Manufacturer's mark of symbol
bending radii shall not be less than those specified by
Date of manufacture
the manufacturers.
Type reference
4.3 Hose assemblies and compensators are to be
accessible at all times. Nominal diameter
Maximum allowable working pressure.
1
) See Regulations for the Performance of Type Tests on
Mechanical Components and Appliances, Part D.13 and
D.14.
Section 12 - Fire Protection and Fire Extinguishing Equipment 12-1
Section 12
Fire Protection and Fire Extinguishing Equipment
A. General - Dry powder fire extinguishing system,

including the powder vessels, propellant
1. Scope
containers and the relevant calculations,
1.1 The rules in this section apply to fire
protection in the machinery and boiler spaces of - Fire extinguishing equipment for galley
passenger and cargo vessels and to fire extinguishing range exhaust ducts
equipment throughout the ship. - Fixed local fire extinguishing arrangement
1.2 Fire fighting ships to which the notation FF for fuel oil purifiers for heated fuel oil
is to be allocated are also subject to the "Regulations - Fire alarm systems,
for the Equipment on Fire fighting Ships".
- Fire control plans showing all items of
2. Documents for approval equipment required for fire protection and
Diagrammatic plans, drawings and documents fire fighting
covering the following are to be submitted in - Arrangements for the transport of dangerous
triplicate1) for approval: goods, as far as these are not covered by the
- Water fire extinguishing equipment, general system drawings of the ship.
including details of the capacities and 3. Further Rules Applicable
pressure heads of the fire pumps,
3.1 Structural fire protection Seagoing Ships,
- CO2 fire extinguishing system with Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II,
arrangement drawing, operating diagram, Section 22 and 24.
CO2 room, tripping devices alarm diagram,
3.2 Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk
- Foam extinguishing system, including Seagoing Ships, Rules for Ships Carrying
drawings of storage tanks for foam Liquefied Gases in Bulk, Volume IX.
concentrate, monitors and foam applicators
and the calculations and details relating to 3.3 Ships Carrying dangerous chemicals in bulk
the supply of foam concentrate Seagoing Ships, Rules for Ships Carrying
Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk, Volume X.
- Pressure water spraying system, automatic,
including drawings for pressurized water 3.4 Pressure vessels Section 8
tank, spray nozzles and alarms, with
calculation 3.5 Oil fired equipment Section 9
- Pressure water spraying system, manually 3.6 Fuel and oil storage Section 10
operated, including calculations of water 3.7 Pipes, valves, fittings and pumps Section 11
demand and pressure drop, spray nozzles,
remote control 3.8 Machinery for ships with ice class Section
11.I.2
For pressure water spraying systems in
Ro/Ro decks/special category spaces, also 3.9 Additional fire protection and fire
documentary proof of water drainage system extinguishing equipment in automated plant
Rules for Automation, Volume VII.
- Pressure water spraying system for exhaust
gas fired thermal oil heaters, including a 3.10 Electrical plant Seagoing Ships, Rules for
drawing of the heater showing the Electrical Installations, Volume IV.
arrangement of the spray nozzles and a 3.11 Equipment of fire fighting ships
diagram and calculation of the water supply "Regulations for the Equipment on Fire
and drainage Fighting Ships".
1
) For Indonesian flag ship in quadruplicate, one for
Government
12-2 Section 12 - Fire Protection and Fire Extinguishing Equipment
B. Fire Protection ventilation.

1. Machinery space arrangement In addition to the fixed fire extinguishing system in the
machinery space, a fixed local fire extinguishing
1.1 The arrangement of machinery spaces shall arrangement is to be provided to protect the area at
be so that safe storage and handling of flammable risk.
liquids is ensured.
2.3 The fixed local fire extinguishing
1.2 All spaces in which internal combustion en- arrangemnts must be suitable for effective fire
gines, oil burners or fuel settling or service tanks are extinguishing in the areas at risk. Their actuation may
located must be easily accessible and sufficiently be performed automatically or manually. In case of
ventilated. automatic actuation means for manual release are to be
1.3 Where leakage of flammable liquids may provided additionally. The actuating equipment for
occur during operation or routine maintenance work, manual release is to be installed in the machinery
special precautions are to be taken to prevent these control room or in another suitable location.
liquids from coming into contact with sources of ig- 3. Arrangement of boiler plants
nition.
3.1 Boilers are to be located at a sufficient dis-
1.4 Materials used in machinery spaces shall not tance from fuel and lubricating oil tanks and from
normally have properties increasing the fire potential cargo space bulkheads in order to prevent undue
of these rooms heating of the tank contents or the cargo.
1.5 Materials used as flooring, bulkhead lining, Alternatively, the tank sides or bulkheads are to be
ceiling or deck in control rooms, machinery spaces or insulated.
rooms with oil tanks must be non-combustible. Where 3.2 Oil tight coamings are to be provided
there is a danger that oil may penetrate insulating between boiler and engine rooms not separated by
materials, these must be protected against the watertight bulkheads. A coaming height of 600 mm is
penetration of oil or oil vapors. normally adequate.
2. Fuel oil purifiers 4. Insulation of piping and equipment with
2.1 Fuel oil purifiers for heated fuel oil should high surface temperatures
preferably be installed in a separate room. This room 4.1 All parts with surface temperatures above
must be enclosed by steel divisions, be fitted with a 220 C, e.g. steam, thermal oil and exhaust gas lines,
self-closing steel door and be provided with the exhaust gas boilers and silencers, turbocharger etc.,
following: are to be effectively insulated with non-combustible
- Separate mechanical ventilation. materials. The insulation must be such that oil or fuel
cannot penetrate into the insulating material.
A ventilation system ensuring equivalent
separation from the engine room ventilation Metal cladding or hard jacketing of the insulation is
system may be approved. considered to afford effective protection against such
penetration.
- Fire detection and alarm system.
4.2 Boilers are to be provided with non-com-
- Fixed fire extinguishing system. bustible insulation which is to be clad with steel sheet
This system may form part of the machinery or the equivalent.
space fire extinguishing system. Actuation of 4.3 Insulation must be such that it will not crack
the system must be possible from outside the or deteriorate when subject to vibration.
room and must not impair the operation of
the rest of the machinery installation. 5. Fuel and lubricating oil tanks
Closure of the ventilation openings is to be The Rules in Section 10 are to be observed.

possible from a position close to the release
6. Protection against fuel and oil leakages
station for the fire extinguishing system.
6.1 Suitable means of collection are to be fitted
In the event of a fire in the machinery space,
below potential leakage points.
the fire extinguishing system must be capable
of being actuated together with the fire Where oil leakages are liable to be frequent, e.g. with
extinguishing system of the machinery space. oil burners, separators, drains and valves of service
tanks, the collectors are to be drained to an oil drain
2.2 If it is impracticable to place the fuel oil
tank.
purifier in a separate room, precautions against fire are
to be taken giving particular consideration to Leakage oil drains may not be part of an overflow
arrangement, shielding containment of leaks and to system.
6.2 The arrangement of piping systems and their and boilers and the outlet pipes of fuel tanks located
components intended for combustible liquids, shall be above the double bottom are to be fitted with remotely
such that leakage of these liquids cannot come into controlled shutoff devices.
contact with heated surfaces or other sources of
The location and grouping of the shut-off devices are
ignition. Where this cannot be precluded by structural
subject to the appropriate requirements specified in 9
design, suitable precautionary measures are to be
above.
taken.
10.1 Machinery Space Safety station
6.3 Tanks, pipelines, filters, preheaters etc.
containing combustible liquids may not be placed di- It is recommended that the following safety devices to
rectly above heat sources such as boilers, steam lines, be grouped togethter in a central, at all times easily
exhaust gas manifolds and silencers or items of accessible location outside the machinery space :
equipment which have to be insulated in accordance
with 4.1 and may also not be placed above electrical - Cut-off switches for engine room ventilation
switchgear. fans, boiler blowers, fuel transfer pumps,
purifiers, thermal oil pumps.
6.4 Fuel injection pipes of diesel engines are to
be shielded or installed that any fuel leaking out can - Means for closing the
be safely drained away (see also Section 2, G.2.2 and - quick-closing fuel valves
Section 11. G.3.3).
- remote-controlled watertight doors and
6.5. All parts of the fuel oil system containing skylight in the machinery space area
heated oil under pressure exceeding 1.8 bar as far as
practicable shall be arranged such that defects and - Actuation of the machinery space fire
leakage can readily be observed. The machinery extinguishing system.
spaces in way of such parts of the fuel oil system shall
10.2 Passenger Ship Safety Station
be adequately illuminated.
On passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers,
7. Bulkhead penetrations the following safety devices are to be grouped together
in a permanently manned central control station :
Pipe penetrations through class A or B divisions in
accordance with SOLAS 1974 must be able to - the alarm panels of the pressure water
withstand the temperature for which the divisions were spraying system required in accordance with
designed. C.2.4 of this Section and the fire detection
and alarm system
Where steam, exhaust gas and thermal oil lines pass
through bulkheads, the bulkhead must be suitably - the controls and status indicators for the
insulated to protect it against excessive heating. remotely operated fire doors
8. Means of closure - the emergency cut-offs of the ventilation fans

(except machinery space fans) plus their
Means must be provided for the airtight sealing of starters and running lights
boiler rooms and machinery spaces. The air ducts to
these spaces are to be fitted with fire dampers made of As regards the design of the alarm-and operating
non-combustible material which can be closed from panels see Volume IV, Section 9.
the deck. Machinery space skylights, equipment 11. Cargo spaces for the carriage of Vehicles
hatches, doors and other openings are to be so with fuel in their tanks and cargo spaces
arranged that they can be closed from outside the of ro-ro ships
rooms.
11.1 The cargo spaces of passenger ships carrying
9. Emergency stops more than 36 passengers are to be provided with
Electrically powered fuel pumps, purifiers, fan motors, forced ventilation capable of effecting at least 10 air
boiler fans, thermal oil and cargo pumps must be changes per hour.
equipped with emergency stops which, as far as 11.2 The cargo spaces of passenger ships carrying
practicable, are to be grouped together outside the less than 36 passengers are to be provided with forced
spaces in which the equipment is installed and which ventilation capable of effecting at least 6 air changes
must remain accessible even in the event of a fire per hour.
breaking out.
11.3 On passenger ships special category spaces1)
are to be equipped with forced ventilation capable of
10. Remotely operated shutoff devices
10 air changes per hour.
Steam-driven fuel pumps, boiler fans, cargo pumps,
the fuel supply lines to main engines, auxiliary engines 1
) For definition see Table 12.1.
if considered necessary by BKI, in control stations1).

11.4 The cargo spaces of cargo ships and ro-ro
ships are to be provided with forced ventilation Spaces where there is no substantial fire risk are
capable of at least 6 or 10 air changes per hour excluded from this Rule.
depending on the arrangement of the electrical 2.2 Instead of a fire detection and alarm system
equipment (Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume in accordance with 2.1, an approved automatic
IV, Section 14). pressure water spraying system in accordance with L.1
11.5 Design in this Section or an approved equivalent pressure
water spraying system2) may be provided.
11.5.1 Mechanical exhaust ventilation is to be
provided. 2/3 of the quantity of air are to be drawn In this case, additionally an approved fire detection
from the lower, 1/3 from the upper part of the space. and alarm system in accordance with Volume VII,
Section 9 is to be installed in corridors, stairways and
Supply ventilation may be natural and be introduced escape routes within the accommodation areas. This
into the cargo spaces at the top of these spaces. system is to be designed for smoke detection.
11.5.2 The ventilation system must be capable of 2.3 Where in passenger ships a public space
being run during loading and unloading of vehicles as comprises three or more decks (atrium) containing
well as during the voyage. combustible furnishings, shops, offices or restaurants,
the entire vertical fire zone is to be equipped with fire
11.5.3 The design of the mechanical exhaust
protection arrangements in accordance with 2.4.
ventilator is to conform to Section 15, B.5.3.
In this case however, deviating from Volume VII,
For the type of protection of electrical motors and
Section 9, D.3.1.11 and L.1.7.2 of this Section, all
other electrical equipment located in the exhaust air
decks within this public space may be monitored or
stream, see, Volume IV, Section 14.
protected by a common fire detection - or spraying
11.6 Monitoring section.
The failure of a fan shall actuate a visual/audible L.1.8.2 of this Section does not apply.
alarm on the bridge.
2.4 In passenger ships carrying more than 36
11.7 Other requirements passengers, an approved automatic pressure water
spraying system in accordance with L.1 in this Section
11.7.1 Drains from vehicle decks may not be led to or an equivalent approved pressure water spraying
machinery spaces or other spaces containing sources system is to be provided in all accomodation - and
of ignition. service spaces including corridors and stairways, and
11.7.2 A fire detection and alarm system according in control stations.
to part C is to be provided for the cargo spaces and All the above-mentioned spaces except for sanitary
vehicle decks. spaces and galleys are additionally to be monitored for
11.7.3 For the fire extinguishing equipment see smoke by means of a fire detection and alarm system
F.2.9, F.2.10 and Table 12.1 of this Section. in accordance with Volume IV, Section 9.
11.8 Electrical equipment is to comply with the In spaces a little fire risk, e.g. void spaces, public
Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV, toilets, etc., installations of a pressure water spraying
Section 14. system or a fire detection and alarm system may be
omitted.
In control stations, instead of a pressure water
spraying system some other suitable fixed fire
C. Fire Detection extinguishing system may be provided if essential
1. General equipment installed in these spaces could be damaged
by water.
Fire detection and alarm systems and sample
extraction smoke detection systems are subject to 2.5 Cargo spaces for the carriage of motor ve-
approval. For the design of the systems, see Rules for hicles with fuel in their tanks and inaccessible cargo
Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Section 9. spaces are to be equipped with a fire detection and
alarm system or with a sample extraction smoke
2. Fire detection in passenger ships detection system.
2.1 In passengers ships carrying not more than
36 passengers, a fire detection and alarm system in 1
accordance with Volume IV Section 9 is to be
) For definition see SOLAS II-2, Reg. 3.
2
provided in all accommodation and service spaces and, ) See IMO-Resolution A 19/Res.800, "Revised Guidelines
for Approval of Sprinkler Systems Equivalent to that
Referred to in Regulation II-2/12 of SOLAS 74."
The conditions of ventilation in the cargo spaces shall detection and alarm system. The system must be
be specially taken into account when designing and designed to detect smoke.
installing these systems.
4.2 All spaces in which oil-fired equipment,
The fire detection and alarm system prescribed for installations for preparation of liquid fuels, oil systems
inaccessible cargo spaces may be dispensed with if the with a working pressure in excess of 15 bar or other
ship only makes journeys of short duration. plant with a high fire risk are installed and which are
not permanently attended while this plant is
2.6 Special category spaces (see also Table 12.1) operational are to be equipped with a fire detection
with an efficient patrol system are to be provided with and alarm system.
a sufficient number of manual fire alarms. One fire
alarm is to be mounted at each exit. 4.3 Exhaust gas fired thermal oil heaters are to be
fitted with a fire alarm on the exhaust gas side.
2.7 Special category spaces without a permanent
patrol system are to be equipped with a fire detection 5. Fire detection and fire alarm systems for
and alarm system. the cargo spaces of cargo ships
The conditions of ventilation are to be especially taken 5.1.1 Ro/ro cargo spaces are to be equipped with a
into account in selecting and positioning the detectors. fire detection and alarm system.
After installation, the system is to be tested under 5.1.2 Cargo spaces for the carriage of motor
normal conditions of ventilation. vehicles with fuel in their tanks are to be equipped
with a fire detection and alarm system or a sample
3. Fire detection in the accommodation
extraction smoke detection system.
spaces of cargo ships
5.1.3 Cargo spaces for the carriage of dangerous
Depending on the structural fire protection of the ac-
goods as specified in Part Q. are to be equipped with
commodation spaces, cargo ships are to be provided
a fire detection and alarm system or a sample
with the following fire detection systems:
extraction smoke detection system. However, ro/ro
3.1 Structural fire protection method IC cargo spaces are subject to 5.1.1.
A fire detection and alarm system including manually 5.2 The provision of a fire detection and alarm
operated alarms is to be provided for corridors, system or a sample extraction smoke detection system
stairways and escape routes within the accommodation in cargo spaces not mentioned in 5.1.1 to 5.1.3 is
areas. The system is to be designed to detect smoke. recommended.
3.2 Structural fire protection method IIC 6. Design of fire detection and fire alarm
systems
An automatic pressure water spraying system con-
forming to L.1. of this Section or an approved 6.1 For the design and installation of fire
equivalent pressure water spraying system1) is to be detection and alarm systems, see Rules for Electrical
provided for accommodation and service spaces. Installations, Volume IV, Section 9 and additionally
Corridors, stairways and escape routes within the Part L, automatic pressure water spraying systems.
accommodation spaces are subject to 3.1.
6.2 Where sample extraction smoke detection
Spaces where there is no fire risk, e.g. void spaces, systems are used in conjunction with CO2 fire
sanitary spaces, etc., need not be monitored. extinguishing systems, separate monitoring is to be
provided for upper and lower cargo hold spaces.
3.3 Structural fire protection method IIIC
A fire detection and alarm system including manually 6.3 In the case of cargo spaces intended for
operated alarms is to be provided for the entire dangerous cargo steps are to be taken to ensure that
accommodation spaces, with the exception of spaces the air drawn in by a sample extraction smoke de-
where there is no fire risk. tection system is discharged directly into the open.
In corridors, staircases and escape routes, the system D. Scope of Fire Extinguishing Equipment
must be designed to detect smoke.
1. General
4. Fire detection and alarm systems for
machinery spaces 1.1 Any ship is to be equipped with a general
water fire extinguishing system in accordance with E.
4.1 Machinery spaces of ships which class and with portable and mobile extinguisher as specified
notation OT or OT-h are to be equipped with a fire under F.
1.2 In addition, depending on their nature, size
1
) See IMO-Resolution A 19/Res.800, "Revised Guidelines and the propulsion power installed, spaces subject to
for Approval of Sprinkler Systems Equivalent to that a fire hazard are to be provided with fire extinguishing
Referred to in Regulation II-2/12 of SOLAS 74."
equipment in accordance with Table 12.1. The design located in one compartment, an additional emergency
of this equipment is described in the following fire pump is to be provided outside this compartment.
paragraphs.
$ & ' ' (
Cargo spaces for the carriage of dangerous goods are
also required to comply with Part Q.
$ ' '(
Unless otherwise specified, this equipment is ' $$
normally to be sited outside the spaces and areas to be
protected and, in the event of a fire, must be capable $$ " ' '
of being actuated from points which are always # ( ) *
accessible. ' '( ! ( '
1.3 Approval of fire extinguishing appliances
and equipment $+ ' ' (
Fire fighting appliances such as hoses, nozzles, fire ' " " ,,
extinguishers, fireman's outfits and fire extinguishing
media must be approved for use aboard seagoing ships
by the competent national authorities. - '
. ' "
1.4 Protection of the cargo area of tankers
' ' (
1.4.1 The cargo area and the cargo pump rooms of $% +
/
tankers are to be equipped with a fixed fire
extinguishing system in accordance with Table 12.1 - '
' ( "
1.4.2 Tankers equipped with crude oil washing and
tankers of 20000 dwt and above carrying flammable ' ! 0 " ! 1 ,,
liquids with a flash point of 60o C, or less are to be $ ' '(
additionally equipped with a fixed inert gas system 2 ' '( 2 '
(see Section 15.D). +
) / '
1.5 Open top container cargo spaces
$% '( #
Fire extinguishing arrangements for open top
container cargo spaces have to be agreed upon with $3 ! (
BKI1). ' $+
4 ' - '
# !
$+ ! ( ,, '
$+ ' ! " 0
$ , (
+ 5 !
+ ' ! " '

!
6 ' (
" #
$% " " # +$ 7 % !
$% " " " # '
% "
In passenger ships of 1000 GRT and over, fire pumps, 1.3.3 On cargo ships of 500 GRT and over a fixed
their sea connections and power sources are to be emergency fire pump is to be provided if an outbreak
distributed throughout the ship in such a way that an of fire in one compartment can put all the fire pumps
outbreak of fire in one compartment cannot put them out of action.
out of action simultaneously. Where, on passenger
ships of less than 1000 GRT, the main fire pumps are
1
) See IMO-MSC/Circ. 608/Rev.1 "Interim Guidelines for
Open Top Containerships"
Table 12.1 Fixed fire extinguishing systems
Spaces and areas to be Type of vessel

protected
Cargo ships 500 GRT Passenger ships
Engine rooms, spaces containing: for all ships

- oil-fired boilers,
- other oil-fired plant, CO2, high expansion foam or pressure water spraying system 1)
- fuel preparation systems
Spaces containing internal 375 kW 375 kW
combustion engines not used for
propelling the ship CO2, high expansion foam or pressure water spraying system
Machinery spaces containing 375 kW 375 kW

steam engines
CO2, high expansion foam or pressure water sparaying system 1)
Fuel oil purifiers in acc. with Fixed local fire extinguishing arrangement
B.2. Low expansion foam-, pressure water spraying-, dry powder system
Exhaust gas fired thermal oil Pressure water spraying system

heaters acc. to L.2.2
Scavenge trunks of two-stroke CO2 system or other equivalent extingushing system
engines acc. to Sect. 2, K.3.3
Paint lockers and flammable CO2, dry powder extinguishing or pressure water spraying system
liquid lockers acc. to M.1.
Accommodation-, service spaces
and control stations, incl. - re C.2.2 - 2.4
corridors and stairways
Galley range exhaust ducks acc. CO2 system or other equivalent extinguishing system
to M.1.
Helicopter landing deck acc. to P Low-expansion foam system
1. Special category spaces2) - Pressure water spraying system
on passenger ships
2. For motor vehicles with For all ships

fuel in their tanks CO2, high-expansion foam system
3. For dangerous goods For all ships

CO2, fire extinguishing system4)
'
4. On ro/ro-ships
4
a) closed CO2, inert gas, high-expansion

foam or pressure water spraying
system
7
b) open pressure water spraying system
c) not capable of being pressure water spraying system

sealed
5. Cargo spaces not in - 2000 GRT 3) 1000 GRT
cluded in 1-4 CO2 or inert gas system CO2- or inert gas - or high-
expansion foam extinguishing
system
Table 12.1 Fixed fire extinguishing systems (continued)
Spaces and area to be Type of vessels

protected
Cargo ships 500 GRT Passenger ships
Tankers to D.1.4 :
Low-expansion foam system and
Cargo area and inert gas system -
cargo tanks
Chemical tankers to Volume X,
(tankers) Section 11:
Low-expansion foam, dry powder,
pressure water spraying and inert
gas system
Ships for the carriage of liquefied
gases to Volume IX, Section 11 :
Pressure water spraying, dry
powder and inert gas systems.
Cargo pump spaces Tankers and chemical tankers : -
CO2, high expansion foam,
pressure water spraying system
Cargo pump and compressor Ships for the carriage of liquefied
rooms : gases :
CO2, or inert gas system.
1
) Also applies to < 500 GRT in the case of ships with class notation OT.
2
) Special category spaces are closed vehicle decks on passenger ships to which the passenger have acces.
3
) May be dispensed with on request where only coal, ore, grain, unseasoned timber, non-combustible
' " 8 ' ' 8 ' '
9 " ( ( / ' '

'
An emergency fire pump is also to be provided if the : ( ' ' '

main fire pumps are installed in adjacent ! 9
compartments, and the division between the
compartments is formed by more than one bulkhead +; " ' (
or deck. ' " ' 8 < '
1.3.4 On cargo ships, in every machinery space #= > 8 < (# #
containing ballast, bilge or other water pumps, '
provision shall be made for connecting at least one of
these pumps to the fire extinguishing system. Such +) ' '
connection may be dispensed with where none of the ' " 6
pumps is capable of the required capacity or pressure.
"
+% - ' #
' '' #
( ' " '
2 (
' ! ( !
' ' (
+3 - ' + #
+1 ! (
( ' 2
' ( '
! ' '
" " " '
- " ' ' # ' 2' " # B

" ' ( !
?C ! " ( 8 D?
+ '( #
'(
+ = # !
- $ # '(
" ! ' ' '(
' ! *
( !
' ' ( '
( !
- E $ # ' '(
+
$% / - ( 2
+ $ 7 ' ' (
( ' "2 " 1.4.2 The emergency fire pump must be capable of
2 !! ' 2 supplying water to all parts of the ship from two
2 !' hydrants simultaneously at the pressure stated in
Table 12.3; see also 2.2.1.
+ + - #
" ' 1.4.3 All the power and water supply equipment
' " ( 0 required for the operation of the emergency fire pump
" " ' ,, ' must be independent of the space where the main fire
( ! ( pumps are installed.
" ( '
l.4.4 The supply of fuel intended for the operation
' of the emergency fire pump must be sufficient for at
+ - " 7 ?- ?# least 18 h at nominal load.
! " The fuel tank intended for the emergency fire pump
power supply must contain sufficient fuel to ensure
' ' # the operation of the pump for at least the first 6 h
without refilling. This period may be reduced to 3 h
' 2 ! ! " for cargo ships off less than 5000 GRT.
'
' !
@ ! ( ' (2 ! ! ( A
(8 !
$$ ' ' (
E 9 % E %
" 2 !
+ $ $
+ $
& . : / 9 9
+ 2 + 2 + + 2+ 2 + 2 + $
9% # +#) 9; #3 % % #; % +#) F
$ $ $ $
F F F F
1
) On passenger ships of less than 250 GRT one fire pump is sufficient
2
) dH (mm) = theoritical diameter of the bilge main (see Section 11,N. formula 4.)
3
) Applicable to passenger ships with a criterion numeral of 30 or over in accordance with SOLAS 1974
(including amendments as per A.1.1) Chapter II-1, Part B, Regulation 6.
1.4.5 The space where the emergency fire pump designed that smoke cannot be aspirated in the event
and its power source are installed must not be directly of a fire in the engine room. Forced ventilation is to
adjacent to machinery spaces of category A1) or to the be connected to the emergency power supply.
space where the main fire pumps are installed. Where
this is not feasible, the division between the rooms 2. Fire mains
shall be formed by not more than one bulkhead. 2.1 International shore connection
Recesses should be restricted to a minimum, and doors
between the spaces are to be designed as airlock. Ships of 500 GRT and over are to be provided with at
least one connector through which water can be
The bulkhead is to be constructed in accordance with pumped from the shore into the ship's fire main. The
the insulation requirements for control stations (Rules dimensions of the shore connection flange shall be as
for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 22). shown in Fig.12.1
When a single access to the emergency fire pump It shall be possible to use the shore connection on
room is through another space adjoining a machinery either side of the ship.
space of category A or the spaces containing the main
fire pumps, class A-60 boundary is required between 2.2 Arrangement of fire mains
that other space and the machinery space of category 2.2.1 On ships for which an emergency fire pump
A or the spaces containing the main fire pumps. is specified or on which fire pumps are installed in
1.4.6 The emergency fire pump is to be installed in separate compartments, it must be possible by means
such a way that the delivery of water at the prescribed of shutoff valves to isolate the sections of the fire
rate and pressure is ensured under all conditions of main within the machinery space where the main fire
list, trim, roll and pitch likely to be encountered in pumps are located from the rest of the fire main. The
service. shutoff valves are to be located in a readily accessible
position outside the machinery space.
1.4.7 The sea suction is to be located as deep as
possible and together with the pump suction and With the shutoff valves closed, it must be possible to
delivery pipes of the pump to be arranged outside the supply all the hydrants located outside the machinery
spaces containing the main fire pumps. space where the main fire pumps are located from a
pump which is not sitted in this space. Piping in the
In exceptional cases consent may be given for locating engine room may not normally be used for this
of short lengths of the suction and delivery pipes in purpose. However, in exceptional cases short sections
spaces containing the main fire pumps provided that of piping may be laid in the machinery space provided
the piping is enclosed in a substantial steel casing. that the integrity is maintained by the enclosure of the
Alternatively to the steel casing the piping may piping in a substantial steel casing.
thickwalled acc. to Sect. 11., Table 11.16 b, Column
B, but not less than 11 mm, all welded and be insu- Alternatively to the steel casing the piping may be
lated equivalent to A-60 standard. thickwalled acc. to Sect. 11., Table 11.16 b, Column
B, but not less than 11 mm, all welded and be
The sea suction may also be located in machinery insulated equivalent to A-60 standard.
spaces of category A if otherwise not practicable. In
this case the suction piping shall be as short as
possible and the valve shall be operable from a
position in the immediate vicinity of the pump.
1.4.8 The sea valve must be operable from a po-
sition close to the pump, or close to the pump controls
in the case of remote-controlled pumps.
1.4.9 If the space in which the main fire pumps or

their power supply are installed is protected by a fixed
pressure water spraying system, the emergency fire
pump must be designed to meet this additional water
demand.
1.4.10 The ventilation system of the space in which
the emergency fire pump is installed shall be so
1
) For definition see Volume II, Section 22.D.4[6] (in the
scope of this Section applicable to all ships)
Cargo ships < 6000 0,25

6000 0,27
Passenger ships < 4000 0,30
4000 0,40
Fig. 12.1 International shore connection
2.2.2 On passenger ships of 4000 GRT and over,

the fire main must be constructed as a ring system 2.4 Hydrants
equipped with appropriately sited isolating valves. 2.4.1 Hydrants are to be so positioned that water
2.2.3 Fire mains are to be provided with drain from two nozzles simultaneously, one of which shall
valves or cocks. be from a single length of hose, may reach
2.2.4 Branch pipes from the fire mains for hawse - any part of the ship to which passengers and
flushing are to be capable of being shut off in the crew normally have access during the
vicinity of the main fire pump(s) or from the open voyage,
deck. Other branch pipes not serving fire fighting - any part of an empty cargo space,
purposes and which are used only occasionally may be
accepted if capable of being shut from the open deck. - any part of a ro-ro space.
The shut off devices, are to be fitted with warning
lt must be possible to reach any part of special
signs instructing personnel to close them after use.
category spaces with two nozzles from a single length
2.2.5 On tankers, the fire main is to be fitted with of hose each.
isolating valves in a protected position at the poop
In passenger ships any part of accommodation,
front and on the tank deck at intervals of not more than
service and machinery spaces must be capable of
40 m.
being reached with water from at least two nozzles,
2.3 Fire main design one of which shall be from a single length of hose,
when all watertight doors and all doors in main
2.3.1 The following formula should be used as vertical zone bulkheads are closed.
guidance for the sizing of the fire main :
2.4.2 Deck hydrants are to be arranged such that
dF = 0,8 . dH they remain accessible when carrying deck cargo.
dF = internal diameter of fire main Hydrants shall be located near the accesses to spaces.
In the case of cargo spaces for the transport of dan-
dH = theoretical diameter of main. bilge pipe in gerous goods, the additional requirements of Part Q.
accordance with Section 11, N.2. are to be observed.
dFmin = 50 mm 2.4.3 Hydrants in machinery spaces and boiler
rooms:
For pipe thicknesses see Section 11, Table 11.4
(Seawater lines). The number and position of the hydrants are to be in
accordance with 2.4.1. On ships of less than 500 GRT
2.3.2 On passenger ships the diameter dF need not
a single hydrant is sufficient. Hydrants are to be sited
to exceed dFmax = 175 mm, on cargo ships dFmax = 130
at easily accessible points above the floor plates on
mm respectively.
each side of the ship. One of the hydrants is to be
2.3.3 The entire fire main is to be designed for the located at the lower emergency escape.
maximum permissible working pressure of the fire
2.4.4 Passenger ships are to be additionally
pumps subject to a minimum working pressure of 10
equipped with two hydrants in a space adjoining the
bar.
lower level of the machinery space where this space
2.3.4 At no point in the ship shall the discharge is part of the escape route (eg. the shaft tunnel).
pressure at the nozzles be less than the values shown
2.5 Fire hoses
in Table 12.3 when water is drawn simultaneously
from any two adjacent hydrants. 2.5.1 Fire hoses must be made of a non-perishable
material.
Table 12.3 Pressure at nozzles
2.5.2 Individual lengths of hose may not exceed
Pressure at 20 m, 15 m in machinery spaces and boiler rooms.
Type of vessel GRT nozzle Every hose must be provided with quick acting
[N/mm2] couplings of an approved type, a nozzle and a
coupling spanner. Fire hoses are to be stowed with
nozzles attached in readily accessible positions close
to the hydrants. foam and water extinguishers should be not less than
9 l and not more than 13,5 l
2.5.3 On passenger ships, a fire hose with nozzle is
to be provided for each hydrant required. The total weight of a portable fire extinguisher ready
for use shall not exceed 20 kg.
On ships carrying more than 36 passengers, the hoses
of hydrants located within the superstructure must be
kept permanently coupled to the hydrant.
2.5.4 Cargo ships of 1000 GRT and over are to be Table 12.4 Classification of extinguishing media
equipped with a fire hose with nozzle for every 30 m
of the ship's length and with one additional hose, but Fire Fire hazard Extin-
at least five hoses altogether. This figure does not class guishing
include the hoses specified for machinery spaces and media
boiler rooms.
Solid combustible Water, dry
2.5.5 Cargo ships of 500 to 1000 GRT are to be A materials of organic powder,
equipped with a number of hoses appropriate to local nature (e.g. wood, coal, foam
conditions. fibre materials)
2.5.6 Cargo ships of less than 500 GRT are to be Flammable liquids (e.g. Dry
equipped with at least three fire hoses. B oils, tars petrol) powder,
foam,
2.6 Nozzles carbon
dioxide
2.6.1 Only dual purpose spray/jet nozzles with a
shutoff are to be provided. C Gases (e.g. acetylene, Dry
propane) powder,
2.6.2 The nozzle sizes shall be 12, 16 and 19 mm carbon
or as near thereto as possible. dioxide
In accommodation and service spaces, a nozzle size of D Metals (e.g. aluminium, Special dry
12 mm is sufficient. magnesium, sodium) powder
For machinery spaces and exterior locations, the
nozzle size shall be such as to obtain the naxinun
1.4 Mobile extinguisher units are to be designed
discharge possible from two nozzles at the stipulated
for a standard dry powder charge of 50 kg or for a
pressure from the smallest available fire pump;
foam solution content of 45 or 135 liters.
however, a nozzle size greater than 19 mm need not be
used. It is recommended that only dry powder extinguishers
be used.
1.5 A portable foam applicator unit comprises
two portable tanks, each containing 20 l or foaming
F. Portable and Mobile Fire Extinguisher, agent, an air-foam jet pipe and an ejector unit. The
Portable Foam Applicators and Water Fog nozzle should be capable of producing at least
Applicators 1,5 m3/min of foam.
1. Extinguishing media and weights of 2. Number and location

charge
2.1 General
1.1 The extinguishing medium for fire
2.1.1 One of the portable fire extinguishers is to be
extinguisher must be suitable for the potential fire
located at the access to the individual space it is
classes (sec Table 12.4).
designated for.
Toxic extinguishing media and extinguishing media
2.1.2 If the portable fire extinguisher are not
liable to generate toxic gases may not be used.
suitable for fire-fighting in electrical installations,
CO2 fire extinguisher may not be located in accom- additional extinguishers are to be provided for this
modation areas and water fire extinguishers not in purpose. Fire extinguisher are to be marked with the
machinery spaces. maximum permissible voltage and with the minimum
distance to be maintained when in use.
1.2 Fire extinguishers must be approved by a
recognized Authority. 2.2 Passenger and crew spaces
1.3 The charge in portable dry powder and gas 2.2.1 The decks of passenger ships to which the
extinguishers should be at least 5 kg and the content of passengers and crew normally have access during the
voyage are to be equipped with fire extinguisher In spaces containing steam turbines or enclosed steam
located not more than 20 m apart. At least one portable engines of an aggregate total output of 375 kW and
fire extinguisher is to be provided on each deck and, in over used for main propulsion or other purposes the
each main vertical zone. following is to be provided :
mobile fire extinguishers of 50 kg dry
powder or 45 l which shall be so located that
2.2.2 Paragraph 2.2.1 is applicable correspondingly the extinguishant can be directed onto any
to cargo ships of 1000 GRT and over, with the part of the casings enclosing pressure
provision that at least 5 fire extinguishers are to be lubricated parts of the turbines, engines or
provided in the accommodation spaces. associated gearing and any other fire hazard.
This requirement is not applicable where the
2.3 Machinery spaces space is protected by fixed fire extinguishing
system in accordance with Table 12.1
Machinery spaces, depending on their designation, are
to be provided with portable fire extinguishers, mobile portable fire extinguishers which shall be so
fire extinguishers, portable air foam applicator units located that no point in the space is more
and water fog applicators as described hereinafter. than 10 m walking distance from an
extinguisher.
2.3.1 Machinery spaces of category A1) contain-
ing internal combustion machinery 2.3.5 Machinery spaces of category A1) in
passenger ships
The following is to be provided:
In addition to the fire fighting equipment specified in
portable fire extinguishers which shall be so 2.3.1 - 2.3.4, machinery spaces of category A in
located that no point in the space is more than passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers are
10 m walking distance from an extinguisher to be provided with at least two water fog applicators.
mobile fire extinguishers of 50 kg dry 2.3.6 Other machinery spaces1)
powder or 45 l which shall be so located
that the extinguishant can be directed onto In machinery spaces other than category A portable
any part of the fuel and lubricating oil fire extinguishers are to be so located that no point in
pressure systems, gearing and other fire the space is more than 10 m walking distance away
hazards from an extinguisher.
at least one portable air foam applicator unit For small spaces without particular fire hazard it is
sufficient if a fire extinguisher is available within
2.3.2 Machinery spaces of category A1) contain- reach at the access.
ing oil fired boilers
2.4 Cargo pump rooms and gas compressor
At least: rooms
two portable fire extinguishers in each firing Each space containing cargo pumps or gas
space in each boiler room and in each space compressors is to be equipped with at least two
in which part of the fuel oil installation is portable fire extinguishers for extinguishing oil or gas
situated fires.
two mobile 50 kg dry powder- or one mobile 2.5 Other spaces and motor lifeboats
135 l foam extinguisher in each boiler room.
The extinguishers shall be provided with Paint lockers, flammable liquid lockers, radio rooms,
hoses on reels suitable for reaching any part galleys and motor lifeboats are each to be equipped
of the boiler room. In case of domestic with one portable fire extinguisher. In motor lifeboats,
boilers of less than 175 kW one portable 2 kg portable extinguishers will be accepted.
extinguisher will be sufficient. 2.6 Cargo spaces for motor vehicles with -
2.3.3 Machinery spaces of category A 1) fuel in their tanks
containing oil fuel units With portable extinguishers suitable for extinguishing
At least two portable fire extinguishers are to be oil fires shall be located on both sides of the cargo
provided. space not more than 20 m apart. One such fire
extinguisher is to be located at each entrance to these
2.3.4 Machinery spaces containing steam spaces.
turbines or enclosed steam engines
2.7 Special category spaces on passenger -
ships and ro-ro spaces
1
) For definition see Volume II, Section 22.D.4[6] (in the These spaces are to be equipped with portable fire
scope of this Section applicable to all ships)
extinguishers in accordance with 2.9. In addition, each must be sufficient to fill at least 30 % of the gross
space is to be provided with one portable foam volume of the largest cargo space which is capable of
applicator unit and three water fog applicators. A total being sealed. Calculation of the gross volume is to be
of at least two portable foam applicator shall be based on the distance from the double bottom (tank
available. top) to the weather deck including the hatchway and
the vertical boundaries of the cargo space concerned.
2.8 Cargo spaces for dangerous goods
1.2.2 For cargo spaces which cannot be completely
Part P. is applicable. sealed, e.g. due to design-related gaps between the
hatch covers of container ships the supply of CO2 is
to be increase by 10 %. As a rule the gaps should not
exceed 25 mm.
G. High-Pressure CO2 Fire Extinguishing
Systems 1.2.3 In the case of cargo spaces in ships carrying
only coal, ore, grain unseasoned, timber, non-com-
1. Calculation of the necessary quantity of
bustible cargo or cargo which present a low fire risk
CO2
application may be made to the National Authorities
The calculation of the necessary quantity of CO2 is to for exemption from this requirement.
be based on a gas volume of 0.56 m3 per kg of CO2.
1.2.4 For the cargo spaces of ships intended for
If two or more individually floodable rooms are the transport of motor vehicles with partly filled fuel
connected to the CO2 system, the total CO2 quantity tanks and for closed ro-ro spaces, the available
available need not be more than the largest quantity quantity of CO2 must be sufficient to fill at least 45 %
required for one of these spaces. of the gross volume of the largest enclosed cargo
space.
1.1 Machinery, boiler and cargo pump spaces
1.2.5 It is recommended that mail rooms, spaces
1.1.1 The quantity of gas available for spaces for bonded stores and baggage rooms be connected to
containing oil-fired boilers or internal combustion the CO2 fire extinguishing system.
machinery and for cargo pump spaces must be
sufficient to give a minimum volume of free gas equal 1.2.6 Where cargo spaces connected to a CO2
to the larger of the following: system are temporarily used as spaces for the trans-
port of passengers means must be provided for sealing
a) 40 % of the gross volume of the largest space off the relevant connecting lines during such periods
including the casing up to the level at which by the use of spectacle flanges.
the horizontal area of the casing is less than
40 % of the horizontal area of the space 2. CO2 cylinders
concerned taken midway between the tank
2.1 Design and equipment
top and the lowest part of the casing,
2.1.1 In respect of their material, manufacture,
b) 35 % of the gross volume of the largest space
type and testing, CO2 cylinders must comply with the
including the casing.
requirements of Section 8, G. (gas cylinders).
1.1.2 For cargo ships under 2000 GRT, the
2.1.2 CO2 cylinders may normally only be filled
percentage specified in 1.1.1 a) and b) may be reduced
with liquid CO2 in a ratio of 2 kg CO2 to every 3 liters
to 35 % and 30 % respectively.
of cylinder capacity. Subject to the shipping route
1.1.3 For cargo pump spaces on chemical tankers, concerned, special consideration may be given to a
and for compartment and cargo pump spaces on higher filling ratio (3 kg CO2 to every 4 liters
liquefied gas tankers, the volume of free gas available capacity).
is to be calculated as 45 % of the gross volume of the
2.1.3 Cylinders intended for flooding boiler
space.
rooms, machinery spaces and pump rooms must be
1.1.4 For machinery spaces without casings (e.g. equipped with quick-opening valves for group release
incinerator or inert gas generator spaces) a CO2 enabling these spaces to be flooded with 85 % of the
concentration of 35 % is to be ensured. required gas volume within two minutes. Cylinders
intended for the flooding of cargo spaces need only be
1.1.5 Where two or more spaces containing boilers fitted with individual release valves.
or internal combustion machinery are not entirely
separated, they are to be considered as a single space For cargo spaces for the carriage of motor vehicles
for the purpose of determining the quantity of CO2 with fuel in their tanks and for ro-ro spaces CO2
required. cylinders with quick-opening valves suitable for
group release are to be provided for flooding of these
1.2 Cargo spaces spaces within 10 minutes with 2/3 of the prescribed
1.2.1 In cargo spaces, the quantity of CO2 available quantity of CO2.
2.1.4 Cylinder valves must be approved by a any CO2 which may leak from the cylinders is to be
recognized institution and be fitted with an overpres- provided. Other spaces may not be connected to this
sure relief device. ventilation system.
2.1.5 Siphons must be securely connected to the Cylinder rooms are to be fitted with thermometers for
cylinder valve. checking the room temperature.
2.2 Disposition 4. Piping
2.2.1 CO2 cylinders are to be stored in special 4.1 Piping is to be made of weldable materials in
spaces, securely anchored and connected to a mani- accordance with Rules for Materials, Volume V.
fold. Check valves are to be fitted between individual Material certificates are to be provided acc. to the
cylinders and the manifold. requirements for pipe class I (see Section 11).
Manufacturers' inspection certificates acc. to
If hoses are used to connect the cylinders lo the EN10204-3.1B may be accepted as equivalent
manifold, they must be type-approved. provided that by means of the pipe marking (name of
2.2.2 At least the cylinders intended for the quick pipe manufacturers, heat number, test mark)
flooding of boiler rooms and machinery spaces are to unambigious reference to the certificate can be
be grouped together in one room. established. The Rules regarding remarking are to be
observed when processing the pipes.
2.2.3 The cylinders for CO2 fire extinguishing
systems for scavenge trunks and for similar purposes 4.2 All pipeworks are to be protected against
may be stored in the machinery space. external corrosion. Distribution lines serving spaces
other than machinery spaces are to be galvanised
3. Rooms for CO2 cylinders internally.
3.1 Location 4.3 Wherever possible, welded pipe connections
are to be used for CO2 systems. For detachable con-
3.1.1 Rooms for CO2 cylinders may not be located
nections which cannot be avoided and for valves and
forward of the collision bulkhead and shall,wherever
fittings, flanged joints are to be used. For pipes with
possible, be situated on the open deck. CO2 cylinder
a nominal bore of less than 50 mm, welded
rooms below the open deck must have a stairway
compression type couplings may be used.
leading directly to the open deck. Direct connections
via doors or other openings between cylinder rooms 4.4 Bends or suitable compensators are to be
and machinery spaces or accommodation spaces below provided to accommodate the thermal expansion of
the open deck are not permitted. In addition to the the pipelines.
cabins themselves, other spaces provided for use by
passengers and crew such as sanitary spaces, public 4.5 The manifold from the cylinders up to and
spaces, stair wells and corridors are also considered to including distribution valves are to be designed for a
form part of the accommodation space. nominal working pressure of PN 100. Pipework
between distribution valves and nozzles is to be
The size of the cylinder room and the arrangement of designed for a nominal working pressure of PN 40.
the cylinders must be conducive to efficient operation.
4.6 Distribution piping for quick-flooding is to
Means are to be provided for conveying cylinders to be designed in such that icing due to expansion of the
the open deck. extinguishing gas cannot occur. Reference values are
3.1.2 Cylinder rooms shall be lockable. The keys to shown in Table 12.5.
such rooms are to be kept in a glass-fronted case fixed 4.7 The minimum nominal bore of flooding lines
to the door. The doors of cylinder rooms must open and of their branches to nozzles in cargo holds is
outward. 20 mm; that of the nozzle connections 15 mm.
3.2 Insulation The pipe thicknesses are shown in Table 12.6.
Cylinder rooms are to be protected or insulated against 4.8 A compressed air connection with a non-
heat and solar radiation in such a way that the room return valve and a shutoff valve is to be fitted at a
temperature does not exceed 45 C. The boundaries of suitable point. The compressed air connection must be
the cylinder room must conform to the insulation of sufficient size to ensure that, when air is blown
valves prescribed for control stations (Rules for Hull through the system at a pressure of 5 to 7 bar, it is
Construction, Volume II, Section 22 ). possible to check the outflow of air from all nozzles.
3.3 Ventilation 5. Release devices
Cylinder rooms are to be provided with adequate 5.1 Release of the system is to be actuated
ventilation. For cylinder rooms located below the open manually. Automatic actuation is not acceptable
deck, efficient forced ventilation capable of extracting
5.2 Release of the CO2 cylinders, whether
individually or in groups, and opening of the distri- 7. Alarm systems

bution valve must be actuated indepently of each other.
7.1 For machinery spaces, boiler, cargo pump
5.3 Remotely operated cylinder actuating devices rooms and similar spaces acoustic alarms of horn or
and distribution valves must be capable of local siren sound is to be provided which shall be
manual operation. independent of the discharge CO2. The audible
warning is to be automatically actuated a suitable time
5.4 The controls for flooding of machinery before flooding occurs and is to be clearly
spaces, boiler rooms, paint lockers and the like and of distinguishable from all other alarm signals.
cargo pump and compressor spaces are to be located
close to one of the entrances outside the space to be As adequate shall be considered the period of time
protected in a lockable case (release station). A necessary to evacuate the space to be flooded but not
separate release station is to be provided for each less than 20 s. The system is to be designed such that
space which can be flooded separately, the space to flooding is not possible before this period of time has
which it relates being clearly indicated. elapsed.
Actuation must also be possible from the location of Opening the door of the release station must trip the
the associated CO2 cylinders. CO2 alarm in the protected space.
5.5 The key for the release station is to be kept in
a clearly visible position next to the release station in The alarm must continue to sound as long as the
a locked case with a glass panel. flooding valves are open. A visual alarm is also to be
installed where necessary.
5.6 A distribution valve is to be located in every
flooding line outside the space to be protected in a
7.2 Where adjoining and interconnecting spaces
readily accessible position.
(e.g. machinery space, purifier room, machinery
5.7 Distribution valves are to be protected against control room) have separate flooding systems, any
unauthorized and unintentional actuation and fitted danger to persons must be excluded by suitable alarms
with signs indicating the space to which the associated in the adjoining spaces.
CO2 lines lead.
5.8 Distribution valves are to be made of a 7.3 Alarm systems are also to be provided in
seawater-resistant material. The valve position open ro-ro spaces and spaces to which personnel normally
or closed must be perceptible. have access. In small spaces, e.g. small compressor
rooms, paint stores, etc.,alarms may be dispensed with
6. CO2 discharge Nozzles on application
6.1 The number and arrangement of the nozzles
provided must ensure even distribution of the CO2. 7.4 The power supply to electrical alarm systems
must be guaranteed in the event of failure of the ship's
6.2 Boiler rooms and machinery spaces main power supply.
At least eight nozzles are to be provided, not less than
two of which shall be located in the bilges. The 7.5 If the alarm is operated pneumatically, a
number of discharge nozzles may be reduced for small permanent supply of compressed air for the alarm
machinery spaces. system is to be ensured.
6.3 Cargo spaces
7.6 Alarm systems for the cargo area of tankers:
Every cargo space or every deck in a cargo space of Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Section
less than 800 m3 gross volume is to be provided with 13.
at least two nozzles. Where the volume is greater, at
least four nozzles are required. Not more than four
nozzles may be connected to a cargo space flooding 8. General arrangement plan
line with a nominal bore of 20 mm which is also In the wheelhouse and in the CO2 rooms arrangement
serving as sampling line of a sample extraction smoke plans are to be displayed showing the disposition of
detection system. Nozzles are to be sited in the upper the entire CO2 system. The plan must also indicate
part of the space. Nozzles also serving as smoke
how many cylinders are to be released to extinguish
sampling points are to be so arranged that no point of
fires in individual spaces.
the overhead deck area is more than 12 m horizontally
away from a nozzle.
Separate distribution valves are to be provided for
flooding the lower holds and the twen-decks.
Table 12.5 Design of quick-flooding lines

Weight of CO2 for machinery Weight of CO2 for cargo

Nominal diameter DN
and boiler spaces holds for motor vehicles
[mm] [inches] [kg] [kg]
15 1/2 45 400
20 3/4 100 800
25 1 135 1200
32 1 1/4 275 2500
40 1 1/2 450 3700
50 2 1100 7200
65 2 1/2 1500 11500
80 3 2000 20000
90 3 1/2 3250
100 4 4750
110 4 1/2 6810
125 5 9500
150 6 15250
Table 12.6 Minimum steel pipe thicknesses for CO2
da From cylinders to distribution From distribution valves to

valves nozzles
[mm] s [mm] s [mm]
21,3 - 26,9 3,2 2,6

30,0 - 48,3 4,0 3,2
51,0 - 60,3 4,5 3,6
63,5 - 76,1 5,0 3,6
82,5 - 88,9 5,6 4,0
101,6 6,3 4,0
108,0 - 114,3 7,1 4,5
127,0 8,0 4,5
133,0 - 139,7 8,0 5,0
152,4 - 168,3 8,8 5,6
9. Warning signs "Before flooding with CO2 shut off ventilation and
close air intakes. Open distribution valves first, then
9.1 For CO2 systems the following signs are to the cylinder valves!"
be displayed :
9.1.3 In the CO2 room and at entrances to spaces
9.1.1 At the release stations: which can be flooded:
"Do not operate release until personnel have left the "WARNING!"
space, the ventilation has been shut off and the space "In case of alarm or release of CO2 leave the space
has been sealed." immediately (danger of suffocation).
9.1.2 At the distribution stations and in the CO2 The space may be re-entered only after thorough
room: ventilating and checking of the atmosphere."
9.1.4 In the CO2 cylinder room: 2.1.3 The containers may be filled with liquid CO2
up to a maximum of 95 % of their volumetric capacity
"This space may be used only for the storage of CO2 calculated at 18 bar
cylinders for the fire extinguishing system. The tem-
perature of the space is to be monitored." The vapour space must be sufficient to allow for the
increase in volume of the liquid phase due to a tem-
9.1.5 At the release station for the CO2 system for perature rise corresponding to the setting pressure of
the cargo pump and gas compressor rooms of tank the relief valves.
ships carrying flammable materials, the warning sign
is to bear the additional instruction: 2.2 Equipment
"Release device to be operated only after outbreak of 2.2.1 Pressure monitoring
fire in .................... space".
The container pressure is to be monitored and an in-
10. Testing dependent visual/audible alarm signalling both high
pressure prior to the attainment of the setting pressure
10.1 After installation, piping between cylinders of the relief valves and low pressure at not less than
and distribution valves and piping passing through 18 bar is to be provided.
accommodation spaces is to be subjected to hydraulic
tests at 120 bar and 50 bar respectively in the pres-
ence of a Surveyor. A test pressure of 10 bar is 2.2.2 Monitoring of liquid level
required for all other piping. Each container is to be equipped with two level
The hydrostatic test may also be carried out prior to gauges, one of which must provide permanent
installation on board in the case of piping which is monitoring of the liquid level.
manufactured complete and equipped with all fittings. A liquid level of 10 % or more below the set level
Joints welded on board must undergo a hydrostatic shall trip a visual/audible alarm.
test at the appropriate pressure.
Where more than one space is protected by the CO2
Where water cannot be used as the test medium and system, a remote indicator is to be provided at all
the piping cannot be dried prior to putting the system release stations outside the room in which the con-
into service, proposals for alternative test media or tainer is located. A remote indicator may be dispensed
test procedures are to be submitted to the Society for with if, after release, the discharge of the rated
approval. quantity of CO2 is regulated automatically, e.g. by an
10.2 After assembly on board, a tightness test is automatic timer.
to be performed using air or other suitable media.
2.2.3 Safety relief valves
The selected pressure depends on the method of leak
detection used. Each container is to be fitted with two safety relief
valves with shutoff valves on the inlet side. The shut-
10.3 All piping is to be checked for free passage
off valves shall be interlocked in such a way that the
and tightness.
cross-sectional area of one relief valve is available at
all times.
The setting pressure of the relief valves must be at
least 10 % above the cut-in pressure of the refriger-
H. Low-Pressure CO2 Fire Extinguishing ating units.
Systems
The capacity of each relief valve must be so that the
1. Calculation of the necessary quantity of quantity of gas produced by the action of fire on the
CO2 container can be discharged without the pressure in
Calculation of the necessary quantity of CO2 is sub- the container exceeding the setting pressure of the
ject to the provisions set out in G.1. relief valves by more than 20 %. For the calculation
see Rules for Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk,
2. CO2 Containers Volume IX, Section 8.
2.1 Design and Construction The blow-off line is to discharge into the open.
2.1.1 The rated CO2 supply is to be stored in
pressure vessels at a pressure of 18 to 22 bar. 2.2.4 Insulation
2.1.2 With regard to their material, manufacture, Containers and piping which are normally filled with
construction, equipment and testing, the containers CO2 are to be insulated in such that after failure of the
must comply with the requirements contained in refrigeration, assuming a container pressure equal to
Section 8 (Pressure Vessels). the cut-in pressure of the refrigerating units and an
ambient temperature of 45 oC, the setting pressure of
the relief valves is not reached before a period of the following variations from the reference condition:
24 h.
- Pressure above maximum or below
The insulating material must be at least not readily minimum in accordance with 2.2.1,
ignitable and be sufficiently robust. Protection against
steam penetration and damage from outside is to be - Liquid level too low in accordance with
provided. See also Rules fo Refrigerating 2.2.2,
Installations, Volume VIII, L. - Failure of a refrigerating set.
3. Refrigerating plant This alarm may function as group alarm "Fault in the
CO2 fire extinguishing system".
3.1 At least two complete, mutually independent,
automatical refrigerating sets are to be provided. The
capacity of the refrigerating sets shall be such that the 7. Release
required CO2 temperature can be maintained with an
ambient temperature of 45 C and a seawater 7.1 The automatic release of CO2 flooding is not
temperature of 32 C. permitted.
3.2 The failure of a refrigerating set must cause 7.2 If devices are fitted for automatically
the standby set to start up automatically. Manual gauging the rated quantity of CO2, provision must also
switchover must be possible. be made for manual control.
G.5.2 also applies.
3.3 Separate electrical supply must be provided
from the main busbar.
8. Warning systems, general arrangement
3.4 At least two circulating pumps must be plans and warning signs
available for the cooling water supply. One of these
pumps can be used as standby pump for other Signs giving the following information are to be
purposes provided that it can be put into operation im- permanently fixed in the CO2 cylinder room and to the
mediately without endangering other essential sys- valve groups for the flooding of individual spaces
tems. with CO2 :
3.5 The supply of cooling water must be avail- - Name of space and gross volume in m3
able from two sea chests, wherever possible from
- Necessary volume of CO2
either side of the ship.
- Number of nozzles for the space
4. Location and disposition
- Flooding time in minutes (i.e. the time the
CO2 containers and the corresponding refrigerating
flooding valves must remain open)
equipment are to be located in special rooms.
G.7., 8. and 9. also apply as appropriate.
The disposition and equipping of the rooms are to
comply with the applicable provisions of G.3.
9. Tests
5. Piping, valves and fittings
9.1 After installation, lines between tanks and
Unless otherwise specified below, G.4., 5. and 6. distribution valves are to be pressure-tested at least
apply analogously together with Section 11, B. 1,5 times the pressure setting of the relief valves.
wherever relevant.
Lines which pass through accommodation spaces are
5.1 Relief valves are to be fitted to isolable pipe to be tested after installation at a pressure of 50 bar
sections in which the heating of enclosed CO2 can gauge. A test pressure of 10 bar is required for all
produce pressures exceeding the design pressure of other lines.
the pipe.
The performance of the test is to conform to G.10.1.
5.2 The flooding lines are to be so designed that,
when flooding occurs, the vaporization of CO2 does
not occur until it leaves the nozzles. The pressure at 9.2 G.10.2 and G.10.3 apply wherever relevant.
the nozzles must be at least 10 bar.
I. Other gas fire extinguishing systems and
5.3 A filling connection with the necessary
steam fire extinguishing systems.
means of pressure equalization is to be provided on
either side of the ship. Extinguishing gases other than CO2 may be applied
only if approved in accordance with international
6. Monitoring regulations (IMO) and accepted by the flag state
Authority.
An alarm is to be fitted in the engine control room for
Steam may be used as extinguishant in limited local The rate of supply of foam solution is to be calculated
applications (e.g. scavente trunks) if agreed upon with in accordance with the following formulae. The rate
BKI1). is to be based on the largest calculated value.
a) 0,6 liters per minute per square meter of the
cargo deck area, where cargo deck area
K. Foam Fire Extinguishing Systems means the maximum breadth of the ship
multiplied by the total longitudinal extent of
1. Foam concentrates the cargo tank spaces.
1.1 Only approved foam concentrates may be Q = 0,6 L B [l/min] or
used; see also D.1.3.
b) 6 liters per minute per square metre of the
Foam concentrates must be able to produce an ef- horizontal sectional area of the single tank
fective foam even when sea water or brackish water having the largest such area.
is used. They must be frostproof to at least - 5 C.
Q = 6 l b [l/min] or
1.2 Distinction is made between low- and
c) 3 liters per minute per square metre of the
high-expansion foam.
area to be protected by the largest monitor
In the case of low-expansion foam, produced by and lying entirely forward of the monitor,
adding 3 - 6 % foam concentrated the foam expansion subject to a minimum of 1250 liters/minute.
ratio (i.e. the ratio of the volume of foam produced to
Q = 3 B 0,75 l1 [l/min]
the mixture of water and foam concentrate supplied)
shall not exceed 12 : 1 The minimum supply of foam concentrate
shall be such that, based on the largest value
For high-expansion foam, produced by adding 1 -
calculated by applying a), b) and c), the
3 % foam concentrate, the expansion ratio may be
production of foam is guaranteed for at least
100: 1 up to 1000 :1. Foam concentrate for the pro-
30 minutes on tankers without an inert gas
duction of multi-purpose foam may be used.
system and for at least 20 minutes on
Deviations from these expansion ratios require the tankers with an inert gas system.
approval of the Society.
Smin = Q s t [l]
Foam concentrates intended for use in the cargo area
Q [l/min] = foam solution
of chemical tankers must be alcohol-resistant if this is
necessitated by the List of Product, Rules for Ships L [m] = length of cargo area
Carrying Dangerous Chemical in Bulk, Volume X,
Section 17; see Foam Fire Extinguishing Systems for B [m] = breadth of ship
Chemical Tankers, Rules for Ships Carrying l [m] = length of largest cargo tank
Dangerous Chemical in Bulk, Volume X, Section 11.
b [m] = breadth of largest cargo tank
Tankers for the carriage of alcohols and other
flammable polar liquids shall be provided with Smin [l] = minimum supply of foam con-
centrate
alcohol resistant foam concentrate.
s = dosing rate (for synthetic foam
2. Low-expansion foam systems for tankers concentrate normally 0,03)
(deck foam systems)
l1 [m] = throw of monitor
2.1 The foam fire extinguishing system is to be
so designed that foam is available for the entire cargo t [min] = duration of foam application.
deck area as well as for any cargo tank, the deck of
2.4 Foam distribution and capacity of
which has ruptured.
monitors
2.2 The deck foam system shall be capable of
2.4.1 The foam from the fixed foam system is to
simple and rapid operation. The main control station
be discharged through monitors and foam applicators.
for the system must be suitably located outside the
Each monitor must be capable of supplying at least 50
cargo area and adjoining the accommodation areas. In
% of the required foam solution. The delivery rate of
the event of a fire in the spaces to be protected it must
a monitor may not be less than 1250 liters/minute.
be easy to reach and to operate.
On tankers of less than 4000 dwt, foam applicators
2.3 Capacity of the foam fire extinguishing
may be provided instead of monitors.
system pump and supply of foam solution:
2.4.2 The number and position of the monitors is
to comply with the requirements specified in 2.1. The
1 capacity of any monitor in liters per minute of foam
) See SOLAS II-"Reg:5.4
solution must be at least three times the deck area in protected to be filled with foam at the rate of at least
square meters protected by that monitor, such area 1 m depth per minute without allowance for installed
being entirely forward of the monitor. machinery and equipment.
2.4.3 The distance from the monitor to the farthest 3.1.2 The supply of foam concentrate must be
extremity of the protected area forward of that sufficient for the largest space being protected to be
monitor shall not be more than 75 % of the monitor filled with foam at least five times. The equipment
throw in still air conditions. must be ready for immediate use at all times.
M = 3 B 0,75 l1 [l/min] 3.2 Foam distribution
M [l/min] = delivery rate of one monitor Foam is to be conveyed to the spaces being protected
through fixed ducts. The outlets in these ducts are to
0,5 Q, be arranged in such a way as to ensure uniform dis-
but not less than 1250 l/min tribution of the foam. Inside the space where the foam
is produced, a shutoff device must be fitted between
B [m] = breadth of ship the foam generator and the distribution system.
l1 [m] = throw of monitor 3.3 Foam generators, pumps, supply of foam
2.4.4 A monitor and a hose connection for a foam concentrate
applicator shall be situated to both port and starboard 3.3.1 Foam generators, pumps and their power
at the poop front or the accommodation spaces facing supply and stored quantities of foam concentrate are
the cargo deck. In addition, connections for foam to be located in enclosed spaces outside the spaces to
applicators are to be sited between the monitors to be protected.
give greater flexibility in the fighting of fires. The
capacity of each foam applicator may not be less than 3.3.2 Where the emergency fire pump is used to
400 liters per minute and the applicator throw may not supply water to the foam generator, the capacity of the
be less than 15 m in still air conditions. pump must be sufficient.
2.4.5 On tankers of less than 4000 dwt, one hose 3.4 Test equipment
connection each for a foam applicator is to be Foam generators are to be installed in such a way that
provided to port and starboard at the poop front or the they can be tested without foam entering the protected
accommodation spaces facing the cargo deck. At least spaces.
four foam applicators must be available. The number
and disposition of foam hydrants are to be such that
foam from at least two applicators can be directed on 4. Low-expansion foam systems for boiler
to any area of the cargo deck. The capacity of each rooms and machinery spaces
foam applicator must be equivalent to at least 25 % of Low-expansion foam systems do not substitute for the
the quantity of foam solution calculated in accordance fire extinguishing systems prescribed in Table 12.1
with 2.3 a) or 2.3 b). The capacity and throw of the
foam applicators may not be less than those specified 4.1 Capacity of the system
in 2.4.4.
The system must be so designed that the largest area
2.4.6 Immediately forward of each monitor, both over which fuel can spread can be covered within five
the foam main and the fire main are to be fitted with minutes with a 150 mm thick blanket of foam.
shutoff valves to enable damaged sections of these
lines to be isolated. 4.2 Foam distribution
4.2.1 The foam solution must be conveyed through
2.5 Operation of the foam system at its required
fixed pipelines and foam distributors to the points at
capacity shall permit the simultaneous use of the
which oil fires are liable to occur.
water fire extinguishing system as per E. over the full
length of the ship on deck, in accommodation spaces, 4.2.2 Foam distributors and controls are to be
control stations, service spaces and machinery spaces. arranged in suitable groups and positioned in such a
way that they cannot be cut off by a fire in the
2.6 The supply of foam concentrate and the
protected space.
necessary pumps are to be located outside the area to
be protected.
3. High-expansion foam systems

3.1 Capacity of the system
3.1.1 The equipment producing the foam must be
of sufficient capacity to enable the largest space being
L. Pressure Water Spraying Systems1) engines.

1. Automatic pressure water spraying The pressure water tank is to be installed in a frost-
systems (sprinkler systems) proof space.
1.1 Pressure water tanks 1.4 Water supply
1.1.1 Pressure water tanks are to be fitted with a 1.4.1 The system shall be completely charged with
safety valve, connected to the water space of the tank fresh water when not in operation.
without means of isolating, with a water level indi-
cator that can be shut off and is protected against In addition to the water supply as per 1.2 the system
damage, and with a pressure gauge. The requirements is also to be connected to the fire main via a screw-
specified in Section 8, Pressure Vessels, are also down non-return valve.
applicable. 1.4.2 The system must be kept permanently under
1.1.2 The volume of the pressure water tank shall pressure and must be ready at all times for immediate,
be equivalent to at least twice the specified pump automatic operation. With the test valve at the alarm
capacity per minute. valve in the fully open position, the pressure at the
level of the highest spray nozzles shall still be at least
The tank shall contain a standing charge of fresh 1,75 bar.
water equivalent to at least the specified pump
capacity per one minute. 1.5 Power supply
The tank is to be fitted with a connection to enable the At least two mutually independent power sources
entire system to be refilled with fresh water. shall be provided for supplying the pump and the
automatic indicating and alarm systems. Each source
1.1.3 Means are to be provided for replenishing shall be sufficient to power the system (Rules for
the air cushion in the pressure water tank. Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Section 7)
1.2 Pressure water spraying pump 1.6 Piping, valves and fittings
1.2.1 The pressure water spraying pump may only 1.6.1 Lines between sea chest, pump, water tank,
be used for supplying water to the pressure water shore connection and alarm valve are to comply with
spraying system. the dimensional requirements set out in Section 11,
Table 11.4. Lines shall be effectively protected
In the event of a pressure drop in the system, the against corrosion.
pump shall start up automatically before the fresh
water charge in the pressure water tank has been 1.6.2 Check valves are to be fitted to ensure that
exhausted. Suitable means of testing are to be sea-water cannot penetrate into the pressure water
provided. tank nor fresh water be discharged into the sea
through pump suction lines.
1.2.2 The capacity of the pump shall be sufficient
to cover an area of at least 280 m2 at the pressure 1.6.3 International shore connections (cf. E.2.1.1)
required for the spray nozzles. At a rate of application are to be provided at suitable points on the port and
of at least 5 l/m min, this is equivalent to a minimum starboard sides for supplying the equipment with
delivery rate of 1400 l/min. water from the shore. The connecting valves are to be
secured against being opened unintentionally.
1.2.3 The pump is to be equipped with a direct sea
suction. The shutoff device is to be secured in the 1.6.4 Each line leading to a section of the system
open position. On the discharge side, the pump is to is to be equipped with an alarm valve with pressure
be fitted with a test valve and pipe connection whose gauge. See also 1.8.
cross-section corresponds to the capacity of the pump
at the prescribed pressure. Shutoff devices between the pump discharge and the
alarm valves are to be secured in the open position.
1.3 Location Each alarm valve is to be fitted with a test valve
corresponding to the capacity of one sprinkler.
Pressure water tanks and pumps are to be located
outside and a sufficient distance away from the spaces 1.6.5 Each alarm valve is to be fitted with a test
to be protected, from boiler rooms and from spaces valve corresponding to the capacity of one sprinkler.
containing oil treatment plant or internal combustion
1.7 Sprinklers
1.7.1 The sprinklers are to be grouped into
1
) Pressure water spraying systems deviating from these sections. Each section may not comprise more than
Rules may be used if approved as equivalent by BKI. 200 sprinklers.
See also IMO-Resolution A 19/Res.800, " Revised
Guidelines for Approval of Sprinkler Systems 1.7.2 On passengers ships, a sprinkler section may
Equivalent to that Referred to in Regulation II-2/12 of
SOLAS 74. extend only over one main fire extinguishing section
or one watertight compartment and may not include accessible even after the outbreak of fire.
more than two vertically adjacent decks.
2.1.3 The pump for supplying the pressure water
1.7.3 The sprinklers are to be so arranged in the spraying system and its power source are to be located
upper deck area that a water volume of not less than outside the spaces to be protected. The pump must at
5 l/m2 . min is sprayed over the area to be protected. least be capable of supplying simultaneously all the
spray nozzles in the largest enclosed space with an
Inside accommodation and service spaces the adequate quantity of water at the necessary pressure.
sprinklers shall be activated within a temperature
range from 68 C to 79 C. This does not apply to 2.1.4 The system is to be maintained at the nec-
spaces such as drying rooms with higher essary pressure. In the event of a pressure drop, the
temperatures. Here the triggering temperature may be pump shall start up automatically.
up to 30 C above the maximum temperature in the
deck head area. 2.1.5 The pump is to be fitted with a direct sea
suction. The shutoff device in this line is to be
1.7.4 The sprinklers are to be made of corrosion- secured in the open position.
resistant material. Sprinklers of galvanized steel are
not allowed. 2.1.6 In the choice of materials, special attention
is to be given to corrosion-resistance.
1.7.5 An adequate number of spare sprinklers is to
be carried on board. 2.2 Pressure water spraying systems for
exhaust gas fired thermal oil heaters
1.8 Indicating and alarm systems
2.2.1 The flow rate of the water spraying system is
1.8.1 Each sprinkler section is to be equipped with to be at least 2.5 l/min per m2 of heating surface.
an alarm valve which, when a sprinkler is activated,
actuates a visual and audible alarm at the fire control The use of fresh water is preferred. An adequate
station. See Rules For Electrical Installations, Volume water supply for at least 20 minutes is to be ensured.
IV Section 9. A pressure gauge is also to be provided 2.2.2 The required volume of water is to be
for each sprinkler section. distributed over the heated surfaces by means of
The electrical equipment must be self-monitoring and suitable nozzles. A pipe and nozzle system intended
each section must be capable of being tested for cleaning purposes may be incorporated into the
individually (see Rules for Electrical Installation IV, water spraying system.
Section 9). 2.2.3 The nozzles may be installed below the
1.8.2 On passenger ships, the area in which a heated surfaces instead. A prerequisite for his
sprinkler has been released is to be indicated at the arrangement is that in the event of a fire in the exhaust
main fire control station or in the wheel house. gas fired thermal oil heater, the engine is kept running
Separate indication is to be provided for at least each at reduced load and the exhaust gas continues to flow
side (pt. and stb.) of each deck. In very small areas the over the heated surfaces.
indication of the ships side may be dispensed with 2.2.4 The piping system for water supply and
upon agreement with BKI. distribution must be a fixed installation.
1.8.3 On cargo ships, the sprinkler section within To protect against uncontrolled water leaks in the
which a sprinkler has been released is to be indicated exhaust gas fired heater, the supply line is to be fitted
at the fire control station or in the wheel house. In with two shutoff valves with a drain valve between
addition, a collective visual and audible alarm is to be them.
installed in the area of the engineers' accommodations
2.2.5 An effective water trap which may drain into
2. Manually operated pressure water the engine room bilge or a suitable tank is to be
spraying systems installed in the exhaust gas line beneath the exhaust
2.1 Pressure water spraying systems for gas fired heater. Suitable measures are to be taken to
machinery spaces prevent leakage of exhaust gases.
2.1.1 Spray nozzles are to be located above bilges, 2.2.6 All valves and pump starters required for
tank decks and all areas over which oil may spread. operation of the water spraying system are to be
The number and arrangement of the nozzles shall be installed for easy access in one place if possible at a
such as to ensure uniform distribution of the water safe distance from the exhaust gas fired heater.
over the area to be protected at a rate of at least Concise operating instructions are to be permanently
5 l/m2 . min. displayed at the operating position.
2.1.2 The spraying system may be subdivided into
sections. The release valves are to be located outside 2.3 Pressure water spraying systems for
the spaces to be protected at positions which remain special category spaces and ro/ro cargo
spaces extinguishing medium and capable of being operated

from outside the room is to be provided.
2.3.1 Only approved full-bore nozzles are to be
used 1.1.1 If CO2 is used, the extinguishing medium
supply is to be calculated for a concentration of 40 %
2.3.2 The nozzles are to be arranged in such a way relative to the gross volume of the room concerned.
that effective, uniform distribution of the water at
3.5 l/m2 . min where the deck height is less than 1.1.2 Dry-powder fire extinguishing systems are to
2.5 m and 5 l/m2 . min where the deck height is 2.5 m be designed with a least 0.5 kg per cubic meter of the
or more is ensured. gross volume of the room concerned. Steps are to be
taken to ensure that the extinguishing medium is
2.3.3 The system may be divided into sections. evenly distributed.
Each section shall be not less than 20 m in length and
extend across the full width of the vehicle deck, 1.1.3 For pressure water spraying systems, a
except in areas which are divided longitudinally by uniform distribution rate of 5 l/m2.min relative to the
"Type A" partitions (e.g. machinery, ventilation or floor area is to be ensured. The water may be supplied
stairway shafts). from the fire main.
2.3.4 The distribution valves are to be installed 1.2 For rooms with a floor area of less than 4 m2,
adjacent to the space to be protected. There must be portable CO2 or dry powder fire extinguisher may be
direct access from the vehicle deck and from outside. used if it is possible to use them without entering the
room, e.g. by means of a special admission opening.
The room where the distribution valves are located
must be adequately ventilated. 2. Galley range exhaust ducts
2.1 The fixed means for extinguishing a fire
2.3.5 One or more separate pumps are to be within the galley range exhaust duct shall be so
provided, the capacity of which must be sufficient to designed that the extinguishant is effective over the
supply the two largest adjoining sections with water entire length between the outer fire damper and the
simultaneously. fire damper to be fitted in the lower end of the duct.
In addition, a connection from the fire main is to be 2.2 Manual actuation is to be provided. The
provided. Reverse flow from the water spraying controls are to be installed near the access to the
system into the fire main is to be prevented by means galley, together with the emergency cut-off switches
of a screw-down non-return valve. The valve is to be for the galley ventilation supply and exhaust fans and
secured in closed position with a lock. the actuating equipment for the fire dampers.
Automatic actuation of the fire extinguishing system
2.3.6 The water spraying pump must be capable of may additionally be provided on application.
being started from the distribution valve group. All
the shutoff valves located between the seawater inlet
and the distribution valves must be capable of being
opened from the distribution valve group, unless they
are secured in the open position. N. Dry Powder Fire Extinguishing System
Measures are to be taken to ensure that the water 1. General
which may collect as a result of the operation of the
water spraying system can be completely drained Ships for the carriage of certain chemicals and
away or pumped out. flammable gases are to be equipped in the cargo deck
area with a fixed dry powder fire extinguishing
system.
2.4 Pressure water spraying systems for the
cargo area of tankers 2. Equipment design
These are subject to the Rules for Ships Carrying 2.1 The system is to be capable of delivering
Liquefied Gases in Bulk, Volume IX, Section 11.3 powder from at least two hand hose lines or a
combination monitor/hand hose line(s) to any part of
M. Fire Extinguishing Systems for Paint the cargo deck area including above-deck product
Lockers, Flammable Liquid Lockers and piping. The system shall be activated by an inert gas,
Galley Range Exhaust Ducts such as nitrogen, used exclusively for this purpose
and stored in pressure vessels adjacent to the powder
1. Paint lockers and flammable liquid containers.
lockers
2.1.1 The two hand hose lines and the combination
1.1 A fixed fire extinguishing system based on monitor/hand hose line mentioned in 2.1 must be
CO2, dry powder, water or an equivalent supplied from two independent powder units.
2.2 The system for use in the cargo area shall protected are substantially elevated above the monitor
consist of at least two independent self-contained dry or hand hose reel locations.
chemical powder units with associated controls,
pressurizing medium, fixed piping, monitors or hand 2.6 Ships fitted with bow or stern loading and
hose lines. For ships with a cargo capacity of less than discharge arrangements are to be provided with an
1000 m3 or 500 GRT, the installation of a single unit additional dry powder unit complete with at least one
can be permitted. On ships used for the carriage of monitor and one hand hose line. This additional unit
liquefied gases in bulk, one monitor is to be mounted is to be located to protect the bow or stern loading and
in such a way that protection can be given to the cargo discharge arrangements. The area of the cargo line
manifold. Operation of this monitor must be possible forward or aft of the cargo area shall be protected by
both locally and from a control position. All hand hand hose lines.
hose lines and monitors shall be capable of actuation
at the hose storage reel or monitor. At least one hand
hose line or monitor is to be located at the after end of
the cargo area. O. Fire Extinguishing Equipment for
Helicopter Landing Decks
2.3 A fire extinguishing unit having two or more
monitors, hand hose lines, or combinations thereof, 1. In close proximity to the helideck there shall
be provided and stored near the means of access to
shall have independent pipes with a manifold at the that helideck :
powder container, unless a suitable approved means
is provided to ensure proper performance. Where two 1.1 At least two dry powder extinguishers having
or more pipes are attached to a unit the arrangement a total capacity of not less than 45 kg;
shall be such that any or all of the monitors and hand
hose lines are capable of simultaneous or sequential 1.2 CO 2 - extinguishers of a total capacity of not
operation at their rated capacities. less than 18 kg or equivalent;
2.4 The capacity of a monitor shall be not less 1.3 A fixed low expansion foam system with
than 10 kg/s. monitors or foam making branch pipes capable of
delivering foam to all parts of the helideck in all
Hand hose lines shall be non-kinkable. They shall be weather conditions in which helicopters can operate.
fitted with a nozzle capable of on/off operation and The system shall be capable of delivering a discharge
discharge at a rate not less than 3,5 kg/s. The maxi- rate as required in following Table for at least five
mum discharge rate shall be such as to allow opera- minutes.
tion by one man. The length of a hand hose line shall
not exceed 33 m. The powder distribution system is to The foam agent shall meet the performance standards
be so designed that clogging of the powder cannot of ICAO1) and be suitable for use with salt water.
occur, even with intermittent operation. After
switching off the equipment, it must be possible to Category Helicopter overall Discharge rate
length foam solution
clean the distribution system. Hand hoses and nozzles (l/min)
are to be made of materials which are resistant to
weathering. Otherwise, they are to be kept in a
weatherproof cabinet or under suitable cover where H1 < 15 m 250
they are accessible at all times.
H2 15m .. < 24 m 500
2.5 A sufficient quantity of dry chemical powder
is to be stored in each container to provide a minimum H3 24 m .. < 35 m 800
45 second discharge time for all monitors and hand
hose lines attached to each powder unit. 1.4 at least two nozzles of dual-purpose type and
hoses sufficient to reach any part of the helideck;
Coverage from fixed monitors shall be in accordance
with the following requirements : 1.5 two firemans outfits in addition to those
required by SOLAS or national regulations,
1.6 at least the following equipment, stored in a
Fixed monitors [kg/s each] 10 25 45 manner that provides for immediate use and
protection from the elements:
maximum distance of 10 30 40
coverage [m] adjustable wrench
The length of the hose is to be taken as the effective

1
reach of a hand hose line. ) < 7 ! @! - , 2 @ 4 !'
& # 2 ' #7 )2
Special consideration is to be given where areas to be @ 7 ' '# ) %2
4 ' ' # )2 # G ! H= H
blanket, fire resistant installation of a fire extinguishing system may be

omitted on request if exclusively non-combustible
cutters bolt 600 mm goods, low fire-risk goods, or dangerous goods for
hook, grab or salving which CO2 is not a suitable extinguishing medium are
to be transported
hacksaw, heavy duty complete with 6 spare
blades 3. Water fire extinguishing equipment
ladder 3.1 Availability of water
life line 5 mm diameter x 15 m in length The water fire extinguishing equipment is to be so

designed that water at the prescribed pressure (see
pliers, side cutting Table 12.3) is immediately available.
set of assorted screwdrivers This is to be ensured by maintaining a permanent
harness knife complete with sheat. pressure in the fire main and by automatic start-up of
the fire pumps or by means of a remote starting
2. Drainage facilities in way of helidecks shall arrangement for the fire pumps from the bridge.
be constructed of steel and lead directly overboard
independent of any other system and designed so that 3.2 Hydrants
drainage does not fall on to any part of the vessel. 3.2.1 Hydrants are to be so installed as to ensure
that water from four nozzles at the prescribed pressure
can be simultaneously directed onto any part of the
empty cargo space. The hydrants are to be installed on
the open deck, except for Ro/Ro spaces and special
P. Equipment for the Transport of category spaces where the hydrants are to be arranged
Dangerous Goods also within the under deck cargo space.
1. General Two of the nozzles are each to be connected by means
1.1 The provisions of this Section apply of a single length of hose. The other nozzles may each
additionally to ships carrying dangerous goods. They be supplied by two coupled lengths of hose.
are not applicable if such goods are transported only 3.3 Arrangement for cooling the cargo space
in limited quantities in accordance with Section 18 of with water (water spray)
the general introduction to the IMDG Code1).
3.3.1 Cargo spaces for transporting Class 1 goods,
1.2 The requirements depend on the type of except for goods in Sub-class 1.4 of compatibility
cargo space and the danger class and special proper- group S, are to be fitted with arrangements for the
ties of the goods to be carried. They are shown in application of water spray.
Table 12.7 for packaged dangerous goods and Table
12.8 for solid dangerous goods in bulk. 3.3.2 The volume of water required is to be
determined on the basis of 5 l/min per m of the
1.3 The requirements for open top container largest horizontal cross section of the cargo space or
cargo spaces are to be agreed upon with BKI2). a dedicated section of it.
2. Fixed fire extinguishing system 3.3.3 The water may be supplied by means of the
2.1 All cargo spaces of ships intended for the main fire pumps if the flow rate of the water delivered
transport of dangerous goods are to be equipped with in parallel flow ensures the simultaneous operation of
a CO2 fire extinguishing system conforming to G. of the nozzles specified in 3.2.1 at the prescribed
this Section. This Rule applies even if the dangerous pressure.
goods are to be stowed exclusively on the weather
deck
3.3.4 The required volume of water is to be dis-
Open Ro/Ro spaces, Ro/Ro spaces not capable of tributed evenly over the cargo space area from above
being sealed and special category spaces are to be via a fixed piping system and full-bore nozzles.
equipped with a pressure water spraying system Cooling of adjoining cargo and machinery space
conforming to L.2.4 instead of a CO2 fire bulkheads is also to be ensured.
extinguishing system.
3.3.5 The piping and nozzle system may also be
For the transport of solid dangerous goods in bulk,
divided into sections and be integrated into the hatch
covers. Connection may be via hoses with
1 quick-acting couplings. Additional hydrants are to be
) International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code
2 provided on deck for this purpose.
) See IMO MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1 "Interim Guidelines for
Open Top Containerships" incl. IACS Unified 3.3.6 Measures are to be taken to ensure that the
Interpretations SC 109 - 111.
water applied to the cargo space is completely drained 23 C and Class 2 gases which are neither ignitable
away of pumped out. If this is not possible, the nor toxic. In this case, however, there are no special
additional weight of water and the influence of the requirements with regard to the number of air changes
free surfaces is to be taken into account in the ship's and the air ducting arrangements as in 6.1. This
stability information. applies also to Classes 6.1 and 8 with the exeption of
flammable liquids with a flsh point < 23oC and of
4. Electrical equipment and sources of those substances for which stowage in a mechanically
ignition ventilated space is stipulated by the appertaining
4.1 The following stipulations apply to the schedule of the IMDG code. The ventilation in those
classes of dangerous goods for which compliance cases shall meet the requirements of 6.1.
with these requirements is prescribed according to 6.3. In container cargo spaces, the number of air
Tables 12.7 and 12.8 in the row "Electrical changes may be reduced to 2 per hour if the goods are
equipment". The relevant footnotes are to be noted. transported in closed containers.
4.2 Electrical appliances may be installed and 6.4 If the properties of the goods to be
operated in the cargo spaces to the extent required for transported require the installation of explosion-
the ship's operation if they have the type of protection protected electrical appliances, the following
corresponding to a the hazard presented by flammable conditions are to be additionally complied with.
gases, vapours or dust.
6.4.1 For the motors of electrically driven shaft
For the design of the Electrical equipment and fans, see Rules for Electrical Installation, Volume IV,
classification of the dangerous areas, see Rules for Section 13.
Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Section 15.
6.4.2 The design of fans is governed by Section
4.3 Electrical appliances which are not required 15, B.5.3.2 to B.5.3.6.
in conjunction with the transport of dangerous goods
need not have a type of protection corresponding to 6.4.3 The fan outlets are to be fitted with fixed
the goods to be transported if they can be isolated protective screens with a mesh size not exceeding
from the electrical supply and safeguarded against 13 mm.
unintentional reconnection.
6.4.4 The air outlets shall be placed at a safe
4.4 Other than electrical appliances, no other distance from possible ignition sources. A spherical
ignition sources may be installed in danger areas, e.g. radius of 3 m around the air outlets, within which
steam or thermal oil lines which in service may attain ignition sources are to be avoided, is recommended.
temperatures higher than those corresponding to the
temperature class of the electrical appliances as 6.5 Ventilation for solid dangerous goods in
designed for the scope of dangerous goods to be bulk
carried. 6.5.1 For solid dangerous goods in bulk, natural
5. Fire detection ventilation is adequate unless mechanical ventilation
is stipulated by national or international regulations1).
5.1 Cargo spaces for transporting packaged
dangerous goods are to be equipped with an approved 6.5.2 If mechanical ventilation is stipulated,
fire detection and alarm system; see C. portable ventilating fans may be used instead of
permanently installed ones. If so, suitable
5.2 If a cargo space is intended for Class 1 arrangements for securing the fans safely are to be
goods, the adjoining cargo spaces must also be provided. Electrical connections are to be firmly and
monitored by the fire detection and alarm system. expertly laid for the duration of the installation.
Details are to be submitted to BKI for approval.
6.5.3 For substances which owing to their
6. Ventilation
properties require continuous mechanical ventilation
6.1 Independent mechanical exhaust ventilation during transport, the in- and outlet openings for the
for at least 6 air changes per hour is to be provided. ventilating fans are to be arranged at a height meeting
the requirements of the International Load Lines
Convention (ILLC) for openings without weathertight
2/3 of the air is to be exhausted from the lower part of
closures.
the cargo space and 1/3 from the upper part.
The requirement applies to the following substances:
6.2 Natural ventilation is sufficient if only
Class 1 goods are transported. This applies also to a) - aluminium ferrosilicon,UN No. 1395,
Classes 4 and 5.1 if carried in closed containers. IMO 4.3
Adequate mechanical ventilation is to be provided for

1
flammable liquids in Classes 3 with a flash point of ) See IMO, "Code of Safe Practice for Solid Bulk
Cargoes (BC Code)".
- aluminium silicon, UN No. 1398, IMO 4.3 water-driven pumps must not be drained into the
cargo space. Water-driven ejector must be equipped
- ferrosilicon, UN No. 1408, IMO 4.3 on the suction side with a means of reverse-flow
- zinc ashes, UN No. 1435, IMO 4.3 protection.
b) - seed cake (b), UN No. 1386, IMO 4.2 7.4 Where tanks are provided for collecting and
storage of dangerous goods spills, their vent pipes are
- seed cake (c), UN No. 2217, IMO 4.2 to be taken to a safe on the open deck.
6.5.4 For the class 4.3 goods listed under 6.5.3 a), 8. Protective clothing and breathing apparatus
at least two independent ventilating fans are to be
provided which together guarantee at least 6 air
changes per hour based on the empty cargo hold. 8.1 Four sets of protective clothing appropriate to the
properties of the cargo are to be provided1).
Should one fan fail, it must be possible to maintain at
least 3 changes per hour. 8.2 In addition to the breathing apparatus stipulated
for the fireman's outfit, two self-contained breathing
The ventilation arrangements must be such that apparatus with cylinders must be available.
escaping gases cannot reach below-deck
accommodation spaces. For each of the additional sets of breathing apparatus,
air cylinders adequate for at least two refill are to be
6.5.5 For the transport of sulphur, UN No. 1350, carried.
IMO 4.1, portable ventilating fans providing 2 air
changes per hour may be used. 9. Portable fire extinguishers
7. Bilge pumping 9.1 Every cargo space is to be equipped with portable

dry powder fire extinguishers containing a total of
The transport of liquids with a flash point of < 23 C 12 kg of extinguishing medium.
or of toxic liquids is subject to the following Rules:
This Rule also applies to the weather deck.
7.1 The bilge system is to be designed so as to
prevent inadvertent pumping of dangerous liquids 10. Insulation between machinery and cargo
through pumps and pipelines in the machinery space. spaces
7.2 Bilge lines leading to the cargo space are to be

10.1 Bulkheads between cargo spaces and
fitted at the point of exit from the machinery space
machinery spaces containing internal combustion
with a shutoff valve located directly at the bulkhead.
engines, boilers or fuel oil preparation systems must
The valves must be capable of being secured against
be equipped with fire insulation to A-60 standard.
inadvertent opening. Appropriate warming signs are
The insulation may be dispensed with if no Class 1
to be displayed at the operating station. goods, with the exception of Sub-class 1.4, compati-
7.3 An additional fixed bilge system with a capacity bility group S, are to be transported in the cargo space
of at least 10 m3/h per cargo hold is to be provided. If and all dangerous goods are stowed at least 3 meters
more than two cargo holds are connected to a away from the bulkhead.
common system, the capacity need not exceed Decks between cargo and machinery spaces must
25 m3/h. conform to A-60 standard. The bulkhead insulation
7.3.1 The additional bilge system must enable any may be dispensed with in cargo spaces intended
leaked dangerous liquids to be removed from all the exclusively for containers.
bilge wells in the cargo space. 10.2 For stowage on the weather deck directly
7.3.2 Pumps and pipelines must not be installed in above machinery spaces, 10.1 is to be complied with
machinery spaces. for the deck insulation.
7.3.3 Section 11, N. applies in analogously.

7.3.4 When using water-driven pumps or ejectors,
the motive water may be drawn from the fire main via
detachable hose connections. The motive water of
1
) 4 ? '( 4' ? <& 5 2
=7 7
Table 12.8 Conditions for the transport of solid dangerous goods in bulk according to the classes of
dangerous goods
Classification 4.1 4.2 4.31) 5.1 6.1 8 9

according to SOLAS, Chapter VII
Dangerous goods
8 '
Additional
'
requirements
"
"
9
"
'
,
'
&
<
&
&
:
-
Availability of water for x x - x x 2) x 2) x
extinguishing equipment
Section 12, P.3.1
Hydrant 4) x x - x - - x
Section 12, P.3.2
Electrical Equipment x x 2) x x 2) - - x 2)
Section 12, P.4
Ventilation 3) x 2) x 2) x x 2) - x 2) x 2)
Section 12, P.6
Protective clothing and x x x x x x x

breathing apparatus
Section 12, P.8
Cargo space/machinery x x x x 2) x 2) x 2) x
space insulation
Section 12, P.10
1
) The additional Rules according to 12 are to be complied with.
2
) Reference is made to the "International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code" or to "Code of Safe Practice for Solid Bulk Cargoes"
3
) See 6.4
4
) Only for goods which require large quantities of water for firefighting
11. Water spraying system 12.1 Engine room bulkhead

A water spraying system designed in accordance with 12.1.1 The bulkhead between the cargo hold and the
L.2.3 is to be provided in open Ro/Ro cargo spaces, engine room must be gastight. Cable penetrations are
in Ro/Ro cargo spaces not capable of being sealed not acceptable.
and in special category spaces.
12.2 Gas detectors
12. Additional Rules for ships for 12.2.1 At least two suitable gas defectors for
transporting Class 4.3 goods in bulk quantitative measurement of phosphine and arsine
must be available.
Section 13 - Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes 13-1
S e c t i o n 13
Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes
A. General C. Necessary Reinforcements

1. Propeller shafts, intermediate shafts, thrust
1. Notations affixed to the character of shafts
classification
1.1 General
The machinery of ships strengthened for navigation in
ice is designated after the character of classification The necessary propeller shaft reinforcements in
SM by the additional notation ES, ES1, ES2, ES3 or accordance with formula (1), in conjunction with the
ES4, provided that the Rules contained in this Section formulae and factors specified in Section 4.C.2,
and the relevant structural requirements set out in relating to ice classes ES, ES1, ES2, ES3 and ES4
Volume II, Section 15, Rules for Hull Constructions apply to the area of the after stern tube bearing or shaft
together with the supplements thereto are satisfied. bracket bearing as far as the forward load-bearing
The reinforcements necessary for the classification edge of the propeller or of the aft propeller shaft
notation ES may also be applied to the machinery coupling flange subject to a minimum area of 2,5 d.
alone. The diameter of the adjoining part of the propeller
2. Compliance with the "Finnish-Swedish Ice shaft to the point where it leaves the stern tube may be
Rules, 1971" designed with an ice class reinforcement factor 15 %
less than that calculated by formula (2).
The requirements for ice classes ES1, ES2, ES3 and
ES4 contained in this Section are equivalent to the Reinforcement of the intermediate and thrust shafts in
relevant Finnish-Swedish ice class requirements for accordance with formulae (1) and (2) is required only
the corresponding ice classes, as set out in Table 13.1. for ice class ES4.
A prior condition is that the ships concerned are given
the characters of class A 100. 1.2 Reinforcements
Where the Finnish-Swedish ice class requirements do dE = CEW d (1)
not need to be complied with, other types of
reinforcement may, where appropriate, be agreed with dE [mm] increased diameter of propeller,
the Society. In such cases, the index o is appended to intermediate or thrust shaft
the ice class notation. d [mm] shaft diameter according to Section
Table 13.1 Corresponding ice classes 4, C.2.
CEW [-] ice class strengthening factor
BKI Ice ES ES1 ES2 ES3 ES4
Class
3
Finnish-swedish II IC IB IA IA 85 . m
Ice Class Rules super CEW c . 1 1,0 (2)
III1) 0,6
P w . n2
0,2
1
) For ships which have the restricted range of service
corresponding to the notation K added to the character of
Pw [kW] power at shaft
class
n2 [Rpm] shaft speed in rev/min
m [-] ice class factor according to Table
B. Necessary Propulsion Power 13.2
The necessary propulsion power shall be as stated in c [-] = 0,7 for shrink fits in gears
Rules for Hull, Volume II, Section 15, Rules for Hull
Constructions. = 0,71 for the propeller shafts of
fixed-pitch propellers
The rated output of the main engines in accordance
with Section 2, A.3. must be such that they are able to = 0,78 for the propeller shafts of
supply in continuous service the propulsion power controllable pitch
necessary for the ice class concerned. propellers
13-2 Section 13 - Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes
= 0,6 for intermediate and thrust CDyn = 1,0, if CDyn CEP

shafts
In the case of ducted propellers, the values of c can be tE [mm] increased thickness of blade section
reduced by 10 %. t [mm] blade section thickness at radii
Table 13.2 Values of ice class factor m 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R in
accordance with Section 6, C.2.
Ice ES ES1 ES2 ES3 ES4 CEP [-] ice class strengthening factor
class
m 8 12 13 16 21 21 . z . m
f . 1 1,0 (6)
0,6 0,2
P w . n2
2. Coupling bolts, shrunk joints
f = 0,62 for solid propellers
2.1 For ice class notation ES4, the diameter of the
fitted bolts and plain bolts used in the shafting is to be = 0,72 for controllable pitch propellers
15 % greater than that calculated by applying the
relevant formulae in Section 4. z [-] number of blades
2.2 When designing shrink fits in the shafting system CDyn [-] dynamic factor in accordance with
and in gearboxes, the necessary pressure per unit area Section 6, formula (3)
pE. [N/mm2] is to be calculated in accordance with In the case of ducted propellers, the values of f may be
formula (3). reduced by 15 %.
Other terms in the formula same as for formula (2).
2 6
. T2 f . (c 2 . ce . Q 2 T 2) . T
pE (3)
A . f 3.2.2 Blade tips
Note:
500
"+" sign in (3) for shrink fits without an axial stop to toE . (0,002 . D t) (7)
Cw
absorb reverse thrust.
"-" sign in (3) for shrink fits with an axial stop to toE [mm] strengthened blade tip
absorb reverse thrust.
t [mm] increase in thickness
ce = 0.89 CEW 1,0 (4) = 10 for ice class ES

= 15 for ice classes ES1, ES2 and
CEW, ce [-] ice class reinforcement factors in ES3
accordance with formula (2) or (4)
= 20 for ice class ES4
as applicable.
D [mm] propeller diameter
Other symbols in accordance with Section 4, D.4.
Cw [N/mm2] material factor in accordance with
3. Propellers Section 6, C.1, Table 6.1
3.1 General In the case of ducted propellers, the thickness of the

blade tips may be reduced by 15 %.
The propellers of ships with ice classes ES, ES1, ES2,
ES3 and ES4 must be made of the cast copper alloys
3.2.3 Leading and trailing edges
or cast steel alloys specified in Section 6.
The thickness of the leading and trailing edges of solid
3.2 Strengthening propellers and the thickness of the leading edge of
controllable pitch propellers must, for ice classes ES1,
3.2.1 Blade sections ES2, ES3 and ES4, be equal to at least 50 %, and for
ice class ES to at least 35 % of the blade tip toE
tE = CEP t (5)
when measured at a distance of 1,25 toE from the
CEP = 1,0 if CEP CDyn edge of the blade.
and
3.2.4 Propeller mounting
Section 13 - Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes 13-3
Where the propeller is mounted on the propeller shaft P [kW] power of propulsion engine
by the oil injection method, the necessary pressure per
unit area pE [N/mm] in the area of the mean taper cl = 14 for the gears of engine plants
diameter is to be determined by formula 8 = 4 for the gears of turbine plants.
cF = correction factors for model
2 6
T2 f (c 2 ce Q2 T 2) T In the case of ducted propellers, the values of c1 may
pE (8) be reduced by 30 % provided that the duct and its
Af
attachment to the hull are suitably strengthened for the
ice class concerned.
Ce [-] ice class reinforcement factor in Where a magnetic or hydraulic slip coupling is fitted
accordance with formula (4). between the engine and the gear system, the value for
cl is to be obtained from the Society, which is to be
Other symbols in accordance with Section 6.
notified of the moments of inertia of the propeller and
In the case of flanged propellers, the required diameter of the secondary component of the coupling. The
dkE of the alignment pins is to be determined by Society reserves the right to carry out a special
applying formula (9). determination of the value of c1 based on the torsional
1,5
vibration characteristics of the shafting where this is
dkE CEW dk (9) rendered necessary by extremely large ratios between
the moments of inertia of engine and propeller and by
the use to which the vessel is to be put.
dkE [mm] reinforced root diameter of thread
4.2.1.2 Strength of tooth flanks
dk [mm] root diameter of propeller retaining
bolt thread in accordance with
HE K E cH H HP (12)
Section 6, F.2.
CEW [-] ice class reinforcement factor in
KE [-] ice class reinforcement factor in
accordance with formula (2).
4. Gears For mn 16 : cH = 1,0
4.1 General For mn > 16 : cH = SH / 1,45
Gears in the main propulsion plant of ships with ice with KE cH 1,0
classes ES1, ES2, ES3 and ES4 are to be of cH = correction factor for modul
strengthened design. Besides the strengthening factor
KE prescribed here for the design of toothing and the F [N/mm2] in accordance with Section 5, C.5.2
dimensions of gear shafts and in addition to ce for the
FP [N/mm2] in accordance with Section 5, C.5.2
design of shrink fits, the other components of such
gears, e.g. clutch couplings, bearings, casings and
bolted joints, must also be designed to withstand the
increased loads encountered when navigating in ice. 4.2.2 Gear shafts
dE = qE d (13)
4.2 Strengthening
dE [mm] increased gear shaft diameter
4.2.1 Tooth systems
3
4.2.1.1 Strength of tooth root qE 0,9 KE 1,0 (14)
FE = KE cF F FP (10) d [mm] gear shaft diameter in accordance

For mn 16 : cF = 1,0 with Section 5, D.1.
For mn > 16 : cF = 2,0 / SF KE [-] ice class strengthening factor in

with KE cF 1,0
F
2
[N/mm ] in accordance with Section 5, C.5.2 4.2.3 Shrink Fits
FP [N/mm2] in accordance with Section 5, C.5.2 The necessary pressure per unit area pE [N/mm] in
KE [-] ice class strengthening factor accordance with formula (3) is to be calculated when
designing shrink fits in gearing systems.
c1 m
KE 1 (11)
0,6 0,2
Pw n2
13-4 Section 13 - Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes
5. Flexible couplings Sea chests and discharge valves are to be designed in

accordance with Section 11, I.2.
Flexible couplings in the main propulsion installation
must be so designed that, given the load on the 7. Steering gear
coupling due to torsional vibrations at Tdrive, they are
able to withstand safely brief torque shocks TE [Nm] The dimensional design of steering gear components
of magnitude: is to be take account of the rudderstock diameter
specified in Rules for Hull Constructions, Volume II
TE = KE Tdrive (15) Section 14 and 15.
KE [-] ice class strengthening factor in 8. Electric propeller drive

Where electric propeller drives are used, the
Tdrive [Nm] driving torque conditions set out in Rules for Electrical Installations,
Volume IV, Section 11, relating to the propulsion
6. Sea chests and discharge valves power necessary for the ice class concerned must be
fulfilled.
Section 14 - Steering Gears, Rudder Propeller Units, Lateral Thrust Units, Windlasses, Winches
Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems and Stabilizers 14-1
Section 14
Steering Gears, Rudder Propeller Units, Lateral Thrust Units, Windlasses, Winches
Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems and Stabilizers
A. Steering Gears 2.1.3 The pipes of hydraulic steering gears are to

be made of seamless or longitudinally welded steel
1. General tubes. The use of cold-drawn, unannealed tubes is not
1.1 Scope permitted.
The Rules contained in Section 14.A. apply to the At points where they are exposed to danger, copper
steering gear, the steering station and all transmission pipes for control lines are to be provided with
elements from the steering station to the steering gear. protective shielding and are to be safeguarded against
For the rudder and manoeuvering arrangement, see the hardening due to vibration by the use of suitable
Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 14. fastenings.
For the purposes of these Rules, steering gears
2.1.4 High-pressure hose assemblies may be used
comprise all equipment used to operate the rudder
for short pipe connections subject to compliance with
from the rudder actuator to the steering station
Section 11, U.
including the transmission elements.
2.1.5 The materials used for pressurized
components including the seals must be suitable for
Assembly and general drawings of all steering gears, the hydraulic oil in use.
diagrams of the hydraulic and electrical equipment
together with detail drawings of all important 2.2 Testing of materials
load-transmitting components are to be submitted to
the Society in triplicate for approval. 2.2.1 The materials of important load-transmitting
components of the steering gear including the
The drawings and other documents must contain all pressurized oil pipes and the pressurized casings of
the information relating to materials, working pres- hydraulic steering gears are to be tested in accordance
sures, pump delivery rates, drive motor ratings etc. with the Rules for Materials, Volume V.
necessary to enable the documentation to be checked.
For welded pressurized casings, the Rules for Wel-
ding, Volume VI, are to be applied.
2. Materials
2.2.2 In the case of small hand-operated main
2.1 Approved materials
steering gears and small manually operated auxiliary
2.1.1 As a rule, important load-transmitting com- equipment the Society may dispense with testing the
ponents of the steering gear should be made of steel or materials of individual components such as axiometer
cast steel complying with the Rules for Materials, gear shafts, etc.
Volume V.
With the consent of the Society, cast iron may be used 3. Design and equipment
for certain components. 3.1 Number of steering gears
Pressure vessels should in general be made of steel, Every ship must be equipped with at least one main
cast steel or nodular cast iron (with a predominantly and one auxiliary steering gear. Both steering gears are
ferritic matrix). to be independent of each other and,wherever
For welded structures, the Rules for Welding, Volume possible, act separately upon the rudderstock. The
VI, are to be observed. Society may agree to components being used jointly
by the main and auxiliary steering gear. For the
2.1.2 Casings which house journal and guide electrical part of steering gear systems, see the Rules
bearings on ships with a nozzle rudder and ice class for Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Section 7, A.
are not to be made of grey cast iron.
3.2 Main steering gear
14-2 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems and Stabilizers
3.2.1 Main steering gears shall, with the rudder On tankers over 10000 GRT and all other ships over
fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting 70000 GRT, this must be accomplished in not more
the rudder from 35 port to 35 starboard and vice than 45 seconds.
versa at the ship's speed for which the rudder has been
designed in accordance with the Rules for Hull 3.4.1.4 In the event of a loss of hydraulic oil, it must
Construction, Volume II, Section 14. The time be possible to isolate the damaged system in such a
required to put the rudder from 35 port to 30 way that the second control system remains fully
starboard or vice versa shall not exceed 28 seconds. serviceable.
The main steering gear must normally be power 3.5 Rudder angle limitation
operated. The rudder angle in normal service is to be limited by
devices fitted to the steering gear (e.g. limit switches)
3.2.2 Manual operation is acceptable for rudder-
to a rudder angle of 35 on both sides. Deviations
stock diameters up to 120 mm calculated for torsional
from this Rule are permitted only with the consent of
loads in accordance with the Rules for Hull
the Society.
Construction, Volume II, Section 14, C.1. Not more
than 25 turns of the handwheel shall be necessary to 3.6 End position limitation
put the rudder from one hard over position to the
other. Taking account of the efficiency of the system, For the limitation by means of stoppers of the end
the force required to operate the handwheel should positions of tillers and quadrants, see the Rules for
generally not exceed 200 N. Hull Construction, Volume II, 14, G.
In the case of hydraulic steering gears without an end
3.3 Auxiliary steering gear position limitation of the tiller and similar compo-
nents, an end position limiting device must be fitted
3.3.1 Auxiliary steering gear shall, with the rud- within the rudder actuator.
der fully immersed in calm water, be capable of
putting the rudder from 15 port to 15 starboard or 3.7 Locking equipment
vice versa within 60 seconds at 50 % of the ship's
maximum speed, subject to a minimum of eight knots. Steering gear systems are to be equipped with a
Hydraulically operated auxiliary steering gears must locking system effective in all rudder positions (see
be fitted with their own piping system independent of also for Rules Hull Construction, Volume II, Section
that of the main steering gear. The pipe or hose 14, G.).
connections of steering gears must be capable of being Where hydraulic plant is fitted with shutoff directly at
shut off directly at the pressurize casings. the cylinders or rotary vane casings, special locking
3.3.2 Manual operation of auxiliary steering gear equipment may be dispensed with.
systems is permitted up to a theoretical stock diameter 3.8 Overload protection
of 230 mm.
Power-operated steering gear systems are to be fitted
with overload protection (slip coupling, relief valve)
3.4 Power Unit
to ensure that the driving torque is limited to the
3.4.1 Where power operated hydraulic main maximum permissible value. The design and setting of
steering gears are equipped with two or more identical safety valves must be such that their response
power units, no auxiliary steering gear need be threshold does not allow the maximum permissible
installed provided that the following conditions are working pressure to be exceeded by more than 10 %.
fulfilled. The overload protection device must be secured to
prevent later adjustment by unauthorized persons.
3.4.1.1 On passenger ships, conditions 3.2.1 and Means must be provided for checking the setting while
4.1.1 must be fulfilled while any one of the power in service.
units is out of operation.
The pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gears
3.4.1.2 On cargo ships, the power units must be so which also fulfil the function of the locking equipment
designed that conditions 3.2.1 and 4.1.1 are fulfilled mentioned in 3.7 are to be fitted with relief valves
while operating with all power units. unless they are so designed that the pressure generated
3.4.1.3 In the event of failure of a single compo- when the elastic-limit torque is applied to the
nent of the main steering gear including the piping, rudderstock cannot cause rupture or permanent
excluding the rudder tiller or similar components as deformation of the pressurized casings.
well as the cylinders, rotary vanes and casing, means 3.9 Controls
must be provided for quickly regaining control of one
steering system. 3.9.1 Control of the main and auxiliary steering
gears must be exercised from a steering station on the
bridge. Controls must be mutually independent and so 3.12.2 The lowest permissible oil level is to be
designed that the rudder cannot move unintentionally. monitored. Audible and visual alarms shall be given
on the navigating bridge and in the machinery space.
3.9.2 Means must also be provided for exercising The alarms on the navigating bridge shall be
control from a steering station in the steering gear individual alarms.
compartment. The transmission system must be in-
dependent of that serving the main steering station. 3.12.3 Filters for cleaning the operating fluid are
to be located in the piping system.
3.9.3 Suitable equipment is to be installed to
provide means of communication between the bridge 3.13 Storage tank
and all steering stations.
In power-operated main steering gear systems, an
3.9.4 Failure of single control components (e.g. additional permanently installed storage tank is to be
control system for variable displacement pump or flow fitted which has a capacity sufficient to refill at least
control valve) which may lead to loss of steering shall one of the control systems including the service tank.
be monitored by an audible and visible alarm on the
navigating bridge, if loss of steering cannot be This storage tank is to be permanently connected by
prevented by other measures. pipes to the control systems so that the latter can be
recharged from a position inside the steering gear
3.10 Rudder angle indication compartment.
3.10.1 The rudder position must be clearly indi- 3.14 Arrangement
cated on the bridge and at all steering stations. Where
Steering gears are to be so installed that they are ac-
the steering gear is operated electrically or
cessible at all times and can be maintained without
hydraulically, the rudder angle must be signalled by a
difficulty.
device (rudder position indicator) which is actuated
either by the rudderstock itself or by parts which are 3.15 For electriccal part of steering gear systems,
rigidly connected to it. In case of timedependent see the Rules for Electrical Installation, Volume IV,
control of the main and auxiliary steering gear, the Section &, A.
midship position of the rudder must be indicated on
the bridge by some additional means (signal lamp or
similar). In general, this indicator is still to be fitted 4. Power and design
even if the second control system is a manually 4.1 Power of steering gears
operated hydraulic system. See also the Rules for
Electrical Installation, Volume IV, Section 9, C.4. The power of the steering gear is governed by the
requirements set out in 3.2 and 3.3. The minimum
3.10.2 The rudder position at any moment must requirement with regard to the maximum effective
also be indicated at the steering gear itself. torque for which the steering gear is to be designed is
to be calculated according to formula (1).
It is recommended that an additional rudder angle
indicator be fitted at the main engine control station.
3
13 Dt kr
3.11 Piping Mmax [Nm] (1)
1000
3.11.1 The pipes of hydraulic steering gear sys-
tems are to be installed in such a way as to ensure
maximum protection while remaining readily acces- For the determination of the pertinent working pres-
sible. sure (maximum pressure1) the frictional losses in the
Pipes are to be installed at a sufficient distance from steering gear are to be considered. The relief valves
the ship's shell. As far as possible, pipes should not are to be set at this pressure value.
pass through cargo spaces.
Connections to other hydraulic systems are not per- Dt [mm] theoretical rudder stock diameter in based
mitted. on ahead run in accordance with the Rules
3.11.2 For the design and dimensions of pipes, for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section
valves, fittings, pressure vessels etc., see Section 8 14, C. 1; 15, B.9; and 15, D.3.7.
(Pressure Vessels) and Section 11 (Pipes, Valves, In the case of multi-surface rudders controlled by a
Fittings, Pumps) A., B., C., D. and U. common steering gear the relevant diameter is to be
3.12 Oil level indicators, filters
1
)
3.12.1 Tanks forming part of the hydraulic system
are to be fitted with oil level indicators.
determined by applying the formula: 4.2.3 Where materials with a tensile strength
greater than 500 N/mm are used, the section of the
3
3 3 hub may be reduced by 10 %.
Dti Dt1 Dt2 ...
kr material characteristic
"
! (2)
#
e = 0,75 where ReH > 235 N/mm2

= 1,0 where ReH 235 N/mm2
ReH [N/mm] yield point of rudderstock
Fig. 14.1 Hub Dimension
material; in no case is REH to
be greater then 450 N/mm2 or 4.2.4 Where the force is transmitted by clamped
0,7 . Rm, whichecer is less or tapered connections, the elastic-limit torque may be
( R m [ N / mm 2 ] = t e n s i l e transmitted by a combination of frictional resistance
strength). and a positive locking mechanism using adequately
tightened bolts and a key.
4.2 Design of transmission components
For the elastic limit torque according to formula (3),
4.2.1 The design calculations for those parts of
the thread root diameter of the bolts can be determined
the steering gear which are not protected against
by applying the following formula:
overload are to be based on the elastic-limit torque of
the rudderstock.
The elastic-limit torque to be used is 1
dk 9,76.D [mm] (4)
z kr ReH
26,6 D 3
MF [Nm] (3)
1000 kr
D [mm] actual rudderstock diameter. The
value used for the actual diameter
where
need not be larger than 1,145 .
D [mm] minimum actual rudderstock Dt
diameter. The value used for the
z [-] total number of bolts
actual diameter need not be larger
than 1,145 . Dt ReH [N/mm] yield point of the bolt material
The loads on the components of the steering gear 4.2.5 Split hubs of clamped joints must be joined
determined in this way must be below the yield point together with at least four bolts.
of the materials used. The design of parts of the
steering gear with overload protection is to be based The key is not to be located at the joint in the clamp.
on the loads corresponding to the response threshold 4.2.6 Where the oil injection method is used to
of the overload protection. joint the rudder tiller or rotary vanes to the rudder-
4.2.2 Tiller and rotary vane hubs made of stock, the methods of calculation appropriate to elas-
material with a tensile strength of up to 500 N/mm ticity theory are to be applied. Calculations are to be
satisfy the following conditions in the area where the based on the elastic-limit torque allowing for a coef-
force is applied (see Figure 14.1): ficient of friction o = 0,15 for steel and 0,12 for
nodular cast iron. The von Mises equivalent stress
Height of hub H = 1,0 . D [mm] calculated from the specific pressure p and the
corresponding tangential load based on the dimensions
Outside diameter Da = 1,8 . D [mm]
of the shrunk joint shall not exceed 80 % of the yield
In special cases the outside diameter may be reduced strength of the materials used.
to
4.2.7 Where circumferential tension components
Da = 1,7 D [mm] are used to connect the rudder tiller or rotary vanes to
the rudder stock, calculations are to be based on two
but the height of the hub must then be at least and a half times the maximum torque (but not more
H = 1,14 D [mm] than the elastic limit torque) allowing for a coefficient
of friction of o = 0,12. The von Mises equivalent

stress calculated from the contact pressure p and the B. Rudder Propeller Units
corresponding tangential load based on the dimensions 1. General
of the shrunk-on connection shall not exceed 80 % of
the yield strength of the materials used. 1.1 Scope
When more than one circumferential tension The Rules of Section 14, B. apply to the rudder pro-
component is used the transmittable torque is to be peller as main drive, the ship's manoeuvering station
determined from the sum of the individual torques and all transmission elements from the manoeuvering
allowing for a weakening factor v = 0,9. station to the rudder propeller.
5 Tests in the manufacturer's work
Assembly and sectional drawings as well as part
5.1 Testing of power units drawings of the gears and propellers giving all the data
The power units are required to undergo test on a test necessary for the examination are to be submitted in
stand in the manufacturer's works. triplicate to the Society for approval.
5.1.1 For diesel engines see Section 2. 2. Materials

5.1.2 For electric motors see Rules for Electrical
Installation, Volume IV, Section 18. The selection of materials is subject, as and where
applicable, to the provisions of A.2.1 and to those of
5.1.3 For hydraulic pumps and motors, the
Section 5, B.1. and Section 6, B.1. to 3.
"Regulations for the Design and Testing of Pumps"
are to be applied analogously. Where the drive power 2.2 Testing of materials
is 50 kW or more, this testing is to be carried out in
the presence of a BKI Surveyor. All important components of the rudder propeller
involved in the transmission of torques and bending
5.2 Pressure and tightness tests moments must be tested in accordance with the Rules
for Materials, Volume V.
Pressure components are to undergo a pressure test.
3. Design and equipment
The test pressure
3.1 Number of rudder propellers
pc = 1,5 . p (5)
Each ship must have at least two rudder propellers.
p [bar] is the maximum allowable
Both units shall be capable of being operated inde-
working pressure or the pressure
pendently of the other.
at which the relief valves open.
However, for working pressures 3.2 Locking devices
above 200 bar the test pressure
need not exceed p + 100 bar. Each rudder propeller is to be provided with a locking
device for cases where it is necessary to prevent the
For pressure testing of pipes, their valves and fittings, unintentional rotation of the propeller or the turning
see Section 11, B.4 and U.5. mechanism of the unit which is out of service at any
time.
Tightness tests are to be performed on components to
which this is appropriate. 3.3 Control
5.3 Final inspection and operational test 3.3.1 Both the drive and the turning mechanism
of each rudder propeller must be controlled from a
Following testing of the individual components and
manoeuvering station on the navigating bridge.
after completion of assembly, the steering gear is re-
quired to undergo final inspection and an operational The controls must be mutually independent and so
test. The overload protection is to be adjusted at this designed that the rudder propeller cannot be shifted
time. unintentionally.
6. Shipboard trials An additional combined control for all rudder pro-
pellers is permitted.
The operational efficiency of the steering gear is to be
proved during the sea trials. For this purpose, the Z 3.3.2 The failure of a single element within the
manoeuvre corresponding to 3.2.1 and 3.3.1 is to be control and hydraulic system of one unit shall not lead
executed as a minimum requirement. to the failure of the other units.
3.3.3 Where the hydraulic systems of more than
one rudder propeller are combined, it must be possible 5.3 Final inspection and operational test
in case of a loss of hydraulic oil to isolate the damaged
system in such a way that the other control systems 5.3.1 After inspection of the individual compo-
remain fully operational. nents and completion of assembly, rudder propellers
are to undergo a final inspection and operational test.
3.4 Position indicators The final inspection shall be combined with a trial run
lasting several hours under part or full-load con-
3.4.1 The position of each rudder propeller must ditions. A check is lo be carried out on the tooth
be clearly discernible on the navigating bridge and at clearance and contact pattern.
each manoeuvering station.
5.3.2 When no suitable test bed is available for
3.4.2 The actual position must also be discernible the operational and load testing of large rudder pro-
at the rudder propeller itself. pellers, the tests mentioned in 5.3.1 can be carried out
3.5 Pipes on the occasion of the dock test.
The pipes of hydraulic control systems are subject to 5.3.3 Limitations on the scope of the test require
the provisions of A.3.11 wherever relevant. the Society's consent.
3.6 Oil level indicators, filters 6. Testing on board
Oil level indicators and filters are subject to the pro- 6.1 The faultless operation, smooth running and
visions of A.3.12 wherever relevant. bearing temperatures of the gears and control system
are to be checked during the sea trials under all
3.7 Lubrication steaming conditions.
3.7.1 The lubricating oil supply is to be ensured After the conclusion of the sea trials, the toothing is to
by a main pump and an independent standby pump. be examined through the inspection openings and the
3.7.2 In the case of separate lubricating system in contact pattern is to be checked. The tooth contact
which the main lubricating oil pumps can be replaced pattern is to be assessed on the basis of the reference
with the means available on board, complete standby values for the percentage area of contact given in
pumps ready for mounting may be carried on board. Section 5, Table 5.5.
4. Design 6.2 The scope of the check on contact pattern

following the sea trials may be limited with the Sur-
4.1 Gears veyor's agreement provided that the checks on contact
pattern called for in 5.3.1 have proved satisfactory.
The turning gears are in general to take the form of
spur gears or bevel gears
4.2 Propellers
For the design of propellers, see Section 6. C. Lateral Thrust Units
4.3 Support pipe 1. General
The dimensional design of the support pipe and its 1.1 Scope
attachment to the ship's hull shall take account of the
loads due to the propeller and nozzle thrust including The Rules contained in Section 14, C. apply to the
the dynamic components. lateral thrust unit, the control station and all the
transmission elements from the control station to the
4.4 Pipes lateral thrust unit.
For arrangement and design of pipes, valves, fittings 1.2 Documents For approval
and pressure vessels, see Section 8 (Pressure Vessel)
and Section 11 (Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps), Assembly and sectional drawings together with detail
A,B,C,D,U. drawings of the gear mechanism and propellers
containing all the data necessary for checking are each
5. Tests in the manufacturer's work to be submitted to the Society in triplicate for
approval. In the case of propellers, this only applies to
5.1 Testing of power units propulsive power levels above 500 kW.
A.5.1 applies wherever relevant.
2. Materials
5.2 Pressure and tightness test Materials are subject, as appropriate, to the provisions
A.5.2 applies wherever relevant. of Sections 5 and 6.
Section 6 applies analogously to the materials and the proved for several strengths and types of chain cable,
material testing of propellers. In the case of propellers the calculation relating to the maximum braking torque
with a propulsive power up to 300 kW an acceptance is to be submitted and proof furnished of the power
test certificate issued by the manufacturer may be and hauling-in speed in accordance with 4.1
acceptance test certificate issued by the manufacturer corresponding to all the relevant types of anchor and
may be accepted as proof of the quality characteristics chain cable.
of the material.
3. Dimensioning and design 2. Materials
The dimensional design of the driving mechanisms of 2.1 Approved materials

lateral thrust units is governed by Section 5, that of the 2.1.1 The provisions contained in A.2.1 are to be
propellers by Section 6. applied as appropriate to the choice of materials.
The pipe connections of hydraulic drive systems are
2.1.2 Cable lifters and chain pulleys are generally
subject to the applicable requirements contained in
to be made of cast steel. Nodular cast iron is permitted
A.2.1.3 and A.2.1.4.
for stud link chain cables of
Lateral thrust units must be capable of being operated
up to 50 mm diameter for grade K 1
independently of other connected systems.
up to 42 mm diameter for grade K 2
For the electrical section of lateral thrust units, see
Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV, up to 35 mm diameter for grade K 3.
Section 7, B.
In special cases, nodular cast iron may also be used for
4. Tests in the manufacturer's works larger chain diameters by arrangement with the
Society.
A.5. is applicable as appropriate.
Grey cast iron is permitted for stud link chain cables
For hydraulic pumps and motors with a drive power of
of
100 kW or more, the test are to be conducted in the
presence of a BKI Surveyor. up to 30 mm diameter for grade K 1
5. Shipboard trials up to 25 mm diameter for grade K 2
Testing is to be carried out during sea trials during up to 21 mm diameter for grade K 3
which the operating times are to be established.
2.2 Testing of materials
2.2.1 The materials for forged, rolled and cast
D. Windlasses parts which are stressed by the pull of the chain when
the cable lifter is disengaged (main shaft, cable lifter,
1. General
brake bands, brake spindles, brake bolts, tension
1.1 Scope straps, stopper bar, chain pulley and axle) are to be
tested in accordance with the Rules for Material,
The Rules contained in Section 14, D. apply to bower Volume V.
anchor windlasses, stern anchor windlasses, combined
anchor and mooring winches and chain stoppers. For In the case of anchor windlasses for chains up to
anchors and chains, see the Rules for Hull 14 mm in diameter an acceptance test certificate issued
Construction, Volume II, Section 18. by the steel producer may be accepted as proof.
1.2 Documents for approval 2.2.2 In the case of hydraulic systems, the mate-
rial used for pipes and pressure vessels is also to be
1.2.1 For each type of anchor windlass and chain tested.
stopper, general and sectional drawings, circuit
diagrams of the hydraulic, electrical and steam systems 3. Design and equipment
and detail drawings of the main shaft, cable lifter,
3.1 Type of drive
brake, stopper bar, and chain pulley and axle are to be
submitted in triplicate for approval. 3.1.1 Windlasses are normally to be driven by an
engine which is independent of other deck machinery.
One copy of a description of the anchor windlass in-
The piping systems of hydraulic and steam-driven
cluding the proposed overload protection and other
windlass engines may be connected to other hydraulic
safety devices is likewise to be submitted.
or steam systems provided that this is permissible for
1.2.2 Where an anchor windlass is to be ap- the latter. The windlasses must, however, be capable
of being operated independently of other connected winches may not be subjected to excessive loads even
systems. when the maximum pull is exerted on the warping
rope.
3.1.2 Manual operation as the main driving
power can be allowed for anchors weighing up to 3.9 Electrical equipment
250 kg.
The electrical equipment is to comply with the Rules
3.1.3 In the case of hydraulic drives with a piping for Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Section 7,E.2.
system connected to other hydraulic systems it is
recommended that a standby pump unit be fitted. 3.10 Hydraulic equipment
For oil level indicators see A.3.12.1. For filters see
3.1.4 The drive of windlasses with two cable
F.3.2.2.
lifters must be capable of hauling up both anchors
simultaneously. 4. Power and design
3.2 Reversing mechanism 4.1 Driving power
Power-driven windlasses must be reversible. On 4.1.1 Depending on the grade of the chain cable,
windlasses for ships with a Range of Service rating up windlasses must be capable of exerting the following
to "K" and on those powered by internal combustion nominal pulls at a mean speed of at least 0,15 m/s:
engines a reversing mechanism may be dispensed
with.
Zl = 37,5 . d2 for Grade K 1
3.3 Overload protection
Z2 = 42,5 . d2 for Grade K 2
For the protection of the mechanical parts in the event 2
Z3 = 47,5 . d for Grade K 3
of the windlass jamming, an overload protection (e.g.
slip coupling, relief valve) is to be fitted to limit the
maximum torque of the drive engine (cf. 4.1.2). The Z [N] pull
setting of the overload protection is to be specified
d [mm] diameter of anchor chain
(e.g. in the operating instructions).
The above pulls are based on an anchor depth of
3.4 Couplings
100 m.
Windlasses are to be fitted with disengageable
For anchor depths greater than 100 m, the windlass
couplings between the cable lifter and the drive shaft.
must be capable of exerting a nominal pull of
In an emergency, hydraulic or electrically operated
couplings must be capable of being disengaged by
hand. Z' = Z + 0,218 d2 (h -100) [N]
3.5 Braking equipment
h [m] Anchor depth
Windlasses must be fitted with cable lifter brakes
which are capable of holding a load in accordance The pull of stern windlasses with an anchor rope can
with 4.2.3 with the cable lifter disengaged. In addition, be determined by reference to the anchor weight and
where the gear mechanism is not of self-locking type, the corresponding diameter of a grade K3 chain cable.
a device (e.g. gearing brake, lowering brake, oil 4.1.2 The nominal output of the power units must
hydraulic brake) is to be fitted to prevent paying out of be such that the conditions specified in 4.1.1 can be
the chain should the power unit fail while the cable met for 30 minutes without interruption. In addition,
lifter is engaged. the power units must be capable of developing a
3.6 Pipes maximum torque equal to a maximum pull of
For the design and dimensions of pipes, valves, Zmax = Z + Z'

fittings, pressure vessels, etc. see Section 8 (Pressure at a reduced speed.
Vessels) and Section 11 (Pipes, Valves, Fittings and
Pumps) A., B., C., D. and U. are to be applied, as 4.1.3 At the maximum torque specified in 4.1.2,
appropriate, to hydraulic piping systems. a short-time overload of up to 20 % is allowed in the
case of internal combustion engines.
3.7 Cable lifters
4.1.4 An additional reduction gear stage may be
Cable lifters shall have at least five snugs. fitted in order to achieve the maximum torque.
3.8 Windlass as warping winch 4.1.5 With manually operated windlasses, steps
Combined windlasses and warping or mooring are to be taken to ensure that the anchor can be hoisted
at a mean speed of 0,033 m/s with the pull specified in A.5.2 is applicable as appropriate.
4.1.1. This is to be achieved without exceeding a
manual force of 150 N applied to a crank radius of 5.3 Final inspection and operational testing
about 350 mm with the hand crank turned at about 5.3.1 Following manufacture, windlasses are re-
30 rpm. quired to undergo final inspection and operational
4.2 Design of transmission elements and testing at the maximum pull. The hauling-in speed is
chain stoppers to be verified with continuous application of the
nominal pull. During the tests, particular attention is to
4.2.1 The basic for the design of the load- be given to the testing and, where necessary, setting of
transmitting components of windlasses and chain braking and safety equipment.
stoppers are the anchors and chain cables specified in
the Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II, In the case of anchor windlass for chain > 14 mm in
Section 18. diameter this test is to be performed in the presence of
the BKI Surveyor.
4.2.2 The cable lifter brake is to be so designed
that the anchor and chain can be safely stopped while In the case of anchor for chain 14 mm diameter, the
paying out the chain cable. manufacturers acceptance test certificate will be
accepted.
4.2.3 The dimensional design of those parts of
5.3.2 Where the manufacturing works does not
the windlass which are subjected to the chain pull
have adequate facilities, the aforementioned tests
when the cable lifter is disengaged (cable lifter, main
including the adjustment of the overload protection
shaft, braking equipment, bedframe and deck
can be carried out on board ship. In these cases,
fastening) is to be based on a theoretical pull equal to
80 % of the nominal breaking load specified in the functional testing in the manufacturer's works is to be
Rules for Materials, Volume V, for the chain in performed under no-load conditions.
question. The design of the main shaft is to take 6. Shipboard trials
account of the braking forces, and the cable lifter
brake shall not slip when subjected to this load. The anchor equipment is to be tested during sea trials.
4.2.4 The theoretical pull may be reduced to 45 As a minimum requirement, this test is required to
% of the nominal breaking load for the chain provided demonstrate that the conditions specified in 3.1.4 and
that a chain stopper approved by the Society is also 4.2.2 can be fulfilled.
fitted.
4.2.5 The design of all other windlass
components is to be based upon a force acting on the
cable lifter pitch circle and equal to twice the E. Winches
maximum pull specified in 4.1.2.
4.2.6 At the theoretical pull specified in 4.2.3 and 1. Towing winches
4.2.4, the force exerted on the brake handwheel shall The design and testing of towing winches are to
not exceed 500 N. comply with the most recent edition of the
4.2.7 The dimensional design of chain stoppers "Regulations for the Construction and Testing of
is to be based on a theoretical pull equal to 80 % of the Towing Gears".
nominal breaking load of the chain. 2. Winches for cargo handling gear and
4.2.8 The total stresses applied to components other lifting equipment
must be below the minimum yield point of the The design and testing of these winches are to comply
materials used. with the most recent edition of the "Regulations for
4.2.9 The foundations and pedestals of the Construction and Survey of Cargo Handling
windlasses and chain stoppers are governed by the Appliances and other Lifting Appliances".
Rules for Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 10, 3. Lifeboat winches
B.5 .
The design and testing of life boat winches are to
5. Tests in the manufacturer's works comply with the most recent edition of the
5.1 Testing of driving engines "Regulations for Life Saving - Launching
Appliances".
A.5.1 is applicable as appropriate.
4. Winches for special equipment
5.2 Pressure and tightness tests
The "Regulations for the Construction and Survey of
Cargo Handling Appliances and other Lifting p . Di > 20 000

Appliances" are to be applied, as appropriate, to
winches for special equipment such as ramps, hoisting p [bar] maximum allowable
gear and hatch covers. working pressure
Di [mm] inside diameter of tube
c) For testing the materials of hydraulic
accumulators, see Section 8, B.
F. Hydraulic Systems
Testing of materials by the Society may be dispensed
1. General with in the case of cylinders for secondary
applications provided that evidence in the form of a
1.1 Scope works test certificate (e.g. to DIN 50 049 - 2.3) or
The Rules contained in Section 14, F. apply to hy- other equivalent standard is supplied.
draulic systems used, for example, to operate hatch 3. Hydraulic operating equipment for
covers, closing appliances in the ship's shell and hatch covers
bulkheads, and hoists. The Rules are to be applied in
analogous manner to the ship's other hydraulic systems 3.1 Design and construction
except where covered by the Rules of Section 11.
3.1.1 Hydraulic operating equipment for hatch
1.2 Documents for approval covers may be served either by one common power
station for all hatch covers or by several power sta-
The diagram of the hydraulic system together with
tions individually assigned to a single hatch cover.
drawings of the cylinders containing all the data
Where a common power station is used, at least two
necessary for assessing the system, e.g. operating data,
pump units are to be fitted. Where the systems are
descriptions, materials used etc., are to submitted in
supplied individually, change-over valves or fittings
triplicate for approval.
are required so that operation can be maintained
1.3 Dimensional design should one pump unit fail.
For the design of pressure vessels, see Section 8; for 3.1.2 Movement of hatch covers may not be ini-
the dimensions of pipes and hose assemblies, see tiated merely by the starting of the pumps. Special
Section 11. control stations are to be provided for controlling the
opening and closing of hatchcovers. The controls are
to be so designed that, as soon as they are released,
2. Materials
movement of the hatch covers stops immediately.
The hatches should normally be visible from the
2.1.1 Components fulfilling a major function in control stations. Should this, in exceptional cases, be
the power transmission system shall normally be made impossible, opening and closing of the hatches is to be
of steel or cast steel in accordance with the Rules for signalled by an audible alarm. In addition, the control
Materials, Volume V. The use of other materials is stations must then be equipped with indicators for
subject to special agreement with the Society. monitoring the movement of the hatch covers.
Cylinders are preferably to be made of steel, cast, steel At the control stations, the controls governing the
or nodular cast iron (with a predominantly ferritic opening and closing operations are to be appropriately
matrix). marked.
2.1.2 Pipes are to be made of seamless or longi- 3.1.3 Suitable equipment must be fitted in, or
tudinally welded steel tubes. immediately adjacent to, each power unit (cylinder or
similar) used to operate hatch covers to enable the
2.1.3 The pressure-loaded walls of valves, fit- hatches to be closed slowly in the event of a power
tings, pumps, motors etc. are subject to the require- failure, e.g. due to a pipe rupture.
ments of Section 11.B.
3.2 Pipes
2.2 Testing of materials
3.2.1 Pipes are to be installed and secured in such
The following components are to be tested in accor- a way as to protect them from damage while enabling
dance with the Rules for Materials, Volume V: them to be properly maintained from outside.
a) Pressure pipes Pipes may be led through tanks in pipe tunnels only.
b) Cylinders, where the product of the The laying of such pipes through cargo spaces is to be
pressure times the diameter: restricted to the essential minimum. The piping system
is to be fitted with relief valves to limit the pressure to
the maximum allowable working pressure. the appliance must stop immediately.
3.2.2 The piping system is to be fitted with filters 4.2.3 Closing appliances in the ship's shell should
for cleaning the hydraulic fluid. normally be visible from the control stations. If the
movement cannot be observed, audible alarms are to
Equipment is to be provided to enable the hydraulic be fitted. In addition, the control stations are then to be
system to be vented. equipped with indicators enabling the execution of the
3.2.3 The accumulator space of the hydraulic ac- movement to be monitored.
cumulator must have permanent access to the relief 4.2.4 Closing appliances in the ship's shell are to
valve of the connected system. The gas chamber of the be fitted with devices which prevent them from
accumulator may be filled only with inert gases. Gas moving into their end positions at excessive speed.
and operating medium are to be separated by Such devices are not to cause the power unit to be
accumulator bags, diaphragms or similar. switched off.
3.2.4 Connection between the hydraulic system As far as is required, mechanical means must be
used for hatch cover operation and other hydraulic provided for locking closing appliances in the open
systems is permitted only with the consent of the So- position.
ciety.
4.2.5 Every power unit driving horizontally
3.2.5 For oil level indicators, see A.3.12.1. hinged or vertically operated closing appliances is to
3.2.6 The hydraulic fluids must be suitable for be fitted with throttle valves or similar devices to
the intended ambient and service temperature. prevent sudden dropping of the closing appliance.
3.3 Hose assemblies 4.2.6 It is recommended that the driving power be

shared between at least two mutually independent
The construction of hose assemblies shall conform to pump sets.
Section 11, U. The requirement that hose assemblies
should be of flame-resistant construction may be set 4.3 Pipes, hose assemblies
aside for hose lines in spaces not subject to a fire 3.2 and 3.3 are to be applied in analogous manner to
hazard and in systems not important to the safety of the pipes and hose lines of hydraulically operated
the ship. closing appliances in the ship's shell.
3.4 Emergency operation 5. Bulkhead closures
It is recommended that devices be fitted which are 5.1 General
independent of the main system and which enable
hatch covers to be opened and closed in the event of 5.1.1 Scope
failure of the main system. Such devices may, for
example, take the form of loose rings enabling hatch 5.1.1.1 The following rules apply to the power
covers to be moved by cargo winches, warping equipment of hydraulically-operated watertight
winches etc. bulkhead doors on passenger and cargo ships.
4. Hydraulically operated closing 5.1.1.2 For details of the number, design and
appliances in the ship's shell arrangement of the watertight doors, see the Rules for
Hull Construction, Volume II, Section 11, 26 and 28..
4.1 Scope
The SOLAS regulations, Chapter II-1, Regulation 15,
The following Rules apply to the power equipment of 16and 25.9 are not affected by these provisions.
hydraulically operated closing appliances in the ship's
shell such as shell and landing doors which are not 5.1.2 Design
normally operated while at sea. For the design and 5.1.2.1 Bulkhead doors shall be power-driven
arrangement of the closures, see the Rules for Hull sliding doors moving horizontally. Other designs
Construction, Volume II, Section 6, G. require the approval of BKI and the provision of
4.2 Design and construction additional safety measures where necessary.
4.2.1 The movement of shell doors etc. may not 5.1.2.2 Powered drive systems for bulkhead doors
be initiated merely by the starting of the pumps at the must not be connected to other drive systems.
power station. 5.1.3 Piping
4.2.2 Local control, inaccessible to unauthorized 5.1.3.1 Wherever applicable, the pipes in hydraulic
persons, is to be provided for every closing appliance bulkhead closing systems are governed by the Rules in
in the ship's shell. As soon as the controls (push- 3.2, with the restriction that the use of flexible hoses
buttons, levers or similar) are released, movement of
is not permitted.
5.1.5 Manual control
5.1.3.2 The hydraulic system for the bulkhead
closing systems must not be connected to other Each door must have a manual control system which
hydraulic systems. is independent of the power drive.
5.1.4 Drive unit 5.1.6 Indicators
5.1.4.1 A selector switch with the switch positions Visual indicators to show whether each bulkhead door
"local control" and "close all doors" is to be provided is fully open or closed are to be installed at the central
at the central control station on the bridge. control station on the bridge.
Under normal conditions this switch should be set to 5.1.7 Electrical equipment
"local control". For details of electrical equipment, see the Rules for
In the "local control" position, the doors may be Electrical Installations, Volume IV, Sections 9, D. and
locally opened and closed without automatic closure. 13, D.
In the "close doors" position, all doors are closed 5.2 Passenger vessels
automatically. They may be reopened by means of the In addition to the Rules stated in 5.1, the following
local control device but must close again automatically regulations are to be taken into consideration in the
as soon as the local door controls are released. case of passenger vessels:
It shall not be possible to open the closed doors from
the bridge. 5.2.1 Design and location
5.1.4.2 Closed or open bulkhead doors shall not be 5.2.1.1 Bulkhead doors together with the power
set in motion automatically in the event of a power plants and including the piping, electric cables and
failure. control instruments must have a minimum distance of
0,2 x B from the perpendiculars which interset the hull
5.1.4.3 The control system is to be designed in such
contour line when the ship is at load draught
a way that an individual fault inside the control
(B = beam).
system, including the piping, does not have any
adverse effect on the operation of other bulkhead 5.2.1.2 The bulkhead doors must be capable of
doors. being closed securely using the power drive as well as
using the manual control even when the ship has a
5.1.4.4 The controls for the power drive are to be
permanent heel of 15.
located at least 1,6 m above the floor on both sides of
the bulkhead close to the door. The controls are to be 5.2.1.3 The force required to close a door is to be
installed in such a way that a person passing through calculated based on a static water pressure of at least
the door is able to hold both controls in the open 1 m above the door coaming.
position.
5.2.1.4 All power driven doors must be capable of
The controls must return to their original position being closed simultaneously from the bridge with the
automatically when released. ship upright in no more than 60 seconds.
5.1.4.5 The direction of movement of the controls 5.2.1.5 The closing speed of each individual door
is to be clearly marked and must be the same as the must have a uniform rate. Their closing time with
direction of movement of the door. power operation and with the ship upright may be no
more than 40 seconds and no less than 20 seconds
5.1.4.6 In the event that an individual element fails
from the start of the motion with the door completely
inside the control system for the power drive,
open until it is closed.
including the piping but excluding the closing
cylinders on the door or similar components, the 5.2.1.6 Power operated bulkhead closing systems
operational ability of the manually-operated control may be fitted as an option with a central hydraulic
system must not be impaired. drive for all doors or with mutually independent
hydraulic or electric drives for each individual door.
5.1.4.7 The movement of the power driven
bulkhead doors may not be initiated simply by 5.2.2 Central hydraulic system - power drives
switching on the drive units but only by actuating
additional devices. 5.2.2.1 Two mutually independent power pump
units are to be installed if possible above the bulkhead
5.1.4.8 The control and monitoring equipment for or freeboard deck and outside the machinery spaces.
the drive units is to be housed in the central control
station on the bridge. 5.2.2.2 Each pump unit must be capable of closing
all connected bulkhead doors simultaneously. more than 10 seconds - before the door start moving
and must continue throughout the door movement.
5.2.2.3 The hydraulic system must incorporate
accumulators with sufficient capacity to operate all 5.2.7.2 When the door is closed by remote control
connected doors three times, i.e. close, open and using the manual control above the bulkhead or
reclose, at the minimum permitted accumulator freeboard deck, it is sufficient for the alarm to sound
pressure. only while the door is actually moving.
5.2.3 Individual hydraulic drive 5.2.7.3 The installation of an additional,
intermittent visual alarm may be required in the
5.2.3.1 An independent power pump unit is to be passenger areas and in areas where there is a high
fitted to each door for opening and closing the door. level of background noise
5.2.3.2 An accumulator must also be provided with .
5.2.7.4 With a central hydraulic system, the
sufficient capacity to operate the door three times, i.e. minimum permitted oil level in the service tank is to
close, open and reclose, at the minimum permitted be signalled by means of an independent audible and
accumulator pressure. visual alarm at the central control station on the
bridge.
5.2.4 Individual electric drive
5.2.7.5 The alarm described in 5.2.7.4 is also to be
5.2.4.1 An independent electric drive unit is to be provided to signal the minimum permitted accumulator
fitted to each door for opening and closing the door. pressure of the central hydraulic system.
5.2.4.2 In the event of a failure of either the main 5.2.7.6 A decentralized hydraulic system which has
power supply or the emergency power supply, the individual drive units on each door, the minimum
drive unit must still be capable of operating the door permitted accumulator pressure is to be signalled by
three times, i.e. close, open and reclose. means of a group alarm at the central control station
on the bridge.
5.2.5 Manual control Visual indicators are also to be fitted at the operating
5.2.5.1 Manual control must be capable of being stations for each individual door.
operated at the door from both sides of the bulkhead 5.3 Cargo vessels
as well as from an easily accessible control station
located above the bulkhead or freeboard decks and In addition to the specifications laid down in 5.1 the
outside the machinery space. following Rules are to be observed for cargo vessels:
5.3.1 Manual control
5.2.5.2 The controls at the door must allow the
door to be opened and closed. 5.3.1.1 The manual control must be capable of
being operated at the door from both sides of the
5.2.5.3 The control above the deck must allow the bulkhead.
door to be closed.
5.3.1.2 The controls must allow the door to be
5.2.5.4 The fully open door must be capable of opened and closed.
being closed using manual control within 90 seconds
with the ship upright. 5.3.2 Alarms
Whilst all the doors are being closed from the bridge,
5.2.5.5 A means of communication is to be
an audible alarm must be sounded all the time they are
provided between the control stations for remote
in motion.
manual drive above the bulkhead of freeboard decks
and the central control station on the bridge. 6. Hoists
6.1 Definition
5.2.6 Indicators
For the purposes of these Rules, hoists include
The indicators described in 5.1.6 are to be installed at hydraulically operated appliances such as wheelhouse
the operating stations for manual control above the hoists, lifts and similar equipment.
bulkhead or freeboard deck for each door.
6.2 Design and construction
5.2.7 Alarms 6.2.1 Hoists may be supplied either by a com-
bined power station or individually by several power
5.2.7.1 While all the doors are being closed from
stations.
the bridge, an audible alarm must sound at each door.
This alarm must commence at least 5 seconds - but not In the case of a combined power supply and hydraulic
drives whose piping system is connected to other 1.1 Scope

hydraulic systems, a second pump unit is to be fitted.
The rules of Section 14, G. apply to the pneumatic
6.2.2 The movement of hoists shall not be capa- control systems of fire doors. (These Rules meet the
ble of being initiated merely by starting the pumps. requirements for the control systems of fire doors laid
The movement of hoists is to be controlled from spe- down in Chapter II-2, Regulation 30 of the Inter-
cial operating stations. The controls are to be so ar- national Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea,
ranged that, as soon as they are released, the move- 1974). The following Rules may be applied as appro-
ment of the hoist ceases immediately. priate to other pneumatic systems where these are not
governed by the Rules of Section 11.
6.2.3 Local controls, inaccessible to unauthorized
persons, are to be fitted. The movement of hoists 1.2 Documents for approval
should normally be visible from the operating stations.
The diagram of the pneumatic system together with
If the movement cannot be observed, audible and/or
drawings of the cylinders containing all the data ne-
visual warning devices are to be fitted. In addition, the
cessary for assessing the system, e.g. operating data,
operating stations are then to be equipped with
descriptions, materials used etc., are to be submitted in
indicators for monitoring the movement of the hoist.
triplicate for approval.
6.2.4 Devices are to be fitted which prevent the
1.3 Dimensional design
hoist from reaching its end position at excessive
speed. These devices are not to cause the power unit For the design of pressure vessels, see Section 8; for
to be switched off. As far as is necessary, mechanical the dimensions of pipes, see Section 11.
means must be provided for locking the hoist in its end
positions. 2. Materials
6.2.5 3.1.3 is to be applied in analogous manner 2.1 Approved materials

to those devices which, if the power unit fails or a pipe Cylinders are preferably to be made of stainless steel.
ruptures, ensure that the hoist is slowly lowered.
Stainless steel is to be used for pipes in the area of the
6.3 Pipes, hose assemblies door. Only corrosion-resistant materials are to be used
3.2 and 3.3 apply in analogous manner to the pipes for the other pipes.
and hose lines of hydraulically operated hoists. The use of hose lines is not permitted.
The quality properties of all components important to
7. Tests in the manufacturer's works
the operation and safety of the system must conform
7.1 Testing of power units to recognized rules and standards.
The power units are required to undergo testing on a 2.2 Materials testing
test bed. Factory test certificates for this testing are to
Suitable proof of the quality properties of the materials
be presented at the final inspection of the hydraulic
used is to be furnished. This proof may take the form
system.
of a BKI material test certificate or a material
certificate issued by the producer.
7.2 Pressure and tightness tests
BKIs Surveyor reserves the right to order
A.5.2 is applicable in analogous manner. supplementary tests of his own to be carried out where
he considers that the circumstances justify this.
8. Shipboard trials See Section 8, B. for details on the materials testing of
After installation, the equipment is to undergo an compressed air accumulators.
operational test. 3. Design
The operational test of watertight doors is to include 3.1 Each door must be capable of being opened
the emergency operating system and determination of and closed by a single person from both sides of the
the closing times. bulkhead.
3.2 Fire doors must be capable of closing
automatically even against a permanent heeling angle
of the ship of 3,5.
G. Pneumatic Systems
3.3 The closing time of hinged doors, with the
1. General ship upright, may be no more than 40 seconds and no
less than 10 seconds from the start of the movement of
the door when fully open to its closed position for Accumulator systems are to be located in the
each individual door. immediate vicinity of the door being sufficient to
allow their supply of air being sufficient to allow the
The closing speed of sliding doors must be steady and, door to be completely opened and closed at least ten
with the ship upright, may be no more than 0,2 m/s more times, with the ship upright, using the local
and no less than 0,1 m/s. controls.
Measures must be taken to ensure that any persons in 3.10 Measures are to be taken to ensure that the
the door areas are protected from any excessive
door can still be operated by hand in the event of
danger. failure of the energy supply.
3.4 All doors must be capable of being closed
3.11 Should the central energy supply fail in the
from the central control station either jointly or in
local control area of a door, the capability of the other
groups. It must also be possible to initiate closure at
doors to function may not be adversely affected.
each individual door. The closing switch is to take the
form of a locking switch. 3.12 Doors which are closed from the central
control station are to be fitted with an audible alarm.
3.5 Visual indicators are to be installed at the Once the door close command has been given this
central control station to show that all fire doors are alarm must start at least 5 seconds, but not more than
10 seconds before the door starts to move and
fully closed. continue sounding until the door is completely closed.
3.6 Power driven doors leading from "special 3.13 Fire doors are to be fitted with safety strips
areas" (e.g. car decks, railway decks) in accordance such that a closing door reopens as soon as contact is
with Chapter II-2, Regulation 3.18 of the "1974 made with them. Following contact with the safety
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea" strip, the opening travel of the door shall be no more
or from comparable spaces to control stations, than 1 m.
stairwells and also to accommodation and service 3.14 Local door controls, including all
spaces and which are closed when the ship is at sea do components must be accessible for maintenance and
not need to be equipped with indicators as described adjusment.
in 3.5 and alarms as described in 3.12. 3.15 The control system must be of approved
design. Their capability to operate in the event of fire
3.7 Controls for the pneumatic system are to be must be proven in accordance with the "Rules relating
installed next to each door on both sides of the to the fire testing procedures for pneumatic fire door
bulkhead and by their operation a door which has been controls".
closed from the central control station can be
The control system must conform to the following
reopened. The controls must return to their original
minimum requirements.
position when released, thereby causing the door to
close again. 3.15.1 The door must still be capable of being
operated safely for 60 minutes at a minimum ambient
In an emergency it must be possible to use the controls
temperature of 200 C by means of the central energy
to interrupt immediately the opening of the door and
supply.
bring about its immediate closure.
3.15.2 The central energy supply for the other
A combination of the controls with the door handle
may be permitted. doors not affected by fire may not be impaired.
The controls are to be designed in such a way that an 3.15.3 In ambient temperatures in excess of 200
open door can be closed locally. In addition, each door C the central energy supply must be shut off
must be capable of being locked locally in such a way automatically and the local control system must be de-
that it can no longer be opened by remote control. energized. The residual energy must still be sufficient
to close an open door completely during this process.
3.8 The control unit at the door is to be
equipped with a device which will vent the pneumatic The shut-off device must be capable of shutting off the
system or cut off the electric energy of the door energy supply for one hour with a temperature
control system, simultaneously shutting off the main variation corresponding to the standardized time-
supply line and thereby allowing emergency operation temperature curve given in Section II-2, Regulation 3
by hand. of the "1974 International Convention for the Safety
of Life at Sea".
3.9 The door must close automatically should
the central power supply fail. The doors may not re- 3.16 The pneumatic system is to be protected
open automatically when the central supply is restored. against overpressure.
3.17 Drainage and venting facilities are to be 1. General

provided.
1.1 Scope
3.18 Air filtering and drying facilities are to be
provided. The Rules contained in Section 14, H. apply to
stabilizer units necessary to the operation and safety
3.19 For details of the electrical equipment cf. the ship.
the Rules for Electrical Installations, Volume IV,
Section 13, D. 1.2 Documents for approval
4. Tests in the manufacturers works Assembly and general drawings together with
diagrams of the hydraulic and electrical equipment
The complete control system is to be subjected to a contain all the data necessary for checking are to be
design approval test to demonstrate that operational submitted in triplicate for approval.
capability and design meet the requirements as laid
down in 2. and 3. 2. Design and construction
5. Shipboard trials A.2.1.3 and A.2.1.4 are applicable in analogous

manner to the pipe connections of hydraulic drive
After installation, the systems are to be subjected to an units.
operating test which also includes emergency
operation and the verification of closing times. 3. Shipboard trials
The operational efficiency of the stabilizer equipment
is to be demonstrated during the sea trials.
H. Stabilizers
Section 15 - Special Rules for Tankers 15-1
S e c t i o n 15
Special Rules for Tankers
A. General submitted to the Society in triplicate1) for approval.

1. Scope 3.2 For ships for the carriage of flammable liquids
and chemicals:
1.1 These Rules apply to tankers for the carriage
of flammable, toxic, corrosive or otherwise hazardous Cargo piping system including the location of
liquids. International and national regulations remain cargo pumps and their driving machinery
unaffected.
Gastight shaft penetrations for pumps and
1.2 For the purposes of these Rules, tankers are: fans
a) Ships for the carriage of liquids in tanks Cargo tan k vent system with
which form part of the hull, and pressure-vacuum relief valve including flame
arrectors and cargo tank vapour return and
b) Ships with fixed tanks independent of the collecting pipes
hull and used for the carriage of liquids.
Cargo tank gauging/sounding devices, level/
1.3 In addition to the general Rules for tankers in overfill alarms and temperature indicating
subsection B: equipment
a) Tankers for the carriage of oil cargoes are Bilge and ballast water lines for the cargo
subject to the provisions of subsection C. area
b) Tankers for carriage of hazardous chemicals Ventilation equipment for spaces in the cargo
in bulk are subject to the provisions of area
Seagoing Ships, Rules for Ships Carrying
Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk, Volume X. Heating and steaming-out lines for cargo
tanks
c) Tankers for the carriage of liquified gases in
bulk are subject to the provisions of Fire fighting/extinguishing equipment for the
Seagoing Ships, Rules for Ships Carrying cargo area
Liquefied Gases in Bulk, Volume IX.
Fixed cargo tank cleaning system
2. Definitions
Remote-controlled valves system including
For the purposes of this Section, the cargo area in- actuating equipment
cludes cargo tanks, hold spaces for independent cargo
Details of the liquid cargoes to be carried
tanks, tanks and spaces adjacent to cargo tanks, cof-
ferdams, cargo pump rooms and the area above these Details of the materials coming into contact
spaces. with the cargoes or their vapours
For the purposes of this Section, separate piping and Pressure drop calculation of the vent system
venting systems are those which can, when necessary, based on the maximum loading/unloading
be isolated from other piping systems by removing rates
spool pieces or valves and blanking the pipe ends.
Gas freeing arrangements for cargo and
For the purposes of this Section, independent piping ballast tanks and cofferdams
and venting systems are those for which no means for
the connection to other systems are provided. Emergency release system for bow loading
piping and SPM arrangements
Inert gas plant and system for cargo tanks,
3.1 According to the type of ship, at least the inerting of ballast tanks
documents (schematic plans, detail/arrangement
drawings) specified in 3.2 together with all the Mechanically driven fans in the cargo area
information necessary for their assessment are to be
1
)
15 - 2 Section 15 - Special Rules for Tankers
Safety equipment in pump rooms, Where the max. discharge pressure of centrifugal
temperature monitoring of cargo pump pumps does not exceed the design pressure of the cargo
bearings/housing etc. line system, relief valves may be dispensed with if
temperature sensors are fitted in the pump housing
Gas detection system in pump room. which stop the pump or activate an alarm in the event
4. References to further Rules of overheating.
The Biro Klasifikasi Indonesia Rules for the 1.2.2 It must be possible to control the capacity of
Classification and Construction of Seagoing Steel the cargo pumps both from the pump room and from a
Ships. suitable location outside this room. Means are to be
provided for stopping cargo pumps from a position
4.1 For the ship's hull: Rules for Hull above the tank deck.
Construction, Volume II, Section 24, 25, 26.
1.2.3 At all pump operating positions and cargo
4.2 For pipelines, pumps, valves and fittings: handling positions on deck, pressure gauges for mon-
Rules for Machinery Installation, Volume III, Section itoring pump pressures are to be fitted. The maximum
11. permissible working pressure is to be indicated by a red
4.3 For fire extinguishing and fire protection: mark on the scale.
Rules for Machinery Installation, Volume III, Section 1.2.4 The drain pipes of steam-driven pumps and
12. steam lines must terminate at a sufficient height above
4.4 For electrical equipment: Rules for Electrical the bilge bottom to prevent the ingress of cargo
Installation, Volume IV, Section 13. residues.
4.5 Attention is also drawn to compliance with 1.3 Drive

the provisions of the International Convention for the
Prevention of Pollution from Ships of 1973 and of the 1.3.1 Drive motors are to be installed outside the
relevant Protocol of 1978 (MARPOL 73/78). cargo area. Exceptions are steam-driven machines
where the steam temperature does not exceed 220 C.
1.3.2 Hydraulic cargo pump driving machinery (e.g.
for submerged pumps) may be installed inside the
cargo area.
B. General Rules for Tankers
1.3.3 For electric motors used to drive cargo pumps
1. Cargo pumps see Volume IV, Rules for Electrical Installations,
Section 13.
1.1 Location
1.1.1 Cargo pumps are to be located on deck, in the 2. Cargo Line system
cargo tanks or in special pump rooms separated from
other ship's spaces by gastight decks and bulkheads. 2.1 Line installation
Pump rooms may be accessible only from the cargo
2.1.1 Cargo line systems must be permanently in-
area and may not be connected to engine rooms or
stalled and completely separated from other piping
spaces which contain sources of ignition.
systems. In general they may not extend beyond the
1.1.2 Penetrations of pump room bulkheads by cargo area. For bow and stern cargo lines see C.5, and
shafts are to be fitted with gastight seals. Provision Rules for Ships Dangerous Chemical in Bulk, Volume
must be made for lubricating the seals from outside the X, Section 3.7.
pump room.
Overheating of the seals and the generation of sparks 2.1.2 Cargo lines are to be so installed that any
are to be avoided by appropriate design and the choice remaining cargo can be drained into the cargo tanks.
of suitable materials. Filling pipes for cargo tanks are to extend down to the
bottom of the tank.
Where steel bellows are used in gastight bulkhead
penetrations, they are to be subjected to a pressure test
2.1.3 Expansion bends, expansion bellows and
at 5 bar prior to fitting.
other approved expansion joints are to be fitted as
1.2 Equipment and operation necessary.
1.2.1 Cargo pumps are to be protected against

overpressure by means of relief valves discharging 2.1.4 Seawater inlets must be separated from cargo
into the suction line of the pump. lines by two stop valves, one of which is to be locked
in the closed position.
2.1.5 Seawater inlets and outlets (sea chest) for 3.3 Condensate return
ballast and cargo systems are to be arranged
The condensate from the heating system is to be
separately.
returned to the feedwater system via observation tanks.
2.2 Design of cargo lines
Condensate observation tanks are to be arranged and
2.2.1 For the design of cargo lines see Section 11, equipped such that cargo residues in the condensate
C. Minimum wall thickness to be in accordance with will not constitute a hazard in engine room or other gas
Table 11.5, group N. Possible delivery heads ofshore safe spaces. Vent pipes must be fitted with flame
based pumps and gravity tanks shall be taken into arrester complying with 6 and shall be led to the open
account. deck in a safe position.
2.2.2 Welding is the preferred method of 3.4 Tank heating with special heat-transfer
connecting cargo lines. Cargo oil pipes shall not pass media
through ballast tanks. Exemptions for short lengths of
3.4.1 Thermal oil systems are subject to the
pipe may be approved by BKI on condition that para.
requirements in Section 7, Part II and 11, P.
4.3.2 is applied analogously.
3.4.2 A secondary circuit system is to be provided
2.3 Valves, fittings and equipment
which is entirely located in the cargo area.
2.3.1 Hose connections are to be made of cast steel
A single-circuit system may be approved if:
or other ductile materials and are to be fitted with
shutoff valves and blind flanges. - the expansion vessel mentioned in Section 7,
Part II, 7.2 is so arranged that at the minimum
2.3.2 Extention rods for stop valves inside cargo
liquid level in the expansion vessel, the
tanks are to be fitted with gastight deck penetrations
pressure in the thermal oil system with the
and open/closed indicators. All other cargo stop valves
thermal fluid circulating pump inoperative is
are to be so designed as to indicate whether they are
at least 0.3 bar higher than the static pressure
open or closed.
of the cargo
2.3.3 Emergency operating mechanisms are to be
- all shutoff valves between the cargo tanks and
provided for stop valves which are actuated
the expansion vessel can be locked in the
hydraulically or pneumatically. Hand-operated pumps
open position, and
which are connected to the hydraulic system in such a
way that they can be isolated may be regarded as - a means of detecting flammable gases in the
emergency operating mechanisms. expansion vessel is provided. The use of a
portable unit may be approved.
An emergency operating mechanism controlled from
the deck can be dispensed with provided that the cargo 3.5 Steaming out lines
tank can be emptied by another line or the shutoff
valve is located in the adjacent tank. Steam lines for steaming out cargo tanks and cargo
lines are to be fitted with screw-down non-return
2.3.4 At the positions for monitoring the cargo valves.
loading and discharging operations, the cargo lines are
to be fitted with pressure gauges with a red mark 3.6 Tank heating systems on chemical tankers
denoting the maximum permissible working pressure. These are additionally subject to the requirements of
2.3.5 Provision must be made for the safe draining, Seagoing Ships, Rules for Ships Carrying Dangerous
gas-freeing and cleaning of the cargo line system. Chemicals in Bulk, Volume X, Section 7.
3. Tank heating and steaming out lines 4. Bilge and ballast systems
3.1 Tank heating 4.1 Calculation of the bilge pipe diameter
This is subject to the appropriate Rules concerning the 4.1.1 Bilge systems for the cargo area are to be
heating of fuels, Section 10, B.5. separated from those of other areas.
3.2 Valves and fittings for the tank heating Bilge systems for the cargo area are to be located in the
system cargo area.
Steam lines to the individual heating coils of the cargo Bilge systems for machinery spaces are subject to
tanks are to be fitted with screw-down nonreturn Section 11, N.2.3.
valves. Means of testing the condensate for ingress of 4.1.2 For spaces in the cargo area of combination
oil are to be fitted before the stop valves in the heating carriers the bilge system is to be designed in accor-
coil outlets., dance with Section 11, N.2.1.2.
4.1.3 For spaces for independent tanks on tankers bilge system. Where the bilge line can be pressurized
according to A.1.2. b) the diameters of the main and from the cargo system, an additional non-return valve
branch bilge lines are calculated as follows: is to be fitted.
4.2.3 Means must be provided for pumping the
dH 1,68 (B H) l2 (b h) lT2 25 [mm] bilges when special circumstances render the pump
room inaccessible. The equipment necessary for this is
to be capable of being operated from outside the pump
dZ 2,15 (B H) l (b h) lT 25 [mm] room or from the pump room casing above the tank
deck (freeboard deck).
where
4.3 Ballast systems in the cargo area
dH [mm] Inside diameter of main bilge line
4.3.1 Means for ballasting cargo tanks or permanent
dz [mm] Inside diameter of branch bilge line ballast tanks within the cargo area must be located in
B [m] Breadth of ship the cargo area and must be independent of piping
systems forward and aft of the cofferdams. On oil
H [m] Moulded depth of ship tankers an emergency discharge connection through a
spool piece to cargo pump may be provided. A non-
l2 [m] Total length of cargo area
return device in the ballast system shall be provided to
l [m] Length of watertight compartment prevent the backflow of cargo into ballast tanks. The
spool piece together with a warning notice shall be
b [m] Maximum breadth of cargo tanks mounted in a conspicuous location in pump room.
h [m] Maximum depth of cargo tanks 4.3.2 Ballast water pipes shall not pass through
lT2 [m] Total length of all cargo tanks cargo oil tanks. Exemptions for short length of pipe
may be approved by BKI on condition that the
lT [m] Length of tanks in the watertight following is complied with :
compartment.
a) Minimum wall thicknesses
The capacity of each bilge pump is to be calculated
according to Section 11, N.3.1. At least two bilge up to DN 50 6,3 mm
pumps are to be provided. DN 100 8,6 mm
4.1.4 When separate bilge pumps, e.g. ejectors are DN 125 9,5 mm
provided for compartments with watertight bulkheads
the pump capacity is to be evaluated as specified in DN 150 11,0 mm
4.1.3 and is to be divided according the length of the
DN 200 and over 12,5 mm
individual compartments. For each compartment two
bilge pumps are to be fitted of a capacity of not less b) Only completely welded pipes or equivalent
than 5 m3/h each. are permitted
c) Where cargoes other than oil products are
4.1.5 Spaces for independent tanks are to be pro- carried, relaxation from these Rules may be
vided with sounding arrangements. approved BKI.
When ballast or cooling water lines are fitted in spaces 4.3.3 Ballast tank sounding and air pipes routed
for independent tanks bilge level alarms are to be through cargo oil tanks are subject to para. 4.3.2
provided. analogously.
4.2 Bilge pumping of cargo pump rooms
and cofferdams in the cargo area 5. Ventilation and gas-freeing
4.2.1 Bilge pumping equipment is to be located in 5.1 Ventilation of cargo and ballast pump
the cargo area to serve the cargo pump rooms and rooms in the cargo area
cofferdams. A cargo pump may also be used as a bilge
pump. On oil tankers used exclusively for the carriage 5.1.1 Pump rooms are to be ventilated by
of flammable liquids with flash points above 60 C, mechanically driven fans of the extraction type. Fresh
cargo pump rooms and cofferdams may be connected air is to be induced into the pump room from above.
to the engine room bilge system. These ventilation system shall not be connected to
those of other spaces.
4.2.2 Where a cargo pump is used as bilge pump,
measures are to be taken, e.g. by fitting screw-down 5.1.2 The exhaust duct is to be so installed that its
non-return valves, to ensure that cargo cannot enter the suction opening is close to the bottom of the pump
room. An emergency suction opening is to be located 5.3.1 Ventilation duct inlet and outlets are to be
about 2 m above the pump room floor. This opening is fitted with protective screens with a mesh size not
to be fitted with a means of closing which can also be exceeding 13 mm.
operated from the main deck.
5.3.2 Overheating of the mechanical components of
The emergency opening is to be of sufficient size to fans and the creation of sparks is to be avoided by
enable at least 3/4 of the necessary volume of exhaust appropriate design and by the choice of suitable ma-
air to be extracted with the bottom opening closed. terials. The safety clearance between the fan housing
and the impeller shall not be less than 1/10 of the inner
Further requirements see C.3 Oil Tanker or Volume X,
impeller bearing diameter, limited to a minimum of 2
Section 12 Chemical Tankers respectively.
mm and is to be such as to preclude any contact
5.2 Gas-freeing of tanks, double hull spaces, between the housing and the rotor. The maximum
ballast tanks, pipe tunnels and cofferdams clearence need not to be more than 13 mm.The
above requirement also applies to portable fans.
5.2.1 Provision must be made for the gas freeing of
cargo tanks, double hull spaces, ballast tanks, pipe 5.3.3 Following materials or combination of
tunnels and cofferdams. Portable fans complying with materials for impeller/housing may be used :
5.3 may be used. Where fans are permanently fitted
Non-metallic materials1) (plastic material
for gas-freeing of tanks having connections to cargo
having sufficient electric conductivity) with
oil lines, measures are to be taken, e.g. by removing
each other or with steel (incl. galvanized,
spool pieces of the ventilation ducting or by using
stainless).
blank flanges, to ensure that neither cargo nor vapours
can penetrate into the fans when not in use. Non-ferrous materials having good heat
conductivity (bronze, brass, copper, not
5.2.2 The inlet openings in cargo tanks used for gas
aluminium) with each other or with steel
freeing or purging must be located either immediately
.
below deck or not higher than 1 m above the tank
bottom. Steel witheach
5.2.3 Outlet openings for gas-freeing cargo tanks other if a ring of adequate size made of above
are to be located as far as possible from air/inert gas non-metallic/non-ferrous material is fitted in
inlet openings at a height of at least 2 m above the way of the impeller, or if a safety clearance of
deck. at least 13 mm is provided.
The gas/air mixtures are to be discharged vertically. Aluminum or magnesium alloys with each
otherorwithsteel
only, if a non-ferrous ring having a good heat
5.2.4 Outlet openings for gas-freeing of cargo conductivity, i.e. copper, brass, of adequate
tanks must be so designed that, taking into account the size is fitted in way of the impeller.
capacity of the fan, the exit velocity of the gas/air is at
least 20 m/s.
5.3.4 Fan drives are subject to the requirements in
5.2.5 On ships with inert gas systems, the free area B.1.3. Electric motors are to be located outside the vent
of the vent openings shall be so designed that an exit ducts.
velocity of at least 20 m/s is maintained if 3 cargo
tanks are simultaneously purged with inert gas. 5.4 Venting of cargo tanks
5.2.6 The openings for gas-freeing are to be fitted 5.4.1 Openings in cargo tanks are to be so located
with screw-down covers. and arranged that no ignitable gas mixtures can be
formed in closed spaces containing sources of ignition
or in the vicinity of sources of ignition on deck.
5.2.7 On ships without inerting systems, the vent
openings used for gas-freeing are to be fitted with 5.4.2 The venting of cargo tanks may be effected
flame arresters in accordance with B.6. only through approved pressure/vacuum relief devices
which fulfill the following functions:
The fitting of flame arresters may be dispensed with if
a velocity of at least 30 m/s in the vent openings is a) Passage of large air or gas volumes during
maintained. loading/unloading and ballast operations, and
5.2.8 Vent openings in accordance with 5.4.8 may

also be used for gas freeing of cargo tanks.
1
)
5.3 Design and construction of mechanically ! "#$ % &
driven fans in the cargo area
b) the flow of small volumes of air or gas ( ) ", - +

during the voyage. ' '
5.4.3 Venting arrangements may be fitted &
individually on each tank or may be connected to a
common header system or to the inert gas system.
( ) ".
5.4.4 Where the venting arrangements of more than & '
one tank are connected to a vent header system, a / '
shutoff device is to be provided at each tank. Where 0 1 / 0 2 0
stop valves are used, they must be provided with 3 & 4 5
locking arrangements.
( ) ") 4 '
5.4.5 When shut off devices according to 5.4.4 are 4 '
provided, cargo tanks are to be protected against '
excessive positive and negative pressures caused by
thermal variations. Pressure/vacuum relief devices as ( ) "( 4 '
specified in para. 5.4.2 b are to be fitted.
5.4.6 Venting arrangements are to be connected to ( ) "$
the top of each cargo tank in such a way that, under
normal conditions of trim and list, they are self
' 6
draining into the cargo tanks. Where a self-draining
arrangement is impossible, permanently installed !
means for draining the vent lines to a cargo tank shall
be provided.
5.4.7 Where flammable liquids with a flash point
of 60 C or below are carried, the inlet and outlet
openings of venting systems are to be fitted with ' &
approved flame arresters in accordance with B.6.
& 1 / 0
5.4.8 Vents for the discharge of large volumes of 2 0 3 & 4 5
air or gas during cargo and ballast handling operations
are to be designed in accordance with the following ( ) "7 8
principles:
' '
a) Depending on the height of the vents, these
shall allow the free flow of vapour mixtures
or achieve a minimum velocity of 30 m/s. (( 4 9
b) The vapour mixtures are to be discharged
vertically upwards. 8 &
c) The clear section of vents shall be designed
in accordance with the maximum loading rate ' &
taking into account a gas evolution factor of
1,25.
5.4.9 Cargotanks ' $ 2
$" 2
!
&
':
"
( ) "# * ' ' 3 ; &
$, '
'
( ) "" * +
'
'
' '
1
'
) <%
< / 0+ 0 .7.+ 1 "
7 ) /
'
? &
'
& ': ' /
$. '
@ &
@ " ! & ':

$) '
' / '
' ' /
$( = !
.# +
@ ,
!
' '
'
'
' ' '
/
@ . & '
$$ = '
% '
/
7 & @ ) & ' '

9
7 " >
@ ( &
7 "" & '
' ' / ", % "
/
A *
7 ", & '
' 7, &
7 .
A " *
7 , -
7 ," / ' ' A ""

' '
7 ,, '
: ' ' 9
7 ,. /
& A ", 0 &
&
& '
& & '
'
7 . /
A ". < '
7 . " / ' 9
' & &
A , < &
7 . , * '
' 1 ' ' '
'
7 . .
& ' ' B
)(# 1*
7 . ) 0 &
' & ': ). ,
A . * &
'
!
A . " ' ' "

& '
' &
3
A . , ?! !
"" &
'
' & % & ,# ### ' '
?! ' '
/ ", %
&
A . . / & '
, '
' ," % & '

'
' '
"#
8 ! &
' ' 6 '
,
' ,, 8
' '
! '
&
! '
'
0 & '
& ,. 8 '
'
"" '
B
' . 4
': "(
! ' &
' ( '. " 0 ' '
", & ! ! ' ,#
' $# 0 . , & '

'
"" ". ,"" . ), ). " (,,
(,. (,) (,( (,7 (. () $ 7"
/ 3 ' & . . & '
! ' .
' $# 0
. ) &
0 & 0
' & ' .
% 0
' > . ( B '
* $# 0 , ' '
"
' .
. $ / ' '
1
! '
) % $# 0 ' ' .$ '
'
3 "# '
' '
' ' ( &
' !
' & '
8 ' '
' ' !' ' , '
! &
'
)( %
< ! '
' '
( &
* '
) 4 & & '
)" 0 & '

3 () ' , '
3 &
3 (),
)$
' :
! C C C C
& 1 =
)""
4 / ) 2 ""
& &
+' & & )7 / & '
' &
)"
( 3
)", )"
& ' (" 0
& ' ' 6
+
(, % '
' &
B
' ' ! (. *
+
'
), 4 '
' &
3 $
'
). 4 8 ' '
' ' '
"# 6 ' & '
' &
B &
() '
2 & ' ' & ' &
' '
' & &
+ ' (( / '
) ' !
6 ' 0 '
% 6 ,
($ < ' '
' % $
'
)) % & '
(7 < ' '

'
' & 8 ' & '
& '
(@ !
/ ", ; '
' $. 6 & '
$) B ! '
' & ' '

' '
' &
(A ? . '
' ' &
1 ?
$( / & ' '
4 4 / ".
'
( "# 3 ' ! / ", # ". A
$$ 0 : &
' ' '
'
' '
' '
( "" & ' / / 1 = 4 / ,)
.
(" ( "# 6
$7 % & ' &
' &
B ! ' 8 3 ; &
'
' B & & '

' $@ % & ' &
'
B & '
9 $A 3 &
'
' 9 '
1 = 4
/ ,) $ "# 0 : '
' ' ' '
B ' !
'
$ "" B !
' ' '
&
: &
$ ", &
$ 0 ' $"# $""
' '
$" 8 ! ' &
& ' & '
7 /
$, & '
7 " ' 1.1 General

'
1.1.1 The inert gas system shall be capable of
' & &supplying
' a low-oxygen gas or gas mixture in order to
4 ' ' ' achieve an inerted atmosphere in cargo tanks and slop
tanks.
1.1.2 Inert gas may be produced by one or more
7 , > ' &
main or auxiliary boilers, by one or more inert gas
generators, by other sources, or by any combination
' of these.
? ' &
1.1.3 Inert gas generators with independent
7 . B bumer systems are generally used on ships for the
' '
transport of chemicals or liquefied gases and on
motor tankers. The required quality of the inert gas
7.3.1 Sampling points or detector heads shall be
produced depends on the range of application.
fitted in suitable locations, e.g. in the exhaust
ventilation duct and in the lower part of the pump This refers to the oxygen content, the purity and the
room above the floor plates, so that any possible dew point of the inert gas.
leakage may be readily detected.
1.1.4 In normal operation, the inert gas system
7.3.2 Where gas sampling piping is routed into shall prevent air from flowing into the tanks and shall
gas safe spaces such as Cargo Control Room, maintain the oxygen content of the tank atmosphere
Navigation Bridge or Engine Room following at less than 8 % by volume. Provision shall,
requirements are to be observed: however, be made for ventilating the tanks when
access is required.
7.3.2.1 Gas sampling pipes shall be equipped with
flame arresters. Sample gas outlets are to be 1.1.5 It must be possible to purge empty tanks
arranged in the open at a safe location. with inert gas in order to reduce the hydrocarbon
content to less than 2 % by volume as to ensure
7.3.2.2 Bulkhead penetrations of sample pipes subsequent safe ventilation.
shall be of approved type. Manual isolating valves
are to be fitted in each sampling line at the bulkhead 1.1.6 Under normal operating conditions, i.e.
on the gas safe side. when tanks are either full or being filled with inert
gas, it must be possible to maintain positive pressure
7.3.2.3 The gas detection equipment incl. sample in the tanks.
piping, sample pumps, solenoids, analyser etc. shall
be arranged in gas tight steel cabinet being 1.1.7 Gas discharge openings for tank purging
monitored for gas leakages by its own sampling must be arranged in suitable locations on deck and
point. At gas concentrations above 30% LEL inside must comply with Section 15, B.5.2.5.
the cabinet the entire electrical equipment of the
analysing unit is to be shut down. 1.1.8 The system must be capable of delivering
inert gas at a rate of at least 125 % of the total dis-
7.3.2.4 Where the cabinet cannot be arranged charge capacity of the cargo pumps.
direct on the bulkhead sample pipes shall be of steel
or equivalent and without detachable connections 1.1.9 The oxygen content of the inert gas
except for the connections of bulkhead valves and produced shall not exceed 5 % by volume under any
the analysing unit. The pipes are to be routed on the operating conditions of the system.
shortest way through this space. 1.1.10 Means are to be provided to stabilise the
7.3.3 Visible and audible alarms in the cargo operation of the system after start up.
control room or cargo control station and on the 1.1.11 The system shall ensure that the gas volume
bridge shall be triggered if the concentration of specified in 1.1.8 is available during discharge. At
flammable gases exceeds 10 % of the lower other times, a sufficient quantity of gas in accordance
explosive limit (LEL). with 1. 1.6 shall be permanently available.
7.4 Bilge level monitoring devices shall be 1.1.12 Parts of the inert gas system which come
provided in all pump rooms, triggering visible and into contact with the corrosive vapours and/or liquids
audible alarms in the cargo control room or the cargo from the inert gases must be resistant to these or are
control station and on the bridge. to be protected by suitable coatings.
1.1.13 Operating instructions are to be compiled
D. Inert Gas Systems for Tankers for the inert gas system containing instructions for the
operation and maintenance of the system together
with notices to health hazards and safety regulations 1.3.7 All tanks are to be equipped with pressure-
for the prevention of accidents. vacuum relief devices.
1.3.8 For the displacement of large volumes of
1.2 Installation vapour/inert gas during loading or ballasting, the inert
1.2.1 The inert gas system may be installed in gas main is to be fitted with blow-off masts or high-
the machinery space or in a separate space. velocity vent valves unless these devices are fitted on
the cargo tanks themselves. The design of these
1.2.2 Separate inert gas spaces shall contain only devices shall comply with B.5.4.
components of the inert gas system. Inert gas spaces
shall have no entrances to, or air intake openings into 1.3.9 In combination carriers spectacle flanges
accommodation and service spaces or control are to be fitted in the inert gas line to enable cargo
stations. spaces to be isolated from the inert gas system.
1.2.3 Entrances and air intake openings are to be Inerting of slop tanks must be possible when cargoes
arranged in the end bulkhead of the space not facing other than oil are being carried.
the cargo area. Alternatively, they may be located in 1.3.10 In the discharge line from the blowers to
a side bulkhead at a distance of L/25, subject to a the cargo area a control valve is to be fitted at the
minimum of 5 m, from the front bulkhead. bulkhead of the forwardmost gas safe space through
1.2.4 Mechanical forced ventilation is to be which this line passes. This shall close automatically
provided for inert gas generator rooms. For fire under the conditions stated in Table 15.1.
extinguishingequipment,seeSectionl2,table 12.1. In addition, this valve must automatically control the
1.2.5 Inert gas lines shall not be led through flow rate in the system unless other equivalent
accommodation and service spaces or control devices are provided for that purpose.
stations. 1.3.11 Two non-retum devices are to be fitted in
the inert gas main to prevent the entry of hydrocarbon
1.3 Piping systems gases or vapours into machinery space, flue gas lines
and gas-safe spaces. These non-retum devices must
1.3.1 Downstream of the non-retum devices remain operational in all normal trim positions and
required by 1.3.1 1, the inert gas main may be motions of the ship and shall be located in the cargo
divided into two or more systems. area between the control valve (1.3.10) and the
1.3.2 The inert gas lines are to be so arranged as aftermost connection to any cargo tank or cargo
to prevent the accumulation of cargo or water. piping.
a) The first non-retum device must be a water
1.3.3 The inert gas main is to be equipped with a
seal.
shore connection.
1.3.4 The inert gas main is to be fitted with one Two separate independent water supplies
or more devices to guard against excessive pressure shall be provided for the water seal.
and vacuum. These are to be designed to protect
both the tanks and the water seal from excessive In- and outlet lines connected to the water
pressure in case of failure of the devices specified in seal are to be fitted with water loops or
1.3.8 and are to be protected against freezing. equivalent devices. Water loops are to be
safeguarded against being emptied by
1.3.5 Connections between the inert gas main vacuum.
and the cargo system are to be equipped with
suitable isolating means. These may consist of. The deck water seal and all loop
arrangements shall be capable of preventing
a) two shutoff valves with intermediate vent, return of hydrocarbon vapours at a pressure
or equal to the test pressure of the cargo tanks.
b) two shutoff valves with an intermediate The water seal must be protected against
spool piece. freezing. Heating devices shall be designed
The valve on the cargo line side must be a screw- to prevent overheating of the water seal.
down non-retum valve. b) The second non-return device shall be a
1.3.6 The inert gas lines to the individual tanks screwdown type check valve or consist of a
are to be fitted with shutoff devices. If valves are check valve and shutoff valve fitted
used for this purpose, they are to be equipped with downstream of the water seal.
locking devices. b) Between the control valve and the water
seal a valve is to be fitted by means of
which the inert gas line between these two Provision shall also be made for alternative supply of
valves can be depressurized. cooling water.
2.5 The boiler flue gas uptakes are to be fitted
1.4 Monitoring equipment with shutoff valves with remote position indicators.
1.4.1 Measuring instruments are to be fitted for The soot blowers are to be interlocked with these
continuous indication and permanent recording of valves in such a way that they can only be operated
the pressure in the inert gas main and the oxygen when the flue gas uptakes are closed.
content of the inert gas being supplied. These Provision is to be made (e.g. by means of an air seal
instruments are to be arranged in the cargo control and steam connection) for maintaining the sealing
room, where provided, or in a location accessible to efficiency and mechanical function of these valves.
the cargo officer.
A second shutoff device is to be fitted at the inlet of
Pressure sensing lines shall not be led directly into the scrubber to ensure that gas cannot enter the
gas safe spaces. Transmitters or equivalent scrubber during maintenance.
equipment shall be fitted.
3. Inert gas generators with independent
burner equipment
1.4.2 For measuring the tank atmosphere,
suitable instruments for the determination of oxygen 3.1 Burner equipment with automatic
and hydrocarbon gases or vapours are to be supplied combustion control in accordance with Section 9 is to
together with the necessary tank connections. be installed.
3.2 The plant shall be capable of delivering the
1.4.3 Suitable equipment is to be provided for volume specified in 1. 1. 8 and 2.2.
calibrating permanently installed and portable gas
measuring appliances. 3.3 Notwithstanding 2.2, only one permanently
installed blower need be provided if sufficient spares
are carried for the blower and blower drive to ensure
1.4.4 The low level alarm in the water seal and that any damage can be rectified with the means
the pressure alarm for the inert gas main must remain available on board.
operational when the inert gas plant is not in service.
3.4 To fuel feed pumps para. 3.3 applies
1.4.5 As a minimum requirement, measuring, analogously.
alarm and safety devices in accordance with Table
15.1 are to be installed.
2. Boiler flue gas plants 3.5 The inert gas equipment is to be fitted with
an automatic starting up system which ensures that
2.1 Boiler plants are to be equipped with only gas of the required composition can be supplied.
automatic combustion control.
3.6 If more than one inert gas generator is
2.2 At least two inert gas blowers are to be installed, each unit is to be fitted with shutoff devices
fitted which, acting together, can deliver at least the on the delivery side.
quantity of gas specified in 1. 1. 8. Each blower must
be capable of delivering at least 1/3 of the required 4. Inert gas plants for chemical tankers
gas flow (42 % of the total delivery rate of the cargo
pumps). The blowers are to be fitted with shutoff 4.1 These Rules apply in addition to paras. I., 2.
valves on the suction and delivery sides. and 3.
If blowers are also used for gas-freeing, the air inlets 4.2 As an alternative to the water seal
are to be provided with blanking arrangements (for mentioned in para. 1.3.11 a), double shutoff valves
the ventilation of spaces in the cargo area, see with an intermediate vent valve may be fitted with the
Section 15, B.5.). Society's special consent provided that:
2.3 A gas scrubber is to be provided outside - these valves operate automatically and
the cargo area, in which the gas is effectively cooled the opening/closing is directly controlled by
and solids and sulphurous combustion products are the inert gas flow or the differential
removed. Suitable separators are to be fitted at the pressure and
scrubber outlet.
- alarms are fitted to signal valve
2.4 The supply of cooling water to the malfunctions (e.g. "Blower stop" with
equipment must be ensured without interfering with "Valves open").
any essential shipboard services.
4.3 Notwithstanding 1. 1.8, a lower delivery
rate may be approved for the plant if the discharge not required to conform to paras. 1.1.5, 1.1.8, 1.3.4,
rate of cargo pumps is limited to 80 % of the 1.3.6, 1.3.8, 1.3.9, 1.3.11, 1.4.4, 2., 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and
available inert gas flow. An appropriate note is to be 4.
included in the operating instructions.
5.2 In the inert gas main within the cargo area
4.4 It must be possible to isolate cargo tanks two non-return devices are to be fitted in series. If
from the inert gas system by spool pieces or double the equipment is provided with fixed connections to
blanks with an intermediate vent. the cargo tanks, the design of the non-return devices
is to comply with 1.3.11 a) to 1.3.11 c). Otherwise,
4.5 The inert gas plant is to be so designed that removable spool pieces are to be fitted at all
the maximum working pressure does not exceed the connections to cargo tanks, spaces surrounding
test pressure of the cargo tanks. tanks, cargo and process pipelines.
Inert gas generators for tankers not covered by C Shutoff devices are to be fitted upstream and down-
1.1 stream of these spool pieces. Pressure reducing
5.1 Inert gas plants used exclusively for valves are to be backed up by safety valves.
blanketing cargo, inerting spaces surrounding tanks
and purging systems and installation components are
Table 15.1 Indicating, alarm and safety devices for inert gas system
Indications Alarm Activation
Monitored Item Remark

'
0
/ 0
<
0
<
D
>
Cooling water pressure/ flow

x - - x - low x x
rate scrubber
Water level scrubber - - - x - high x x
Inert gas temperature blower

x - - x - high x x
outlet
Inert gas pressure blower

x - - - - - - -
outlet
Oxygen content blower outlet x x - x x high - -
Blower failure x - - x - - - x
Level water seal - - - x - low - -
Control valve power failure - - - x x - - x
Alarm/safety sytem power

- - - x x - - -
failure
Inert gas pressure main line Low pressure :

pre-alarm at approx 20
low mbar, main alarm or
x x x x x - -
high cargo pump stop at
approx. 10 mbar
Inert gas pressure slop tank On combination carrier

- - x x - - - -
only
Additional arrangement for inert gas generators with independent burner equipment
Activation of burner safety

- - - x - - x x
circuit
Failure of power supply/alarm

- - - x x - x x
and safety systems
Failure of inert gas generator

- - - x - - - x
power supply
Fuel oil pressure to burner x - - x - low - -

5.3 Spaces to be inerted, are to be equipped gas must be sufficient to allow for losses of inert gas
with means for measuring the pressure and with during the voyage.
connections for checking the tank atmosphere as
well as with suitable safety devices to prevent 6.2 Design
excessive pressure or vacuum. Suitable measuring 6.2.1 The inert gas may be stored in pressure
instruments are to be provided for the measurement vessels or cylinders. Pressure vessels are to be
of oxygen and hydrocarbon gases and vapours. located in the cargo area on the open deck or in
separate spaces. Pressure vessels and cylinders are
5.4 Where absorption units are installed those
subject to the requirements in Section 8.
shall be designed for automatic regenerative
operation. The provisions of Section 12.G.2.2 and G.3. apply
wherever relevant to the installation of pressure
5.5 Inert gas storage tanks and absorption and
vessels and cylinders in closed spaces.
filter units operated under pressure shall comply with
Section 8. 6.2.2 A pressure reducing valve backed up by a
safety valve is to be fitted to pressure vessels and
6. Inert gas storage systems
batteries of cylinders. The downstream piping
6.1 General system is to be installed in accordance with 5.2.
Inert gas storage systems may also be provided for 6.2.3 The spaces which shall be inerted are to be
inerting the spaces surrounding tanks and for blan- equipped in accordance with 5.3.
keting the cargo in the tanks. The stored quantity of
Section 16 - Torsional Vibration 16-1
A. Definition - Estimated torsional vibration stresses in all

important elements of the system with
For the purposes of the Rules, torsional vibration particular reference to clearly defined
stresses are additional loads due to torsional vibra- resonance speed of rotation and continuous
tions. They result from the alternating torque which is operating ranges.
normally superimposed on a mean torque.
2. The calculations are to be performed both for

normal operation and for departures from normal
B. Calculation of Torsional Vibrations operation due to irregularities in ignition. In this
respect, the calculations are to assume operation with
1. A torsional vibration analysis covering the one cylinder without ignition.
torsional vibration stresses to be expected in the main
engine shafting system including its branches is to be
submitted to the Society for examination. The follow-
3. Where the arrangement of the installation
ing data shall be included in the analysis:
allows various different operation modes, the
- Equivalent dynamic system comprising torsional vibration characteristics are to be
individual masses and inertialess torsional investigated for all possible modes, e.g. in
elasticities installations fitted with controllable pitch propellers
for zero and full pitch, with power take off for loaded
- Prime mover and idling conditions of the generator unit, with
Engine type clutches for engaged and disengaged branches.
Rated power, rated speed
Engine cycle
Engine type (in-line/V-type) 4. The calculation of torsional vibrations shall
also take account of the stresses resulting from the
Number of cylinders, firing order
superimposition of several orders of vibration in so
Cylinder diameter, crank pin radius far as this has a bearing on the assessment of the
Stroke to connecting rod ratio system.
Oscillating weight of one crank gear
- Vibration dampers, damping data 5. If modifications are introduced into the

system which have a substantial effect on the torsional
- Coupling, dynamic characteristics and
vibration characteristics, the calculation of the
damping data
torsional vibrations is to be repeated and submitted for
- Gearing data checking.
- Shaft diameter of crankshafts, intermediate
shafts, gear shafts, thrust shafts and propeller
6. Where an electrical machine (e.g. static
shafts
converter controlled motors) can generate periodic
- Propellers excitation leading to relevant torsional vibration
Propeller diameter, number of blades stressess in the system as a whole, this is to be taken
into account in the calculation of the forced torsional
Pitch and area ratio
vibration. The manufacturer of the electrical machine
is responsible for defining the excitation spectrum in
- Natural frequencies with their relevant
a suitable manner for performing forced torsional
vibration forms and the vector sums for the
vibration calculations.
harmonics of the engine excitation
16-2 Section 16 - Torsional Vibration
C. Permissible Torsional Vibration Stresses cK [-] form factor

1. Shafting for intermediate and propeller
shafts determined by the type and
1.1. In no part of the shafting may the alternating design of the shafting and
torsional vibration stresses exceed the following value connection elements. The value of
of 1 for continuous operation or of 2 under transient cK is shown in Table 16.1.
conditions. Fig. 16.1 indicates the 1 and 2 limits for
intermediate and propeller shafts of common design
and for the location deemed to be most severely 1.2. In the speed range 0,9 1,05 the
stressed (ck = 0,55 or ck = 0,45 for propeller shafts, alternating torques in the shafting system may not
and ck = 1,0 and ck = 0,8 for intermediate shafts). The exceed 75 % of the mean full-load torque transmitted
limits depend on the design and the location by the shafting. With the consent of the Society, 90 %
considered and may in particular cases lie outside the of the mean torque may be permitted provided that the
indicated ranges according to Fig. 16.1. They are to be torque is only transmitted by frictional connection.
determined in accordance with equations (1) - (4) and
Table 16.1. 1.3. In controllable pitch propeller systems the
Speed ranges in which the permissible values of 1 are permissible values of 2 within a barred speed range
exceeded may be transversed in the n/no 0,8 range may be exceeded provided that the system is operated
provided that the permissible values of 2 are not at a low pitch and the additional shear stresses remain
exceeded. below the 2 value for = 0,55 calculated by
formula (3).
2
1 cW cK cD (3 2 ) (1)
2. Crankshafts
where < 0,9
2.1. Where crankshafts have been approved on
cW cK cD 1,38 (2)
1 the basis of the Society's "Regulations for the
where 0,9 1,05 Calculation of Diesel Engine Crankshafts", the
maximum alternating torsional load on which this
1 calculation is based (cf. also Section 2, C.1.) shall not
2 1,7 6,0 (3) be exceeded in any operating state within the service
cK cW
speed range.
d [mm] shaft diameter

2.2. Where crankshafts have not been approved
[-] speed ratio on the basis of the aforementioned Regulations, the
= n/no following values of 1 and 2 may be used as an initial
n [rpm] speed guide to the permissible additional shear stresses :
no [rpm] nominal speed 1 = cD 30,36 where 0,9 1,05 (5)
Rm [N/mm] tensile strength of shaft material = cD 22 (3 - 2 ) where < 0,9 (6)

1
cW [-] material factor
2 = 1,9 1 where 0,8 (7)
Rm 160
(4)
18 2.3. Torsional vibration dampers used to reduce
the stresses in the crankshaft must be suitable for use
with diesel engines. The society reverses the right to
For materials with a tensile strength Rm of less than
call for proof of this.
450 N/mm, a material factor cw of 33,9 is to be
applied. In the case of suitable shaft materials with a
higher tensile strength than 450 N/mm2 and a high Torsional vibration dampers shall be capable of being
forging factor, this higher tensile strength up to checked for serviceability in the assembled condition
600 N/mm may, with the Society's agreement, be or shall be capable of being dismantled with
substituted for Rm in formula (4) for the calculation reasonable ease for checking.
of cW.
cD [-] size factor
= 0,35 + 0,93 d-0,2
Table 1 Form factor for intermediate and propeller shafts
cK Shaft type
1,0 Intermediate shafts

with integrally forged flanges and/or oil-press-mounted couplings.
Intermediate shafts
0,80 with keyed mountings.
Propeller shafts
in the forward 1) propeller shaft area.

with transverse holes

with through slots
0,55 Propeller shafts

with integrally forged flanges in the after 2) propeller shaft area

with a propeller mounted by a method approved by BKI in the after 2) propeller shaft area.

with tapered and keyed mounting and oil lubrication in the stern tube in the after 2) propeller
shaft area.

with grease lubrication in the stern tube in the after 2) propeller shaft area.
The portion of propeller shafts outside the stern tube (the engine room area) is subject to the same cK factors as the intermediate shaft.
1) The forward propeller shaft area is the area inside the stern tube adjoining and lying forward of the after bearing position. In
constructions with shaft bossings, the forward area is that adjoining and lying forward of the position of the after bossing
bearing.
2) The after propeller area is the area inside the stern tube extending from the after stern tube bearing is to the forward
supporting edge of the propeller hub. In constructions with shaft bossings, it is the area between the after bossing bearing
and the forward supporting edge of the propeller hub. The after propeller shaft area shall have an axial extent of at least 2,5
d.
3. Gears the permissible bending stresses at the tooth root and

for the tooth flank (Hertzian) pressures are to be
3.1. In the service speed range 0,9 1,05, no reduced accordingly.
alternating torque higher than 30 % of the mean
torques at nominal speed should normally occur in any 3.2. The alternating torque in the gears at resonant
gear stage. Otherwise, the reference values for the speed outside the operational speed range (i.e. when
permissible bending stresses at the tooth root and for starting up or stopping the engine or within a barred
the tooth flank (Hertzian) pressures are to be reduced speed range) may not exceed twice the nominal mean
accordingly. The mean nominal torque is the value of torque for which the gear has been designed.
the maximum mean torque transmitted by the gear
stage. 3.3. Load reversal due to alternating torques is
normally permitted only while passing through the
If the gearing is demonstrably designed for a higher lower speed range up to 0,35.
power, then, in agreement with the Society, 30 % of
the design torque of the gear stage concerned may be
taken as the limit. Otherwise, the reference values for
Fig. 16.1 Permissible torsional vibration stresses in shafting systems in accordance with formulae (1) -
(3) for shaft materials with tensile strenght of 450 N/mm
If, in special cases, gear hammering in the amplitude is obtained by multiplying the mechanical
0,35 speed range is unavoidable, a barred speed range vibration amplitude by the number of pole pairs.
in accordance with E.1 is to be specified. Whether the Society is able to permit higher values
depends on the configuration of the ship's distribution
This Rule does not apply to gear stages which run network.
without load (e.g. the idling stage of a reversing gear
and the idling gear of an unloaded shaft driven 6. Connected units
generator). These are covered by the provisions of
C.3.4. 6.1. If further units (e.g. power turbines or
compressors) are coupled positively or non-positively
3.4. In installations where parts of the gear train to the main propulsion system, due attention is to be
run without load, the torsional vibration torque in paid to these when establishing the torsional vibration
continuous operation should not exceed 20 % of the loadings.
nominal torque in order to avoid unacceptable stresses
due to gear hammering. This applies not only to gear In the assessment of their dynamic loads, the limits
stages but also to parts which are particularly subject laid down by the respective manufacturers are to be
to torsional vibrations (e.g. multiple-disc clutch considered in addition to the factors mentioned in C.1.
mountings). The loaded parts of the gear system are If these limits are exceeded, the units concerned are to
also subject to the provisions of C.3.1. be uncoupled or prohibited ranges of operation in
accordance with E.1. are to be set. Uncoupling of
Higher alternating torques may be approved by BKI if these units shall not generally lead to substantial
proof is submitted to BKI that measures have been overloading of the main system in terms of exceeding
taken and the design takes into account these higher the 2 limit for shafting systems, the maximum torque
loadings. for flexible couplings and so on.
4. Flexible couplings 6.2. In specially critical cases, the calculations of
forced torsional vibrations, including those for
4.1. Flexible couplings must be designed to disturbed operation (uncoupled set), as stated in B.1.
withstand the torsional vibration loads which occur in are to be submitted to the Society. In such cases the
the operation of the ship. In this context, the total load Society reserves the right to stipulate the performance
resulting, in accordance with B.4., from the superim- of confirmatory measurements (cf. D.) including such
position of several orders is to be taken into account as relate to disturbed operation.
(see also Section 5).
4.2. Flexible couplings must be capable of

transmitting for a reasonable time the increased
alternating torques which occur under abnormal
operating conditions is accordance with B.2. Speed D. Torsional Vibration Measurements
range within which, under abnormal operating
conditions, continuous operation is not allowed must
be indicated in accordance with E.2. 1. During the ship's sea trial, the torsional
vibration of the propulsion plant are to be measured
5. Shaft-driven generators over the whole operating range. Where measurements
5.1. In installation with generators directly from identical propulsion plants are available, further
torsional vibration measurement may, with the consent
coupled to the engine (free crankshaft end) it is
necessary to ensure that the accelerations do not of the Society, be dispenced with.
exceed the values prescribed by the manufacturer in 2. Where existing propulsion plants are
any part of the generator. modified, the Society reserves the right to require a
The critical criterion here is the tangential renewed investigation of the torsional vibration
acceleration, which is the product of the angular characteristics.
acceleration and the effective radius. The angular
acceleration is determined by means of forced
torsional vibrations calculations and is to be regarded
as the synthesized value of all major orders. However,
for marked points of resonance the value of the E. Prohibited Ranges of Operation
individual harmonics may be used instead as the basis
for assessment. 1. Operating ranges which, because of the
magnitude of the torsional vibration stresses, may only
5.2. The torsional vibration amplitude (angle) of be passed through are to be indicated as pro-hibited
shaft-driven generators shall not normally exceed an ranges of operation by red marks on the tachometer or
electrical value of 5 . The electrical vibration in some other suitable manner at the operating
stations. In normal operation the speed range 0,8 1. Important auxiliary machinery such as diesel
is to be kept free of prohibited ranges of operation. generators and lateral thrust units is to be so designed
that the operating speed range is free from undue
In specifying prohibited ranges it is important to
stresses due to torsional vibrations in accordance with
ensure that the navigating and manoeuvering functions
paragraph C. For installations of more than 150 kW,
are not unreasonably restricted.
the torsional vibration calculation is to be submitted to
2. Measures necessary to avoid overloading the the Society.
propulsion plant under abnormal operating condition
2. In the case of diesel generators with rigidly
are to be displayed on an instruction panel to be
coupled generators, the torsional vibration torque in
affixed to all operating stations from which the plant
continuous operation shall not exceed 2,5 times the
can be controlled.
nominal generator torque.
F. Auxiliary Machinery
Section 17 - Spare Parts 17 - 1
A. General B. Volume of Spare Parts

The volume of spare parts in accordance with the
1. In order to be able to restore engine tables below is classified according to different ranges
operation and manoeuvering capacity to the ship in of service:
the event of damage at sea spare parts for the main
drive and the essential auxiliary machinery are to be A = Unlimited range of service and "P"
carried on board every ship, together with the B = All other ranges of service (L & T)
necessary tools.
Explanations :
The Rule is considered to be complied with if the
range of spare parts corresponds to the tables given
below and allowing for the extend of the installed P (Restricted Ocean)
systems and components in question at the time of This range of service is limited, in general, to the trade
commisioning. along the coast, provided the distance to the nearest
port of refuge and the offshore distance are not
exceeding 200 nautical miles, as well as to the trade
2. Depending on the design and arrangement of within South East Asia which is defined in Indonesian
the engine plant, the intended service and operation of Law.
the ship, and also the manufacturer's
recommendations, a different volume of spare parts
may be agreed between the shipowner and BKI. L (Coasting Service)
This range of service is limited, in general, to the trade
Where the volume of spare parts is based on special
along the coast, provided the distance to the nearest
arrangements between the shipowner and the Society,
port of refuge and the offshore distance are not
technical documentation is to be provided.
exceeding 50 nautical miles, as well as to "Pelayaran
A list of the relevant spare parts is to be carried on Lokal" (Local Service as defined in the Indonesian
board. Law.
T (Shallow Water Service)

3. In the case of propulosion systems and
operationally important auxiliary machinery which are This range of service is limited to the trade in shoals,
not included in the following tables, the requisite lagoons, bays, firths and similar waters where there is
range of spare parts is to be established in each no running of heavy seas.
individual case between shipyard/shipowner and BKI
17 - 2 Section 17 - Spare Parts
Internal combustion engines

Table 17.1 Spare parts for main engines 1), 4), 5)
Range of spare parts A B
Main bearings Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type 1 -
fitted, complete with shims, bolts and nuts
Main thrust block Pads for one face of Michell type thrust block, or 1 set 1 set
(integral)
complete white metal thrust shoe of solid ring type 1 1
Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, 1 set -
Connecting rod complete with shims, bolts and nuts, for one cylinder
bearings
Crosshead type :
1 set -
Crosshead bearing or shells of each type complete with shims,
bolts and nuts, for one cylinder
Trunk piston type :

1 set -
Gudgeon pins complete with bush/bearing shells and securing
rings for one cylinder
Cylinder liner Cylinder liner, complete with joint rings and gaskets 1 -
Cylinder cover with full equipment and ready for installation, 1 set -
including gaskets
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover bolts and nuts, for one cylinder set -
Exhaust valves with full equipment and ready for installation, 1 set 1 set
for one cylinder
Inlet valves with full equipment and ready for installation, for 1 set 1 set
Valves one cylinder
Starting air valve with full equipment and ready for installation. 1 1
Overpressure control valve, complete 1 1
Fuel injection valves of each type, ready for installation, for 1 set set
one engine2)
Hydraulic valve drive High-pressure pipe/hose of each type 1 -
Piston, Crosshead Piston of each type, ready for fitting, with piston rod, stuffing 1 -
type box, piston rings, bolts and nuts
Table 17. 1 Spare parts for main engine (contd.)

Piston trunk piston Piston of each type, ready for fitting , with piston rings, 1 -
type gudgeon pin, connecting rod, bolts and nuts
Piston rings Piston rings for one cylinder 1 set -
Piston cooling Telescopic cooling pipes and fittings or their equivalent for one 1 set -
cylinder unit
Cylinder lubricator Complete lubricator, largest type, with drive 1 -
Fuel injection pumps Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of
individual components at sea is practicable, complete pump 1 -
element with associated valves, seals, springs, etc.
Fuel injection pipes High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete 1 -
with couplings
Auxiliary blower, complete including drive 1 -

Charge air system3) Exhaust-gas turbocharger: rotor complete, with bearings,
nozzle rings and attached lube oil 1 set -
pump.
Suction and pressure valves of each type for one cylinder 1 set -
Gaskets and packings - 1 set
Exhaust gas syetem Compensator of each type 1 -

(engine-related)
Notes :
1). In the case of multi-engine installations, the minimum required spares are only necessary for one engine.
2). a) Engines with one or two fuel-injection valves per cylinder:
one set of fuel valves, complete.
b) Engines with more than two fuel-injection valves per cylinder:
two valves complete per cylinder plus a coresponding number of valve parts ( excluding the valve bodies ) which
make it possible to form complete spare set by re-using the operational parts of the dismantled valves.
3). Spare parts for exhaust-gas turbocharger and auxiliary blower may be omitted if emergency operation of the main engine
after failure is demonstrably possible.
The requisite blanking and blocking arrangements for the emergency operartion of the main engine are to be available on
board
4). The necessary tools and equipment for fitting the required spare parts must be available on board.
5). Spares parts are to be replaced immediately as soon as they are "used-up".
Table 17.2 Spare parts for auxiliary engines driving electric generators for essential services
Range of spare parts A
Main bearings Bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with 1
shims, bolts and nuts
Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one 2 sets
cylinder
Cylinder valves
Air inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one 1 set
cylinder
Starting air valve, complete with casing. seat. springs and other fittings 1
Overpressure control valve, complete 1
Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one set
engine
Bottom end bearings or shells of each type, complete with all fittings 1 set
Connecting rod
bearings Gudgeon pin with bush for one cylinders 1 set
Piston rings Piston rings, for one cylinder 1 set
Fuel injection Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual components 1
pumps at sea is practicable, complete pump element with associated valves, seals.
springs. etc.
Fuel injection High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with couplings 1
pipes
Gaskets and Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers 1 set
packings and cylinder liners for one cylinder
Notes:
1. Where the number of generating sets (including stand-by units) is greater than that called for by the Rules, no spares are
required for the auxiliary engines.
2. Where several diesel engines of the same type are installed by way of generator drive spare parts are required for one
engine only
3. No spares are required for the engines driving emergency generator sets.
Steam turbines
Table 17.3 Spare parts for main turbines
Main bearings Bearing shell for each size and type fitted. for the rotor 1 set -
Thrust bearings Pads of each size for one face of tilting pad type thrust, with
liners, or rings for turbine adjusting block of each size fitted, 1 set 1 set
with liners
Shaft seals Labyrinth seals, complete 1 set -
Oil filters Strainer baskets or inserts for filters of special design, each 1 set -
type and size
Note:
In the case of twin turbine systems, spare parts are only required for one main turbine.
Table 17.4 Spare parts for auxiliary turbines driving electric generators for essential services
Main bearings Bearing shells or roller bearings of each type and size fitted, 1 set -
for the turbin rotor
Thrust bearings Pads for one face of tilting pad type thrust with liners, or rings 1 set 1 set
for turbine adjusting block with liners
Shaft seals Labyrinth seals, complete 1 set -
Oil filters Strainer baskets or inserts, for filters of special design, each 1 set -
type and size
Note :
Where the number of generating sets (including stand-by units) is greater than that called for by the Rules, no spares are required for the
auxiliary turbines.
Auxiliary prime movers

Table 17.5 Spare parts for prime movers of essential auxiliary machinery other than generators
Range of spare parts
The range of spare parts required for auxiliary drive machinery for essential consumer is to be specified in
accordance with Table 17.2, or l7.4
Note:
Where an additional unit is provided for the same purpose no spare parts are required.
Steam boilers
Table 17.6 Spare parts for steam boilers
Springs of all types for safety valves 1 1
Tube plugs for each type of boiler and superheater tubes. each size for each boiler 2% 2%
Water level gauge glasses for each boiler 4 set 2 set
Plate glass. mica sheets and jointing material for water level gauges of each boiler 2 set 2 set
Parts of each burner subject to wear 1 set 1 set
Complete burner, for rotary atomizers one spare rotor with bearings, for one boiler 1 1
Gears, thrust bearings

Table 17.7 Spare parts for gears and thrust bearings in propulsion plants
Wearing parts of main-engine-driven pump supplying lubricating oil to gears or 1 set -

one complete lubricating oil pump if no stand-by pump is available 1
Thrust pads for ahead side of thrust bearings 1 set 1 set
Air compressor for essential services

Table 17.8 Spare parts for air compressors
Piston rings of each type and size fitted for one piston 1 set 1 set
Suction and delivery valves complete of each size fitted in one unit set set
Note:
For spare parts for refrigerant compressors, see Volume VIII, Rules for the Contruction of Refrigerating Installations
Pumps
Table 17.9 Spare parts for pumps
Piston pumps Valve with seats and springs each size fitted 1 set 1 set
Piston rings each type and size for one piston 1 set 1 set
Centrifugal pumps Bearing of each type and size 1 1
Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1
Gear and screw type Bearines of each type and size. 1 1

pumps
Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1
Note:
Where, for a system served by a pump, a stand-by pump of sufficient capacity is available, the spare parts may be dispersed.
Hydraulic systems
(e.g. controllable pitch propeller systems, steering gear, windlasses, hatch cover operating systems,
closing appliances in the ship's shell, watertight door closing systems. hoists)
Table 17.10 Spare parts for hydraulic systems
Pressure hoses and flexible pipes, at least one of each size 20 % 20 %
Seals, gaskets 1 set 1 set

Note:
For valves and seals, this requirement is applicable only to the extent that these parts can be changed with the means available on board.
Where a hydraulic system comprises two mutually independent sub-systems, spare parts need to be supplied for one sub-system only.
Other spare parts

Table 17.11 Others spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and also for operationally important
systems
Safety valve or one valve cone and spring of each type for pressure vessels 1 1
Hoses and compensators incorporated in machines and pipelines 20 % 20 %
Testing device for fuel injection valves 1 1
Condenser tubes with ferrules 2% -
Tubes for intercooler of air ejector 10 % -

Note:
For carrying out maintenance and repair work, a sufficient number of suitable tools and special tools according to the size of the machinery
installation must be available on board.

BKI Vol3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BKI Vol3 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BKI Vol3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIRO KLASIFIKASI INDONESIA

Rules for Machinery Instalation

Section 1 General Rules and Instructions

Section 2 Internal Combuction Engines and Air Compressors

II. Gas Turbines and Exhaust Gas Turbochargers

Section 4 Main Shafting

Section 5 Gears, Couplings

Section 7 Boilers and Heat Transfer Equipment

II. Thermal Oil System

Section 8 Pressure Vessels

Section 9 Oil Firing Equipment

Section 10 Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating, Hydraulic and

Section 11 Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps

Section 12 Fire Protection and Fire Extinguishing Equipment

E. General Water Fire Extinguishing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

F. Portable and Mobile Fire Extinguisher, Portable Foam Applicators and

Section 13 Machinery for Ships with Ice Classes

A. Steering Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Section 15 Special Rules for Tankers

Section 16 Torsional Vibrations

Section 17 Spare Parts

A. General B. Documents for Approval

1. The Rules for the Construction of Machinery

2. Apart from the machinery and equipment

4. Machinery installations which have been

Table 1.1 Inclinations Table 1.3 Air temperature

at atmosphere pressure = 1000 mbar

Main and in enclosed 0 to 45 2)

Trouble-free operation within

Coolant Temperature [oC] Tolerance to condensation is

2.1 General reliability or loading of components so long as these

2.1.2 Where a machine or a piece of equipment

2.1.5 The procedure described below is largely veff veff

formed for the vibration stress or the intensity of the

2.3.1 Where in accordance with 2.2.4.1, 2.2.4.4,

the entire available speed range in order to facilitate 1. Dimensions of components

D. Design and Construction of the Ma-

Sides for L left side looking Measuring 0 bed

- The appliances remain at their present 9. Turning appliances

- No unintentional start-up sequences are initiated. 9.3 An automatic interlocking device is to be

12.1 The flash point1) of liquid fuels for the

8.4 Multiple-shaft and multi-engine systems 1

operation in limited geographical areas or where liquid heads an hydraulic hammer.

Refrigerating installations for which no Refrigerating 3. Engine control rooms

Fig. 1.1 Areas for the assessment of vibration loads

Areas A B C A' B'

s [mm] <1 <1 <1 <1 <1

- Starting devices for auxiliary and main engines

Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors

A. General livery system of main engines is normally to be so

3.4 After running on the test bed, the fuel de-

Table 2.1 Documents for approval

Serial I/A Description Quantity Remarks

4. Torsional vibration, critical speeds Section 16 applies.

D. Materials 15. Bolts and studs for:

1. Approved materials - cylinder covers

1.1 The mechanical characteristics of materials - crossheads

2. Testing of materials Table 2.2 Material tests

2.1 In the case of individually produced engines,